The Project Gutenberg eBook of Military schools and courses of instruction in the science and art of war,

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: Military schools and courses of instruction in the science and art of war,

Compiler: Henry Barnard

Release date: December 16, 2013 [eBook #44443]
Most recently updated: October 23, 2024

Language: English

Credits: Produced by Louise Hope, Curtis Weyant and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from scans of public domain works at the
University of Michigan's Making of America collection.)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY SCHOOLS AND COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN THE SCIENCE AND ART OF WAR, ***

The second and longer Table of Contents was printed at the end of the volume. There is a supplementary table of contents partway through the France section, covering only the Polytechnic. The relationship between the Tables of Contents (all) and the printed book is casual at best; information may have been accurate for the first edition. Except in the case of apparent typographical error, discrepancies were left as printed.

The section on Switzerland (Part IX) was printed after the section on Great Britain (Part VIII). For this e-text it has been grouped with the smaller countries (Parts III through VIII).

Introduction to Revised Edition
Contents (2 pages)
Introduction
Detailed Table of Contents (12 pages)

In separate files:
I. France
II. Prussia
III. Austria
IV. Bavaria, Holland, Saxony
V. Italy
VI. Russia
VII. Sweden, Norway, Denmark
VIII. Great Britain
IX. Switzerland
X. United States

Typographical errors are shown in the text with mouse-hover popups. Errors are listed again at the end of each section.

Military Schools and Courses of Instruction in the Science and Art of War,

IN

FRANCE, PRUSSIA, AUSTRIA, RUSSIA, SWEDEN, SWITZERLAND, SARDINIA, ENGLAND, AND THE UNITED STATES.

DRAWN FROM RECENT OFFICIAL REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS.


By HENRY BARNARD, LL.D.


REVISED EDITION.

NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY E. STEIGER,
22 & 24 FRANKFORT STREET.
1872.

3

REVISED EDITION.

The first edition of Military Schools in France and Prussia was issued in 1862, as a number of the American Journal of Education; and subsequently in the same year this portion was printed as Part I. of a comprehensive survey of the whole field of Instruction in the Science and Art of War in different countries. The circumstances under which the publication was begun, are set forth in the Preface to the imperfect edition of 1862. Now that the survey in the serial chapters of the Journal is as complete as the material at the command of the Editor, and the space which he can give to this special subject enable him to make it, the several chapters have been revised and brought together in a single volume, to present the actual condition of this important department of national education in the principal states of Europe, as well as in our own country.

It is due to the late Col. Samuel Colt, the inventor of the Colt Revolver, and the founder of the Colt Patent Fire-Arms Factory—two enterprises which have changed the character and the mode of constructing fire-arms in every country—to state that the information contained in the first edition of this Treatise, was collected and prepared at his request, to assist him in maturing the plan of a School of Mechanical Engineering, which he proposed to establish on his estate at Hartford, and on which, after the breaking out of the War of Secession, he decided to engraft both military drill, and military history, and to give that scientific instruction which every graduate of our national Military and Naval Academies ought to possess. Soon after Col. Colt’s death (Jan. 10, 1862), Mrs. Elizabeth Jarvis Colt, learning what had been done in the direction of her husband’s wishes, authorized the use which has been made, of the material already collected, in the preparation of this treatise, and of the volume already published on Technical Schools in different countries, and of any more which might be collected and prepared at her expense, to illustrate any department of his plan of a scientific school at Hartford.

HENRY BARNARD.

Hartford, Conn., March, 1872.

5

CONTENTS.

PAGE.
Introduction, 3
I. FRANCE.
Outline of Military System, 9
System of Military Instruction, 10
I. Polytechnic School at Paris, 11
1. Subject and Methods of Instruction prescribed for Admission, 13
2. Scientific Course in Lycées and other Schools in reference to, 49
3. History, Management, Studies, Examinations, 55
4. Public Services, Legal and Military, provided for by, 88
5. Programmes of Lectures and Courses of Instruction, 91
II. The Artillery and Engineer School of Application at Metz, 133
III. The Regimental Schools of Practice for Artillery and Engineers, 221
IV. The Infantry and Cavalry School at St. Cyr, 225
V. The Cavalry School of Practice at Saumur, 241
VI. The Staff School at Paris, 245
VII. The Military Orphan School at La Fleche, 257
VIII. The School of Musketry at Vincennes, 259
IX. The Military and Naval Schools of Medicine and Pharmacy, 261
X. The Naval School at Brest, 263
XI. The Military Gymnastic School at Vincennes, 265
Remarks on French Military Education, 273
II. PRUSSIA.
Outline of Military System and Military Education, 275
I. Outline of Military System, 281
II. Historical View of Military Education, 284
III. Present System of Military Education and Promotion, 293
IV. Examinations; General and Professional for a Commission, 297
1. Preliminary or Ensign’s Examination, 297
2. Officers’ Examination, 302
V. Military Schools preparatory to the Officers’ Examination, 310
1. The Cadet Schools, or Cadet Houses, 310
2. The Division Schools, 321
3. The United Artillery and Engineers’ School, 325
VI. The School for Staff Officers at Berlin, 330
VII. Elementary Military Schools for Non-commissioned Officers, 329
1. Military Orphan Houses, 339
Orphan-House at Potsdam, 340
Orphan-House at Annaburg, 345
2. The School Division or Non-commissioned Officers’ School, 348
3. Regimental Schools, 350
4. The Noble-School at Liegnitz, 350
VIII. Remarks on the System of Military Education in Prussia, 351
Appendix, 351
The Artillery and Engineer School at Berlin, 353
The Staff School at Berlin, 395
6 III. AUSTRIA.
Military System and Instruction 409-464
I. Schools of non-commissioned officers 411
II. School for officers 429
III. Special Military Schools 436
IV. Staff School at Vienna 447
V. Reorganization of Military Schools in 1868 453
VI. Cavalry Brigade School for officers 463
IV. BAVARIA, SAXONY, HOLLAND.
Military System and Schools of Bavaria 465-480
I. Cadet Corps—War School—Artillery, Engineers, and Staff Schools 467
II. Military Academy at Dresden 471
III. Military Academy at Breda 477
V. ITALY.
Military System and Schools 481-500
I. Military Academy at Turin 483
II. Artillery and Engineer School 489
III. Staff School and Staff Corps 492
IV. Regimental School for officers 494
V. School for Artillery officers 498
VI. Nautical School at Genoa 499
VI. RUSSIA.
Military System and Schools 501-514
I. Imperial Staff School at St. Petersburg 505
VII. SWEDEN, &c.
Military System and Schools 515-516
VIII. GREAT BRITAIN.
Military System and Schools 511-686
I. Council of Military Education 535
II. Royal Military College at Sandhurst 557
III. Royal Military Academy at Woolwich 585
IV. Royal School of Military Engineering at Chatham 595
V. Professional Instruction for officers. 605
1. Survey Class at Aldershot.
2. Advanced Class of Artillery at Woolwich.
3. School of Gunnery at Shoeburyness
VI. Staff College and Staff appointments 619
VII. School of Musketry, and Army Schools 625
VIII. Naval and Navigation Schools 627
IX. English and other Naval Systems and Schools compared 655
1. French Naval and Navigation Schools 659
2. German Naval and Navigation Schools 681
IX. SWITZERLAND.
Military System and Military Instruction 687-714
I. Federal Militia—Cantonal Cadet System—Target Shooting 689
II. Federal Instruction of officers—experience of 1870 710
X. UNITED STATES.
Military System and Schools 713-940
A. Military Education for Land Service 715
I. National Military Academy at West Point 721
II. Special Artillery School at Fortress Monroe 819
III. Military element in State Schools 825
IV. Individual and Corporate Institutions 838
V. Military Drill in Public Schools 865
B. Naval and Navigation Schools 887
I. United States Naval Academy at Annapolis 897
II. School of Naval Construction and Marine Engineering 937
III. Instruction for the Mercantile Marine 939
General Review of Military System and Schools 945

Errata for Table of Contents:

VIII. GREAT BRITAIN.
VIII GREAT BRITAIN.

V. ... 2. Advanced Class of Artillery at Woolwich.
Classs

7

MILITARY SCHOOLS AND EDUCATION.


An account of the Military and Naval Schools of different countries, with special reference to the extension and improvement, among ourselves, of similar institutions and agencies, both national and state, for the special training of officers and men for the exigencies of war, was promised by the Editor in his original announcement of “The American Journal and Library of Education.” Believing that the best preparation for professional and official service of any kind, either of peace or war, is to be made in the thorough culture of all manly qualities, and that all special schools should rest on the basis, and rise naturally out of a general system of education for the whole community, we devoted our first efforts to the fullest exposition of the best principles and methods of elementary instruction, and to improvements in the organization, teaching, and discipline of schools, of different grades, but all designed to give a proportionate culture of all the faculties. We have from time to time introduced the subject of Scientific Schools—or of institutions in which the principles of mathematics, mechanics, physics, and chemistry are thoroughly mastered, and their applications to the more common as well as higher arts of construction, machinery, manufactures, and agriculture, are experimentally taught. In this kind of instruction must we look for the special training of our engineers, both civil and military; and schools of this kind established in every state, should turn out every year a certain number of candidates of suitable age to compete freely in open examinations for admission to a great National School, like the Polytechnic at Paris, or the purely scientific course of the Military Academy at West Point, and then after two years of severe study, and having been found qualified by repeated examinations, semi-annual and final, by a board composed, not of honorary visitors, but of experts in each science, should pass to schools of application or training for the special service for which they have a natural aptitude and particular preparation.

The terrible realities of our present situation as a people—the fact that within a period of twelve months a million of able bodied men have been summoned to arms from the peaceful occupations of the office, the shop, and the field, and are now in hostile array, or in actual conflict, within the limits of the United States, and the no less alarming aspect of the future, arising not only from the delicate position of our own relations with foreign governments, but from the armed interference of the great Military Powers of Europe in the internal affairs of a neighboring republic, have brought up the subject of Military Schools, and Military Education, for consideration and action with an urgency which admits of no delay. Something must and will be done at once. And in reply to numerous letters for information and suggestions, and to enable those who are urging the National, State or Municipal authorities to provide additional facilities for military instruction, or who may propose to establish schools, or engraft on existing schools exercises for this purpose,—to profit by the experience of our own and other countries, in the work of training officers and men for the Art of War, we shall bring together into a single volume, “Papers on Military Education,” which it was our intention to publish in successive numbers of the New Series of the “American Journal of Education.”

8

This volume, as will be seen by the Contents, presents a most comprehensive survey of the Institutions and Courses of Instruction, which the chief nations of Europe have matured from their own experience, and the study of each other’s improvements, to perfect their officers for every department of military and naval service which the exigences of modern warfare require, and at the same time, furnishes valuable hints for the final organization of our entire military establishments, both national and state.

We shall publish in the Part devoted to the United States, an account of the Military Academy at West Point, the Naval Academy at Newport, and other Institutions and Agencies,—State, Associated, and Individual, for Military instruction, now in existence in this country, together with several communications and suggestions which we have received in advocacy of Military Drill and Gymnastic exercises in Schools. We do not object to a moderate amount of this Drill and these exercises, properly regulated as to time and amount, and given by competent teachers. There is much of great practical value in the military element, in respect both to physical training, and moral and mental discipline. But we do not believe in the physical degeneracy, or the lack of military aptitude and spirit of the American people—at least to the extent asserted to exist by many writers on the subject. And we do not believe that any amount of juvenile military drill, any organization of cadet-corps, any amount of rifle or musket practice, or target shooting, valuable as these are, will be an adequate substitute for the severe scientific study, or the special training which a well organized system of military institutions provides for the training of officers both for the army and navy.

Our old and abiding reliance for industrial progress, social well being, internal peace, and security from foreign aggression rests on:—

I. The better Elementary education of the whole people—through better homes and better schools—through homes, such as Christianity establishes and recognizes, and schools, common because cheap enough for the poorest, and good enough for the best,—made better by a more intelligent public conviction of their necessity, and a more general knowledge among adults of the most direct modes of effecting their improvement, and by the joint action of more intelligent parents, better qualified teachers, and more faithful school officers. This first great point must be secured by the more vigorous prosecution of all the agencies and measures now employed for the advancement of public schools, and a more general appreciation of the enormous amount of stolid ignorance and half education, or mis-education which now prevails, even in states where the most attention has been paid to popular education.

II. The establishment of a System of Public High Schools in every state—far more complete than exists at this time, based on the system of Elementary Schools, into which candidates shall gain admission only after having been found qualified in certain studies by an open examination. The studies of this class of schools should be preparatory both in literature and science for what is now the College Course, and for what is now also the requirements in mathematics in the Second Year’s Course at the Military Academy at West Point.

III. A system of Special Schools, either in connection with existing Colleges, or on an independent basis, in which the principles of science shall be taught with special reference to their applications to the Arts of Peace and War. Foremost in this class should stand a National School of Science, organized and conducted on the plan of the Polytechnic School of France, and preparatory to Special Military and Naval Schools.

IV. The Appointment to vacancies, in all higher Public Schools, either among teachers or pupils, and in all departments of the Public Service by Open Competitive Examination.

HENRY BARNARD.

Hartford, Conn., 1862.



In the on Mathematics, the form “assymplotes” is used several times alongside “asymptote(s)”. The spelling “assymptotic” occurs once at line break. Accents on French words are printed as shown; missing accents have not been supplied.

9

PART I
MILITARY SYSTEM AND SCHOOLS IN FRANCE.

10

AUTHORITIES.

The following account of the System of Military Education in France, except in the case of three or four schools, where credit is given to other authorities, is taken from an English Document entitled “Report of the Commissioners appointed (by the Secretary of War) to consider the best mode of reorganizing the system of Training Officers for the Scientific Corps: together with an Account of Foreign and other Military Education.” Reference has been had, especially in the Programmes and Courses of Instruction to the original authorities referred to by the Commissioners.

I. General Military Organization of France.

Vauchelle’s Course d’ Administration Militaire, 3 vols.

II. The Polytechnic.

1. Fourcy’s Histoire de l’Ecole Polytechnique.

2. Décret portant l’Organisation, &c.

3. Règlement pour le Service Interieur.

4. Programme de l’Enseignement Interieur.

5. Programme des Connaissances Exigées pour Admission, &c.

6. Rapport de la Commission Mixte, 1850.

7. Répertoire de l’Ecole Polytechnique; by M. Marielle.

8. Calenders from 1833.

9. Pamphlets—by M. le Marquis de Chambray, 1836; by V. D. Bugnot, 1837; by M. Arago, 1853.

III. School Of Application at Metz, and St. Cyr.

Décret Impérial, &c., 1854.

IV. School for the Staff at Paris.

Manuel Réglementaire a l’Usage, &c.

V. Annuaire de l’Instruction Publique, 1860.

11

MILITARY SYSTEM AND SCHOOLS OF FRANCE

I. MILITARY SYSTEM.

The French armies are composed of soldiers levied by yearly conscription for a service of seven years. Substitutes are allowed, but in accordance with a recent alteration, they are selected by the state. Private arrangements are no longer permitted; a fixed sum is paid over to the authorities, and the choice of the substitutes made by them.

The troops are officered partly from the military schools and partly by promotion from the ranks. The proportions are established by law. One-third of the commissions are reserved for the military schools, and one-third left for the promotion from the ranks. The disposal of the remaining third part is left to the Emperor.

The promotion is partly by seniority and partly by selection.

The following regulations exist as to the length of service in each rank before promotion can be given, during a period of peace:—

A second Lieutenant can not be promoted to Lieutenant under 2 years’ service.
A Lieutenant Captain 2
A Captain Major 4
A Major Lieut-Col. 3
A Lieutenant-Colonel Colonel 2

But in time of war these regulations are not in force.

Up to the rank of captain, two-thirds of the promotion takes place according to seniority, and the other one-third by selection.

From the rank of captain to that of major (chef de bataillon ou d’escadron) half of the promotion is by seniority and the other half by selection, and from major upwards, it is entirely by selection.

The steps which lead to the selection are as follows:—The general officers appointed by the minister at war to make the annual inspections of the several divisions of the army of France, who are called inspectors-general, as soon as they have completed their tours of inspection, return to Paris and assemble together for the purpose of comparing their notes respecting the officers they have each seen, and thus prepare a list arranged in the order in which they recommend that the selection for promotion should be made.

We were informed that the present minister of war almost invariably promoted the officers from the head of this list, or, in other words, followed the recommendation of the inspector-general.

12

II. MILITARY SCHOOLS.

The principal Military Schools at present existing in France are the following:—

1. The Polytechnic School at Paris (Ecole Impériale Polytechnique,) preparatory to—

2. The Artillery and Engineers School of Application at Metz (Ecole Impériale d’Application de l’Artillerie et du Génie.)

3. The Military School at St. Cyr (Ecole Impériale Spéciale Militaire,) for the Infantry and Cavalry, into which the Officers’ Department of the Cavalry School at Saumur has lately been absorbed.

4. The Staff School at Paris (Ecole Impériale d’Application d’Etat Major.)

5. The Military Orphan School (Prytanée Impériale Militaire) at La Flèche.

6. The Medical School (Ecole Impériale de Médicine et de Pharmacie Militaires.) recently established in connection with the Hospital of Val-de-Grâce.

7. The School of Musketry (Ecole Normale de Tir) at Vincennes, founded in 1842.

8. The Gymnastic School (Ecole Normale de Gymnastique) near Vincennes.

9. The Music School (Gymnase Musical.)

10. The Regimental Schools (Ecoles Régimentaires.)

The military schools are under the charge of the minister of war, with whom the authorities of the schools are in direct communication.

The expenses to the state of the military schools, including the pay of the military men who are employed in connection with them, for the year 1851, are as follows:—

For Polytechnic School at Paris, fr. 554,911. 91
Artillery and Engineers School at Metz, 187,352. 06
Infantry and Cavalry School at St. Cyr, 682,187. 35
Cavalry School at Saumur, 196,170. 27
Staff School at Paris, 145,349. 96
Gymnastic School of Musketry at Vincennes, 33,211. 33
Regimental Schools, 108,911½, 30

From this sum, 2,224,542fr., should be deducted 421,372fr. secured from paying pupils, leaving the total cost to the state to be 1,803,308fr., or about $360,000, for about 2,100 pupils. The cost to the state for training an officer of Artillery and Engineers is about $1,500, and that of an officer of the Staff is about $1,400.

13

SUBJECTS AND METHODS OF INSTRUCTION
IN MATHEMATICS AS PRESCRIBED FOR ADMISSION TO THE POLYTECHNIC SCHOOL OF FRANCE.

“L’École Polytechnique” is too well known, by name at least, to need eulogy in this journal. Its course of instruction has long been famed for its completeness, precision, and adaptation to its intended objects. But this course had gradually lost somewhat of its symmetrical proportions by the introduction of some new subjects and the excessive development of others. The same defects had crept into the programme of the subjects of examination for admission to the school. Influenced by these considerations, the Legislative Assembly of France, by the law of June 5th, 1850, appointed a “Commission” to revise the programmes of admission and of internal instruction. The President of the Commission was Thenard, its “Reporter” was Le Verrier, and the other nine members were worthy to be their colleagues. They were charged to avoid the error of giving to young students, subjects and methods of instruction “too elevated, too abstract, and above their comprehension;” to see that the course prescribed should be “adapted, not merely to a few select spirits, but to average intelligences;” and to correct “the excessive development of the preparatory studies, which had gone far beyond the end desired.”

The Commission, by M. Le Verrier, prepared an elaborate report of 440 quarto pages, only two hundred copies of which were printed, and these merely for the use of the authorities. A copy belonging to a deceased member of the Commission (the lamented Professor Theodore Olivier), having come into the hands of the present writer, he has thought that some valuable hints for our use in this country might be drawn from it, presenting as it does a precise and thorough course of mathematical instruction, adapted to any latitude, and arranged in the most perfect order by such competent authorities. He has accordingly here presented, in a condensed form, the opinions of the Commission on the proper subjects for examination in mathematics, preparatory to admission to the Polytechnic School, and the best methods of teaching them.

The subjects which will be discussed are Arithmetic; Geometry; Algebra; Trigonometry; Analytical Geometry; Descriptive Geometry.

14
I. ARITHMETIC.

A knowledge of Arithmetic is indispensable to every one. The merchant, the workman, the engineer, all need to know how to calculate with rapidity and precision. The useful character of arithmetic indicates that its methods should admit of great simplicity, and that its teaching should be most carefully freed from all needless complication. When we enter into the spirit of the methods of arithmetic, we perceive that they all flow clearly and simply from the very principles of numeration, from some precise definitions, and from certain ideas of relations between numbers, which all minds easily perceive, and which they even possessed in advance, before their teacher made them recognize them and taught them to class them in a methodical and fruitful order. We therefore believe that there is no one who is not capable of receiving, of understanding, and of enjoying well-arranged and well-digested arithmetical instruction.

But the great majority of those who have received a liberal education do not possess this useful knowledge. Their minds, they say, are not suited to the study of mathematics. They have found it impossible to bend themselves to the study of those abstract sciences whose barrenness and dryness form so striking a contrast to the attractions of history, and the beauties of style and of thought in the great poets; and so on.

Now, without admitting entirely the justice of this language, we do not hesitate to acknowledge, that the teaching of elementary mathematics has lost its former simplicity, and assumed a complicated and pretentious form, which possesses no advantages and is full of inconveniences. The reproach which is cast upon the sciences in themselves, we out-and-out repulse, and apply it only to the vicious manner in which they are now taught.

Arithmetic especially is only an instrument, a tool, the theory of which we certainly ought to know, but the practice of which it is above all important most thoroughly to possess. The methods of analysis and of mechanics, invariably lead to solutions whose applications require reduction into numbers by arithmetical calculations. We may add that the numerical determination of the final result is almost always indispensable to the clear and complete comprehension of a method ever so little complicated. Such an application, either by the more complete condensation of the ideas which it requires, or by its fixing the mind on the subject more precisely and clearly, develops a crowd of remarks which otherwise would not have been made, and it thus contributes to facilitate the comprehension of theories in such an efficacious manner 15 that the time given to the numerical work is more than regained by its being no longer necessary to return incessantly to new explanations of the same method.

The teaching of arithmetic will therefore have for its essential object, to make the pupils acquire the habit of calculation, so that they may be able to make an easy and continual use of it in the course of their studies. The theory of the operations must be given to them with clearness and precision; not only that they may understand the mechanism of those operations, but because, in almost all questions, the application of the methods calls for great attention and continual discussion, if we would arrive at a result in which we can confide. But at the same time every useless theory must be carefully removed, so as not to distract the attention of the pupil, but to devote it entirely to the essential objects of this instruction.

It may be objected that these theories are excellent exercises to form the mind of the pupils. We answer that such an opinion may be doubted for more than one reason, and that, in any case, exercises on useful subjects not being wanting in the immense field embraced by mathematics, it is quite superfluous to create, for the mere pleasure of it, difficulties which will never have any useful application.

Another remark we think important. It is of no use to arrive at a numerical result, if we cannot answer for its correctness. The teaching of calculation should include, as an essential condition, that the pupils should be shown how every result, deduced from a series of arithmetical operations, may always be controlled in such a way that we may have all desirable certainty of its correctness; so that, though a pupil may and must often make mistakes, he may be able to discover them himself, to correct them himself, and never to present, at last, any other than an exact result.

The Programme given below is made very minute to avoid the evils which resulted from the brevity of the old one. In it, the limits of the matter required not being clearly defined, each teacher preferred to extend them excessively, rather than to expose his pupils to the risk of being unable to answer certain questions. The examiners were then naturally led to put the questions thus offered to them, so to say; and thus the preparatory studies grew into excessive and extravagant development. These abuses could be remedied only by the publication of programmes so detailed, that the limits within which the branches required for admission must be restricted should be so apparent to the eyes of all, as to render it impossible for the examiners to go out of them, and thus to permit teachers to confine their instruction within them.

16

The new programme for arithmetic commences with the words Decimal numeration. This is to indicate that the Duodecimal numeration will not be required.

The only practical verification of Addition and Multiplication, is to recommence these operations in a different order.

The Division of whole numbers is the first question considered at all difficult. This difficulty arises from the complication of the methods by which division is taught. In some books its explanation contains twice as many reasons as is necessary. The mind becomes confused by such instruction, and no longer understands what is a demonstration, when it sees it continued at the moment when it appeared to be finished. In most cases the demonstration is excessively complicated and does not follow the same order as the practical rule, to which it is then necessary to return. There lies the evil, and it is real and profound.

The phrase of the programme, Division of whole numbers, intends that the pupil shall be required to explain the practical rule, and be able to use it in a familiar and rapid manner. We do not present any particular mode of demonstration, but, to explain our views, we will indicate how we would treat the subject if we were making the detailed programme of a course of arithmetic, and not merely that of an examination. It would be somewhat thus:

“The quotient may be found by addition, subtraction, multiplication;

“Division of a number by a number of one figure, when the quotient is less than 10;

“Division of any number by a number less than 10;

“Division of any two numbers when the quotient has only one figure;

“Division in the most general case.

Note.—The practical rule may be entirely explained by this consideration, that by multiplying the divisor by different numbers, we see if the quotient is greater or less than the multiplier.”

The properties of the Divisors of numbers, and the decomposition of a number into prime factors should be known by the student. But here also we recommend simplicity. The theory of the greatest common divisor, for example, has no need to be given with all the details with which it is usually surrounded, for it is of no use in practice.

The calculation of Decimal numbers is especially that in which it is indispensable to exercise students. Such are the numbers on which they will generally have to operate. It is rare that the data of a question are whole numbers; usually they are decimal numbers which are not even known with rigor, but only with a given decimal approximation; and the result which is sought is to deduce from these, other decimal numbers, themselves exact to a certain degree of approximation, 17 fixed by the conditions of the problem. It is thus that this subject should be taught. The pupil should not merely learn how, in one or two cases, he can obtain a result to within 1/n, n being any number, but how to arrive by a practicable route to results which are exact to within a required decimal, and on the correctness of which they can depend.

Let us take decimal multiplication for an example. Generally the pupils do not know any other rule than “to multiply one factor by the other, without noticing the decimal point, except to cut off on the right of the product as many decimal figures as there are in the two factors.” The rule thus enunciated is methodical, simple, and apparently easy. But, in reality, it is practically of a repulsive length, and is most generally inapplicable.

Let us suppose that we have to multiply together two numbers having each six decimals, and that we wish to know the product also to the sixth decimal. The above rule will give twelve decimals, the last six of which, being useless, will have caused by their calculation the loss of precious time. Still farther; when a factor of a product is given with six decimals, it is because we have stopped in its determination at that degree of approximation, neglecting the following decimals; whence it results that several of the decimals situated on the right of the calculated product are not those which would belong to the rigorous product. What then is the use of taking the trouble of determining them?

We will remark lastly that if the factors of the product are incommensurable, and if it is necessary to convert them into decimals before effecting the multiplication, we should not know how far we should carry the approximation of the factors before applying the above rule. It will therefore be necessary to teach the pupils the abridged methods by which we succeed, at the same time, in using fewer figures and in knowing the real approximation of the result at which we arrive.

Periodical decimal fractions are of no use. The two elementary questions of the programme are all that need be known about them.

The Extraction of the square root must be given very carefully, especially that of decimal numbers. It is quite impossible here to observe the rule of having in the square twice as many decimals as are required in the root. That rule is in fact impracticable when a series of operations is to be effected. “When a number N increases by a comparatively small quantity d, the square of that number increases very nearly as 2Nd.” It is thus that we determine the approximation with which a number must be calculated so that its square root may afterwards be obtained with the necessary exactitude. This supposes that before determining the square with all necessary precision, we have a 18 suitable lower limit of the value of the root, which can always be done without difficulty.

The Cube root is included in the programme. The pupils should know this; but while it will be necessary to exercise them on the extraction of the square root by numerous examples, we should be very sparing of this in the cube root, and not go far beyond the mere theory. The calculations become too complicated and waste too much time. Logarithms are useful even for the square root; and quite indispensable for the cube root, and still more so for higher roots.

When a question contains only quantities which vary in the same ratio, or in an inverse ratio, it is immediately resolved by a very simple method, known under the name of reduction to unity. The result once obtained, it is indispensable to make the pupils remark that it is composed of the quantity which, among the data, is of the nature of that which is sought, multiplied successively by a series of abstract ratios between other quantities which also, taken two and two, are of the same nature. Hence flows the rule for writing directly the required result, without being obliged to take up again for each question the series of reasonings. This has the advantage, not only of saving time, but of better showing the spirit of the method, of making clearer the meaning of the solution, and of preparing for the subsequent use of formulas. The consideration of “homogeneity” conduces to these results.

We recommend teachers to abandon as much as possible the use of examples in abstract numbers, and of insignificant problems, in which the data, taken at random, have no connection with reality. Let the examples and the exercises presented to students always relate to objects which are found in the arts, in industry, in nature, in physics, in the system of the world. This will have many advantages. The precise meaning of the solutions will be better grasped. The pupils will thus acquire, without any trouble, a stock of precise and precious knowledge of the world which surrounds them. They will also more willingly engage in numerical calculations, when their attention is thus incessantly aroused and sustained, and when the result, instead of being merely a dry number, embodies information which is real, useful, and interesting.

The former arithmetical programme included the theory of progressions and logarithms; the latter being deduced from the former. But the theory of logarithms is again deduced in algebra from exponents, much the best method. This constitutes an objectionable “double emploi.” There is finally no good reason for retaining these theories in arithmetic.

The programme retains the questions which can be solved by making two arbitrary and successive hypotheses on the desired result. It is true 19 that these questions can be directly resolved by means of a simple equation of the first degree; but we have considered that, since the resolution of problems by means of hypotheses, constitutes the most fruitful method really used in practice, it is well to accustom students to it the soonest possible. This is the more necessary, because teachers have generally pursued the opposite course, aiming especially to give their pupils direct solutions, without reflecting that the theory of these is usually much more complicated, and that the mind of the learner thus receives a direction exactly contrary to that which it will have to take in the end.

“Proportions” remain to be noticed.

In most arithmetics problems are resolved first by the method of “reduction to unity,” and then by the theory of proportions. But beside the objection of the “double emploi,” it is very certain that the method of reduction to unity presents, in their true light and in a complete and simple manner, all the questions of ratio which are the bases of arithmetical solutions; so that the subsequent introduction of proportions teaches nothing new to the pupils, and only presents the same thing in a more complicated manner. We therefore exclude from our programme of examination the solution of questions of arithmetic, presented under the special form which constitutes the theory of proportions.

This special form we would be very careful not to invent, if it had not already been employed. Why not say simply “The ratio of M to N is equal to that of P to Q,” instead of hunting for this other form of enunciating the same idea, “M is to N as P is to Q”? It is in vain to allege the necessities of geometry; if we consider all the questions in which proportions are used, we shall see that the simple consideration of the equality of ratios is equally well adapted to the simplicity of the enunciation and the clearness of the demonstrations. However, since all the old books of geometry make use of proportions, we retain the properties of proportions at the end of our programme; but with this express reserve, that the examiners shall limit themselves to the simple properties which we indicate, and that they shall not demand any application of proportions to the solution of arithmetical problems.

PROGRAMME OF ARITHMETIC.

Decimal numeration.

Addition and subtraction of whole numbers.

Multiplication of whole numbers.—Table of Pythagoras.—The product of several whole numbers does not change its value, in whatever order the multiplications are effected.—To multiply a number by the product of several factors, it is sufficient to multiply successively by the factors of the product.

Division of whole numbers.—To divide a number by the product of several factors, it is sufficient to divide successively by the factors of the product.

Remainders from dividing a whole number by 2, 3, 5, 9, and 11.—Applications to the characters of divisibility by one of those numbers; to the verification of the product of several factors; and to the verification of the quotient of two numbers.

20

Prime numbers. Numbers prime to one another.

To find the greatest common divisor of two numbers.—If a number divides a product of two factors, and if it is prime to one of the factors, it divides the other.—To decompose a number into its prime factors.—To determine the smallest number divisible by given numbers.

Vulgar fractions.

A fraction does not alter in value when its two terms are multiplied or divided by the same number. Reduction of a fraction to its simplest expression. Reduction of several fractions to the same denominator. Reduction to the smallest common denominator.—To compare the relative values of several fractions.

Addition and subtraction of fractions.—Multiplication. Fractions of fractions.—Division.

Calculation of numbers composed of an entire part and a fraction.

Decimal numbers.

Addition and subtraction.

Multiplication and division.—How to obtain the product of the quotient to within a unit of any given decimal order.

To reduce a vulgar fraction to a decimal fraction.—When the denominator of an irreducible fraction contains other factors than 2 and 5, the fraction cannot be exactly reduced to decimals; and the quotient, which continues indefinitely, is periodical.

To find the vulgar fraction which generates a periodical decimal fraction: 1o when the decimal fraction is simply periodical; 2o when it contains a part not periodical.

System of the new measures.

Linear Measures.—Measures of surface.—Measures of volume and capacity.—Measures of weight.—Moneys.—Ratios of the principal foreign measures (England, Germany, United States of America) to the measures of France.

Of ratios. Resolution of problems.

General notions on quantities which vary in the same ratio or in an inverse ratio.—Solution, by the method called Reduction to unity, of the simplest questions in which such quantities are considered.—To show the homogeneity of the results which are arrived at; thence to deduce the general rule for writing directly the expression of the required solution.

Simple interest.—General formula, the consideration of which furnishes the solution of questions relating to simple interest.—Of discount, as practised in commerce.

To divide a sum into parts proportional to given numbers.

Of questions which can be solved by two arbitrary and successive hypotheses made on the desired result.

Of the square and of the square root. Of the cube and of the cube root.

Formation of the square and the cube of the sum of two numbers.—Rules for extracting the square root and the cube root of a whole number.—If this root is not entire, it cannot be exactly expressed by any number, and is called incommensurable.

Square and cube of a fraction.—Extraction of the square root and cube root of vulgar fractions.

Any number being given, either directly, or by a series of operations which permit only an approximation to its value by means of decimals, how to extract the square root or cube root of that number, to within any decimal unit.

Of the proportions called geometrical.

In every proportion the product of the extremes is equal to the product of the means.—Reciprocal proportion.—Knowing three terms of a proportion to find the fourth.—Geometrical mean of two numbers.—How the order of the terms of a proportion can be inverted without disturbing the proportion.

When two proportions have a common ratio, the two other ratios form a proportion.

In any proportion, each antecedent may be increased or diminished by its consequent without destroying the proportion.

When the corresponding terms of several proportions are multiplied together, the four products form a new proportion.—The same powers or the same roots of four numbers in proportion form a new proportion.

In a series of equal ratios, the sum of any number of antecedents and the sum of their consequents are still in the same ratio.

21
II. GEOMETRY

Some knowledge of Geometry is, next to arithmetic, most indispensable to every one, and yet very few possess even its first principles. This is the fault of the common system of instruction. We do not pay sufficient regard to the natural notions about straight lines, angles, parallels, circles, etc., which the young have acquired by looking around them, and which their minds have unconsciously considered before making them a regular study. We thus waste time in giving a dogmatic form to truths which the mind seizes directly.

The illustrious Clairaut complains of this, and of the instruction commencing always with a great number of definitions, postulates, axioms, and preliminary principles, dry and repulsive, and followed by propositions equally uninteresting. He also condemns the profusion of self-evident propositions, saying, “It is not surprising that Euclid should give himself the trouble to demonstrate that two circles which intersect have not the same centre; that a triangle situated within another has the sum of its sides smaller than that of the sides of the triangle which contains it; and so on. That geometer had to convince obstinate sophists, who gloried in denying the most evident truths. It was therefore necessary that geometry, like logic, should then have the aid of formal reasonings, to close the mouths of cavillers; but in our day things have changed face; all reasoning about what mere good sense decides in advance is now a pure waste of time, and is fitted, only to obscure the truth and to disgust the reader.”

Bezout also condemns the multiplication of the number of theorems, propositions, and corollaries; an array which makes the student dizzy, and amid which he is lost. All that follows from a principle should be given in natural language as far as possible, avoiding the dogmatic form. It is true that some consider the works of Bezout deficient in rigor, but he knew better than any one what really was a demonstration. Nor do we find in the works of the great old masters less generality of views, less precision, less clearness of conception than in modern treatises. Quite the contrary indeed.

We see this in Bezout’s definition of a right line—that it tends continually towards one and the same point; and in that of a curved line—that it is the trace of a moving point, which turns aside infinitely little at each step of its progress; definitions most fruitful in consequences. When we define a right line as the shortest path from one point to another, we enunciate a property of that line which is of no use for demonstrations. When we define a curved line as one which is neither straight 22 nor composed of straight lines, we enunciate two negations which can lead to no result, and which have no connection with the peculiar nature of the curved line. Bezout’s definition, on the contrary, enters into the nature of the object to be defined, seizes its mode of being, its character, and puts the reader immediately in possession of the general idea from which are afterwards deduced the properties of curved lines and the construction of their tangents.

So too when Bezout says that, in order to form an exact idea of an angle, it is necessary to consider the movement of a line turning around one of its points, he gives an idea at once more just and more fruitful in consequences, both mathematical and mechanical, than that which is limited to saying, that the indefinite space comprised between two straight lines which meet in a point, and which may be regarded as prolonged indefinitely, is called an angle; a definition not very easily comprehended and absolutely useless for ulterior explanations, while that of Bezout is of continual service.

We therefore urge teachers to return, in their demonstrations, to the simplest ideas, which are also the most general; to consider a demonstration as finished and complete when it has evidently caused the truth to enter into the mind of the pupil, and to add nothing merely for the sake of silencing sophists.

Referring to our Programme of Geometry, given below, our first comments relate to the “Theory of parallels.” This is a subject on which all students fear to be examined; and this being a general feeling, it is plain that it is not their fault, but that of the manner in which this subject is taught. The omission of the natural idea of the constant direction of the right line (as defined by Bezout) causes the complication of the first elements; makes it necessary for Legendre to demonstrate that all right angles are equal (a proposition whose meaning is rarely understood); and is the real source of all the pretended difficulties of the theory of parallels. These difficulties are now usually avoided by the admission of a postulate, after the example of Euclid, and to regulate the practice in that matter, we have thought proper to prescribe that this proposition—Through a given point only a single parallel to a right line can be drawn—should be admitted purely and simply, without demonstration, and as a direct consequence of our idea of the nature of the right line.

We should remark that the order of ideas in our programme supposes the properties of lines established without any use of the properties of surfaces. We think that, in this respect, it is better to follow Lacroix than Legendre.

23

When we prove thus that three parallels always divide two right lines into proportional parts, this proposition can be extended to the case in which the ratio of the parts is incommensurable, either by the method called Reductio ad absurdum, or by the method of Limits. We especially recommend the use of the latter method. The former has in fact nothing which satisfies the mind, and we should never have recourse to it, for it is always possible to do without it. When we have proved to the pupil that a desired quantity, X, cannot be either larger or smaller than A, the pupil is indeed forced to admit that X and A are equal; but that does not make him understand or feel why that equality exists. Now those demonstrations which are of such a nature that, once given, they disappear, as it were, so as to leave to the proposition demonstrated the character of a truth evident à priori, are those which should be carefully sought for, not only because they make that truth better felt, but because they better prepare the mind for conceptions of a more elevated order. The method of limits, is, for a certain number of questions, the only one which possesses this characteristic—that the demonstration is closely connected with the essential nature of the proposition to be established.

In reference to the relations which exist between the sides of a triangle and the segments formed by perpendiculars let fall from the summits, we will, once for all, recommend to the teacher, to exercise his students in making numerical applications of relations of that kind, as often as they shall present themselves in the course of geometry. This is the way to cause their meaning to be well understood, to fix them in the mind of students, and to give these the exercise in numerical calculation to which we positively require them to be habituated.

The theory of similar figures has a direct application in the art of surveying for plans (Lever des plans). We wish that this application should be given to the pupils in detail; that they should be taught to range out and measure a straight line on the ground; that a graphometer should be placed in their hands; and that they should use it and the chain to obtain on the ground, for themselves, all the data necessary for the construction of a map, which they will present to the examiners with the calculations in the margins.

It is true that a more complete study of this subject will have to be subsequently made by means of trigonometry, in which calculation will give more precision than these graphical operations. But some pupils may fail to extend their studies to trigonometry (the course given for the Polytechnic school having become the model for general instruction in France), and those who do will thus learn that trigonometry merely gives means of more precise calculation. This application will also be 24 an encouragement to the study of a science whose utility the pupil will thus begin to comprehend.

It is common to say that an angle is measured by the arc of a circle, described from its summit or centre, and intercepted between its sides. It is true that teachers add, that since a quantity cannot be measured except by one of the same nature, and since the arc of a circle is of a different nature from an angle, the preceding enunciation is only an abridgment of the proposition by which we find the ratio of an angle to a right angle. Despite this precaution, the unqualified enunciation which precedes, causes uncertainty in the mind of the pupil, and produces in it a lamentable confusion. We will say as much of the following enunciations: “A dihedral angle is measured by the plane angle included between its sides;” “The surface of a spherical triangle is measured by the excess of the sum of its three angles above two right angles,” etc.; enunciations which have no meaning in themselves, and from which every trace of homogeneity has disappeared. Now that everybody is requiring that the students of the Polytechnic school should better understand the meaning of the formulas which they are taught, which requires that their homogeneity should always be apparent, this should be attended to from the beginning of their studies, in geometry as well as in arithmetic. The examiners must therefore insist that the pupils shall never give them any enunciations in which homogeneity is not preserved.

The proportionality of the circumferences of circles to their radii must be inferred directly from the proportionality of the perimeters of regular polygons, of the same number of sides, to their apothems. In like manner, from the area of a regular polygon being measured by half of the product of its perimeter by the radius of the inscribed circle, it must be directly inferred that the area of a circle is measured by half of the product of its circumference by its radius. For a long time, these properties of the circle were differently demonstrated by proving, for example, with Legendre, that the measure of the circle could not be either smaller or greater than that which we have just given, whence it had to be inferred that it must be equal to it. The “Council of improvement” finally decided that this method should be abandoned, and that the method of limits should alone be admitted, in the examinations, for demonstrations of this kind. This was a true advance, but it was not sufficient. It did not, as it should, go on to consider the circle, purely and simply, as the limit of a series of regular polygons, the number of whose sides goes on increasing to infinity, and to regard the circle as possessing every property demonstrated for polygons. Instead of this, they inscribed and circumscribed to the circle two polygons of the same number of sides, and 25 proved that, by the multiplication of the number of the sides of these polygons, the difference of their areas might become smaller than any given quantity, and thence, finally, deduced the measure of the area of the circle; that is to say, they took away from the method of limits all its advantage as to simplicity, by not applying it frankly.

We now ask that this shall cease; and that we shall no longer reproach for want of rigor, the Lagranges, the Laplaces, the Poissons, and Leibnitz, who has given us this principle: that “A curvilinear figure may be regarded as equivalent to a polygon of an infinite number of sides; whence it follows that whatsoever can be demonstrated of such a polygon, no regard being paid to the number of its sides, the same may be asserted of the curve.” This is the principle for the most simple application of which to the measure of the circle and of the round bodies we appeal.

Whatever may be the formulas which may be given to the pupils for the determination of the ratio of the circumference to the diameter (the “Method of isoperimeters” is to be recommended for its simplicity), they must be required to perform the calculation, so as to obtain at least two or three exact decimals. These calculations, made with logarithms, must be methodically arranged and presented at the examination. It may be known whether the candidate is really the author of the papers, by calling for explanations on some of the steps, or making him calculate some points afresh.

The enunciations relating to the measurement of areas too often leave indistinctness in the minds of students, doubtless because of their form. We desire to make them better comprehended, by insisting on their application by means of a great number of examples.

As one application, we require the knowledge of the methods of surveying for content (arpentage), differing somewhat from the method of triangulation, used in the surveying for plans (lever des plans). To make this application more fruitful, the ground should be bounded on one side by an irregular curve. The pupils will not only thus learn how to overcome this practical difficulty, but they will find, in the calculation of the surface by means of trapezoids, the first application of the method of quadratures, with which it is important that they should very early become familiar. This application will constitute a new sheet of drawing and calculations to be presented at the examination.

Most of our remarks on plane geometry apply to geometry of three dimensions. Care should be taken always to leave homogeneity apparent and to make numerous applications to the measurement of volumes.

The theory of similar polyhedrons often gives rise in the examination of the students to serious difficulties on their part. These difficulties 26 belong rather to the form than to the substance, and to the manner in which each individual mind seizes relations of position; relations always easier to feel than to express. The examiners should be content with arriving at the results enunciated in our programme, by the shortest and easiest road.

The simplicity desired cannot however be attained unless all have a common starting-point, in the definition of similar polyhedrons. The best course is assuredly to consider that theory in the point of view in which it is employed in the arts, especially in sculpture; i.e. to conceive the given system of points, M, N, P, . . . . to have lines passing from them through a point S, the pole of similitude, and prolonged beyond it to M’, N’, P’, . . . . so that SM’, SN’, SP’, . . . . are proportional to SM, SN, SP, . . . . . Then the points M’, N’, P’, . . . . form a system similar to M, N, P, . . . . .

The areas and volumes of the cylinder, of the cone, and of the sphere must be deduced from the areas and from the volumes of the prism, of the pyramid, and of the polygonal sector, with the same simplicity which we have required for the measure of the surface of the circle, and for the same reasons. It is, besides, the only means of easily extending to cones and cylinders with any bases whatever, right or oblique, those properties of cones and cylinders,—right and with circular bases,—which are applicable to them.

Numerical examples of the calculations, by logarithms, of these areas and volumes, including the area of a spherical triangle, will make another sheet to be presented to the examiners.

PROGRAMME OF GEOMETRY.

1. OF PLANE FIGURES.

Measure of the distance of two points.—Two finite right lines being given, to find their common measure, or at least their approximate ratio.

Of angles.—Right, acute, obtuse angles.—Angles vertically opposite are equal.

Of triangles.—Angles and sides.—The simplest cases of equality.—Elementary problems on the construction of angles and of triangles.

Of perpendiculars and of oblique lines.

Among all the lines that can be drawn from a given point to a given right line, the perpendicular is the shortest, and the oblique lines are longer in proportion to their divergence from the foot of the perpendicular.

Properties of the isosceles triangle.—Problems on tracing perpendiculars.—Division of a given straight line into equal parts.

Cases of equality of right-angled triangles.

Of parallel lines.

Properties of the angles formed by two parallels and a secant.—Reciprocally, when these properties exist for two right lines and a common secant, the two lines are parallel.1—Through a given point, to draw a right line parallel to a given right line, or cutting it at a given angle.—Equality of angles having their sides parallel and their openings placed in the same direction.

27

Sum of the angles of a triangle.

The parts of parallels intercepted between parallels are equal, and reciprocally. Three parallels always divide any two right lines into proportional parts. The ratio of these parts may be incommensurable.—Application to the case in which a right line is drawn, in a triangle, parallel to one of its sides.

To find a fourth proportional to three given lines.

The right line, which bisects one of the angles of a triangle, divides the opposite side into two segments proportional to the adjacent sides.

Of similar triangles.

Conditions of similitude.—To construct on a given right line, a triangle similar to a given triangle.

Any number of right lines, passing through the same point and met by two parallels, are divided by these parallels into proportional parts, and divide them also into proportional parts.—To divide a given right line in the same manner as another is divided.—Division of a right line into equal parts.

If from the right angle of a right-angled triangle a perpendicular is let fall upon the hypothenuse, 1o this perpendicular will divide the triangle into two others which will be similar to it, and therefore to each other; 2o it will divide the hypothenuse into two segments, such that each side of the right angle will be a mean proportional between the adjacent segment and the entire hypothenuse; 3o the perpendicular will be a mean proportional between the two segments of the hypothenuse.

In a right-angled triangle, the square of the number which expresses the length of the hypothenuse is equal to the sum of the squares of the numbers which express the lengths of the other two sides.

The three sides of any triangle being expressed in numbers, if from the extremity of one of the sides a perpendicular is let fall on one of the other sides, the square of the first side will be equal to the sum of the squares of the other two, minus twice the product of the side on which the perpendicular is let fall by the distance of that perpendicular from the angle opposite to the first side, if the angle is acute, and plus twice the same product, if this angle is obtuse.

Of polygons.

Parallelograms.—Properties of their angles and of their diagonals.

Division of polygons into triangles.—Sum of their interior angles.—Equality and construction of polygons.

Similar polygons.—Their decomposition into similar triangles.—The right lines similarly situated in the two polygons are proportional to the homologous sides of the polygons.—To construct, on a given line, a polygon similar to a given polygon.—The perimeters of two similar polygons are to each other as the homologous sides of these polygons.

Of the right line and the circumference of the circle.

Simultaneous equality of arcs and chords in the same circle.—The greatest arc has the greatest chord, and reciprocally.—Two arcs being given in the same circle or in equal-circles, to find the ratio of their lengths.

Every right line drawn perpendicular to a chord at its middle, passes through the centre of the circle and through the middle of the arc subtended by the chord.—Division of an arc into two equal parts.—To pass the circumference of a circle through three points not in the same right line.

The tangent at any point of a circumference is perpendicular to the radius passing through that point.

The arcs intercepted in the same circle between two parallel chords, or between a tangent and a parallel chord, are equal.

Measure of angles.

If from the summits of two angles two arcs of circles be described with the same radius, the ratio of the arcs included between the sides of each angle will be the same as that of these angles.—Division of the circumference into degrees, minutes, and seconds.—Use of the protractor.

An angle having its summit placed, 1o at the centre of a circle; 2o on the circumference of that circle; 3o within the circle between the centre and the circumference; 4o without the circle, but so that its sides cut the circumference; to determine the ratio of that angle to the right angle, by the consideration of the arc included between its sides.

From a given point without a circle, to draw a tangent to that circle.

To describe, on a given line, a segment of a circle capable of containing a given angle.

28

To make surveys for plans. (Lever des plans.)

Tracing a straight line on the ground.—Measuring that line with the chain.

Measuring angles with the graphometer.—Description of it.

Drawing the plan on paper.—Scale of reduction.—Use of the rule, the triangle, and the protractor.

To determine the distance of an inaccessible object, with or without the graphometer.

Three points, A, B, C, being situated on a smooth surface and represented on a map, to find thereon the point P from which the distances AB and AC have been seen under given angles. “The problem of the three points.” “The Trilinear problem.”

Of the contact and of the inter of circles.

Two circles which pass through the same point of the right line which joins their centres have in common only that point in which they touch; and reciprocally, if two circles touch, their centres and the point of contact lie in the same right line.

Conditions which must exist in order that two circles may intersect.

Properties of the secants of the circle.

Two secants which start from the same point without the circle, being prolonged to the most distant part of the circumference, are reciprocally proportional to their exterior segments.—The tangent is a mean proportional between the secant and its exterior segment.

Two chords intersecting within a circle divide each other into parts reciprocally proportional.—The line perpendicular to a diameter and terminated by the circumference, is a mean proportional between the two segments of the diameter.

A chord, passing through the extremity of the diameter, is a mean proportional between the diameter and the segment formed by the perpendicular let fall from the other extremity of that chord.—To find a mean proportional between two given lines.

To divide a line in extreme and mean ratio.—The length of the line being given numerically, to calculate the numerical value of each of the segments.

Of polygons inscribed and circumscribed to the circle.

To inscribe or circumscribe a circle to a given triangle.

Every regular polygon can be inscribed and circumscribed to the circle.

A regular polygon being inscribed in a circle, 1o to inscribe in the same circle a polygon of twice as many sides, and to find the length of one of the sides of the second polygon; 2o to circumscribe about the circle a regular polygon of the same number of sides, and to express the side of the circumscribed polygon by means of the side of the corresponding inscribed polygon.

To inscribe in a circle polygons of 4, 8, 16, 32, sides.
To inscribe in a circle polygons of 3, 6, 12, 24, sides.
To inscribe in a circle polygons of 5, 10, 20, 40, sides.
To inscribe in a circle polygons of 15, 30, 60, sides.

Regular polygons of the same number of sides are similar, and their perimeters are to each other as the radii of the circles to which they are inscribed or circumscribed.—The circumferences of circles are to each other as their radii.

To find the approximate ratio of the circumference to the diameter.

Of the area of polygons and of that of the circle.

Two parallelograms of the same base and of the same height are equivalent.—Two triangles of the same base and height are equivalent.

The area of a rectangle and that of a parallelogram are equal to the product of the base by the height.—What must be understood by that enunciation.—The area of a triangle is measured by half of the product of the base by the height.

To transform any polygon into an equivalent square.—Measure of the area of a polygon.—Measure of the area of a trapezoid.

The square constructed on the hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle is equivalent to the sum of the squares constructed on the other two sides.—The squares constructed on the two sides of the right angle of a right-angled triangle and on the hypothenuse are to each other as the adjacent segments and entire hypothenuse.

The areas of similar polygons are to each other as the squares of the homologous sides of the polygons.

Notions on surveying for content (arpentage).—Method of decomposition into triangles.—Simpler method of decomposition into trapezoids.—Surveyor’s cross.—Practical solution, when the ground is bounded, in one or more parts, by a curved line.

The area of a regular polygon is measured by half of the product of its perimeter by the radius of the inscribed circle.—The area of a circle is measured by half of the product of the circumference by the radius.—The areas of circles are to each other as the squares of the radii.

The area of a sector of a circle is measured by half of the product of the arc by the radius.—Measure of the area of a segment of a circle.

29

2. OF PLANES AND BODIES TERMINATED BY PLANE SURFACES.

Conditions required to render a right line and a plane respectively perpendicular.

Of all the lines which can be drawn from a given point to a given plane, the perpendicular is the shortest, and the oblique lines are longer in proportion to their divergence from the foot of the perpendicular.

Parallel right lines and planes.—Angles which have their sides parallel, and their openings turned in the same direction, are equal, although situated in different planes.

Dihedral angle.—How to measure the ratio of any dihedral angle to the right dihedral angle.

Planes perpendicular to each other.—The inter of two planes perpendicular to a third plane, is perpendicular to this third plane.

Parallel planes.—when two parallel planes are cut by a third plane the inters are parallel.—Two parallel planes have their perpendiculars common to both.

The shortest distance between two right lines, not intersecting and not parallel.

Two right lines comprised between two parallel planes are always divided into proportional parts by a third plane parallel to the first two.

Trihedral angle.—The sum of any two of the plane angles which compose a trihedral angle is always greater than the third.

The sum of the plane angles which form a convex polyhedral angle is always less than four right angles.

If two trihedral angles are formed by the same plane angles, the dihedral angles comprised between the equal plane angles are equal.—There may be absolute equality or simple symmetry between the two trihedral angles.

Of polyhedrons.

If two tetrahedrons have each a trihedral angle composed of equal and similarly arranged triangles, these tetrahedrons are equal. They are also equal if two faces of the one are equal to two faces of the other, are arranged in the same manner, and form with each other the same dihedral angle.

When the triangles which form two homologous trihedral angles of two tetrahedrons are similar, each to each, and similarly disposed, these tetrahedrons are similar. They are also similar if two faces of the one, making with each other the same angle as two faces of the other, are also similar to these latter, and are united by homologous sides and summits.

Similar pyramids.—A plane parallel to the base of a pyramid cuts off from it a pyramid similar to it.—To find the height of a pyramid when we know the dimension of its trunk with parallel bases.

Sections made in any two pyramids at the same distance from these summits are in a constant ratio.

Parallelopipedon.—Its diagonals.

Any polyhedron can always be divided into triangular pyramids.—Two bodies composed of the same number of equal and similarly disposed triangular pyramids, are equal.

Similar polyhedrons.

The homologous edges of similar polyhedrons are proportional; as are also the diagonals of the homologous faces and the interior diagonals of the polyhedrons.—The areas of similar polyhedrons are as the squares of the homologous edges.

Measure of volumes.

Two parallelopipedons of the same base and of the same height are equivalent in volume.

If a parallelogram be constructed on the base of a triangular prism, and on that parallelogram, taken as a base, there be constructed a parallelopipedon of the same height as the triangular prism, the volume of this prism will be half of the volume of the parallelopipedon.—Two triangular prisms of the same base and the same height are equivalent.

Two tetrahedrons of the same base and the same height are equivalent.

A tetrahedron is equivalent to the third of the triangular prism of the same base and the same height.

The volume of any parallelopipedon is equal to the product of its base by its height.—What must be understood by that enunciation.—The volume of any prism is equal to the product of its base by its height.

The volume of a tetrahedron and that of any pyramid are measured by the third of the product of the base by the height.

Volume of the truncated oblique triangular prism.

The volumes of two similar polyhedrons are to each other as the cubes of the homologous edges.

30

3. OF ROUND BODIES.

Of the right cone with circular base.

Sections parallel to the base.—Having the dimensions of the trunk of a cone with parallel bases, to find the height of the entire cone.

The area of a right cone is measured by half of the product of the circumference of its circular base by its side.—Area of a trunk of a right cone with parallel bases.

Volume of a pyramid inscribed in the cone.—The volume of a cone is measured by the third of the product of the area of its base by its height.2

Which of the preceding properties belong to the cone of any base whatever?

Of the right cylinder with circular base.

Sections parallel to the base.

The area of the convex surface of the right cylinder is measured by the product of the circumference of its base by its height.—This is also true of the right cylinder of any base.

Measure of the volume of a prism inscribed in the cylinder.—The volume of a right cylinder is measured by the product of the area of its base by its height.—This is also true of any cylinder, right or oblique, of any base whatever.

Of the sphere.

Every of the sphere, made by a plane, is a circle.—Great circles and small circles.

In every spherical triangle any one side is less than the sum of the other two. The shortest path from one point to another, on the surface of the sphere, is the arc of a great circle which joins the two given points.

The sum of the sides of a spherical triangle, or of any spherical polygon, is less than the circumference of a great circle.

Poles of an arc of a great or small circle.—They serve to trace arcs of circles on the sphere.

Every plane perpendicular to the extremity of a radius is tangent to the sphere.

Measure of the angle of two arcs of great circles.

Properties of the polar or supplementary triangle.

Two spherical triangles situated on the same sphere, or on equal spheres, are equal in all their parts, 1o when they have an equal angle included between sides respectively equal; 2o when they have an equal side adjacent to two angles respectively equal; 3o when they are mutually equilateral; 4o when they are mutually equiangular. In these different cases the triangles may be equal, or merely symmetrical.

The sum of the angles of any spherical triangle is less than six, and greater than two, right angles.

The lune is to the surface of the sphere as the angle of that lune is to four right angles.

Two symmetrical spherical triangles are equivalent in surface.

The area of a spherical triangle is to that of the whole sphere as the excess of the sum of its angles above two right angles is to eight right angles.

When a portion of a regular polygon, inscribed in the generating circle of the sphere, turns around the diameter of that circle, the convex area engendered is measured by the product of its height by the circumference of the circle inscribed in the generating polygon.—The volume of the corresponding polygonal sector is measured by the area thus described, multiplied by the third of the radius of the inscribed circle.

The surface of a spherical zone is equal to the height of that zone multiplied by the circumference of a great circle.—The surface of the sphere is quadruple that of a great circle.

Every spherical sector is measured by the zone which forms its base, multiplied by the third of the radius. The whole sphere is measured by its surface multiplied by the third of its radius.3

31
III. ALGEBRA.

Algebra4 is not, as are Arithmetic and Geometry, indispensable to every one. It should be very sparingly introduced into the general education of youth, and we would there willingly dispense with it entirely, excepting logarithms, if this would benefit the study of arithmetic and geometry. The programme of it which we are now to give, considers it purely in view of its utility to engineers, and we will carefully eliminate every thing not necessary for them.

Algebraical calculation presents no serious difficulty, when its students become well impressed with this idea, that every letter represents a number; and particularly when the consideration of negative quantities is not brought in at the outset and in an absolute manner. These quantities and their properties should not be introduced except as the solution of questions by means of equations causes their necessity to be felt, either for generalizing the rules of calculation, or for extending the meaning of the formulas to which it leads. Clairaut pursues this course. He says, “I treat of the multiplication of negative quantities, that dangerous shoal for both scholars and teachers, only after having shown its necessity to the learner, by giving him a problem in which he has to consider negative quantities independently of any positive quantities from which they are subtracted. When I have arrived at that point in the problem where I have to multiply or divide negative quantities by one another, I take the course which was undoubtedly taken by the first analysts who have had those operations to perform and who have wished to follow a perfectly sure route: I seek for a solution of the problem which does not involve these operations; I thus arrive at the result by reasonings which admit of no doubt, and I thus see what those products or quotients of negative quantities, which had given me the first solution, must be.” Bezout proceeds in the same way.

We recommend to teachers to follow these examples; not to speak to their pupils about negative quantities till the necessity of it is felt, and 32 when they have become familiar with algebraic calculation; and above all not to lose precious time in obscure discussions and demonstrations, which the best theory will never teach students so well as numerous applications.

It has been customary to take up again, in algebra, the calculus of fractions, so as to generalize the explanations given in arithmetic, since the terms of literal fractions may be any quantities whatsoever. Rigorously, this may be well, but to save time we omit this, thinking it better to employ this time in advancing and exercising the mind on new truths, rather than in returning continually to rules already given, in order to imprint a new degree of rigor on their demonstration, or to give them an extension of which no one doubts.

The study of numerical equations of the first degree, with one or several unknown quantities, must be made with great care. We have required the solution of these equations to be made by the method of substitution. We have done this, not only because this method really comprehends the others, particularly that of comparison, but for this farther reason. In treatises on algebra, those equations alone are considered whose numerical coefficients and solutions are very simple numbers. It then makes very little difference what method is used, or in what order the unknown quantities are eliminated. But it is a very different thing in practice, where the coefficients are complicated numbers, given with decimal parts, and where the numerical values of these coefficients may be very different in the same equation, some being very great and some very small. In such cases the method of substitution can alone be employed to advantage, and that with the precaution of taking the value of the unknown quantity to be eliminated from that equation in which it has relatively the greatest, coefficient. Now the method of comparison is only the method of substitution put in a form in which these precautions cannot be observed, so that in practice it will give bad results with much labor.

The candidates must present to the examiners the complete calculations of the resolution of four equations with four unknown quantities, made with all the precision permitted by the logarithmic tables of Callet, and the proof that that precision has been obtained. The coefficients must contain decimals and be very different from one another, and the elimination must be effected with the above precautions.

The teaching of the present day disregards too much the applicability of the methods given, provided only that they be elegant in their form; so that they have to be abandoned and changed when the pupils enter on practice. This disdain of practical utility was not felt by our great mathematicians, who incessantly turned their attention towards applications. 33 Thus the illustrious Lagrange made suggestions like those just given; and Laplace recommended the drawing of curves for solving directly all kinds of numerical equations.

As to literal equations of the first degree, we call for formulas sufficient for the resolution of equations of two or three unknown quantities. Bezout’s method of elimination must be given as a first application of that fruitful method of indeterminates. The general discussion of formulas will be confined to the case of two unknown quantities. The discussion of three equations with three unknown quantities, x, y, and z, in which the terms independent of the unknown quantities are null, will be made directly, by this simple consideration that the system then really includes only two unknown quantities, to wit, the ratios of x and y, for example, to z.

The resolution of inequalities of the first degree with one or more unknown quantities, was added to equations of the first degree some years ago. We do not retain that addition.

The equations of the second degree, like the first, must be very carefully given. In dwelling on the case where the coefficient of x2 converges towards zero, it will be remarked that, when the coefficient is very small, the ordinary formula would give one of the roots by the difference of two numbers almost equal; so that sufficient exactness could not be obtained without much labor. It must be shown how that inconvenience may be avoided.

It is common to meet with expressions of which the maximum or the minimum can be determined by the consideration of an equation of the second degree. We retain the study of them, especially for the benefit of those who will not have the opportunity of advancing to the general theory of maxima and minima.

The theory of the algebraic calculation of imaginary quantities, given à priori, may, on the contrary, be set aside without inconvenience. It is enough that the pupils know that the different powers of √-1 continually reproduce in turn one of these four values, ±1, ±√-1. We will say as much of the calculation of the algebraic values of radicals, which is of no use. The calculation of their arithmetical values will alone be demanded. In this connection will be taught the notation of fractional exponents and that of negative exponents.

The theory of numbers has taken by degrees a disproportionate development in the examinations for admission; it is of no use in practice, and, besides, constitutes in the pure mathematics a science apart.

The theory of continued fractions at first seems more useful. It is employed in the resolution of algebraic equations, and in that of the 34 exponential equation ax=b. But these methods are entirely unsuited to practice, and we therefore omit this theory.

The theory of series, on the contrary, claims some farther developments. Series are continually met with in practice; they give the best solutions of many questions, and it is indispensable to know in what circumstances they can be safely employed.

We have so often insisted on the necessity of teaching students to calculate, as to justify the extent of the part of the programme relating to logarithms. We have suppressed the inapplicable method of determining logarithms by continued fractions, and have substituted the employment of the series which gives the logarithm of n+1, knowing that of n. To exercise the students in the calculation of the series, they should be made to determine the logarithms of the numbers from 1 to 10, from 101 to 110, and from 10,000 to 10,010, the object of these last being to show them with what rapidity the calculation proceeds when the numbers are large; the first term of the series is then sufficient, the variations of the logarithms being sensibly proportional to the variations of the numbers, within the limits of the necessary exactness. In the logarithmic calculations, the pupils will be exercised in judging of the exactness which they may have been able to obtain: the consideration of the numerical values of the proportional parts given in the tables is quite sufficient for this purpose, and is beside the only one which can be employed in practice.

The use of the sliding rule, which is merely an application of logarithms, gives a rapid and portable means of executing approximately a great number of calculations which do not require great exactness. We desire that the use of this little instrument should be made familiar to the candidates. This is asked for by all the professors of the “School of application,” particularly those of Topography, of Artillery, of Construction, and of Applied Mechanics, who have been convinced by experience of the utility of this instrument, which has the greatest possible analogy with tables of logarithms.

Before entering on the subjects of higher algebra, it should be remembered that the reductions of the course which we have found to be so urgent, will be made chiefly on it. The general theory of equations has taken in the examinations an abnormal and improper development, not worth the time which it costs the students. We may add, that it is very rare to meet a numerical equation of a high degree requiring to be resolved, and that those who have to do this, take care not to seek its roots by the methods which they have been taught. These methods moreover are not applicable to transcendental equations, which are much more frequently found in practice.

35

The theory of the greatest common algebraic divisor, in its entire generality, is of no use, even in pure science, unless in the elimination between equations of any degree whatever. But this last subject being omitted, the greatest common divisor is likewise dispensed with.

It is usual in the general theory of algebraic equations to consider the derived polynomials of entire functions of x. These polynomials are in fact useful in several circumstances, and particularly in the theory of equal roots; and in analytical geometry, they serve for the discussion of curves and the determination of their tangents. But since transcendental curves are very often encountered in practice, we give in our programme the calculation of the derivatives of algebraic and fractional functions, and transcendental functions, logarithmic, exponential, and circular. This has been long called for, not only because it must be of great assistance in the teaching of analytical geometry, but also because it will facilitate the elementary study of the infinitesimal calculus.

We have not retrenched any of the general ideas on the composition of an entire polynomial by means of factors corresponding to its roots. We retain several theorems rather because they contain the germs of useful ideas than because of their practical utility, and therefore wish the examiners to restrict themselves scrupulously to the programme.

The essential point in practice is to be able to determine conveniently an incommensurable root of an algebraic or transcendental equation, when encountered. Let us consider first an algebraic equation.

All the methods which have for their object to separate the roots, or to approximate to them, begin with the substitution of the series of consecutive whole numbers, in the first member of the equation. The direct substitution becomes exceedingly complicated, when the numbers substituted become large. It may be much shortened, however, by deducing the results from one another by means of their differences, and guarding against any possibility of error, by verifying some of those results, those corresponding to the numbers easiest to substitute, such as ±10, ±20. The teacher should not fail to explain this to his pupils.

Still farther: let us suppose that we have to resolve an equation of the third degree, and that we have recognized by the preceding calculations the necessity of substituting, between the numbers 2 and 3, numbers differing by a tenth, either for the purpose of continuing to effect the separation of the roots, or to approximate nearer to a root comprised between 2 and 3. If we knew, for the result corresponding to the substitution of 2, the first, second, and third differences of the results of the new substitutions, we could thence deduce those results themselves with as much simplicity, as in the case of the whole numbers. The new third difference, for example, will be simply the thousandth part of the old 36 third difference. We may also remark that there is no possibility of error, since, the numbers being deduced from one another, when we in this way arrive at the result of the substitution of 3, which has already been calculated, the whole work will thus be verified.

Let us suppose again that we have thus recognized that the equation has a root comprised between 2.3 and 2.4; we will approximate still nearer by substituting intermediate numbers, differing by 0.01, and employing the course just prescribed. As soon as the third differences can be neglected, the calculation will be finished at once, by the consideration of an equation of the second degree; or, if it is preferred to continue the approximations till the second differences in their turn may be neglected, the calculation will then be finished by a simple proportion.

When, in a transcendental equation f(X) = 0, we have substituted in f(X) equidistant numbers, sufficiently near to each other to allow the differences of the results to be neglected, commencing with a certain order, the 4th, for example, we may, within certain limits of x, replace the transcendental function by an algebraic and entire function of x, and thus reduce the search for the roots of f(X) = 0 to the preceding theory.

Whether the proposed equation be algebraic or transcendental, we can thus, when we have obtained one root of it with a suitable degree of exactness, continue the approximation by the method of Newton.

PROGRAMME OF ALGEBRA.

Algebraic calculation.

Addition and subtraction of polynomials.—Reduction of similar terms.

Multiplication of monomials.—Use of exponents.—Multiplication of polynomials. Rule of the signs.—To arrange a polynomial.—Homogeneous polynomials.

Division of monomials. Exponent zero.—Division of polynomials. How to know if the operation will not terminate.—Division of polynomials when the dividend contains a letter which is not found in the divisor.

Equations of the first degree.

Resolution of numerical equations of the first degree with one or several unknown quantities by the method of substitution.—Verification of the values of the unknown quantities and of the degree of their exactness.

Of cases of impossibility or of indetermination.

Interpretation of negative values.—Use and calculation of negative quantities.

Investigation of general formulas for obtaining the values of the unknown quantities in a system of equations of the first degree with two or three unknown quantities.—Method of Bezout.—Complete discussion of these formulas for the case of two unknown quantities.—Symbols m/o and o/o.

Discussion of three equations with three unknown quantities, in which the terms independent of the unknown quantities are null.

Equations of the second degree with one unknown quantity.

Calculus of radicals of the second degree.

Resolution of an equation of the second degree with one unknown quantity.—Double solution.—Imaginary values.

When, in the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, a converges towards 0, one of the roots increases indefinitely.—Numerical calculation of the two roots, when a is very small.

Decomposition of the trinomial x2 + px + q into factors of the first degree.—Relations between the coefficients and the roots of the equation x2 + px + q = 0.

37

Trinomial equations reducible to the second degree.

Of the maxima and minima which can be determined by equations of the second degree.

Calculation of the arithmetical values of radicals.

Fractional exponents.—Negative exponents.

Of series.

Geometrical progressions.—Summation of the terms.

What we call a series.—Convergence and divergence.

A geometrical progression is convergent, when the ratio is smaller than unity; diverging, when it is greater.

The terms of a series may decrease indefinitely and the series not be converging.

A series, all the terms of which are positive, is converging, when the ratio of one term to the preceding one tends towards a limit smaller than unity, in proportion as the index of the rank of that term increases indefinitely.—The series is diverging when this limit is greater than unity. There is uncertainty when it is equal to unity.

In general, when the terms of a series decrease indefinitely, and are alternately positive and negative, the series is converging.

Combinations, arrangements, and permutations of m letters, when each combination must not contain the same letter twice.

Development of the entire and positive powers of a binomial.—General terms.

Development of (a + b √-1)m.

Limit towards which (1 + 1/m)m tends, when m increases indefinitely.

Summation of piles of balls.

Of logarithms and of their uses.

All numbers can be produced by forming all the powers of any positive number, greater or less than one.

General properties of logarithms.

When numbers are in geometrical progression, their logarithms are in arithmetical progression.

How to pass from one system of logarithms to another system.

Calculation of logarithms by means of the series which gives the logarithm of n + 1, knowing that of n.—Calculation of Napierian logarithms.—To deduce from them those of Briggs. Modulus.

Use of logarithms whose base is 10.—Characteristics.—Negative characteristics. Logarithms entirely negative are not used in calculation.

A number being given, how to find its logarithm in the tables of Callet. A logarithm being given, how to find the number to which it belongs.—Use of the proportional parts.—Their application to appreciate the exactness for which we can answer.

Employment of the sliding rule.

Resolution of exponential equations by means of logarithms.

Compound interest. Annuities.

Derived functions.

Development of an entire function F(x + h) of the binomial (x + h).—Derivative of an entire function.—To return from the derivative to the function.

The derivative of a function of x is the limit towards which tends the ratio of the increment of the function to the increment h of the variable, in proportion as h tends towards zero.

Derivatives of trigonometric functions.

Derivatives of exponentials and of logarithms.

Rules to find the derivative of a sum, of a product, of a power, of a quotient of functions of x, the derivatives of which are known.

Of the numerical resolution of equations.

Changes experienced by an entire function f(x) when x varies in a continuous manner.—When two numbers a and b substituted in an entire function f(x) give results with contrary signs, the equation f(x) = 0 has at least one real root not comprised between a and b. This property subsists for every species of function which remains continuous for all the values of x comprised between a and b.

An algebraic equation of uneven degree has at least one real root.—An algebraic equation of even degree, whose last term is negative, has at least two real roots.

Every equation f(x) = 0, with coefficients either real or imaginary of the form a + b √-1, admits of a real or imaginary root of the same form. [Only the enunciation, and not the demonstration of this theorem, is required.]

38

If a is a root of an algebraic equation, the first member is divisible by x - a. An algebraic equation of the mth degree has always m roots real or imaginary, and it cannot admit more.—Decomposition of the first members into factors of the first degree. Relations between the coefficients of an algebraic equation and its roots.

When an algebraic equation whose coefficients are real, admits an imaginary root of the form a + b √-1, it has also for a root the conjugate expression a - b √-1.

In an algebraic expression, complete or incomplete, the number of the positive roots cannot surpass the number of the variations; consequence, for negative roots.

Investigation of the product of the factors of the first degree common to two entire functions of x.—Determination of the roots common to two equations, the first members of which are entire functions of the unknown quantity.

By what character to recognize that an algebraic equation has equal roots.—How we then bring its resolution to that of several others of lower degree and of unequal roots.

Investigation of the commensurable roots of an algebraic equation with entire coefficients.

When a series of equidistant numbers is substituted in an entire function of the mth degree, and differences of different orders between the results are formed, the differences of the mth order are constant.

Application to the separation of the roots of an equation of the third degree.—Having the results of the substitution of -1, 0, and +1, to deduce therefrom, by means of differences, those of all other whole numbers, positive or negative.—The progress of the calculation leads of itself to the limits of the roots.—Graphical representation of this method.

Substitution of numbers equidistant by a tenth, between two consecutive whole numbers, when the inspection of the first results has shown its necessity.—This substitution is effected directly, or by means of new differences deduced from the preceding.

How to determine, in continuing the approximation towards a root, at what moment the consideration of the first difference is sufficient to give that root with all desirable exactness, by a simple proportion.

The preceding method becomes applicable to the investigation of the roots of a transcendental equation X = 0, when there have been substituted in the first member, numbers equidistant and sufficiently near to allow the differences of the results to be considered as constant, starting from a certain order.—Formulas of interpolation.

Having obtained a root of an algebraic or transcendental equation, with a certain degree of approximation, to approximate still farther by the method of Newton.

Resolution of two numerical equations of the second degree with two unknown quantities.

Decomposition of rational fractions into simple fractions.

IV. TRIGONOMETRY.

In explaining the use of trigonometrical tables, the pupil must be able to tell with what degree of exactness an angle can be determined by the logarithms of any of its trigonometrical lines. The consideration of the proportional parts will be sufficient for this. It will thus be seen that if the sine determines perfectly a small angle, the degree of exactness, which may be expected from the use of that line, diminishes as the angle increases, and becomes quite insufficient in the neighborhood of 90 degrees. It is the reverse for the cosine, which may serve very well to represent an angle near 90 degrees, while it would be very inexact for small angles. We see, then, that in our applications, we should distrust those formulas which give an angle by its sine or cosine. The tangent 39 being alone exempt from these difficulties, we should seek, as far as possible, to resolve all questions by means of it. Thus, let us suppose that we know the hypothenuse and one of the sides of a right-angled triangle, the direct determination of the included angle will be given by a cosine, which will be wanting in exactness if the hypothenuse of the triangle does not differ much from the given side. In that case we should begin by calculating the third side, and then use it with the first side to determine the desired angle by means of its tangent. When two sides of a triangle and the included angle are given, the tangent of the half difference of the desired angles may be calculated with advantage; but we may also separately determine the tangent of each of them. When the three sides of a triangle are given, the best formula for calculating an angle, and the only one never at fault, is that which gives the tangent of half of it.

The surveying for plans, taught in the course of Geometry, employing only graphical methods of calculation, did not need any more accurate instruments than the chain and the graphometer; but now that trigonometry furnishes more accurate methods of calculation, the measurements on the ground require more precision. Hence the requirement for the pupil to measure carefully a base, to use telescopes, verniers, etc., and to make the necessary calculations, the ground being still considered as plane. But as these slow and laborious methods can be employed for only the principal points of the survey, the more expeditious means of the plane-table and compass will be used for the details.

In spherical trigonometry, all that will be needed in geodesy should be learned before admission to the school, so that the subject will not need to be again taken up. We have specially inscribed in the programme the relations between the angles and sides of a right-angled triangle, which must be known by the students; they are those which occur in practice. In tracing the course to be pursued in the resolution of the three cases of any triangles, we have indicated that which is in fact employed in the applications, and which is the most convenient. As to the rest, ambiguous cases never occur in practice, and therefore we should take care not to speak of them to learners.

In surveying, spherical trigonometry will now allow us to consider cases in which the signals are not all in the same plane, and to operate on uneven ground, obtain its projection on the plane of the horizon, and at the same time determine differences of level.

It may be remarked that Descriptive Geometry might supply the place of spherical trigonometry by a graphical construction, but the degree of exactitude of the differences of level thus obtained would be insufficient.

40

PROGRAMME OF TRIGONOMETRY.

1. PLANE TRIGONOMETRY.

Trigonometrical lines.—Their ratios to the radius are alone considered.—Relations of the trigonometric lines of the same angle.—Expressions of the sine and of the cosine in functions of the tangent.

Knowing the sines and the cosines of two arcs a and b, to find the sine and the cosine of their sum and of their difference.—To find the tangent of the sum or of the difference of two arcs, knowing the tangents of those arcs.

Expressions for sin.2a and sin.3a; cos.2a and cos. 3a; tang.2a and tang.3a.

Knowing sin.a or cos.a, to calculate sin.½a and cos.½a.

Knowing tang.a, to calculate tang.½a.

Knowing sin.a, to calculate sin.⅓a—Knowing cos.a, to calculate cos.⅓a.

Use of the formula cos.p+cos.q = 2cos.½(p + q)cos.½(p - q), to render logarithms applicable to the sum of two trigonometrical lines, sines or cosines.—To render logarithms applicable to the sum of two tangents.

Construction of the trigonometric tables.

Use in detail of the tables of Callet.—Appreciation, by the proportional parts, of the degree of exactness in the calculation of the angles.—Superiority of the tangent formulas.

Resolution of triangles.

Relations between the angles and the sides of a right-angled triangle, or of any triangle whatever.—When the three angles of a triangle are given, these relations determine only the ratios of the sides.

Resolution of right-angled triangles.—Of the case in which the hypothenuse and a side nearly equal to it are given.

Knowing a side and two angles of any triangle, to find the other parts, and also the surface of the triangle.

Knowing two sides a and b of a triangle and the included angle C, to find the other parts and also the surface of the triangle.—The tang.½(A - B) may be determined; or tang.A and tang.B directly.

Knowing the three sides a, b, c, to find the angles and the surface of the triangle.—Employment of the formula which gives tang.½A.

Application to surveying for plans.

Measurement of bases with rods.

Measurement of angles.—Description and use of the circle.—Use of the telescope to render the line of sight more precise.—Division of the circle.—Verniers.

Measurement and calculation of a system of triangles.—Reduction of angles to the centres of stations.

How to connect the secondary points to the principal system.—Use of the plane table and of the compass.

2. SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY.

Fundamental relations (cos.a = cos.b cos.c + sin.b sin.c cos.A) between the sides and the angles of a spherical triangle.

To deduce thence the relations sin.A : sin.B = sin.a : sin.b; cot.a sin.b - cot.A sin.C = cos.b cos.C, and by the consideration of the supplementary triangle cos.A = -cos.B cos.C + sin.B sin.C cos.a.

Right-angled triangles.—Formulas cos.a = cos.b cos.c; sin.b = sin.a sin.B; tang.c = tang.a cos.B, and tang.b = sin.c tang.B.

In a right-angled triangle the three sides are less than 90°, or else two of the sides are greater than 90°, and the third is less. An angle and the side opposite to it are both less than 90°, or both greater.

Resolution of any triangles whatever:

1o Having given their three sides a, b, c, or their three angles A, B, C.—Formulas tang.½a and tang.1/2A, calculable by logarithms:

2o Having given two sides and the included angle, or two angles and the included side.—Formulas of Delambre:

3o Having given two sides and an angle opposite to one of them, or two angles and a side opposite to one of them. Employment of an auxiliary angle to render the formulas calculable by logarithms.

Applications.—Survey of a mountainous country.—Reduction of the base and of the angles to the horizon.—Determination of differences of level.

Knowing the latitude and the longitude of two points on the surface of the earth, to find the distance of those points.

41
V. ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY.

The important property of homogeneity must be given with clearness and simplicity.

The transformation of co-ordinates must receive some numerical applications, which are indispensable to make the student clearly see the meaning of the formulas.

The determination of tangents will be effected in the most general manner by means of the derivatives of the various functions, which we inserted in the programme of algebra. After having shown that this determination depends on the calculation of the derivative of the ordinate with respect to the abscissa, this will be used to simplify the investigation of the tangent to curves of the second degree and to curves whose equations contain transcendental functions. The discussion of these, formerly pursued by laborious indirect methods, will now become easy; and as curves with transcendental equations are frequently encountered, it will be well to exercise students in their discussion.

The properties of foci and of the directrices of curves of the second degree will be established directly, for each of the three curves, by means of the simplest equations of these curves, and without any consideration of the analytical properties of foci, with respect to the general equation of the second degree. With even greater reason will we dispense with examining whether curves of higher degree have foci, a question whose meaning even is not well defined.

We retained in algebra the elimination between two equations of the second degree with two unknown quantities, a problem which corresponds to the purely analytical investigation of the co-ordinates of the points of inter of two curves of the second degree. The final equation is in general of the fourth degree, but we may sometimes dispense with calculating that equation. A graphical construction of the curves, carefully made, will in fact be sufficient to make known, approximately, the co-ordinates of each of the points of inter; and when we shall have thus obtained an approximate solution, we will often be able to give it all the numerical rigor desirable, by successive approximations, deduced from the equations. These considerations will be extended to the investigation of the real roots of equations of any form whatever with one unknown quantity.

Analytical geometry of three dimensions was formerly entirely taught within the Polytechnic school, none of it being reserved for the course of admission. For some years past, however, candidates were required to know the equations of the right line in space, the equation of the plane, the solution of the problems which relate to it and the transformation 42 of co-ordinates. But the consideration of surfaces of the second order was reserved for the interior teaching. We think it well to place this also among the studies to be mastered before admission, in accordance with the general principle now sought to be realized, of classing with them that double instruction which does not exact a previous knowledge of the differential calculus.

We have not, however, inserted here all the properties of surfaces of the second order, but have retained only those which it is indispensable to know and to retain. The transformation of rectilinear co-ordinates, for example, must be executed with simplicity, and the teacher must restrict himself to giving his pupils a succinct explanation of the course to be pursued; this will suffice to them for the very rare cases in which they may happen to have need of them. No questions will be asked relating to the general considerations, which require very complicated theoretical discussions, and especially that of the general reduction of the equation of the second degree with three variables. We have omitted from the problems relating to the right line and to the plane, the determination of the shortest distance of two right lines.

The properties of surfaces of the second order will be deduced from the equations of those surfaces, taken directly in the simplest forms. Among these properties, we place in the first rank, for their valuable applications, those of the surfaces which can be generated by the movement of a right line.

PROGRAMME OF ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY.

1. GEOMETRY OF TWO DIMENSIONS.

Rectilinear co-ordinates.—Position of a point on a plane.

Representation of geometric loci by equations.

Homogeneity of equations and of formulas.—Construction of algebraic expressions.

Transformation of rectilinear co-ordinates.

Construction of equations of the first degree.—Problems on the right line.

Construction of equations of the second degree.—Division of the curves which they represent into three classes.—Reduction of the equation to its simplest form by the change of co-ordinates.5

Problem of tangents.—The coefficient of inclination of the tangent to the curve, to the axis of the abscissas, is equal to the derivative of the ordinate with respect to the abscissa.

Of the ellipse.

Centre and axes.—The squares of the ordinates perpendicular to one of the axes are to each other as the products of the corresponding segments formed on that axis.

The ordinates perpendicular to the major axis are to the corresponding ordinates of the circle described on that axis as a diameter, in the constant ratio of the minor axis to the major.—Construction of the curve by points, by means of this property.

Foci; eccentricity of the ellipse.—The sum of the radii vectors drawn to any point of the ellipse is constant and equal to the major axis.—Description of the ellipse by means of this property.

43

Directrices.—The distance from each point of the ellipse to one of the foci, and to the directrix adjacent to that focus, are to each other as the eccentricity is to the major axis.

Equations of the tangent and of the normal at any point of the ellipse.6—The point in which the tangent meets one of the axes prolonged is independent of the length of the other axis.—Construction of the tangent at any point of the ellipse by means of this property.

The radii vectores, drawn from the foci to any point of the ellipse, make equal angles with the tangent at that point or the same side of it.—The normal bisects the angle made by the radii vectores with each other.—This property may serve to draw a tangent to the ellipse through a point on the curve, or through a point exterior to it.

The diameters of the ellipse are right lines passing through the centre of the curve.—The chords which a diameter bisects are parallel to the tangent drawn through the extremity of that diameter.—Supplementary chords. By means of them a tangent to the ellipse can be drawn through a given point on that curve or parallel to a given right line.

Conjugate diameters.—Two conjugate diameters are always parallel to supplementary chords, and reciprocally.—Limit of the angle of two conjugate diameters.—An ellipse always contains two equal conjugate diameters.—The sum of the squares of two conjugate diameters is constant.—The area of the parallelogram constructed on two conjugate diameters is constant.—To construct an ellipse, knowing two conjugate diameters and the angle which they make with each other.

Expression of the area of an ellipse in function of its axes.

Of the hyperbola.

Centre and axes.—Ratio of the squares of the ordinates perpendicular to the transverse axes.

Of foci and of directrices; of the tangent and of the normal; of diameters and of supplementary chords.—Properties of these points and of these lines, analogous to those which they possess in the ellipse.

Asymptotes of the hyperbola.—The asymptotes coincide with the diagonals of the parallelogram formed on any two conjugate diameters.—The portions of a secant comprised between the hyperbola and its asymptotes are equal.—Application to the tangent and to its construction.

The rectangle of the parts of a secant, comprised between a point of the curve and the asymptotes, is equal to the square of half of the diameter to which the secant is parallel.

Form of the equation of the hyperbola referred to its asymptotes.

Of the parabola.

Axis of the parabola.—Ratio of the squares of the ordinates perpendicular to the axis.

Focus and directrix of the parabola.—Every point of the curve is equally distant from the focus and from the directrix.—Construction of the parabola.

The parabola may be considered as an ellipse, in which the major axis is indefinitely increased while the distance from one focus to the adjacent summit remains constant.

Equations of the tangent and of the normal.—Sub-tangent and sub-normal. They furnish means of drawing a tangent at any point of the curve.

The tangent makes equal angles with the axis and with the radius vector drawn to the point of contact.—To draw, by means of this property, a tangent to the parabola, 1o through a point on the curve; 2o through an exterior point.

All the diameters of the parabola are right lines parallel to the axis, and reciprocally.—The chords which a diameter bisects are parallel to the tangent drawn at the extremity of that diameter.

Expression of the area of a parabolic segment.

Polar co-ordinates.—To pass from a system of rectilinear and rectangular co-ordinates to a system of polar co-ordinates, and reciprocally.

Polar equations of the three curves of the second order, the pole being situated at a focus, and the angles being reckoned from the axis which passes through that focus.

Summary discussion of some transcendental curves.—Determination of the tangent at one of their points.

Construction of the real roots of equations of any form with one unknown quantity.—Investigation of the inters of two curves of the second degree.—Numerical applications of these formulas.

44

2. GEOMETRY OF THREE DIMENSIONS.

The sum of the projections of several consecutive right lines upon an axis is equal to the projection of the resulting line.—The sum of the projections of a right line on three rectangular axes is equal to the square of the right line.—The sum of the squares of the cosines of the angles which a right line makes with three rectangular right lines is equal to unity.

The projection of a plane area on a plane is equal to the product of that area by the cosine of the angle of the two planes.

Representation of a point by its co-ordinates.—Equations of lines and of surfaces.

Transformation of rectilinear co-ordinates.

Of the right line and of the plane.

Equations of the right line.—Equation of the plane.

To find the equations of a right line, 1o which passes through two given points, 2o which passes through a given point and which is parallel to a given line.

To determine the point of inter of two right lines whose equations are known.

To pass a plane, 1o through three given points; 2o through a given point and parallel to a given plane; 3o through a point and through a given right line.

Knowing the equations of two planes, to find the projections of their inter.

To find the inter of a right line and of a plane, their equations being known.

Knowing the co-ordinates of two points, to find their distance.

From a given point to let fall a perpendicular on a plane; to find the foot and the length of that perpendicular (rectangular co-ordinates).

Through a given point to pass a plane perpendicular to a given right line (rectangular co-ordinates).

Through a given point, to pass a perpendicular to a given right line; to determine the foot and the length of that perpendicular (rectangular co-ordinates).

Knowing the equations of a right line, to determine the angles which that line makes with the axes of the co-ordinates (rectangular co-ordinates).

To find the angle of two right lines whose equations are known (rectangular co-ordinates).

Knowing the equation of a plane, to find the angles which it makes with the co-ordinate planes (rectangular co-ordinates).

To determine the angle of two planes (rectangular co-ordinates).

To find the angle of a right line and of a plane (rectangular co-ordinates).

Surfaces of the second degree.

They are divided into two classes; one class having a centre, the other not having any. Co-ordinates of the centre.

Of diametric planes.

Simplification of the general equation of the second degree by the transformation of co-ordinates.

The simplest equations of the ellipsoid, of the hyperboloid of one sheet and of two sheets, of the elliptical and the hyperbolic paraboloid, of cones and of cylinders of the second order.

Nature of the plane s of surfaces of the second order.—Plane s of the cone, and of the right cylinder with circular base.—Anti-parallel of the oblique cone with circular base.

Cone asymptote to an hyperboloid.

Right-lined s of the hyperboloid of one sheet.—Through each point of a hyperboloid of one sheet two right lines can be drawn, whence result two systems of right-lined generatrices of the hyperboloid.—Two right lines taken in the same system do not meet, and two right lines of different systems always meet.—All the right lines situated on the hyperboloid being transported to the centre, remaining parallel to themselves, coincide with the surface of the asymptote cone.—Three right lines of the same system are never parallel to the same plane.—The hyperboloid of one sheet may be generated by a right line which moves along three fixed right lines, not parallel to the same plane; and, reciprocally, when a right line slides on three fixed lines, not parallel to the same plane, it generates a hyperboloid of one sheet.

Right-lined s of the hyperbolic paraboloid.—Through each point of the surface of the hyperbolic paraboloid two right lines may be traced, whence results the generation of the paraboloid by two systems of right lines.—Two right lines of the same system do not meet, but two right lines of different systems always meet.—All the right lines of the same system are parallel to the same plane.—The hyperbolic paraboloid may be generated by the movement of a right line which slides on three fixed right lines which are parallel to the same plane; or by a right line which slides on two fixed right lines, itself remaining always parallel to a given plane. Reciprocally, every surface resulting from one of these two modes of generation is a hyperbolic paraboloid.

General equations of conical surfaces and of cylindrical surfaces.

45
VI. DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.

The general methods of Descriptive Geometry,—their uses in Stone-cutting and Carpentry, in Linear Perspective, and in the determination of the Shadows of bodies,—constitute one of the most fruitful branches of the applications of mathematics. The course has always been given at the Polytechnic School with particular care, according to the plans traced by the illustrious Monge, but no part of the subject has heretofore been required for admission. The time given to it in the school, being however complained of on all sides as insufficient for its great extent and important applications, the general methods of Descriptive Geometry will henceforth be retrenched from the internal course, and be required of all candidates for admission.

As to the programme itself, it is needless to say any thing, for it was established by Monge, and the extent which he gave to it, as well as the methods which he had created, have thus far been maintained. We merely suppress the construction of the shortest distance between two right-lines, which presents a disagreeable and useless complication.

Candidates will have to present to the examiner a collection of their graphical constructions (épures) of all the questions of the programme, signed by their teacher. They are farther required to make free-hand sketches of five of their épures.

PROGRAMME OF DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.

Problems relating to the point, to the straight line, and to the plane.7

Through a point given in space, to pass a right line parallel to a given right line, and to find the length of a part of that right line.

Through a given point, to pass a plane parallel to a given plane.

To construct the plane which passes through three points given in space.

Two planes being given, to find the projections of their inter.

A right line and a plane being given, to find the projections of the point in which the right line meets the plane.

Through a given point, to pass a perpendicular to a given plane, and to construct the projections of the point of meeting of the right line and of the plane.

Through a given point, to pass a right line perpendicular to a given right line, and to construct the projections of the point of meeting of the two right lines.

A plane being given, to find the angles which it forms with the planes of projection.

Two planes being given, to construct the angle which they form between them.

Two right lines which cut each other being given, to construct the angle which they form between them.

To construct the angle formed by a right line and by a plane given in position in space.

Problems relating to tangent planes.

To draw a plane tangent to a cylindrical surface or to a conical surface, 1o through a point taken on the surface; 2o through a point taken out of the surface; 3o parallel to a given right line.

Through a point taken on a surface of revolution, whose meridian is known, to pass a plane tangent to that surface.

46

Problems relating to the inter of surfaces.

To construct the made, on the surface of a right and vertical cylinder, by a plane perpendicular to one of the planes of projection.—To draw the tangent to the curve of inter.—To make the development of the cylindrical surface, and to refer to it the curve of inter, and also the tangent.

To construct the inter of a right cone by a plane perpendicular to one of the planes of projection. Development and tangent.

To construct the right of an oblique cylinder.—To draw the tangent to the curve of inter. To make the development of the cylindrical surface, and to refer to it the curve which served as its base, and also its tangents.

To construct the inter of a surface of revolution by a plane, and the tangents to the curve of inter.—To resolve this question, when the generating line is a right line which does not meet the axis.

To construct the inter of two cylindrical surfaces, and the tangents to that curve.

To construct the inter of two oblique cones, and the tangents to that curve.

To construct the inter of two surfaces of revolution whose axes meet.

VII. OTHER REQUIREMENTS.

The preceding six heads complete the outline of the elementary course of mathematical instruction which it was the object of this article to present; but a few more lines may well be given to a mere enumeration of the other requirements for admission to the school.

Mechanics comes next. The programme is arranged under these heads: Simple motion and compound motion; Inertia; Forces applied to a free material point; Work of forces applied to a movable point; Forces applied to a solid body; Machines.

Physics comprises these topics: General properties of bodies; Hydrostatics and hydraulics; Densities of solids and liquids; Properties of gases; Heat; Steam; Electricity; Magnetism; Acoustics; Light.

Chemistry treats of Oxygen; Hydrogen; Combinations of hydrogen with oxygen; Azote or nitrogen; Combinations of azote with oxygen; Combination of azote with hydrogen, or ammonia; Sulphur; Chlorine; Phosphorus; Carbon.

Cosmography describes the Stars; the Earth; the Sun; the Moon; the Planets; Comets; the Tides.

History and Geography treat of Europe from the Roman Empire to the accession of Louis XVI.

German must be known sufficiently for it to be translated, spoken a little, and written in its own characters.

Drawing, besides the épures of descriptive geometry, must have been acquired sufficiently for copying an academic study, and shading in pencil and in India ink.

Will not our readers agree with M. Coriolis, that “There are very few learned mathematicians who could answer perfectly well at an examination for admission to the Polytechnic School”?

47

SCHOOLS OF PREPARATION FOR THE POLYTECHNIC SCHOOL

There are strictly speaking no Junior Military Schools preparatory to the Polytechnic School, or to the Special Military School at St. Cyr. These schools are recruited in general from the Lycées and other schools for secondary instruction, upon which they exert a most powerful influence. Until 1852 there was no special provision made in the courses of instruction in the Lycées for the mathematical preparation required for admission into the Polytechnic, and the Bachelor’s degree in science could not be obtained without being able to meet the requirements in Latin, rhetoric, and logic for graduation in the arts, which was necessary to the profession of law, medicine, and theology. In consequence, young men who prepared to be candidates for the preliminary examinations at the Polytechnic and the St. Cyr, left the Lycées before graduation in order to acquire more geometry and less literature in the private schools, or under private tuition.

A new arrangement, popularly called the Bifurcation, was introduced by the Decrees of the 10th of April, 1852; and has now come into operation. The conditions demanded for the degree in science were adapted to the requirements of the Military Schools; and in return for this concession it is henceforth to be exacted from candidates for the Military Schools. The diploma of arts is no longer required before the diploma of science can be given. The instruction, which in the upper classes of the Lycées had hitherto been mainly preparatory for the former, takes henceforth at a certain point (called that of Bifurcation) two different routes, conducting separately, the one to the baccalaureate of arts, the other to that of science. The whole system of teaching has accordingly been altered. Boys wanting to study algebra are no longer carried through a long course of Latin; mathematics are raised to an equality with literature; and thus military pupils—pupils desirous of admission at the Polytechnic and St. Cyr, may henceforth, it is hoped, obtain in the Lycées all the preparation which they had latterly sought elsewhere.

48

Under this new system the usual course for a boy seems to be the following:—

He enters the Lycée, in the Elementary Classes; or, a little later, in the Grammar Classes, where he learns Latin and begins Greek. At the age of about fourteen, he is called upon to pass an examination for admission into the Upper Division, and here, in accordance with the new regulations, he makes his choice for mathematics or for literature, the studies henceforth being divided, one course leading to the bachelorship of science, the other to that of arts.

In either case he has before him three yearly courses, three classes—the Third, the Second, and what is called the Rhetoric. At the close of this, or after passing, if he pleases, another year in what is called the Logic, he may go up for his bachelor’s degree. The boy who wants to go to St. Cyr or the Polytechnic chooses, of course, the mathematical division leading to the diploma he will want, that of a bachelor of science. He accordingly begins algebra, goes on to trigonometry, to conic s, and to mechanics, and through corresponding stages in natural philosophy, and the like. If he chooses to spend a fourth year in the Logic, he will be chiefly employed in going over his subjects again. He may take his bachelor’s degree at any time after finishing his third year; and he may, if he pleases, having taken that, remain during a fifth or even a sixth year, in the class of Special Mathematics.

If he be intended for St. Cyr, he may very well leave at the end of his year in Rhetoric, taking of course his degree. One year in the course of Special Mathematics will be required before he can have a chance for the Polytechnic. Usually the number of students admitted at the latter, who have not passed more than one year in the mathematiques spéciales is very small. Very probably the young aspirant would try at the end of his first year in this class, and would learn by practice to do better at the end of the second.

The following are the studies of the mathematical of the upper division as laid down by the ordinance of 30th August, 1854.

The Third Class (Troisième,) at fourteen years old.

Arithmetic and first notions of Algebra. Plane Geometry and its applications. First notions of Chemistry and Physics. General notions of Natural History; Principles of classification. Linear and imitative Drawing.

The Second Class (Seconde,) at fifteen years old.

Algebra; Geometry, figures in space, recapitulation; Applications of Geometry, notions of the geometrical representations of bodies by projections; Rectilineal Trigonometry; Chemistry; Physics; and Drawing.

49

The Rhetoric, at sixteen years old.

Exercises in Arithmetic and Algebra; Geometry; notions on some common curves; and general recapitulation; Applications of Geometry; notions of leveling and its processes; recapitulation of Trigonometry; Cosmography; Mechanics; Chemistry concluded and reviewed; Zoölogy and Animal Physiology; Botany and Vegetable Physiology; Geology; Drawing. (The pupil may now be ready for the Degree and for St. Cyr.)

The Logic, at seventeen years old.

Six lessons a week are employed in preparation for the bachelorship of science, and in a methodical recapitulation of the courses of the three preceding years according to the state of the pupil’s knowledge.

Two lessons a week are allowed for reviewing the literary instruction; evening lessons in Latin, French, English, and German, and in History and Geography, having been given through the whole previous time.

The Special Mathematics, at eighteen and nineteen years old.

Five lessons a week are devoted to these studies; in the other lessons the pupils join those of the Logic class for reviewing all their previous subjects, whether for the bachelorship in science or for competition for admission at the Ecole Normale or the Polytechnic.

It will only be necessary to add a few sentences in explanation of the methods pursued in the upper classes of the Lycées. The classes are large—from 80 to above 100; the lessons strictly professorial lectures, with occasional questions, as at the Polytechnic itself. In large establishments the class is divided, and two professors are employed, giving two parallel courses on the same subject. To correct and fortify this general teaching, we find, corresponding to the interrogations of the Polytechnic, what are here called conferences. The members of the large class are examined first of all in small detachments of five or six by their own professors once a week; and, secondly, a matter of yet greater importance, by the professor who is conducting the parallel course, and by professors who are engaged for this purpose from other Lycées and preparatory schools, and from among the répétiteurs of the Polytechnic and the Ecole Normale themselves. It appeared by the table of the examinations of this latter kind which had been passed by the pupils of the class of Special Mathematics at the Lycée St. Louis, that the first pupil on the list had in the interval between the opening of the school and the date of our visit (February 16th) gone through as many as twenty-four.

The assistants, who bear the name of répétiteurs at the Lycées, do not correspond in any sense to those whom we shall hereafter notice at the Ecole Polytechnique. They are in the Lycées mere superintendents in the salles d’étude, who attend to order and discipline, who give some slight occasional help to the pupils, and may be 50 employed in certain cases, where the parents wish for it, in giving private tuition to the less proficient. The system of salles d’étude appears to prevail universally; the number of the pupils placed in each probably varying greatly. At the Polytechnic we found eight or ten pupils in each; at St. Cyr as many as 200. The number considered most desirable at the Lycée of St. Louis was stated to be thirty.

It thus appears that in France not only do private establishments succeed in giving preparation for the military schools, but that even in the first-class public schools, which educate for the learned professions, it has been considered possible to conduct a series of military or science classes by the side of the usual literary or arts classes. The common upper schools are not, as they used to be, and as with us they are, Grammar schools, they are also Science schools. In every Lycée there is, so to say, a sort of elementary polytechnic department, giving a kind of instruction which will be useful to the future soldier, and at the same time to others, to those who may have to do with mines, manufactures, or any description of civil engineering. There is thus no occasion for Junior Military Schools in France, for all the schools of this class are more or less of a military character in their studies.

The conditions of admission to the examination for the degree of Bachelor of Science are simply, sixteen years of age, and the payment of fees amounting to about 200 fr. (10l.) Examinations are held three times a year by the Faculties at Paris, Besançon, Bordeaux, Caen, Clermont, Dijon, Grenoble, Lille, Lyons, Marseilles, Montpellier, Nancy, Poitiers, Rennes, Strasburg, and Toulouse, and once a year at Ajaccio, Algiers, and nineteen other towns. There is a written examination of six hours, and a viva voce examination of an hour and a quarter. It is, of course, only a pass examination, and is said to be much less difficult than the competitive examination for admission to St. Cyr.—Report of English Commissioners, 1856.

51

THE POLYTECHNIC SCHOOL OF FRANCE.

53

CONTENTS.

Page.
Polytechnic School at Paris, 11
Subjects of Instruction as Prescribed for Admission in 1850, 13
Preparatory Course in the Lycees, 49
History, Management, Conditions of Admission, Course of Study, Examinational System, and Results, 55
I. Foundation and History, 55
Out growth of the Necessities of the Public Service in 1794, 56
High Scientific Ability of its first Teachers, 58
Peculiar Method of Scientific Teaching, 59
Characteristic features of the Répétitorial System, 59
The Casernement, or Barrack Residence of the Pupils, 60
Permanent Organization in 1809, 60
Commission of 1850, 62
II. Outline of the Plan, Objects, and Management, 63
Public Services provided for in its General Scientific Course, 63
Admission by Competition in an Open Examination, 63
Annual Charge for Board and Instruction, 64
Exhibitions, (or bourses, demi-bourses,) and Outfits (trousseaux,) 64
Length of Course of Study, 64
Number of Professors and Teachers, besides its Military Staff, 64
Military Establishment, 65
Civil Establishment, 65
General Control and Supervision, 65
1. Board of Administration, 65
2. Board of Discipline, 65
3. Board of Instruction, 65
4. Board of Improvement, 66
III. Conditions and Examinations for Admission, 66
Who may be Candidates for Admission, 66
Subjects of Entrance Examination, 66
Preliminary Examination, 67
Written Examination, 67
Oral Examination, 68
Scale of Merit, and Latitude in Amount of Credit given, 68
Reports of Examiners to Minister of War, 69
Co-efficients of Influence, varying with the Study and Mode of Examination, 69
Decision of Jury on all the Documents of each Candidate, 70
Final Action of the Minister of War, 70
IV. School Buildings, Course and Method of Study, 70
Situation, Number, and Purposes of Buildings, 70
Daily Routine of Exercises, 72
Method of Teaching and Study, 73
Professorial and Répétitorial, 74
Interrogations, Général, 74
Interrogations, Particulieres by the Répétiteurs, 74
One Répétiteur to every eight Pupils, 74
System of Credits for every Lecture, every Interrogation, and Exercise, 75
54 Final Admission to Public Service, depends on daily and hourly fidelity, 76
Division of First Year’s Work into three portions, 76
First portion—Analysis and Descriptive Geometry, 76
Second portion—Mechanics, Geodesy, Physics, &c., 76
Third portion—General Private Study, 76
Number and Subjects of Lectures in Second Course, 78
V. Examinational System, 78
Ordinary Examinations, 78
1. By Professors on their own Lectures, both Written and Oral, 78
2. By Examiners on the Manipulations of the Pupils, 78
3. By Répétiteurs every ten or fourteen days, 78
4. By Professors and Répétiteurs at the close of each Course, 79
First Annual Examination, 79
Table—Co-efficient of Influence in Second Division of First Year’s Course, 79
Specimen of Credits gained by one Student in First Year’s Course, 80
Persons excluded from the Second Year’s Course, 81
Second Annual or Great Final Examination, 81
Conducted by the same Examiners as the First, 81
Oral, and extends over the whole Two Years’ Course, 81
Results based on each Day’s Study’s, Year’s, and Examination’s results, 82
Tables—Co-efficients of Influence in Final Classification, &c., 82
Order in which the Public Services are Selected, 83
VI. General Remarks on Character and Results of the Polytechnic School, 84
Appendix, 88
Public Services Beside the Army Supplied by This School, 88
1. Gunpowder and Saltpetre, 88
2. Navy, 88
3. Marine Artillery and Foundries, 88
4. Naval Architects. School of Application at L’Orient, 88
5. Hydrographers, 88
6. Roads and Bridges. School of Application at Paris, 89
7. Mining Engineers. School of Mines at Paris and St. Etienne, 89
8. Tobacco Department 90
9. Telegraphs, 90
Programmes of Internal Instruction During the Two Years of Study, 91
1. Analysis, 91
First Year—Calculus, Differential, 91
Calculus, Integral, 93
Second Year—Calculus, Integral, (continuation,) 94
2. Descriptive Geometry and Stereotomy, 97
First Year—Descriptive Geometry, Geometrical Drawing, 97
Second Year—Stereotomy: Wood-work, 103
Masonry, 103
3. Mechanics and Machines, 104
First Year—Kinematics, 105
Equilibrium of Forces, 105
Second Year—Dynamics, 112
Hydrostatics, 115
Hydraulics, 115
Machines in Motion, 116
4. Physics, 116
First Year—General Properties of Bodies, Hydrostatics, Hydrodynamics, 117
Heat, 119
Statical Electricity, 123
Second Year—Dynamical Electricity, 124
Acoustics, 125
Optics, 126
5. Manipulations in Physics, 129
First and Second Year, 130
Distribution of Time, 131
55

THE POLYTECHNIC SCHOOL AT PARIS8

I. FOUNDATION AND HISTORY.

The origin of the Ecole Polytechnique dates from a period of disorder and distress in the history of France which might seem alien to all intellectual pursuits, if we did not remember that the general stimulus of a revolutionary period often acts powerfully upon thought and education. It is, perhaps, even more than the Institute, the chief scientific creation of the first French Revolution. It was during the government of the committee of public safety, when Carnot, as war minister, was gradually driving back the invading armies, and reorganizing victory out of defeat and confusion, that the first steps were taken for its establishment. A law, dating the 1st Ventose, year II., the 12th of March 1794, created a “Commission des Travaux Publics,” charged with the duty of establishing a regular system for carrying on public works; and this commission ultimately founded a central school for public works, and drew up a plan for the competitive examination of candidates for admission to the service. It was intended at first to give a complete education for some of the public services, but it was soon changed into a preparatory school, to be succeeded by special schools of application. This was the Ecole Polytechnique.

The school and its plan were both owing to an immediate and pressing want. It was to be partly military and partly civil. Military, as well as civil education had been destroyed by the revolutionists. The committee of public safety had, indeed, formed a provisional school for engineers at Metz, to supply the immediate wants of the army on the frontier, and at this school young men were hastily taught the elements of fortification, and were sent direct to the troops, to learn as they best could, the practice of their art. “But such a method,” says the report accompanying the law which founded the school, “does not form engineers in any true sense of the term, and can only be justified by the emergency of the 56 time. The young men should be recalled to the new school to complete their studies.” Indeed no one knew better than Carnot, to use the language of the report, “that patriotism and courage can not always supply the want of knowledge;” and in the critical campaigns of 1793–4, he must often have felt the need of the institution which he was then contributing to set on foot. Such was the immediate motive for the creation of this school. At first, it only included the engineers amongst its pupils. But the artillery were added within a year.

We must not, however, omit to notice its civil character, the combination of which with its military object forms its peculiar feature, and has greatly contributed to its reputation. Amongst its founders were men, who though ardent revolutionists, were thirsting for the restoration of schools and learning, which for a time had been totally extinguished. The chief of these, besides Carnot, were Monge and Fourcroy, Berthollet and Lagrange. Of Carnot and Lagrange, one amongst the first of war ministers, the other one of the greatest of mathematicians, we need not say more. Berthollet, a man of science and practical skill, first suggested the school; Monge, the founder of Descriptive Geometry, a favorite savant of Napoleon though a zealous republican, united to real genius that passion for teaching and for his pupils, which makes the beau idéal of the founder of a school; and Fourcroy was a man of equal practical tact and science, who at the time had great influence with the convention, and was afterwards intrusted by Napoleon with much of the reorganization of education in France.

When the school first started there was scarcely another of any description in the country. For nearly three years the revolution had destroyed every kind of teaching. The attack upon the old schools, in France, as elsewhere, chiefly in the hands of the clergy, had been begun by a famous report of Talleyrand’s, presented to the legislative assembly in 1791, which recommended to suppress all the existing academies within Paris and the provinces, and to replace them by an entirely new system of national education through the country. In this plan a considerable number of military schools were proposed, where boys were to be educated from a very early age. When the violent revolutionists were in power, they adopted the destructive part of Talleyrand’s suggestions without the other. All schools, from the university downwards, were destroyed; the large exhibitions or Bourses, numbering nearly 40,000, were confiscated or plundered by individuals, and even the military schools and those for the public works (which were absolutely 57 necessary for the very roads and the defense of the country) were suppressed or disorganized. The school of engineers at Mézières (an excellent one, where Monge had been a professor,) and that of the artillery at La Fère, were both broken up, whilst the murder of Lavoisier, and the well known saying in respect to it, that “the Republic had no need of chemists,” gave currency to a belief, which Fourcroy expressed in proposing the Polytechnic, “that the late conspirators had formed a deliberate plan to destroy the arts and sciences, and to establish their tyranny on the ruins of human reason.”

Thus it was on the ruin of all the old teaching, that the new institution was erected; a truly revolutionary school, as its founders delighted to call it, using the term as it was then commonly used, as a synonym for all that was excellent. And then for the first time avowing the principle of public competition, its founders, Monge and Fourcroy, began their work with an energy and enthusiasm which they seem to have left as a traditional inheritance to their school. It is curious to see the difficulties which the bankruptcy of the country threw in their way, and the vigor with which, assisted by the summary powers of the republican government, they overcame them. They begged the old Palais Bourbon for their building; were supplied with pictures from the Louvre; the fortunate capture of an English ship gave them some uncut diamonds for their first experiments; presents of military instruments were sent from the arsenals of Havre; and even the hospitals contributed some chemical substances. In fine, having set their school in motion, the government and its professors worked at it with such zeal and effect, that within five months after their project was announced, they had held their first entrance examination, open to the competition of all France, and started with three hundred and seventy-nine pupils.

The account of one of these first pupils, who is among the most distinguished still surviving ornaments of the Polytechnic, will convey a far better idea of the spirit of the young institution than could be given by a more lengthy description. M. Biot described to us vividly the zeal of the earliest teachers, and the thirst for knowledge which, repressed for awhile by the horrors of the period, burst forth with fresh ardor amongst the French youth of the time. Many of them, he said, like himself, had been carried away by the enthusiasm of the revolution, and had entered the army. “My father had sent me,” he added, “to a mercantile house, and indeed I never felt any great vocation to be a soldier, but Que voulez vous? 58 les Prussiens etaient en Champagne.” He joined the army, served two years under Dumouriez, and returned to Paris in the reign of terror, “to see from his lodgings in the Rue St. Honore the very generals who had led us to victory, Custine and Biron, carried by in the carts to the guillotine. “Imagine what it was when we heard that Robespierre was dead, and that we might return safely to study after all this misery, and then to have for our teachers La Place, Lagrange, and Monge. We felt like men brought to life again after suffocation. Lagrange said, modestly, “Let me teach them arithmetic.” Monge was more like our father than our teacher; he would come to us in the evening, and assist us in our work till midnight, and when he explained a difficulty to one of our chefs de brigade, it ran like an electric spark through the party.” The pupils were not then, he told us, as they have since been, shut up in barracks, they were left free, but there was no idleness or dissipation amongst them. They were united in zealous work and in good camaraderie, and any one known as a bad character was avoided. This account may be a little tinged by enthusiastic recollections, but it agreed almost entirely with that of M. de Barante, who bore similar testimony to the early devotion of the pupils, and the unique excellence of the teaching of Monge.

We are not, however, writing a history of this school, and must confine ourselves to such points as directly illustrate its system of teaching and its organization. These may be roughly enumerated in the following order:

1. Its early history is completed by the law of its organization, given it by La Place in his short ministry of the interior. This occurred in the last month of 1799, a memorable era in French history, for it was immediately after the revolution of the 18th of Brumaire, when Napoleon overthrew the Directory and made himself First Consul. One of his earliest acts was to sign the charter of his great civil and military school. This charter or decree deserves some attention, because it is always referred to as the law of the foundation of the school. It determined the composition of the two councils of instruction and improvement, the bodies to which the direction of the school was to be, and still is, intrusted; some of its marked peculiarities in the mode and subject of teaching. It is important to notice each of the two points.

The direction of the school was at first almost entirely in the hands of its professors, who formed what is still called its Council of Instruction. Each of them presided over the school alternately for one month, a plan copied from the revolutionary government of 59 the Convention. In the course of a few years, however, another body was added, which has now the real management of the school. This is called the “Council of Improvement” (Conseil de perfectionnement,) and a part of its business is to see that the studies form a good preparation for those of the more special schools (écoles d’application) for the civil and military service. It consists of eminent men belonging to the various public departments supplied by the school, and some of the professors. It has had, as far as we could judge, an useful influence; first, as a body not liable to be prejudiced in its proposals by the feelings of the school, and yet interested in its welfare and understanding it; secondly, as having shown much skill in the difficult task of making the theoretical teaching of the Polytechnic a good introduction to the practical studies of the public service; thirdly, as being sufficiently influential, from the character of its members, to shield the school from occasional ill-judged interference. It should be added that hardly any year has passed without the Council making a full report on the studies of the school, with particular reference to their bearing on the Special Schools of Application.

The method of scientific teaching has been peculiar from the beginning. It is the most energetic form of what may be called the repetitorial system, a method of teaching almost peculiar to France, and which may be described as a very able combination of professional and tutorial teaching. The object of the répétiteur, or private tutor, is to second every lecture of the professor, to explain and fix it by ocular demonstration, explanations, or examination. This was a peculiarity in the scheme of Monge and Foureroy. The latter said, in the first programme, “Our pupils must not only learn, they must at once carry out their theory. We must distribute them into small rooms, where they shall practice the plans of descriptive geometry, which the professors have just shown them in their public lectures. And in the same manner they must go over in practice (répéteront) in separate laboratories the principal operations of chemistry.” To carry out this system the twenty best pupils, of whom M. Biot was one, were selected as répétiteurs soon after the school had started. Since then the vacancies have always been filled by young but competent men, aspiring themselves to become in turn professors. They form a class of teachers more like the highest style of private tutors in our universities, or what are called in Germany Privat-docenten, than any other body—with this difference, that they do not give their own lectures, but breaking up the professor’s large class into small classes of five and six pupils, examine 60 these in his lecture. The success of this attempt we shall describe hereafter.

2. A change may be noticed which was effected very early by the Council of Improvement—the union of pupils for artillery and engineers in a single school of application. The first report in December 1800, speaks of the identity in extent and character of the studies required for these two services; and in conformity with its recommendation, the law of the 3rd of October 1802, (12th Vendémiaire, XI.) dissolved the separate artillery school at Châlons, and established the united school for both arms in the form which it still retains at Metz.

3. In 1805 a curious change was made, and one very characteristic of the school. The pupils have always been somewhat turbulent, and generally on the side of opposition. In the earliest times they were constantly charged with incivisme, and the aristocracy was said to have “taken refuge within its walls.” In fact, one of its earliest and of its few great literary pupils, M. de Barante, confirmed this statement, adding, as a reason, that the school gave for a while the only good instruction in France. It was in consequence of some of these changes that the pupils who had hitherto lived in their own private houses or lodgings in Paris, were collected in the school building. This “casernement” said to be immediately owing to a burst of anger of Napoleon, naturally tended to give the school a more military character; but it was regarded as an unfortunate change by its chief scientific friends. “Ah! ma pauvre école!” M. Biot told us he had exclaimed, when he saw their knapsacks on their beds. He felt, he said, that the enthusiasm of free study was gone, and that now they would chiefly work by routine and compulsion.

4. The year 1809 may be called the epoch at which the school attained its final character. By this time the functions, both of boards and teachers, were accurately fixed, some alterations in the studies had taken place, and the plan of a final examination had been drawn up, according to which the pupils were to obtain their choice of the branch of the public service they preferred. In fact, the school may be said to have preserved ever since the form it then assumed, under a variety of governments and through various revolutions, in most of which, indeed, its pupils have borne some share; and one of which, the restoration of 1816, was attended with its temporary dissolution.

Thus, during the first years after its foundation the Polytechnic grew and flourished in the general dearth of public teaching, being 61 indeed not merely the only great school, but, until the Institute was founded, the only scientific body in France. Working on its first idea of high professorial lectures, practically applied and explained by répétiteurs, its success in its own purely scientific line was, and has continued to be, astonishing. Out of its sixteen earliest professors, ten still retain an European name. Lagrange, Monge, Fourcroy, La Place, Guyton de Morveau were connected with it. Malus, Hauy, Biot, Poisson, and De Barante, were among its earliest pupils. Arago, Cauchy, Cavaignac, Lamoricière, with many more modern names, came later. All the great engineers and artillerymen of the empire belonged to it, and the long pages in its calendar of distinguished men are the measure of its influence on the civil and military services of France. In fact its pupils, at a time of enormous demands, supplied all the scientific offices of the army, and directed all the chief public works, fortresses, arsenals, the improvement of cities, the great lines of roads, shipbuilding, mining—carried out, in a word, most of the great improvements of Napoleon. He knew the value of his school, “the hen” as he called it, “that laid him golden eggs”—and perhaps its young pupils were not improved by the excessive official patronage bestowed by him upon “the envy of Europe,” “the first school in the world.” It can not, however, be matter of surprise, that its vigor and success should have caused Frenchmen, even those who criticise its influence severely, to regard it with pride as an institution unrivaled for scientific purposes.

It is not necessary to give any detailed account of the later history of the school, but we must remark that disputes have frequently arisen with regard to the best mode of harmonizing its teaching with that of the special schools of application to which it conducts. These disputes have been no doubt increased by the union of a civil and military object in the same school. The scientific teaching desirable for some of the higher civil professions has appeared of doubtful advantage to those destined for the more practical work of war. There has been always a desire on the one side to qualify pure mathematics by application, a strong feeling on the other that mathematical study sharpens the mind most keenly for some of the practical pursuits of after life. We should add, perhaps, that there has been some protest in France (though little heard among the scientific men who have been the chief directors of the school) against the esprit faux, the exclusive pursuit of mathematics to the utter neglect of literature, and the indifference to moral and historical studies. Some one or other of these complaints 62 any one who studies the literature, the pamphlets, and history of the school will find often reproduced in the letters of war ministers, of artillery and engineer officers commanding the school of application at Metz, or of committees from the similar schools for the mines and the roads and bridges. The last of these occasions illustrates the present position of the school.

On the 5th of June 1850, the legislative assembly appointed a mixed commission of military men and civilians, who were charged to revise all the programs of instruction, and to recommend all needful changes in the studies of the pupils, both those preparatory to entrance9 and those actually pursued in the school. The commission was composed as follows:—

M. Thenard, Member of the Academy of Sciences, and of the Board of Improvement of the Polytechnic School, President.

Le Verrier, Member of the Academy of Sciences and of the Legislative Assembly, Reporter.

Noizet, General of Brigade of Engineers.

Poncelet, General of Brigade of Engineers, Commandant of the Polytechnic School, Member of the Academy of Sciences.

Piobert, General of Brigade of Artillery, Member of the Academy of Sciences.

Mathieu, Rear Admiral.

Duhamel, Member of the Academy of Sciences, Director of Studies at the Polytechnic School.

Mary, Divisional Inspector of Roads and Bridges.

Morin, Colonel of Artillery, Member of the Academy of Sciences.

Regnault, Engineer of Mines, Member of the Academy of Sciences.

Olivier, Professor at the Conservatoire des Arts et Metiers.

Debacq, Secretary for Military Schools at the Ministry of War, Secretary.

A chronic dispute which has gone on from the very first year of the school’s existence, between the exclusive study of abstract mathematics on the one hand, and their early practical application on the other, was brought to a head (though it has scarcely been set at rest) by this commission. All the alterations effected have been in the direction of eliminating a portion of the pure mathematics, and of reducing abstract study to the limits within which it was believed to be most directly applicable to practice. The results, however, are still a subject of vehement dispute, in which most of the old scientific pupils of the Polytechnic, and many of what may be styled its most practical members, the officers of the artillery and engineers, are ranged on the side of “early and deep scientific study versus early practical applications.” It is, indeed, a question which touches the military pupils nearly, since it is in their case particularly that the proposed abstract studies of the Polytechnic might be thought of the most doubtful advantage. We do not try to solve the problem here, though the facts elsewhere stated will afford some materials for judgment. We incline to the opinion 63 of those who think that the ancient genius loci, the traditional teaching of the school, will be too strong for legislative interference, and that, in spite of recent enactments, abstract science and analysis will reign in the lecture-rooms and halls of study of the Polytechnic, now as in the days of Monge.

II. AN OUTLINE OF THE MANAGEMENT AND OF THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE SCHOOL, ETC.

The Polytechnic, as we have said, is a preparatory and general scientific school; its studies are not exclusively adapted for any one of the departments to which at the close of its course the scholars will find themselves assigned; and on quitting it they have, before entering on the actual discharge of their duties of whatever kind, to pass through a further term of teaching in some one of the schools of application specially devoted to particular professions.

The public services for which it thus gives a general preparation are the following:

Military: Under the Minister at War.

Artillery (Artillerie de terre.)

Engineers (Génie.)

The Staff Corps (Corps d’Etat Major.)

The Department of Powder and Saltpetre (Poudres et Salpétres.)

Under the Minister of Marine.

Navy, (Marine.)

Marine Artillery (Artillerie de mer.)

Naval Architects (Génie maritime.)

The Hydrographical Department (Corps des Ingénieurs Hydrographes.)

Civil: Under the Minister of Public Works.

The Department of Roads and Bridges (Ponts-et-chaussées.)

The Department of Mines (Mines.)

Under the Minister of the Interior.

The Telegraph Department (Lignes Télégraphiques.)

Under the minister of Finance.

The Tobacco Department (Administration des Tabacs.)

To these may be added at any time, by a decree on the part of the government, any other departments, the duties of which appear to require an extensive knowledge of mathematics, physics, or chemistry.

Admission to the school is, and has been since its first commencement in 1794, obtained by competition in a general examination, held yearly, and open to all. Every French youth, between the age of sixteen and twenty, (or if in the army up to the age of twenty-five,) may offer himself as a candidate.

64

A board of examiners passes through France once every year, and examines all who present themselves, that have complied with the conditions, which are fully detailed in the decree given in the appendix. It commences at Paris.

A list of such of the candidates as are found eligible for admittance to the Polytechnic is drawn up from the proceedings of the board, and submitted to the minister at war; the number of places likely to be vacant has already been determined, and the minister fixes the number of admissions accordingly. The candidates admitted are invariably taken in the order of merit.

The annual charge for board and instruction is 40l. (1,000 fr.,) payable in advance in four installments. In addition there is the cost of outfit, varying from 20l. to 24l. Exhibitions, however, for the discharge of the whole or of one-half of the expense (bourses and demi-bourses,) are awarded by the state in favor of all the successful candidates, whose parents can prove themselves to be too poor to maintain their children in the school. Outfits and half outfits (trousseaux) and demi-trousseaux) are also granted in these cases, on the entrance of the student into the school; and the number of these boursiers and demi-boursiers amounts at the present time to one-third of the whole.

The course of study is completed in two years. On its successful termination which is preceded by a final examination, the students are distributed into the different services, the choice being offered them in the order of their merit, and laid down in the classified list drawn up after the examination. If it so happen that the number of places or the services which can be offered is not sufficient for the number of qualified students, those at the bottom of the list are offered service in the infantry or cavalry, and those who do not enter the public service, are supplied with certificates of having passed successfully through the school. Students who have been admitted into the school from the army, are obliged to re-enter the army.

All others, as has been said, have the right of choosing, according to their position on the list, the service which they prefer, so far, that is, as the number of vacancies in that service will allow; or they may if they please decline to enter the public service at all.

Such is a general outline of the plan and object of the school. We may add that, besides its military staff, it employs no less than thirty-nine professors and teachers; that it has four boards of management, and that ten scientific men unconnected with the school, and amongst the most distinguished in France, conduct its examinations. 65 The magnitude of this establishment for teaching may be estimated by the fact, that the number of pupils rarely exceeds three hundred and fifty, and is often much less.

A fuller enumeration of these bodies will complete our present sketch.

I. The military establishment consists of:—

The Commandant, a General Officer, usually of the Artillery or the Engineers, at present a General of Artillery.

A Second in Command, a Colonel or Lieutenant-Colonel, chosen from former pupils of the school; at present a Colonel of Engineers.

Three Captains of Artillery and Three Captains of Engineers, as Inspectors of Studies, chosen also from former pupils of the school.

Six Adjutants (adjoints,) non-commissioned officers, usually such as have been recommended for promotion.

II. The civil establishment consists of:—

1. A Director of Studies, who has generally been a civilian, but is at present a Lieutenant-Colonel of Engineers.

2. Fifteen Professors, viz.:—Two of Mathematical Analysis. Two of Mechanics and Machinery. One of Descriptive Geometry. Two of Physics. Two of Chemistry. One of Military Art and Fortification. One of Geodesy. One of Architecture. One of French Composition. One of German. One of Drawing. Of these one is an officer of the Staff, another of the Artillery, and a third of the Navy; two are Engineers in Chief of the Roads and Bridges; nine are civilians, of whom two are Members of the Academy of Sciences.

3. Three Drawing Masters for Landscape and Figure Drawing; one for Machine Drawing, and one for Topographical Drawing.

4. Nineteen Assistant and Extra Assistant Teachers, (répétiteurs and répétiteurs adjoints) whose name and functions are both peculiar.

5. Five Examiners for Admission, consisting at present of one Colonel of Artillery, as President, and four civilians.

6. Five Examiners of Students (civilians,) four of them belonging to the Academy of Sciences.

7. There is also a separate Department for the ordinary Management of Administration of the affairs of the school, the charge of the fabric and of the library and museums; and a Medical Staff.

III. The general control or supervision of the school is vested, under the war department, in four great boards of councils, viz.:—

1. A board of administration, composed of the commandant, the second in command, the director of studies, two professors, two captains, and two members of the administrative staff. This board has the superintendence of all the financial business and all the minutiae of the internal administration of the school.

2. A board of discipline, consisting of the second in command, the director, two professors, three captains (of the school,) and two captains of the army, chosen from former pupils. The duty of this board is to decide upon cases of misconduct.

3. A board of instruction, whose members are, the commandant, the second in command, the director, the examiners of students, and the professors; and whose chief duty is to make recommendations relating to ameliorations in the studies, the programmes of admission and of instruction in the school, to—

66

4. A board of improvement, charged with the general control of the studies, formed of—

The Commandant, as President.

The Second in Command.

The Director of Studies.

Two Delegates from the Department of Public Works.

One Delegate from the Naval Department.

One Delegate from the Home Department.

Three Delegates from the War Department.

Two Delegates from the Academy of Sciences.

Two Examiners of Students.

Three Professors of the School.

III. CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATIONS FOR ADMISSION.

The entrance examination is held yearly in August; the most important conditions for admission to it are always inserted in the Moniteur early in the year, and are—

1st. All candidates must be bachelors of science.

2nd. All candidates (unless they have served in the army) must have been as much as sixteen and not more than twenty years old on the 1st of January preceding.

3rd. Privates and non-commissioned officers of the army must be above twenty and under twenty-five years of age; must have served two years, and have certificates of good conduct.

4th. Candidates who propose to claim pecuniary assistance (a bourse or demi-bourse) must present formal proofs of their need of it.

The subjects of the entrance examination are the following:—

Arithmetic, including Vulgar and Decimal Fractions, Weights and Measures, Involution and Evolution; Simple Interest.

Geometry of Planes and Solids; application of Geometry to Surveying; Properties of Spherical Triangles.

Algebra, including Quadratic Equations with one unknown quantity, Series and Progressions in general; Binomial Theorem and its applications; Logarithms and their use; on Derived Functions; on the Theory of Equations; on Differences; application of the Theory of Differences to the Numerical Solution of Equations.

Plane and Spherical Trigonometry; Solution of Triangles; application of Trigonometry to Surveying.

Analytical Geometry, including Geometry of two dimensions; Co-ordinates; Equations of the first and second degree, with two variables; Tangents and Asymptotes; on the Ellipse, Hyperbola, and Parabola; Polar Co-ordinates; Curved Lines in general.

Geometry of three dimensions, including the Theory of Projections; Co-ordinates; the Right Line and Plane; Surfaces of the second degree; Conical and Cylindrical Surfaces.

Descriptive Geometry; Problems relative to a Point, Right Line and Plane; Tangent Planes; Inter of Surfaces.

Mechanics; on the Movement of a Point considered geometrically; on the Effect of Forces applied to points and bodies at rest and moving; on the Mechanical Powers.

Natural Philosophy, including the Equilibrium of Liquids and Gasses; Heat; 67 Electricity; Magnetism; Galvanism; Electro-magnetism and Light; Cosmography.

Chemistry, the Elements; French; German; Drawing, and (optionally) Latin.

This examination is partly written and partly oral. It is not public, but conducted in the following manner:—

Five examiners are appointed by the minister of war to examine the candidates at Paris, and at the several towns named for the purpose throughout France.

Two of these examiners conduct what may be called a preliminary examination (du premier degré,) and the other three a second examination (du second degré.) The preliminary examiners precede by a few days in their journey through France those who conduct the second examination. The written compositions come before either.

The preliminary examination (du premier degré) is made solely for the purpose of ascertaining whether the candidates possess sufficient knowledge to warrant their being admitted to the second examination; and the second examination serves, in conjunction with the written compositions, for their classification in the order of merit.

Prior to the examination, each candidate is called upon to give in certain written sheets containing calculations, sketches, plans and drawings, executed by him at school during the year, certified and dated by the professor under whom he has studied. Care is taken to ascertain whether these are the pupils’ own work, and any deception in this matter, if discovered, excludes at once from the competition of the school.

This done, the candidates are required to reply in writing to written or printed questions, and to write out French and German exercises; great care being taken to prevent copying. This written examination occupies about twenty-four hours during three and a half separate days, as shown in the following table. It usually takes place in the presence of certain official authorities, the examiners not being present.

First Sitting.

Hours.
Arithmetic, 1
Geometry, 1
Latin, 1
3

Second Sitting.

Algebra, 1
History, geography, and French, 3
4

Third Sitting.

Descriptive geometry, and diagram, or sketch, 4

Fourth Sitting.

Mechanics, 1
Physics, chemistry, and cosmography, 2
3

68 Fifth Sitting.

Applied analysis,
German exercise,
3

Sixth Sitting.

Solution of a triangle by logarithms 3

Seventh Sitting.

Drawing 4
Total 24  

Next each candidate is examined orally for three-quarters of an hour, on two successive days, by each of the two examiners separately, and each examiner makes a note of the admissibility or non-admissibility of the candidate.

At the close of this oral examination, the notes relating to the various candidates are compared, and if the examiners differ as to the admissibility of any candidate, he is recalled, further orally examined, and his written exercises carefully referred to, both examiners being present. A final decision is then made.

The preliminary examiners then supply the others with a list of the candidates who are entitled to be admitted to the second oral examination. On this occasion each candidate is separately examined for one hour and a half by each examiner, but care is taken that in all the principal subjects of study the candidate is examined by at least two out of the three examiners.

Each examiner records his opinion of the merits of every candidate in replying, orally and in writing, by awarding him a credit varying between O and 20, the highest number indicating a very superior result.

This scale of merit is employed to express the value of the oral replies, written answers, or drawings. It has the following signification, and appears to be generally in use in the French military schools:—

20  denotes perfect.
19
18
denotes very good.
17
16
15
denotes good.
14
13
12
denotes passable.
11
10
9
denotes middling.
8
7
6
denotes bad.
5
4
3
denotes very bad.
2
1
denotes almost nothing.
0 denotes nothing

Considerable latitude is granted to the examiner engaged in deciding upon the amount of credit to be allowed to the student, for the manner in which he replies to the various questions. He is 69 expected to bear in mind the temperament of the candidate, his confidence or timidity, as well as the difficulty of the questions, when judging of the quality of the reply, more value being given for an imperfect answer to a difficult question than for a more perfect reply to an easy one.

The reports of the examiners, together with the various documents belonging to each candidate, are sent from each town to the minister at war, who transmits them to the commandant of the Polytechnic School to make out a classified list.

Very different value of course is attached to the importance of some of the subjects, when compared with others; and the measure of the importance is represented in French examinations by what are termed co-efficients of influence, varying for the several subjects of study and kind of examination. The particular co-efficients of influence for each subject in these written and oral examinations, are as follows:—

Co-efficients of Influence.
Oral examination— analytical mathematics, 20  
Oral examination— geometrical ditto, 14 52
Oral examination— physics and mechanics, 16
Oral examination— German language, 2  
Written compositions on mathematical subjects, 5  
Written compositions on descriptive geometry, drawing, and description, 5 34
Written compositions on logarithmic calculations of a triangle, 2
Written compositions on mechanics, 2
Written compositions on physics or chemistry, 4
German exercise, 1
French composition, 5
Latin translation, 5
Copy of a drawing, 5  
Total, 86

In order to make out the above mentioned classified list, the respective credits awarded by the examiners to each candidate are multiplied by the co-efficients representing the weight or importance attached to each subject; and the sum of their products furnishes a numerical result, representing the degree of merit of each candidate.

A comparison of these numerical results is then made, and a general list of all the candidates is arranged in order of merit.

This list, and the whole of the documents from which it has been drawn up, are then submitted to a jury composed of the

Commandant of the School.

The Second in Command.

The Director of Studies.

Two Members of the Board of Improvement.

The Five Examiners.

70

It is the special business of this jury carefully to scrutinize the whole of the candidates’ documents, drawings, &c., and they further take care that a failure in any one branch of study is duly noted, as such failure is a sufficient reason for the exclusion of the candidate from the general list.

As soon as this general list has been thoroughly verified, it is submitted to the minister of war, who is empowered to add one-tenth to the number actually required for the public services; and thus it may happen that one-tenth of the pupils may annually be disappointed.

IV. THE SCHOOL BUILDINGS AND THE COURSE AND METHOD OF STUDY.

A brief description of the buildings may be a suitable introduction to an account of the studies that are pursued, and the life that is led in them.

The Polytechnic School stands near the Pantheon, and consists of two main buildings, one for the official rooms and the residence of the commandant and director of studies, the other, and larger one, for the pupils. Detached buildings contain the chemical lecture room and laboratory, the laboratory of natural philosophy, the library, fencing and billiard rooms.

The basement floor of the larger building contains the kitchen and refectories. On the first floor, are the two amphitheaters or great lecture rooms, assigned respectively to the pupils of the two years or divisions, in which the ordinary lectures are given. The rooms are large and well arranged; the seats fixed, the students’ names attached to them. The students are admitted by doors behind the upper tier of seats; at the foot of all is a platform for the professor, with a blackboard facing his audience, and with sufficient room for a pupil to stand and work questions beside him. Room also is provided for one of the captains, inspectors of studies, whose duty it is to be present, for the director of studies, whose occasional presence is expected, and for the assistant teachers or répétiteurs, who in the first year of their appointment are called upon to attend the course upon which they will have to give their subsequent questions and explanations. On this floor are also the museums, or repositories of models, instruments, machines, &c., needed for use in the amphitheaters, or elsewhere. The museum provided for the lecturer on Physics (or Natural Philosophy) appeared in particular to be well supplied.

The whole of the second floor is taken up with what are called the salles d’interrogation, a long series of small cabinets or studies, 71 plainly furnished with six or eight stools and a table, devoted to the interrogations particulières, which will presently be described.

The third floor contains the halls of study, salles d’étude, or studying rooms, in which the greater part of the student’s time during the day is passed—where he studies, draws, keeps his papers and instruments, writes his exercises, and prepares his lectures. These are small chambers, containing eight or, exceptionally, eleven occupants. A double desk runs down the middle from the window to the door, with a little shelf and drawers for each student. There is a blackboard for the common use, and various objects are furnished through the senior student, the sergeant, a selected pupil, more advanced than the rest, who is placed in charge of the room, and is responsible for whatever is handed in for the use of the students. He collects the exercises, and generally gives a great deal of assistance to the less proficient. “When I was sergeant,” said an old pupil, “I was always at the board.” The spirit of camaraderie, said to exist so strongly among the Polytechnic students, displays itself in this particular form very beneficially. Young men of all classes work heartily and zealously together in the salles d’étude, and no feeling of rivalry prevents them from assisting one another. The sergeant does not, however, appear to exercise any authority in the way of keeping discipline.

These chambers for study are arranged on each side of a long corridor which runs through the whole length of the building, those of the juniors being separated from those of the seniors by a central chamber or compartment, the cabinet de service, where the officers charged with the discipline are posted, and from hence pass up and down the corridor, looking in through the glass doors and seeing that no interruption to order takes place.

The fourth story is that of the dormitories, airy rooms, with twelve beds in each. These rooms are arranged as below, along the two sides of a corridor, and divided in the same manner into the senior and junior side. A non-commissioned officer is lodged at each end of the corridor to see that order is kept.

Such is the building into which at the beginning of November the successful candidates from the Lycées and the Ecoles préparatoires are introduced, in age resembling the pupils whom the highest classes of English public schools send annually to the universities, and in number equal perhaps to the new under-graduates at one of the largest colleges at Cambridge. There is not, however, in other points much that is common, least of all in the methods 72 and habits of study we are about to describe. This will be best understood by a summary of a day’s work.

The students are summoned to rise at half-past five, have to answer the roll-call at six, from six to eight are to occupy themselves in study, and at eight they go to breakfast. On any morning except Wednesday, at half-past eight, we should find the whole of the new admission assembled in an amphitheater, permanent seats in which are assigned to them by lot, and thus placed they receive a lecture from a professor, rough notes of which they are expected to take while it goes on. The first half hour of the hour and a half assigned to each lecture is occupied with questions put by the professor relating to the previous lecture. A name is drawn by lot, the student on whom the lot falls is called up to the blackboard at which the professor stands, and is required to work a problem and answer questions. The lecture concluded, the pupils are conducted to the salles d’étude, which have just been described, where they are to study. Here for one hour they devote themselves to completing and writing out in full the notes of the lecture they have just heard. The professor and his assistants, the répétiteurs, are expected to follow and make a circuit through the corridors, to give an opportunity to ask for information on any difficult points in the lecture. A lithographed summary of the substance of the lecture, extending perhaps to two octavo pages, is also furnished to each studying room for the use of its pupils.

The lecture, as we have said, commences at half-past eight o’clock; it lasts an hour and a half; the hour of writing up the notes brings us to eleven. The young men are now relieved by a change of occupation, and employ themselves (still in their places in the rooms of study) at drawing. A certain number, detached from the rest, are sent to the physical and chemical laboratories. The rotation is such as to admit each student once a month to two or three hours’ work at a furnace for chemistry, and once in two months to make experiments in electricity, or other similar subjects. In this way, either at their drawing or in the laboratories, they spend three hours, and at two o’clock go to their dinner in the refectories below, and after dinner are free to amuse themselves in the court-yard, the library, the fencing and the billiard rooms, till five. At five they return to the studying rooms, and for two hours, on Mondays and Fridays, they may employ themselves on any work they please (étude libre;) on Tuesday there is a lecture in French literature, and on Thursday in German; at seven o’clock they commence a lesson, which lasts till nine, in landscape and figure drawing, or they 73 do exercises in French writing or in German; at nine they go down to supper; at half-past nine they have to answer to a roll-call in their bedrooms, and at ten all the lights are put out.

Wednesday is a half-holiday, and the pupils are allowed to leave the school after two o’clock, and be absent till ten at night. The morning is occupied either in study, at the pleasure of the students, or in set exercises till eleven, when there is a lecture of one hour and a half, followed, as usual, by an hour of special study on the subject of the lecture. On Sunday they are allowed to be absent almost the whole day till ten P.M. There is no chapel, and apparently no common religious observance of any kind in the school.

Such is a general sketch of the ordinary employment of the day; a couple of hours of preparatory study before breakfast, a lecture on the differential calculus, on descriptive geometry, on chemistry, or natural philosophy, followed by an hour’s work at notes; scientific drawing till dinner; recreation; and general study, or some lighter lecture in the evening. Were we merely to count the hours, we should find a result of eleven or eleven and a half hours of work for every day but Wednesday, and of seven and a half hours for that day. It is to be presumed, however, that though absolute idleness, sleeping, or reading any book not authorized for purposes of study, is strictly prohibited, and when detected, punished, nevertheless the strain on the attention during the hours of drawing and the lectures of the evening is by no means extreme. Landscape and figure drawing, the lecture in French literature, and probably that in German, may fairly be regarded as something like recreation. Such, at least, was the account given us of the lectures on literary subjects, and it agrees with the indifference to literature which marks the school. Of wholesome out-of-door recreation, there certainly seems to be a considerable want. There is nothing either of the English love of games, or of the skillful athletic gymnastics of the German schools.

The method of teaching is peculiar. The plan by which a vast number of students are collected as auditors of professorial lectures is one pursued in many academical institutions, at the Scotch universities, and in Germany. Large classes attend the lectures in Greek, in Latin, and in mathematics at Glasgow; they listen to the professor’s explanations, take notes, are occasionally questioned, and do all the harder work in their private lodgings. Such a system of course deserves in the fullest sense the epithet of voluntary; a diligent student may make much of it; but there is nothing to compel an idle one to give any attention.

74

It seems to have been one especial object pursued in the Polytechnic to give to this plan of instruction, so lax in itself, the utmost possible stringency, and to accumulate upon it every attainable subsidiary appliance, every available safeguard against idleness. Questions are expressly put vivâ voce by the professor before his lecture; there is a subsequent hour of study devoted to the subject; there is the opportunity for explanation to individual students; the exaction of notes written out in full form; the professor also gives exercises to the students to write during their hours of general study, which he examines, and marks; general vivâ voce examinations (interrogations générales,) conducted by the professors and répétiteurs, follow the termination of each course of lectures; and lastly, one of the most important and peculiar parts of the method, we have what are called the interrogations particulières. After every five or six lectures in each subject, each student is called up for special questioning by one of the répétiteurs. The rooms in which these continual examinations are held have been described. They occupy one entire story of the building; each holds about six or eight pupils, with the répétiteurs. Every evening, except Wednesday, they are filled with these little classes, and busy with these close and personal questionings. A brief notice, at the utmost of twenty-four hours, is served upon the students who are thus to be called up. Generally, after they have had a certain number of lectures, they may expect that their time is at hand, but the precise hour of the summons can not be counted upon. The scheme is continually varied, and it defies, we are told, the efforts of the ablest young analysts to detect the law which it follows.

It will be seen at once that such a system, where, though nominally professorial, so little is left to the student’s own voluntary action, where the ordinary study and reading, as it is called in our English universities (here such an expression is unknown) is subjected to such unceasing superintendence and surveillance, and to so much careful assistance, requires an immense staff of teachers. At the Polytechnic, for a maximum of 350 pupils, a body of fifteen professors and twenty-four répétiteurs, are employed, all solely in actual instruction, and in no way burdened with any part of the charge of the discipline or the finance, or even with the great yearly examinations for the passage from the first to the second division, and for the entrance to the public services.

With a provision of one instructor to every eight students, it is probable that in England we should avoid any system of large classes, from the fear of the inferior pupils being unable to keep 75 pace with the more advanced. We should have numerous small classes, and should endeavor, above all things, to obtain the advantage of equality of attainment in the pupils composing them.

The French, on the other hand, make it their first object to secure one able principal teacher in each subject, a professor whom they burden with very few lectures. And to meet the educational difficulty thus created, to keep the whole large class of listeners up to the prescribed point, they call in this numerous and busily employed corps of assistants to repeat, to go over the professor’s work afresh, to whip in, as it were, the stragglers and hurry up the loiterers. Certainly, one would think, a difficult task with a class of 170 freshmen in such work as the integral and differential calculus. It is one, however, in which they are aided by a stimulus which evidently acts most powerfully on the students of the Polytechnic School. During the two years of their stay, the prospect of their final admission to the public services can rarely be absent from the thoughts even of the least energetic and forethinking of the young men. Upon their place in the last class list will depend their fortune for life. A high position will secure them not only reputation, but the certainty of lucrative employment; will put it in their power to select which service they please, and in whichever they choose will secure them favorable notice. Let it be remembered that fifty-three of these one hundred and seventy are free scholars, born of parents too poor to pay 40l. a year for their instruction; to whom industry must be at all times a necessity, and industry during their two years at the Polytechnic the best conceivable expenditure, the most certainly remunerative investment of their pains and labor. The place on the final class list is obviously the prize for which this race of two years’ length has to be run. What is it determines that place? Not by any means a final struggle before the winning-post, but steady effort and diligence from first to last throughout the course. For the order of the class list is not solely determined by success in the examination after which it is drawn up, but by the result of previous trials and previous work during the whole stay at the school.

For, during the whole time, every written exercise set by the professor, every drawing, the result of every interrogation particulière by the répétiteurs, and of each general interrogation by the professors and répétiteurs, is carefully marked, and a credit placed according to the name of the student and reserved for his benefit, in the last general account. The marks obtained in the examination which closes the first year of study form a large element 76 in this last calculation. It had been found that the work of the first year was often neglected: the evil was quickly remedied by this expedient. The student, it would seem, must feel that he is gaining or losing in his banking account, so to call it, by every day’s work; every portion of his studies will tell directly for or against him in the final competition, upon which so much depends.

Such is the powerful mechanism by which the French nation forces out of the mass of boys attending their ordinary schools the talent and the science which they need for their civil and military services. The efforts made for admission to this great scientific school of the public services, the struggle for the first places at the exit from it, must be more than enough, it is thought, to establish the habits of hard work, to accumulate the information and attainment, and almost to create the ability which the nation requires for the general good.

We may now follow the student through his course of two years’ study. The first year’s work may be mainly divided into three portions of unequal length; two of them of about four months each (with an additional fortnight of private study and examination,) are mainly given to hard lecturing, whilst the third portion of two months is devoted to private study and to the examinations.

In accordance with this arrangement of the year, the four hardest subjects are thus distributed. Analysis and descriptive geometry, the staple work of the school—its Latin, as M. de Barante called it—come in the first four months; there is then a pause for private study and a general examination in these two subjects (interrogations générales as distinct from the interrogations particulières of the répétiteurs.) This brings us to the middle of March. Analysis and geometry are then laid aside for the rest of the year, and for the next portion of four months the pupils work at mechanics and geodesy, private study and a general examination completing this course also. Important lectures on physics and chemistry run on during both these periods, and are similarly closed by private study and a general examination. The less telling evening classes of French literature and German end at the beginning of June, and landscape and figure drawing only last half the year. It may be observed also, that, as a general rule, there is on each day one, and only one, really difficult lecture. This is immediately preceded and followed by private study, but then comes something lighter, as a relief, such as drawing or work in the laboratories.

The chief feature in the third portion of the year is the complete break in the lectures for general private study (étude libre,) a month 77 or six weeks before the closing examination at the end of the year. The immediate prospect of this prevents any undue relaxing of the work; and it is curious to observe here how private efforts and enforced system are combined together, for even the private efforts are thus systematized and directed. The closing examination of the first year begins on the 1st and ends on the 25th of September.

The total number of lectures in each branch of study, with the dates when they respectively commence and finish, and the period when the general examinations (interrogations générales) take place, are exhibited in the following tables, and we should add that the interval between the close of each course and the commencement of the chief yearly examination is devoted to free study.

TABLE FOR THE SECOND OR LOWER DIVISION, FOLLOWING THE FIRST YEAR’S COURSE OF STUDY.

NL No. of Lectures

E Annual Examination

Subject of Study. NL Course of Lectures General Examinations
Interrogations Générales.
E
Commenced. Finished. Commenced. Finished.
Analysis 48 3rd Nov. 25 Feb. 13th March 18th March *
Mechanics & Machines 40 21st March 29th June 24th July 2nd August  
Descriptive Geometry 38 3rd Nov. 3rd March 13th March 18th March  
Physics 34 2nd   “ 28th June 10th July 19th July  
Chemistry 38 5th   “ 17th   “ 10th   “ 19th   “  
Geodesy 35 20th March 30th   “ 24th   “ 2nd August  
French Literature 30 8th Nov. 6th   “      
German 30 2nd   “ 15th   “      
Figure and Landscape Drawing 50 4th   “ 28th April    
Total 343          

* Begins on the 1st Sept., and ends on the 25th Sept.

The work of the second year is almost identical in its general plan with that of the first. A continuation of analysis with mechanics in place of descriptive geometry is the work of the first four months, then comes the private study and the interrogations générales, and then again, from the middle of March to the middle of July, work of a more professional character, stereotomy, the art of war and topography, forms the natural completion of the pupil’s studies. Chemistry and physics follow the same course as during the first year, and terminate with the private study and the general examination at the beginning of August. The evening lectures in French literature and German end about the middle of June, and those in figure and landscape drawing at the beginning of May. The last portion is again given to private study and the great Final Examination.

78

TABLE FOR THE FIRST OR UPPER DIVISION, FOLLOWING THE SECOND YEAR’S COURSE OF STUDY.

NL No. of Lectures

E Annual Examination

Subject of Study. NL Course of Lectures General Examinations
Interrogations Générales.
E
Commenced. Finished. Commenced. Finished.
Analysis 32 11th Nov. 3rd March 13th March 18th March *
Mechanics and Machines 42 10th   “ 2nd   “ 13th   “ 18th   “  
Stereotomy 32 20th Mar. 26th June 10th July. 19th July.  
Physics 36 12 Nov. 29th   “ 24th   “ 2nd Aug.  
Chemistry 38 14th   “ 28th   “ 24th   “ 2nd   “  
Architecture and Construction 40 10th   “ 8th   “      
Military Art and Fortification 20 21st Mar. 21st   “ 10th   “ 19th July.  
Topography 10 3rd Jan. 21st   “      
French literature 30 11th Nov. 9th   “      
German 30 14th   “ 19th   “      
Figure and Landscape Drawing 48 12th   “ 2nd May.      
Total 358          

* Begins on the 10th Sept. and ends on the 10th Oct.

V. THE EXAMINATIONS, PARTICULARLY THAT OF THE FIRST YEAR AND THE FINAL ONE.

We have now brought the pupil nearly to the end of his career, but must previously say a few words about his examinations, the chief epochs which mark his progress, and the last of which fixes his position almost for life. For this purpose it is necessary to recapitulate briefly what has been said in different places of the whole examinatorial system of the Polytechnic School.

1. All the professors require the students in their studying rooms, to answer questions in writing on the courses as they go through them: a different question is given to each student, and every third question is of such a nature as to involve a numerical example in the reply.

These questions are given in the proportion of one to about every four lectures, and the replies after being examined by the professor or répétiteur, are indorsed with a credit, varying from 0 to 20, and the paper is then given back to the student, to be produced at the close of the year.

2. Credits are assigned to the students for their ordinary manipulations in chemistry and physics, during the first year; and at the close of each year, for their manipulations, in chemistry alone, before the examiners.

3. The répétiteurs examine, (in the interrogations particulières,) every ten or fourteen days, from six to eight students during a sitting of two hours, on the subject of study lectured on since the previous examination of the same kind. All these students must continue present, and at the close the répétiteur assigns to each a 79 previous examination of the same kind. All these students must continue present, and at the close the répétiteur assigns to each a credit entirely dependent on the manner in which each has replied. The professors and captains inspectors are occasionally present at these examinations, which are discontinued at certain periods according to the instructions of the director of studies.

4. At different intervals of time, from a fortnight to a month, as may happen, after the close of the course in each branch of study, general examinations (interrogations générales) are made by the professors and répétiteurs. From four to six students are examined together for at least two hours, and at the conclusion the professor makes known to the director of studies the credit he has granted to each student for the manner in which he has passed his examination.

Such may be called the minor or ordinary examinations. But there is an annual closing examination at the end of each year, which we will now describe. The first year’s annual examination commences on the 1st and ends on the 25th September. It is carried on by special examiners, (a different set from those who conduct the entrance examinations,) and not by the professors. These give to every student a credit between 0 and 20 in each branch of study, according to the manner in which he replies.

The following table shows the co-efficients of influence allowed to the different studies of the first year, subdivided also among the particular classes of examination to which the student has been subjected. The component parts of the co-efficients as well as the co-efficients themselves, slightly vary from year to year, dependent on the number of examinations:—

TABLE I.—FIRST YEAR’S COURSE OF STUDIES: SECOND DIVISION.

TC Total Co-efficients. (repeated)

WA Written Answers to Professors’ Questions.

ER Examinations by Répétiteurs. (Int. Part.)

GE General Examinations. (Int. Gen.)

Man. Manipulations.

O Ordinary.

Ex At Examination.

SN Sheets of notes on descriptive Geometry.

GD Graphical Representations and Drawing.

1st First Annual Examination.

Nature of Study. TC Co-efficient of Influence awarded to TC
WA ER GE Man. SN GD 1st
O Ex
Analysis, 56 9 10 9 . . . . . . . . 28 56
Mechanics, 60 7 9 8 . . . . . . 14 22 60
Descriptive Geometry, 48 . . 7 7 . . . . 4 12 18 48
Geodesy, 39 6 5 7 . . . . . . 3 18 39
Physics, 45 6 9 7 2 . . . . . . 21 45
Chemistry, 45 5 9 7 4 2 . . . . 18 45
French Literature, 12 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
German Language, 10 2 3 . . . . . . . . . . 5 10
Drawing, 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . 10
Shading & Tinting Plans, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

At the conclusion of this examination the director of studies prepares 80 a statement for each student, exhibiting the credits he has obtained at each of the preceding examinations in each subject, multiplied by the co-efficient of influence, and the sum of the products represents the numerical account of the student’s credit in each branch of study.

As the process is somewhat intricate, we append the following example, to show the nature of the calculation performed, in order to ascertain the amount of credits due to each student:—

REPORT OF THE CREDITS GAINED IN THE FIRST YEAR’S COURSE OF STUDY BY M. N., STUDENT AT THE POLYTECHNIC SCHOOL.

CI Co-efficient of Influence (twice)

Cr Credit obtained by the Student.

SP Sum of Products.

MC Mean Credit in each Subject of the Course.

Subject of Examination CI Nature of Examination or Proof. Cr CI Product SP MC
Analysis, 56 Written answers to Professors’ questions 17.16 9 154.44    
Examinations by répétiteurs (interrogations particulières) 15.47 10 154.70 845.81 15.00
General Examination (interrogations générales) 13.71 9 123.39
Annual Examination 14.75 28 413.28    
Mechanics 60 Written answers to Professors’ questions 13.45 7 94.15    
Examinations by répétiteurs 12.72 9 114.48 664.13 11.07
General Examination 11.37 8 90.96
Graphical representations and drawing 5.61 14 78.54
Annual Examination 13.00 22 286.00    
Descriptive Geometry 48 Examinations by répétiteurs 17.15 7 120.05    
General Examination 11.72 7 82.04 633.15 13.19
Sheets of notes 12.45 4 49.80
Graphical representation and drawing 11.88 12 142.76
Annual Examination 13.25 18 238.50    
Geodesy 39 Written answers to Professors’ questions 9.16 6 54.96    
Examinations by répétiteurs 7.85 5 39.25 229.01 5.87
General Examination 5.74 7 40.18
Graphical representation and drawing 4.36 3 13.08
Annual Examination 4.53 1 81.54    
Physics 45 Written answers to Professors’ questions 2.76 6 13.56    
Examinations by répétiteurs 3.54 9 31.86 112.21 2.49
General Examination 5.74 7 40.18
Ordinary manipulation 1.55 2 3.10
Annual Examination 1.84 21 38.84    
Chemistry 45 Written answers to Professors’ questions 2.46 5 12.30    
Examinations by répétiteurs 3.25 9 29.95 131.16 2.91
General Examination 2.47 7 17.29
Ordinary manipulation 2.26 4 9.04
Manipulation at Exam 1.58 2 3.16
Annual Examination 3.34 18 60.12    
French Literature 12 Written answers to Professors’ questions 5.46 12 67.68 67.68 5.64
German Language 10 Written answers to Professors’ questions 6.57 2 13.14    
Examinations by répétiteurs 4.86 3 14.58 55.92 5.59
Annual Examination 5.64 5 28.20    
Drawing 10 Graphical representation and drawing 4.36 10 43.60 43.60 4.36
Shading and Tinting Plans 3 Graphical representation and drawing 3.86 3 11.58 11.58 3.86
Sum 10)70.07
General Mean Credit, = (7.00)
81

It is important to remark that any student whose mean credit, given in the eighth column of the preceding table, in any branch of study does not exceed three, or whose general mean credit for the whole of the studies being the arithmetical mean of all the values recorded in the eighth column, and given at the bottom in the example, does not exceed six, is considered to possess an insufficient amount of instruction to warrant his being permitted to pass into the first division for the second year’s course. He is accordingly excluded from the school, unless he has been prevented from pursuing his studies by illness, in which case, when the facts are thoroughly established, he will be allowed a second year’s study in the second division, comprising the first year’s course of study.

We now pass to the second annual or great final examination for admission to the public services, remarking only that in the interrogations générales of the second year the principal subjects of both years are included.

The final examinations for admission into the public service commence about the 10th September, and last about one month. They are conducted by the same examiners who examined at the close of the first year. These are five in number, and appointed by the minister of war. One of these takes analysis; a second, mechanics; a third, descriptive geometry and geodesy; the fourth, physics; and the fifth, chemistry.

The examination in military art and topography is conducted by a captain of engineers specially appointed for the purpose; and in the same manner the examination in German is carried on by a professor, usually a civilian, specially but not permanently appointed.

The questions are oral, and extend over the whole course of study pursued during the two years. Each student is taken separately for one hour and a quarter on different days by each of the five examiners; each examiner examines about eight students daily.

A table, very similar to that already given, is prepared under the superintendence of the Director of studies for every student, to ascertain the numerical amount of his credits in each branch of study, the co-efficients of influences for the particular subject of study and nature of examination being extracted from a table similar to that in page 80, and when these tables have all been completed, a general list of all the students is made out, arranged in the order of their merits.

Formerly, conduct was permitted to exercise some slight influence on their position, but that is no longer the case.

The same regulations exist, as regards the minimum amount of 82 credit that will entitle the students to enter into the public service, as have already been stated above in reference to the passage from the first to the second year’s course of study.

TABLE II. SECOND YEAR’S COURSE OF STUDY: FIRST DIVISION.

RP Result of previous Year’s Examination.

WA Written Answers to Professors’ Questions.

ER Examinations by Répétiteurs. (Int. Part.)

GE General Examinations. (Int. Gen.)

Man. Manipulations.

O Ordinary.

Ex At Examination.

SN Sketches and Notes in Architecture

GD Graphical Representations and Drawing

EA Examination in Architecture

2d 2d Annual or Final Examination.

TC Total Co-Efficients.

  TC Co-efficient of Influence awarded to TC
RP WA ER GE Man. SN GD 2d
O Ex
Analysis, 28 8 10 9 . . . . . . . . . . 26 81
Mechanics, 25 8 12 9 . . . . . . 10 . . 28 92
Descriptive Geometry, 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Geodesy, . . 6 5 7 . . . . . . 1 . . 18 37
Physics, 23 5 10 8 . . . . . . . . . . 22 68
Chemistry, 20 5 10 8 4 2 . . . . . . 19 68
Architecture, . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 14 10 . . 36
Military Art and Tophography, . . . . 3 5 . . . . . . 9 . . 8 25
French Literature, 6 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
German, 5 2 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Drawing, 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . 15
Shading and Tinting, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . 5

From the preceding tables and explanations, it will be apparent that, as the whole of the students for each year are compelled to follow precisely the same course of study, the system of professorial instruction, combined with the constant tutelage and supervision exercised by the répétiteurs, and the examinations (interrogations particulières) of the répétiteurs, at short intervals of time, have for their principal object the keeping alive in the minds of the students the information which has been communicated to them. As a stimulus to continuous and unceasing exertion, it will be seen by an inspection of the tables of the co-efficients of influence, that the manner in which the students acquit themselves from day to day, and from week to week, is made an element, and a very important one, in determining their final position in the list arranged according to merit, exceeding as it does in most instances the influence exerted on their classification by their final examination at the close of each year. This principle thus recognizes not only their knowledge at the end of each year, but also the manner in which they have proved it to the professors and répétiteurs in the course of the year; and with reference to the second year’s study, the final result of the first year’s classification exercises an influence amounting to 83 about one-third of the whole, in the final classification at the end of the second year.

It follows also, that as the examinations at the end of each year are made by examiners, otherwise unconnected with the school, and not by the professors belonging to it, the positions of the students in the classified list is partly dependent on the judgment of the professors with whom they are constantly in communication, and partly on the public examiners, whom they meet only in the examination rooms.10

The examiners of the students are not frequently changed, and practically the same may be said of the examiners for admission.

PR By Professors and Répétiteurs.

Ex By Examiners.

Y1 By the results of the first Year’s Examination.

CL In the Classified List at the end of 2nd year.

Subjects of Study. Per-centage of influence exercised on the position of the Students.
During the
1st Year.
During the
2nd Year.
CL
PR Ex Y1 PR Ex PR Ex
Analysis, 50.0 50.0 34.5 32.5 33.0 49.75 50.25
Mechanics, 63.2 36.7 27.2 42.4 30.4 59.6  40.40
Descriptive Geometry, 62.5 37.5 100.0 0.0 0.0 62.5  37.5 
Geodesy, 53.8 46.2 0.0 51.4 48.6 * 51.4  48.6 
Physics, 53.3 46.7 33.8 33.8 32.4 51.8  48.2 
Chemistry, 60.0 40.0 29.4 43.2 27.4 60.8  39.2 
Architecture, . . . . 0.0 100.0 0.0 100.0  100.0 
Military Art and Topography, . . . . 0.0 68.0 32.0 68.0  32.0 
French Literature, 100.0 0.0 33.3 66.7 0.0 100.0  0.0 
German Language, 100.0 0.0 33.3 33.3 33.4 66.7  33.3 
Drawing 100.0 0.0 33.3 66.7 0.0 100.0  0.0 
Shading and Tinting Plans, 100.0 0.0 40.0 60.0 0.0 100.0  0.0 
          *    

* When taught in the 2nd year

The students at the head of the list have generally since the wars of the first Empire entered into the civil rather than into the military services, the former being much better remunerated.

The services are usually selected by preference, nearly in the following order:—

The Roads and Bridges (Ponts et chaussées)
and Mines (Mines,)

very nearly on an equality.
Powder and Saltpetre (Poudres et Salpêtres.)
Naval Architects (Génie maritime.)
Engineers (Génie militaire.)

The Artillery (Artillerie de terre.)
and the Staff Corps (Etat Major,)

very nearly on an equality.
The Hydographical Corps (Ingénieurs Hydrographes.)
84Tobacco Department (Administration des Tabacs.)
Telegraph Department (Lignes Télégraphiques.)
Navy (Marine.)
Marine Artillery (Artillerie de mer.)

Such, at least, is the result of a comparison of the selections made by the students during eight different years.

This preference of the civil to the military services has been the subject of frequent complaints on the part of the military authorities to the minister of war.

No steps have, however, been taken by the French government to prevent the free choice of a profession being granted to the most successful students.

We have now followed the student at the Polytechnic to the end of his school career. He is then to pass to his particular School of Application, in which (as the name implies) he is taught to apply his science to practice. It is difficult to state precisely the amount of such science which the highest pupils may be thought to possess on leaving; the best idea of it will be gained by reference to the programmes of the most important of the lectures. It is also needless to dwell again on the main features of the school—the emulation called forth, the minute method, the great prizes offered for sustained labor. We must, however, make some remarks on these points before concluding our account, so far as they bear on the subject of military education.

VI. GENERAL REMARKS.

1. Keeping out of sight for the moment some defects both in the principles and details of the education of this school, the method of teaching adopted seems to us excellent, and worthy of careful study. In this remark we allude principally to the skillful combination of two methods which have been generally thought incompatible; for it unites the well-prepared lecture of a German professor, with the close personal questioning of a first-rate English school or college lecture. But besides this, its whole system is admirably adapted for the class of pupils it educates.

These pupils are generally not of the wealthy classes; they are able, and struggling for a position in life. On all these grounds their own assistance in the work may be calculated upon. Yet they are not left to themselves to make the most of their professors’ lectures. The aid of répétiteurs, even more valuable in its constant “prudent interrogations,” than in the explanations afforded, is joined to the stimulus given by marking every step of proficiency, and by making all tell on the last general account. But though the routine and method of the school are so elaborate, play is given to the individual freedom of the pupils in their private work, and this is managed so skillfully that the private work is made immediately to precede the final examination, on which mainly depends the pupil’s place for life. Thus from first to last they are carried on by their system without being cramped by it; every circumstance favorable to study is made the most of; rigorous habit, mental readiness, 85 the power of working with others, and the power of working for themselves, the ambition for immediate and permanent success, all the objects and all the methods which students ever have in view, support and stimulate those of the Polytechnic in their two years’ career.

2. The mainspring, however, of the school’s energy is the competition amongst the pupils themselves, and this could hardly exist without the great prizes offered to the successful. This advantage, added to the general impulse of the early days of the Empire, has no doubt powerfully contributed to the great position of the school. It has made it a kind of university of the élite mathematicians, and as in England young men look to the prizes of the universities, and the professions to which they lead, as their best opening in life, so in France, ever since the first revolution, the corresponding class has inclined to the active and chiefly military career which is offered by the great competitive school of the country.

3. A preparatory school of this remarkable character can not but exercise a very powerful influence over those three-fourths of its pupils who leave it to enter the army. The obvious question is whether the attempt is not made to teach more than is either necessary or desirable for military purposes, and to this suspicion may be added the fact that the civil prizes being more in request than the military, many of those who enter the army do so in the first instance reluctantly, and that the pupils at the bottom of the list appear to be often such marked failures as to imply either great superficiality or premature exhaustion.

4. In studying the Polytechnic School we have had these points constantly brought before us, and feeling the difficulty of discussing them fully, we beg to invite attention to the evidence sent us in reply to some questions which we addressed on the subject to some distinguished scientific officers and civilians connected with the school. We will give briefly the result of our own inquiries.

5. The complaint of General Paixhans has been quoted. He urges that a considerable proportion of the army pupils are mere queues de promotion, and quite insufficient to form le corps et surtout la tête of troops d’élite.

Other not inconsistent complaints we heard ourselves, of the mental exhaustion and the excessively abstract tendencies of many of the military pupils of the school.

6. Such are the complaints. There is certainly reason to think that, with regard to the twenty or thirty lowest pupils on the list, those of General Paixhans are well founded. These are the breaks down, and we are at first surprised that, entering as they must do,11 with high attainments, 86 they should fall so low as the marks in the tables (with which we are most liberally supplied) prove to be the case.

At the same time, we believe that no teaching ever has provided or will provide against many failures out of one hundred and seventy pupils, even among those who promised well at first: and if the standard of the majority of pupils is high at the Polytechnique, and the point reached by the first few very high, it is no reproach that the descent amongst the last few should be very rapid.

With regard to the assertion, that the teaching is excessive and leads too much to abstract pursuits for soldiers, it may be partially true. Perhaps the general passion for science has led to an overstrained teaching for the army, even for its scientific corps; and yet would it be allowed by officers of the highest scientific ability, either in the French or the English army, that less science is required for the greatest emergencies of military than for those of civil engineering, or for the theory of projectiles than for working the department of saltpetre?

It may, however, be true that an attempt is made at the Polytechnic to exact from all attainments which can only be reached by a few.

7. With this deduction, we must express our opinion strongly in favor of the influence of the Polytechnic on the French army. We admit that in some instances pupils who have failed in their attempt at civil prizes enter the army unwillingly, but they are generally soon penetrated with its esprit de corps, and they carry into it talent which it would not otherwise have obtained. Cases of overwork no doubt occur, as in the early training for every profession, but (following the evidence we have received) we have no reason to think them so numerous as to balance the advantage of vigorous, thoughtful study directed early towards a profession which, however practical, is eminently benefited by it. “It can not be said,” was the verdict of one well fitted to express an opinion, “that there is too much science in the French army.”

8. Assuming, however, the value of the scientific results produced in the French army by the Polytechnic, it by no means follows that a similar institution would be desirable in another country. Without much discussion it may be safely said that the whole history and nature of the institution—the offspring of a national passion for system and of revolutionary excitement—make it thoroughly peculiar to France.

9. Some obvious defects must be noticed. The curious rule of forbidding the use of all books whatever is a very exaggerated attempt to make the pupil to rely entirely on the professors and répétiteurs. The exclusive practice of oral examination also seems to us a defect. Certainly every examination should give a pupil an opportunity of showing such 87 valuable qualities as readiness and power of expression; but an examination solely oral appears to us an uncertain test of depth or accuracy of knowledge; and however impartial or practiced an examiner may be, it is impossible that questions put orally can present exactly the same amount of difficulty, and so be equally fair, to the several competitors.

At the same time, although in all great competing examinations the chief part of the work (in our opinion) should be written, the constant oral cross-questioning of the minor examinations at the Polytechnic, appeared to be one of the most stimulating and effective parts of their system,

10. A more serious objection than any we have named lies against the exclusive use of mathematical and scientific training, to the neglect of all other, as almost the only instrument of education. The spirit of the school, as shown especially by its entrance examinations, is opposed to any literary study. This is a peculiar evil in forming characters for a liberal profession like the army. Such a plan may indeed produce striking results, if the sole object is to create distinguished mathematicians, though even then the acuteness in one direction is often accompanied by an unbalanced and extravagant judgment in another. But a great school should form the whole and not merely a part of the man; and as doing this, as strengthening the whole mind, instead of forcing on one or two of its faculties—as giving, in a word, what is justly called a liberal education—we are persuaded that the system of cultivating the taste for historical and other similar studies, as well as for mere science, is based on a sounder principle than that which has produced the brilliant results of the Polytechnic.

11. It may be added, in connection with the above remark, that as the entrance examination at the Polytechnic influences extensively the teaching of the great French schools, and is itself almost solely mathematical, it tends to diffuse a narrow and exclusive pursuit of science, which is very alien from the spirit of English teaching.

12. We may sum up our remarks on the Polytechnic School thus:—

Regarded simply as a great Mathematical and Scientific School, its results in producing eminent men of science have been extraordinary. It has been the great (and a truly great) Mathematical University of France.

Regarded again as a Preparatory School for the public works, it has given a very high scientific education to civil engineers, whose scientific education in other countries (and amongst ourselves) is believed to be much slighter and more accidental.

Regarded as a school for the scientific corps of the army, its peculiar mode of uniting in one course of competition candidates for civil and military services, has probably raised scientific thought to a higher point in the French than in any other army.

Regarded as a system of teaching, the method it pursues in developing the talents of its pupils appears to us the best we have ever studied.

It is in its studies and some of its main principles that the example of the Polytechnic School may be of most value. In forming or improving any military school, we can not shut our eyes to the successful working at the Polytechnic of the principle, which it was the first of all schools to initiate, the making great public prizes the reward and stimulus of the pupil’s exertions. We may observe how the state has here encouraged talent by bestowing so largely assistance upon all successful, but poor pupils, during their school career. We may derive some lessons from its method of teaching, though the attempt to imitate it might be unwise. Meanwhile, without emulating the long established scientific prestige of the Polytechnic, we have probably amongst ourselves abundant materials for a military scientific education, at least as sound as that given at this great School.

88
NOTE.

In addition to the Schools of Application for Artillery and Engineers at Metz, and of Infantry and Cavalry at St. Cyr, of which a pretty full account will be given, the following Public Services are supplied by the Polytechnic School.

Gunpowder and Saltpetre.—(Poudres et Salpêtres.)

In France the manufacture of gunpowder is solely in the hands of the Government. The pupils of the Polytechnic who enter the gunpowder and saltpetre service, are sent in succession to different powder-mills and saltpetre refineries, so as to gain a thorough acquaintance with all the details of the manufacture.

On first entering the service they are named élèves des poudres. They afterwards rise successively to the rank of assistant-commissary, commissary of the third, of the second, and of the first class.

Navy.—(Marine.)

A small number of the pupils of the Polytechnic enter the Navy. They receive the rank of élève de première classe, from the date of their admission.

They are sent to the ports to serve afloat. After two years’ service they may be promoted to the rank of enseigne de vaisseau, on passing the necessary examinations, on the same terms precisely as the élèves de premiere classe of the Naval School.

Marine Artillery.—(Artillerie de la Marine.)

The French marine artillery differs from the English corps of the same name, in not serving afloat. Its duties are confined to the ports and to the colonies. It is governed by the same rules and ordinances as the artillery of the army.

The foundries of La Villeneuve, Rochefort, Ruelle, Névers, and Saint Gervais are under its direction.

The officers of the marine artillery are liable to be sent on board ship to study naval gunnery, so as to be in a position to report upon alterations or improvements in this science.

Naval Architects.—(Génie Maritime.)

The naval architects are charged with the construction and repair of vessels of war, and with the manufacture of all the machinery required in the ports and dockyards. The factories of Indret and La Chaussade are under their direction.

The pupils of the Polytechnic enter the corps of naval architects with the rank of élève du Génie Maritime. They are sent to the School of Application of Naval Architects at L’Orient. After two years’ instruction they undergo an examination, and, if successful, they are promoted to the rank of sub-architect of the third class, so far as vacancies admit. They may be advanced to the second class after a service of two years.

Hydrographers.—(Ingénieurs Hydrographes.)

The hydrographers are stationed at Paris. They are sent to the coast to make surveys, and the time so spent reckons as a campaign in determining their pension. On their return to Paris they are employed in the construction of maps and charts.

The hydrographers have the same rank and advantage as the naval architects.

On leaving the Polytechnic, the pupils enter the corps of hydrographers with the rank of élève hydrographe. After two years’ service, and one season employed on the coast, they become sub-hydrographers without further examination.

89

Roads and Bridges.—Government Civil Engineers.—(Fonts et Chaussées.)

The Polytechnic furnishes exclusively the pupils for the Government Civil Engineer Corps. On leaving the Polytechnic, the pupils enter the School of Application in Paris. The course of instruction here extends over a period of three years. It commences each year on the first of November, and lasts till the 1st of April. After the final examination, the pupils are arranged according to the results of the examination and the amount of work performed.

The pupils enter the college with the rank of élève de troisième classe. They rise successively to the second and to the first class, on making the requisite progress in their studies.

From the 1st of May to the 1st of November the élèves of the second and the third class are sent on duty into the provinces. The élèves of the first class who have completed their three years’ course of instruction, are employed in the duties of ordinary engineers, or are detached on special missions. In about three years after quitting the college, they may be appointed ordinary engineers of the second class.

The engineers of the Ponts et Chaussées prepare the projects and plans, and direct the execution of the works for the construction, preservation, and repair of high roads, and of the bridges and other structures connected with these roads, with navigable rivers, canals, seaports, lighthouses, &c. They are charged with the superintendence of railways, of works for draining marshes, and operations affecting water-courses; they report upon applications to erect factories driven by water. Under certain circumstances, they share with the Mining Engineers the duty of inspecting steam-engines.

Permission is not unfrequently granted to the engineers of the Ponts et Chaussées to accept private employment. They receive leave of absence for a certain time, retaining their rank and place in their corps, but without pay.

Mining Engineers.—(Mines.)

The Mining School of Application is organized almost exactly on the same plan as that of the Ponts et Chaussées: like the latter, it is in Paris.

The course of instruction, which lasts three years, consists of lectures, drawing, chemical manipulation and analysis, visits to manufactories, geological excursions, and the preparation of projects for mines and machines. Journeys are made by the pupils, during the second half of the last two years of the course, into the mineral districts of France or foreign countries for the purpose of studying the practical details of mining. These journeys last one hundred days at least. The pupils are required to examine carefully the railroads and the geological features of the countries they pass through, and to keep a journal of facts and observations. In the final examination, marks are given for every part of their work.

The mining engineers, when stationed in the departments, are charged to see that the laws and ordinances relating to mines, quarries, and factories are properly observed, and to encourage, either directly or by their advice, the extension of all branches of industry connected with the extraction and treatment of minerals.

One of their principal duties is the superintendence of mines and quarries, in the three-fold regard of safety of the workmen, preservation of the soil, and economical extraction of the minerals.

They exercise a special control over all machines designed for the production of steam, and over railways, as far as regards the metal and fuel.

The instructors in the School of Application in Paris, and in the School of Mines at St. Etienne, are exclusively taken from the members of the corps.

Like the engineers of the Ponts et Chaussées, the mining engineers obtain permission to undertake private employment.

Tobacco Department.—(Administration des Tabacs.)

The pupils who enter the tobacco service, commence, on quitting the Polytechnic, with the rank of élève de 2e classe. They study, in the manufactory at 90 Paris, chemistry, physics, and mechanics, as applied to the preparation of tobacco. They make themselves acquainted at the same time with the details of the manufacture and with the accounts and correspondence.

They are generally promoted to the rank of élevè de 1re classe in two years. They rise afterwards successively to the rank of sub-inspector, inspector, and director.

After completing their instruction at the manufactory of Paris, the élevès are sent to tobacco manufactories in other parts of France.

Promotion in the tobacco service does not follow altogether by seniority. Knowledge of the manufacture and attention to their duties are much considered, as the interests of the treasury are involved in the good management of the service.

Telegraphs.—(Lignes Telégraphiques.)

On entering the telegraphic service the pupils of the Polytechnic receive the rank of élevè inspecteur.

They pass the first year at the central office. During the six winter months they study, under two professors, the composition of signals, and the regulations which insure their correctness and dispatch, the working of telegraphs and the manner of repairing them, the theory of the mode of tracing lines and of determining the height of the towers, electro-magnetism and its application to the electric telegraph. During the summer months they make tours of inspection. They assist in the execution of works, and practice leveling and the laying down of lines.

At the end of the year the élevès inspecteurs undergo an examination, and, if there are vacancies, are appointed provisional inspectors. After a year in this rank they may be appointed inspectors either in France or Algeria.

Each inspector has charge of a district containing from twelve to fifteen stations. He is obliged to make a tour of inspection once a month of at least ten days’ duration.

After a certain number of years’ service the inspector rises to the rank of director. Besides their other duties, the directors exercise a general superintendence over the inspectors.

91

PROGRAMMES OF THE PRINCIPAL COURSES OF INSTRUCTION
OF THE IMPERIAL POLYTECHNIC SCHOOL DURING THE TWO YEARS OF STUDY.

I. ANALYSIS.—FIRST YEAR.

DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS.

Lessons 1–9. Derivatives and Differentials of Functions of a Single Variable.

Indication of the original problems which led geometers to the discovery of the infinitesimal calculus.

Use of infinitesimals; condition, subject to which, two infinitely small quantities may be substituted for one another. Indication in simple cases of the advantage of such substitution.

On the different orders of infinitely small quantities. Infinitely small quantities of a certain order may be neglected in respect of those of an inferior order. The infinitely small increment of a function is in general of the same order as the corresponding increment of the variable, that is to say, their ratio has a finite limit.

Definitions of the derivative and differential of a function of a single variable. Tangents and normals to plane curves, whose equation in linear or polar coordinates is given.

A function is increasing or decreasing, according as its derivative is positive or negative. If the derivative is zero for all values of the variable, the function is constant. Concavity and convexity of curves; points of inflection.

Principle of function of functions. Differentiation of inverse functions.

Differentials of the sums, products, quotients, and powers of functions, whose differentials are known. General theorem for the differentiation of functions composed of several functions.

Differentials of exponential and logarithmic functions.

Differentials of direct and inverse circular functions.

Differentiation of implicit functions.

Tangents to curves of double curvature. Normal plane.

Differential of the area and arc of a plane curve, in terms of rectilinear and polar co-ordinates.

Differential of the arc of a curve of double curvature.

Applications to the cycloid, the spiral of Archimedes, the logarithmic spiral, the curve whose normal, sub-normal, or tangent, is constant; the curve whose normal passes through a fixed point; the curve whose arc is proportional to the angle which it subtends at a given point.

Derivatives and differentials of different orders of functions of one variable. Notation adopted.

Remarks upon the singular points of plane curves.

Lessons 10–13. Derivatives and Differentials of Functions of Several Variables.

Partial derivatives and differentials of functions of several variables. The order in which two or any number of differentiations is effected does not influence the result.

Total differentials. Symbolical formula for representing the total differential of the nth order of a function of several independent variables.

Total differentials of different orders of a function; several dependent variables. 92 Case where these variables are linear functions of the independent variables.

The infinitesimal increment of a function of several variables may in general be regarded as a linear function of the increments assigned to the variables. Exceptional cases.

Tangent and normal planes to curved surfaces.

Lessons 14–18. Analytical Applications of the Differential Calculus.

Development of F(x + h,) according to ascending powers of h. Limits within which the remainder is confined on stopping at any assigned power of h.

Development of F(x,) according to powers of x or x - a; a being a quantity arbitrarily assumed. Application to the functions sin(x,) cos x, ax, (1 + xm) and log.(1 + x.) Numerical applications. Representation of cos x and sin x by imaginary exponential quantities.

Developments of cosm x and sinm x in terms of sines and curves of multiples of x.

Development of F(x + h, y + k,) according to powers of h and k. Development of F(x, y) according to powers of x and y. Expression for the remainder. Theorem on homogeneous functions.

Maxima and minima of functions of a single variable; of functions of several variables, whether independent or connected by given equations. How to discriminate between maxima and minima values in the case of one and two independent variables.

True values of functions, which upon a particular supposition assume one or another of the forms

00, , ∞ + 0, 00, 4

Lessons 19–23. Geometrical Applications. Curvature of Plane Curves.

Definition of the curvature of a plane curve at any point. Circle of curvature. Center of curvature. This center is the point where two infinitely near normals meet.

Radius of curvature with rectilinear and polar co-ordinates. Change of the independent variable.

Contacts of different orders of plane curves. Osculating curves of a given kind. Osculating straight line. Osculating circle. It is identical with the circle of curvature.

Application of the method of infinitesimals to the determination of the radius of curvature of certain curves geometrically defined. Ellipse, cycloid, epicycloid, &c.

Evolutes of plane curves. Value of the arc of the evolute. Equation to the involute of a curve. Application to the circle. Evolutes considered as envelops. On envelops in general. Application to caustics.

Lessons 24–27. Geometrical Applications continued. Curvature of Lines of Double Curvature and of Surfaces.

Osculating plane of a curve of double curvature. It may be considered as passing through three points infinitely near to one another, or as drawn through a tangent parallel to the tangent infinitely near to the former. Center and radius of curvature of a curve of double curvature. Osculating circle. Application to the helix.

93

Radii of curvature of normal s of a surface. Maximum and minimum radii. Relations between these and that of any , normal or oblique.

Use of the indicatrix for the demonstration of the preceding results. Conjugate tangents. Definition of the lines of curvature. Lines of curvature of certain simple surfaces. Surface of revolution. Developable surfaces. Differential equation of lines of curvature in general.

Lesson 28. Cylindrical, Conical, Conoidal surfaces, and Surfaces of Revolution.

Equations of these surfaces in finite terms. Differential equations of the same deduced from their characteristic geometrical properties.

INTEGRAL CALCULUS.

Lessons 29–34. Integration of Functions of a Single Variable.

Object of the integral calculus. There always exists a function which has a given function for its derivative.

Indefinite integrals. Definite integrals. Notation. Integration by separation, by substitution, by parts.

Integration of rational differentials, integer or fractional, in the several cases which may present themselves. Integration of the algebraical differentials, which contain a radical of the second degree of the form √c+bx+ax2. Different transformations which render the differential rational. Reduction of the radical to one of the forms

x2+x2, √a2-x2, √x2-a2.

Integration of the algebraical differentials which contain two radicals of the form

a+x, √b+x,

or any number of monomials affected with fractional indices. Application to the expressions

xmdx dx xmdx
1-x2 , xm1-x2 , ax-x

Integration of the differentials

F(log x) dx x , F sin-1x dx 1-x2 , x(log xn)dx, xm eax dx, (sin-1xm)dx.

Integration of the differentials eax sin bxdx and eax cos bxdx.

Integration of (sin xm.)(cos xn) dx.

Integration by series. Application to the expression

dx
ax-x21-bx

Application of integration by series to the development of functions, the development of whose derivatives is given: tan-1x, sin-1x, log(1 + x.)

Lessons 35–38. Geometrical Applications.

Quadrature of certain curves. Circle, hyperbola, cycloid, logarithmic spiral, &c.

Rectification of curves by rectilinear or polar co-ordinates. Examples. Numerical applications.

Cubic content of solids of revolution. Quadrature of their surfaces.

94

Cubic content of solids in general, with rectilinear or polar co-ordinates. Numerical applications.

Quadrature of any curved surfaces expressed by rectangular co-ordinates. Application to the sphere.

Lessons 39–42. Mechanical Applications.

General formula for the determination of the center of gravity of solids, curved or plane surfaces, and arcs of curves. Various applications.

Guldin’s theorem.

Volume of the truncated cylinder.

General formula which represent the components of the attraction of a body upon a material point, upon the supposition that the action upon each element varies inversely as the square of the distance. Attraction of a spherical shell on an external or internal point.

Definition of moments of inertia. How to calculate the moment of inertia of a body in relation to a straight line, when the moment in relation to a parallel straight line is known. How to represent the moments of inertia of a body relative to the straight lines which pass through a given point by means of the radii vectores of an ellipsoid. What is meant by the principal axes of inertia.

Determination of the principal moments of inertia of certain homogeneous bodies, sphere, ellipsoid, prism, &c.

Lessons 43–45. Calculus of Differences.

Calculation of differences of different orders of a function of one variable by means of values of the function corresponding to equidistant values of the variable.

Expression for any one of the values of the function by means of the first, and its differences. Numerical applications; construction of tables representing a function whose differences beyond a certain order may be neglected. Application to the theory of interpolation. Formulæ for approximation by quadratures. Numerical exercises relative to the area of equilateral hyperbola or the calculation of a logarithm.

Lessons 46–48. Revision.

General reflections on the subjects contained in the preceding course.

ANALYSIS.—SECOND YEAR.

CONTINUATION OF THE INTEGRAL CALCULUS.

Lessons 1–2. Definite Integrals.

Differentiation of a definite integral with respect to a parameter in it, which is made to vary. Geometrical demonstration of the formula. Integration under the sign of integration. Application to the determination of certain definite integrals.

Determination of the integrals ∫ sin ax x dx, and ∫ cos bx sin ax x dx, between the limits 0 and x. Remarkable discontinuity which these integrals present.

Determination of ∫e-x²dx and ∫e-x²cos mx dx between the limits 0 and ∞.

95

Lesson 3. Integration of Differentials containing several Variables.

Condition that an expression of the form M dx + N dy in which M and N are given functions of x and y may be an exact differential of two independent variables x and y. When this condition is satisfied, to find the function.

Extension of this theory to the case of three variables.

Lessons 4–6. Integration of Differential Equations of the First Order.

Differential equations of the first order with two variables. Problem in geometry to which these equations correspond. What is meant by their integral. This integral always exists, and its expression contains an arbitrary constant.

Integration of the equation M dx + N dy = 0 when its first member is an exact differential. Whatever the functions M and N may be there always exists a factor µ, such that µ (M dx + N dy) is an exact differential.

Integration of homogeneous equations. Their general integral represents a system of similar curves. The equation (a + b x + c y) dx + (a’ + b’ x + c’ y) dy = c, may be rendered homogeneous. Particular case where the method fails. How the integration may be effected in such case.

Integration of the linear equation of the first order dy dx + P y = Q, where P and Q denote functions of x. Examples.

Remarks on the integration of equations of the first order which contain a higher power than the first of dy dx . Case in which it may be resolved in respect of dy dx . Case in which it may be resolved in respect of x or y.

Integrations of the equation y = x dy dx + φ ( dy dx ). Its general integral represents a system of straight lines. A particular solution represents the envelop of this system.

Solution of various problems in geometry which lead to differential equations of the first order.

Lessons 7–8. Integration of Differential Equations of Orders superior to the First.

The general integral of an equation of the m order contains m arbitrary constants.

(The demonstration is made to depend on the consideration of infinitely small quantities.)

Integration of the equation dmy dxm = φ (x.)

Integration of the equation d2y dx2 = φ (y, dy dx ).

How this is reduced to an equation of the first order. Solution of various problems in geometry which conduct to differential equations of the second order.

Lessons 9–10. On Linear Equations.

When a linear equation of the mth order contains no term independent of the unknown function and its derivatives, the sum of any number whatever of 96 particular integrals multiplied by arbitrary constants is also an integral. From this the conclusion is drawn that the general integral of this equation is deducible from the knowledge of m particular integrals.

Application to linear equations with constant co-efficients. Their integration is made to depend on the resolution of an algebraical equation. Case where this equation has imaginary roots. Case where it has equal roots. The general integral of a linear equation of any order, which contains a term independent of the function, may be reduced by the aid of quadratures to the integration of the same equation with this term omitted.

Lesson 11. Simultaneous Equations.

General considerations on the integration of simultaneous equations. It may be made to depend on the integrations of a single differential equation. Integration of a system of two simultaneous linear equations of the first order.

Lesson 12. Integrations of Equations by Series.

Development of the unknown function of the variable x according to the powers of x-a. In certain cases only a particular integral is obtained. If the equation is linear, the general integral may be deduced from it by the variation of constants.

Lessons 13–16. Partial Differential Equations.

Elimination of the arbitrary functions which enter into an equation by means of partial derivatives. Integration of an equation of partial differences with two independent variables, in the case where it is linear in respect to the derivatives of the unknown function. The general integral contains an arbitrary function.

Indication of the geometrical problem, of which the partial differential equation expresses analytically the enunciation. Integration of the partial differential equations to cylindrical, conical, conoidal surfaces of revolution. Determination of the arbitrary functions.

Integration of the equation d2u dy2 = a2 d2u dx2. The general integral contains two arbitrary functions. Determination of these functions.

Lessons 17–23. Applications to Mechanics.

Equation to the catenary.

Vertical motion of a heavy particle, taking into account the variation of gravity according to the distance from the center of the earth. Vertical motion of a heavy point in a resisting medium, the resistance being supposed proportional to the square of the velocity.

Motion of a heavy point compelled to remain in a circle or cycloid. Simple pendulum. Indication of the analytical problem to which we are led in investigating the motion of a free point.

Motion of projectiles in a vacuum. Calculation of the longitudinal and transversal vibrations of cords. Longitudinal vibrations of elastic rods. Vibration of gases in cylindical tubes.

Lessons 24–26. Applications to Astronomy.

Calculation of the force which attracts the planets, deduced from Kepler’s laws. Numerical data of the question.

97

Calculation of the relative motion of two points attracting one another, according to the inverse square of the distance.

Determination of the masses of the earth and of the planets accompanied by satellites. Numerical applications.

Lessons 27–30.

Elements of the calculus of probabilities and social arithmetic.

General principles of the calculus of chances. Simple probability, compound probability, partial probability, total probability. Repeated trials. Enunciation of Bernouilli’s theorem (without proof.)

Mathematical expectation. Applications to various cases, and especially to lotteries.

Tables of population and mortality. Mean life annuities, life interests, assurances, &c.

Lessons 31–32. Revision.

General reflections on the subjects comprised in the course.

II. DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY AND STEREOTOMY.

General Arrangements.

The pupils take in the lecture-room notes and sketches upon sheets, which are presented to the professor and the “répétiteurs” at each interrogation. The care with which these notes are taken is determined by “marks,” of which account is taken in arranging the pupils in order of merit.

The plans are made according to programmes, of which the conditions are different for different pupils. The drawings are in general accompanied with decimal scales, expressing a simple ratio to the meter. They carry inscriptions written conformably to the admitted models, and are, when necessary, accompanied with verbal descriptions.

In the graphic exercises of the first part of the course, the principal object is to familiarize the pupils with the different kinds of geometrical drawing, such as elevations and shaded s, oblique projections and various kinds of perspective. The pupils are also accustomed to different constructions useful in stereotomy.

The subjects for graphic exercises in stereotomy are taken from roofs, vaults, and staircases. Skew and oblique arches are the subject of detailed plans.

FIRST YEAR.

DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.—GEOMETRICAL DRAWING.

Lessons 1–3. Revision and Completion of the Subjects of Descriptive Geometry comprised in the Programme for Admission into the School.

Object of geometrical drawing. Methods of projection. Representation of points, lines, planes, cones, cylinders, and surfaces of revolution. Construction of tangent planes to surfaces, of curves, of inter of surfaces, of their tangents and their assymplotes.

Osculating plane of a curve of double curvature. A curve in general cuts its osculating plane.

When the generating line of a cylinder or a cone becomes a tangent to the directrix, the cylinder or cone in general has an edge of regression along this 98 generating line. The osculating plane of the directrix at the point of contact touches the surface along this edge.

Projections of curves of double curvature; infinite branches and their assymplotes, inflections, nodes, cusps, &c.

Change of planes of projection.

Reduction of scale; transposition.

Advantage and employment of curves of error; their irrelevant solutions.

Lessons 4–6. Modes of Representation for the Complete Definition of Objects.

Representation by plans, s, and elevation.

Projection by the method of contours. Representation of a point, a line, and a plane; questions relative to the straight line and plane. Representation of cones and cylinders; tangent planes to these surfaces.

Lessons 7–11. Modes of Representation which are not enough in themselves to define objects completely.

Isometrical and other kinds of perspective.

Oblique projections.

Conical perspective: vanishing points; scales of perspective; method of squares; perspective of curved lines; diverse applications. Choice of the point of sight. Rules for putting an elevation in perspective. Rule for determining the point of sight of a given picture, and for passing from the perspective to the plan as far as that is possible. Perspective of reflected images. Notions on panoramas.

Lessons 12–13. Representations with Shadows.

General observations on envelops and characteristics.

A developable surface is the envelop of the position of a movable plane; it is composed of two sheets which meet. It may be considered as generated by a straight line, which moves so as to remain always a tangent to a fixed curve.

Theory of shade and shadow, of the penumbra, of the brilliant point, of curves of equal intensity, of bright and dark edges.

Atmospheric light: direction of the principal atmospheric ray. Notions on the degradation of tints; construction of curves of equal tint.

Influence of light reflected by neighboring bodies.

Received convention in geometrical drawing on the direction of the luminous ray, &c.

Perspective of shadows.

Lessons 14–15. Construction of Lines of Shadows and of Perspective of Surfaces.

Use of circumscribed cones and cylinders, and of the normal parallel to a given straight line.

General method of construction of lines of shadow and of perspective of surfaces by plane s and auxiliary cylindrical or conical surfaces.

Construction of lines of shadow and perspective of a surface of revolution.

The curve of contact of a cone circumscribed about a surface of the second degree is a plane curve. Its plane is parallel to the diametral plane, conjugate to the diameter passing through the summit of the cone. The curve of contact of a cylinder circumscribed about a surface of the second degree is a plane 99 curve, and situated in the diametral plane conjugate to the diameter parallel to the axis of the cylinder.

The plane parallel s of a surface of the second degree are similar curves. The locus of their centers is the diameter conjugate to that one of the secant planes which passes through the center of the surface.

General study of surfaces with reference to the geometrical constructions to which their use gives rise.

Lesson 16. Complementary Notions on Developable Surfaces.

Development of a developable surface; construction of transformed curves and their tangents. Developable surface; an envelop of the osculating planes of a curve. The osculating plane of a curve at a given point may be constructed by considering it as the edge of regression of a developable surface; this construction presents some uncertainty in practice. Notions on the helix and the developable helicoid.

Approximate development of a segment of an undevelopable surface.

Lessons 17–18. Hyperbolic Paraboloid.

Double mode of generation of the paraboloid by straight lines; plane-directers; tangent planes, vertex, axis, principal planes; representation of this surface. Construction of the tangent plane parallel to a given plane. Construction of plane s and of curves of contact, of cones, and circumscribed cylinders.

Scalene paraboloid. Isosceles paraboloid.

Identity of the paraboloid with one of the five surfaces of the second degree studied in analytical geometry.

Re-statement without demonstration of the properties of this surface found by analysis, principally as regards its generation by the conic s.

Lessons 19–20. General Properties of Warped or Ruled Surfaces.

Principal modes of generation of warped surfaces. When two warped surfaces touch in three points of a common generatrix, they touch each other in every point of this straight line. Every plane passing through a generatrix touches the surface at one point in this line. The tangent plane at infinity is the plane-directer to all the paraboloids of “raccordement.”

Construction of the tangent planes and curves of contact of circumscribed cones and cylinders. When two infinitely near generatrices of a warped surface are in the same plane, all the curves of contact of the circumscribed cones and cylinders pass through their point of concourse.

The normals to a warped surface along a generatrix form an isosceles paraboloid. The name of central point of a generatrix is given to the point where it is met by the straight line upon which is measured its shortest distance from the adjoining generatrix. The locus of these points forms the line of striction of the surface. The vertex of the normal paraboloid along a generating line is situated at the central point. If the point of contact of a plane touching a warped surface moves along a generatrix, beginning from the central point, the tangent of the angle which the tangent plane makes with its primitive position is proportional to the length described by the point of contact. The tangent 100 plane at the central point is perpendicular to the tangent plane at infinity upon the same generatrix. Construction of the line of striction by aid of this property.

Lessons 21–22. Ruled Surfaces with plane-divecters Conoids.

The plane-directer of the surface is also so to all the paraboloids of “raccordement.” Construction of the tangent planes and curves of contact of the circumscribed cones and cylinders.

The line of striction of the surface is its curve of contact with a circumscribed cylinder perpendicular to the directer-plane. Determination of the nature of the plane s.

The lines of striction of the scalene paraboloid are parabolas; those of the isosceles paraboloid are straight lines.

Construction of the tangent plane parallel to a given plane.

Conoid: discussion of the curves of contact of the circumscribed cones and cylinders.

Right conoid. Conoid whose inter with a torus of the same height, whose axis is its rectilinear directrix, has for its projection upon the directer-plane two arcs of Archimedes’ spiral. Construction of the tangents to this curve of inter.

Lessons 23–25. Ruled Surfaces which have not a Directer-Plane. Hyperboloid. Surface of the “biais passe.”

Directer-cone: its advantages for constructing the tangent plane parallel to a given plane, and for determining the nature of the plane s. The tangent planes to the points of the surface, situated at infinity, are respectively parallel to the tangent plane of the directer-cone. Developable surface which is the envelope of these tangent planes at infinity. Construction of a paraboloid of raccordement to a ruled surface defined by two directrices and a directrix cone.

Hyperboloid; double mode of generation by straight lines; center; assymptotic cone.

Scalene hyperboloid; hyperboloid of revolution. Identity of the hyperboloid with one of the five surfaces of the second degree studied in analytical geometry.

Re-statement without demonstration of the properties of this surface, found by analysis, principally as to what regards the axis, the vertices, the principal planes, and the generation by conic s.

Hyperboloid of raccordement to a ruled surface along a generatrix; all their centers are in the same plane. Transformation of a hyperboloid of raccordement.

Surface of the biais passé. Construction of a hyperboloid of raccordement; its transformation into a paraboloid.

Construction of the tangent plane at a given point.

Lessons 26–28. Curvature of Surfaces. Lines of Curvature.

Re-statement without proof of the formula of Euler given in the course of analysis.

There exists an infinity of surfaces of the second degree, which at one of their vertices osculate any surface whatever at a given point.

101

In the tangent plane, at a point of a surface, there exists a conic , whose diameters are proportional to the square roots of the radii of curvature of the normal s to which they are tangents. This curve is called the indicatrix. It is defined in form and position, but not in magnitude. The normal s tangential to the axes of the indicatrix are called the principal s.

The indicatrix an ellipse; convex surfaces; umbilici; line of spherical curvatures.

The indicatrix a hyperbola; surfaces with opposite curvatures.

The assymplotes of the indicatrix have a contact of the second order with the surface, and of the first order with the of the surface by its tangent plane.

A ruled surface has contrary curvatures at every point. The second assymplotes of the indicatrices of all the points of the same generatrix form a hyperboloid, if the surface has not directer-plane,—a paraboloid, if it have one.

Curvature of developable surfaces.

There exists upon every surface two systems of orthogonal lines, such that every straight line subject to move by gliding over either of them, and remaining normal to the surface, will engender a developable surface. These lines are called lines of curvature.

The two lines of curvature which cross at a point, are tangents to the principal s of the surface at that point.

Remarks upon the lines of curvature of developable surfaces, and surfaces of revolution.

Determination of the radii of curvature, and assymplotes of the indicatrix at a point of a surface of revolution.

Lessons 29–30. Division of Curves of Apparent Contour, and of Separation of Light and Shadow into Real and Virtual Parts.

When a cone is circumscribed about a surface, at any point whatever of the curve of contact, the tangent to this curve and the generatrix of the cone are parallel to two conjugate diameters of the indicatrix.

Surfaces, as they are considered in shadows, envelop opaque bodies, and the curve of contact of a circumscribed cone, only forms a separation of light and shadow, for a luminous point at the summit of the cone, when the generatrices of this cone are exterior. This line is thus sometimes real and sometimes virtual.

Upon a convex surface, the curve of separation of light and shade is either all real or all virtual. Upon a surface with contrary curvatures, this curve presents generally a succession of real and virtual parts: the curve of shadow cast from the surface upon itself presents a like succession. These curves meet tangentially, and the transition from the real to the virtual parts upon one and the other, take place at their points of contact in such a way that the real part of the curve of shadow continues the real part of the curve of separation of light and shade. The circumscribed cones have edges of regression along the generatrices, which correspond to the points of transition.

The lines of visible contour present analogous circumstances.

General method of determining the position of the transition points. Special method for a surface of revolution.

102

Lessons 31–34. Ruled Helicoidal Surfaces.

Surface of the thread of the triangular screw; generation, representation, s by planes and conical cylinders.

Construction of the tangent plane at a given point, or parallel to a given plane. The axis is the line of striction.

Construction of lines of shadow and perspective: their infinite branches, their assymplotes. Determination of the osculating hyperboloid along a generatrix.

Representation and shading of the screw with a triangular thread and its nut.

Surface of the thread of the square screw; generation, s by planes and conical cylinders; tangent planes; curve of contact of a circumscribed cone.

The curve of contact of a circumscribed cylinder is a helix whose step is half that of the surface. Determination of the osculating paraboloid. At any point whatever of the surface, the absolute lengths of the radii of curvature are equal.

Representation and shading of the screw with a square thread, and of its nut.

Observations on the general ruled helicoidal surface, and on the surface of intrados of the winding staircase.

Lesson 35. Different Helicoidal Surfaces.

Saint-Giles screw, worm-shaped screw and helicoidal surfaces to any generatrix. Every tangent to the meridian generatrix describes a screw surface with triangular thread, which is circumscribed about the surface, along a helix, and may be used to resolve the problems of tangent planes, circumscribed cylinders, &c.

Helicoid of the open screw, its generation, tangent planes.

Lessons 36–37. Topographical Surfaces.

Approximate representation of a surface by the figured horizontal projections of a series of equidistant horizontal s. This method of representation is especially adapted to topographical surfaces, that is to say, surfaces which a vertical line can only meet in one point.

Lines of greatest slope. Trace of a line of equal slope between two given points.

Inter of a plane and a surface, of two surfaces, of a straight line and a surface.

Tangent planes, cones, and cylinders circumscribed about topographical surfaces.

Use of a topographical surface to replace a table of double-entry when the function of two variables, which it represents, is continuous. It is often possible, by a suitable anamorphosis, to make an advantageous transformation in the curves of level.

Lesson 38. Revision.

Review of the different methods of geometrical drawing. Advantages and disadvantages of each.

103

Comparison of the different kinds of surfaces, résumé of their general properties.

Object, method, and spirit of descriptive geometry.

SECOND YEAR.

STEREOTOMY.—WOOD-WORK.

Lessons 1–4. Generalities.

Notions on the mode of action of forces in carpentry. Resistance of a piece of wood to a longitudinal effort and to a transversal effort. Distinction between resistance to flexure and resistance to rupture. Beams.

Advantages of the triangular system, St. Andrew’s cross.

Lessons 5–8. Roofs.

Ordinary composition of roofs.

Distribution of pressures in the different parts of a girded roof.

Design of the different parts of roofs, &c., &c.

Lessons 9–10. Staircases.

MASONRY.

Lessons 11–12. Generalities.

Notions on the settlement of vaulted roofs. Principal forms of vaults, en berceau, &c., &c.

Distribution of the pressures, &c.

Division of the intrados. Nature of the surfaces at the joints, &c., &c.

Lessons 13–15. Berceaux and descentes.

Lessons 16–22. Skew Arches.

Study of the general problem of skew arches.

First solution. Straight arches en échelon.

Second solution: Orthogonal appareil. True and principal properties of the orthogonal trajectories of the parallel s of an elliptical or circular cylinder. Right conoid, having for directrices the axis of the circular cylinder and an orthogonal trajectory. The inter of this conoid by a cylinder about the same axis is an orthogonal trajectory for a series of parallel s.

Third solution: helicoidal. Determination of the angular elevation at which the surfaces of the beds become normal to the head planes; construction in the orthogonal and helicoidal appareil of the curves of junction upon the heads, and the angles which they form with the curves of intrados. Cutting of the stones in these different constructions. Broken helicoidal appareil, for very long skew arches.

Helicoidal trompes at the angles of straight arches; voussures or widenings, which it is necessary to substitute near the heads at the intrados of an arch with a considerable skew; case where the skew is not the same for the two heads. Orthogonal trajectories of the converging s of a cylinder.

104

Lessons 23–25. Conical Intrados—Intrados of Revolution.

Skew trompe in the angle. Suggestions on the general problem of conical skew vaulted roofs.

Spherical domes, &c.

Lessons 26–27. Intrados, a Ruled Surface.

Winding staircases, &c., &c.

Lesson 28. Helicodial Intrados.

Staircase on the Saint-Giles screw.

Lessons 29–31. Composite Vaulted Roofs.

Various descriptions of vaults.

Suggestions on vaulted roofs with polygonal edges and with ogival edges.

Lesson 32. Revision.

Spirit and method of stereotomy.

Degree of exactness necessary. Approximate solutions. Case where it is proper to employ calculation in aid of graphical constructions.

Review and comparison of different appareils.

MECHANICS AND MACHINES.

GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS.

The pupils execute during the two years of study:—

1. Various drawings or plans of models in relief representing the essential and internal organs of machines, such as articulations of connecting rods, winch-handles and fly-wheels, grease-boxes, eccentrics worked by cams or circles giving motion to rods; the play of slides, &c.; cylinders of steam-engines, condenser, pistons, and various suckers; Archimedes’ screw, and other parts of machines.

The sketches of the plan drawings are traced by hand and figured. The drawings in their finished state are washed and colored according to the table of conventional tints; they all carry a scale suitably divided.

2. A drawing of wheel-work by the method of development, and tracing the curves of teeth by arcs of circles from which they are developed. This drawing represents, of the natural size, or on any other scale of size considered suitable to show the nature of the partial actions only, a small number of teeth either in development or projection; the entire wheel-work is represented by the usual method of projection, where in drawings on a small scale the teeth are replaced by truncated pyramids with a trapezoidal base.

3. Finally, numerical exercises concerning the loss of work due to the proejudicial resistances in various machines, the gauging of holes, orifices, &c.

Models in relief or drawings on a large scale, of the machines or elements of the machines mentioned in the course, assist in explaining the lessons. They are brought back, as often as found necessary, under the eyes of the students. When possible, lithographic sketches of the machines, or the elements of the machines, which ought to enter into the course, are distributed among the pupils.

105

The pupils, divided into s, pay their first visit to the engine factories towards the end of their first year of study; they make one or more additional visits at the end of the second year.

FIRST YEAR.

PART I. KINEMATICS.—PRELIMINARY ELEMENTARY MOVEMENTS OF INVARIABLE POINTS AND SYSTEMS.

Lessons 1–2.

Object of kinematics, under the geometrical and experimental point of view. Its principal divisions.

Re-statement of the notions relative to the motion of a point, its geometrical representation, and more especially the determination of its velocity.

Simultaneous Velocities of a Point and the Increments of its Velocities.

Ratio of the elementary displacement and the velocity of a point to the displacement, and velocity of its projection upon a straight line or plane. Use of infinitesimals to determine these ratios. Example:—Oscillatory motion of the projection upon a fixed axis of a point moving uniformly upon the circumference of a circle.

Analogous considerations for polar co-ordinates. Relations of the velocity of a point, of its velocity of revolution and its angular velocity about a fixed pole; of its velocity in the direction of the radius vector; of the velocity of increase of the area which this radius describes.

Simple Motions of Solids, or Rigid Systems.

1. Motion of rectilinear or curvilinear translation; simultaneous displacements, and velocities of its different points.

2. Motion of rotation about a fixed axis; relation of the velocities of different points to the angular velocity.

Geometrical notions and theorems relative to the instantaneous center of rotation of a body of invariable figure and movable in one plane, or to the instantaneous axis of rotation of a rigid system situated in space, and movable parallel to a fixed plane. Relation of the velocities of different points to their common angular velocity. Use of the instantaneous center of rotation for tracing tangents; examples—and amongst others—that of the plane curve described by a point in a straight line of given length, whose extremities slide upon two fixed lines. Rolling of a curve upon another fixed curve in a plane. Descartes’ theorems upon the inter of the normals at the successive points of contact: cycloids, epicycloids, involutes, and evolutes. Extension of the preceding motions to the instantaneous axis of rotation of a rigid system movable about a fixed point.

COMPOSITION OF MOTIONS.

Lessons 3–6. Composition of the Velocities of a Point.

Polygon of velocities. Example of movements observed relatively to the earth. Particular cases; composition of velocities taken along three axes; composition of the velocity of a point round a fixed pole, and its velocity along the radius vector. Method of Roberval for tracing tangents.

106

Composition of the Simple Motions of a Solid System.

Composition of any number of translatory displacements of a solid. Composition of two rotations about two intersecting axes. Composition of any number of rotations about axes cutting one another at the same point; parallelopiped and polygon of rotations. Composition of two simultaneous rotations about parallel axes; case where the rotations are equal and of opposite kinds. Decomposition of a rotation about an axis into an equal rotation about any axis whatever parallel to the first, and a translation perpendicular to the direction of this axis. Direct and geometrical decomposition of the most general motions of a body into a rotation about, and a translation along, an axis called the instantaneous axis. Composition of any two motions whatever. Every movement of an invariable system is at each instant of time decomposable into three movements of rotation, and three movements of translation with respect to three axes, which are neither parallel nor lying in the same plane, but otherwise arbitrarily chosen.

Relative or Apparent Motions.

Relative motion of two points whose absolute motions are given graphically à priori. Trajectory of the relative motions, relative velocities, and displacements upon curves or upon the direction of the mutual distance of the two points; use of the parallelogram to determine its amount. Relative motion of a point in motion in respect of a body turning about a fixed axis; relative motion of two bodies which turn about parallel or converging axes, and in general of two rigid bodies or systems impelled by any motions whatever. How this problem is immediately reduced to that of the composition of given motions.

The most general continued motion of an invariable figure in a plane is an epicycloidal motion, in which the instantaneous center describes a curve fixed in relation to absolute space, and traces relatively to the proposed figure a movable curve, which is rigidly connected with that figure and draws it along with it in its motion of rolling upon the other fixed curve. Case of space or spherical figures.

ON THE ACCELERATED MOTION OF A POINT.

Lessons 7–9. Accelerated Rectilinear Motion.

Re-statement of the motions acquired relatively to the acceleration in the variable rectilinear motion of a point. Brief indication of the solution of six problems arising out of the investigation of the laws of the motion in terms of the space, time, velocity, and accelerating force. For the most part these solutions may be brought to depend on exact or approximate quadratures. Numerical exercises.

Accelerated Curvilinear Motions.

Re-statement of the notions acquired relative to the composition of accelerating forces; the resulting acceleration, the normal and tangential acceleration animating a point in motion on a curve. The total acceleration of a point upon an axis or plane is the projection upon this axis or plane of the acceleration of the moving body in space. In uniform curvilinear motion the total or resultant acceleration becomes normal to the curve. Particular case of the circle; value of the normal acceleration in terms of the velocity of revolution or the angular 107 velocity of the radius vector. Case of any curve whatever; geometrical expression of the total or resultant acceleration.

Accelerated Compound and Relative Motions.

Geometrical investigation of the simple and compound accelerations arising out of the hypothesis in which the motion of any system of points whatever is referred to another system of invariable form, but also in motion. Geometrical and elementary explanations of the results obtained by means of the transformation of co-ordinates.

Examples or Exercises chosen from among the following Questions:

Projection of circular and uniform motion upon a fixed straight line or plane; motion of a circle which rolls uniformly on a straight line; comparison of the motions of the planets relatively to each other, treating them as circular and uniform: comparison of the accelerating force on the moon with that of bodies which fall to the earth.

GEOMETRICAL THEORY AND APPLICATION OF MECHANISMS OR CONTRIVANCES FOR THE TRANSFORMATION OF MOTION.

Lessons 10–19.

Succinct notions on the classification of elementary motions and organs for transmission of motion in machines after Monge and Hachette, Lanz and Bétancourt.

The most essential details upon this subject are set forth in the following order, and made clear by outline drawings previously distributed among the pupils.

Organs fitted to regulate the direction of the circular or rectilinear motion of certain pieces.

Axle; trunnions, gudgeons; pivots and bearings; couplings of axes; adjustment of wheels and of their arms. Joints with hinges, &c.; sheaves and pulleys; chains, ropes, and straps; means of securing them to the necks. Grooves and tongue-pieces. Eyelet-holes sliding along rectilinear or curvilinear rods. Advantages and disadvantages of these different systems of guides under the point of view of accuracy.

Rapid indication of some of their applications to drawbridges and to the movable frames or wagons of saw-works and railways.

Transmission at a Distance of Rectilinear Motion in a determinate Direction and Ratio.

Inclined plane or wedge guiding a vertical rod. Wedge applied to presses. Rods, winch-handles, &c. Disposition of drums or pulleys in the same plane or in different planes; geometrical problem on this subject. Fixed and movable pulleys. Blocks to pulleys. Simple and differential wheel and axle moved by cords. Transmission through a liquid. Ratios of velocities in these different organs.

Direct Transformation of circular progressive motion into progressive and intermittent rectilinear motion.

Rod conducted between guides: 1o, by the simple contact of a wheel; 2o, by cross-straps or chains; 3o, by a projecting cam; 4o, by means of a helicoidal 108 groove set upon the cylindrical axis of the wheel. To-and-fro movement, and heart-shaped or continuous cam, waves, and eccentrics. Simple screw and nut. Left and right handed screws; differential screw of Prony, called the micrometric screw. Ratio of the velocities in these different organs.

The example of the cam and pile-driver will be particularly insisted upon; 1o, in the case where this cam and the extremity of the rod have any continuous form given by a simple geometrical drawing; 2o, in the case where this form is defined geometrically by the condition, that the velocity is to be transmitted in an invariable ratio, as takes place for cams in the form of epicycloids or involutes of circles.

Transformation of a circular progressive motion into another similar to the first.

1o, by contact of cylinders or cones, the two axes being situated in the same plane; 2o, by straps, cords, or endless chains, the axes being in the same situation; 3o, by cams, teeth, and grooves, at very slight intervals; 4o, by the Dutch or universal joint. Case, where the axes are not situated in the same plane; use of an intermediate axis with beveled wheels or a train of pulleys; idea of White or Hooke’s joint in its improved form. Endless screw specially employed in the case of two axes at right angles to one another. Combinations or groupings of wheels. Idea of differential wheels. Relations of velocities in the most important of these systems of transmission.

Transformation of circular progressive Motion into rectilinear or alternating circular motion.

Ordinary circular eccentric. Eccentrics with closed waves or cams. Examples and graphical exercises in the class-rooms relative to the alternate action of the traveling frames of saw-mills, of the slides or entrance valves of steam-engines. Cams for working hammers and bellows.

Transformation of alternating circular motion into alternating rectilinear motion, or into intermittent and progressive circular motion.

Pump rods with or without circular sectors, &c. Examples taken from large exhausting pumps, fire-engines, and common pumps. Suggestions as to the best arrangement of the parts. Lagarousse’s lever, &c. Application of the principle relative to the instantaneous center of rotation to give the relations of the velocities in certain simple cases.

Transformation of alternating circular or rectilinear motions into progressive circular motion.

The knife-grinder’s treadle. System of great machines worked with connecting rods, fly-wheel, &c. Watt’s parallelogram, and the simplest modifications of it for steamboats, for instance. The most favorable proportions for avoiding the deviation of piston-rods. Simplification of parts in the modern steam-engines of Maudsley, Cavé, &c. Variable ratios of the velocities.

Of organs for effecting a sudden change of motion.

Suspendors or moderators, &c. Dead wheels and pulleys, &c. Mechanisms for stretching cords or straps, and make them change pulleys during the motion. Brakes to windmills, carriages, &c., &c. Case where the axes are rendered 109 movable. Means for changing the directions and velocity of the motions. Coupled and alternate pulleys; alternate cones; castors moving by friction and rotation upon a plate or turning-cone; eccentric and orrery wheels. Means of changing the motion suddenly and by intervals; wheels with a detent pile-drivers; Dobo’s escapement for diminishing the shock, &c.

Geometrical Drawing of Wheel-work.

General condition which the teeth of toothed wheels must satisfy. Consequence resulting from this for the determination of the form of the teeth of one of two wheels, when the form of the teeth of the other wheel is given.

Cylindrical action of toothed wheels or toothed wheels with parallel axes. External engagement of the teeth; internal engagement. Particular systems of toothed wheels; lantern wheels, flange wheels, involutes of circles. Reciprocity of action; case where the action can not be rendered reciprocal. Pothook action. Details as to the form and dimensions given in practice to the teeth and the spaces which separate them.

Conical action of toothed wheels, or toothed wheels with converging axes. Practical approximate method of reducing the construction of a conical to that of a cylindrical engagement of toothed wheels.

Means of observation and apparatus proper for discovering experimentally the law of any given movement.

Simple methods practiced by Galileo and Coulomb in their experiments relative to the inclined plane and the motion of bodies sliding down it. Various means of observing and discovering the law of the translatory and rotatory motion of a body according as the motion is slow or rapid. Determination of the angular velocity, &c. The counter in machines. Apparatus of Mattei and Grobert for assigning the initial velocity of projectiles (musket balls.) Colonel Beaufoy’s pendulum apparatus. Chronometrical apparatus for continuous indications by means of a pencil. Eytelwein’s apparatus with bands, and its simplest modifications. Apparatus with cylinders or revolving disks. Use of the tuning-fork for measuring with precision very small fractions of time.

(The principal sorts of the apparatus above described are made to act under the eyes of the pupils.)

PART II.—EQUILIBRIUM OF FORCES APPLIED TO MATERIAL SYSTEMS.

Lesson 21.

Résumé of the notions acquired upon the subject of forces, and their effects on material points.

Principle of inertia, notion of force, of its direction, of its intensity. Principle of the equality of action and reaction. What is meant by the force of inertia? Principle of the independence and composition of the effects of forces. Forces proportional to the acceleration which they produce on the same body. Composition of forces. Relation between the accelerating force, the pressure, and the mass. Definition of the work done by a force. The work done by the resultant is equal to the sum of the works done by the components. Moment of a force in relation to an axis deduced from the consideration of the work of the force applied to a point turning about a fixed line. The moment of the 110 resultant of several forces applied to a point is equal to the sum of the moments of the components. Corresponding propositions of geometry.

Lessons 22–25.

Succinct Notions upon the Constitution of Solid Bodies.

Every body or system of bodies may be regarded as a combination of material points isolated or at a distance, subject to equal and opposite mutual actions. Interior and exterior forces. Example of two molecules subject to their reciprocal actions alternately, attractive and repulsive, when the forces applied draw them out of their position of natural equilibrium. Different degrees of natural solidity, stability, or elasticity; they can only be appreciated by experience.

Equilibrium of any Systems whatever of Material Points.

General theorem of the virtual work of forces applied to any system whatever of material points. It is applicable to every finite portion of the system, provided regard be had to the actions exercised by the molecules exterior to the part under consideration. Determination of the sum of the virtual works of the equal and reciprocal actions of two material points. Demonstration of the six general equations of equilibrium of any system whatever. They comprise implicitly every equation deduced from a virtual movement compatible with the pre-supposed solidification of the system.

Theorem on the virtual work in the case of systems where one supposes ideal connections, such as the invariability of the distance of certain points of the system from one another, and the condition that certain of them are to remain upon curves either fixed or moving without friction.

Equilibrium of Solid Bodies.

The six general equations of equilibrium are sufficient as conditions of the equilibrium of a solid body. Theory of moments and couples.

APPLICATIONS.

Lessons 26–29. Equilibrium of Heavy Systems.

Recapitulation of some indispensable notions for the experimental determination of the center of gravity of solids when the law of their densities is unknown. Re-statement of the theorem relative to the work done by gravity upon a system of bodies connected or otherwise. In machines supposed without friction submitted, with the exception of their supports, to the action of gravity alone, the positions of stable or unstable equilibrium correspond to the highest or lowest points of the curve which would be described by the center of gravity of the system when made to move. Influence of defect of centering in its wheels, upon the equilibrium of a machine. Case where the center of gravity always remaining at the same height the equilibrium is neutral. Examples relative to the most simple drawbridges, &c.

Equilibrium of Jointed Systems.

Equilibrium of the funicular polygon deduced from direct geometrical considerations: Varignon’s theorem giving the law of the tensions by another 111 polygon whose sides are parallel and proportional to the forces acting upon the vertices of the funicular polygon. Case of suspension bridges; investigation of the curve which defines the boundary of the suspension chain; tensions at the extremities.

Equilibrium of systems of jointed rigid bodies without friction. Determination of the pressure upon the supports and the mutual actions at the joints.

Equilibrium and stability of solid bodies submitted to the action of stretching or compressing forces.

Permanent resistance and limiting resistance of prisms to longitudinal extension and compression. Equilibrium and stability of a heavy solid placed upon a horizontal plane and submitted to the action of forces which tend to overset it. Resultant pressure and mean pressure; hypothetical distribution of the elements of the pressure on the base of support. Conditions of stability, regard being had to the limit of resistance of solid materials, co-efficient of stability deduced from it.

PART III.—ON THE WORK DONE BY FORCES IN MACHINES.

Lessons 30–39. General Notions.

Principle of work in the motion of a material point. Extension of this principle to the case of any material system whatever in motion. Considerations relative to mechanical work in various operations, such as the lifting of weights, sawing, planing, &c. It is the true measure of the productive activity of forces in industrial works. It may always be calculated either rigorously or approximately when the mathematical or experimental law which connects the force with the spaces described is given. Uniform work, periodical work, mean work, for the unit of time. Horse-power unit. Examples and various exercises, such as the calculation of the work corresponding to the elasticity of gases on the hypothesis of Mariotte’s law, the elongation of a metallic prism, &c.

Dynamometrical Apparatus.

Dynamometer of traction by a band or rotating disc or register. Dynamometer of rotation with simple spring, with band or register. Dynamometer of rotation with multiple springs and with register for the axles of powerful machines. Improved indicator of Watt.

(These pieces of apparatus are made to act under the eyes of the pupils.)

Work of Animal Prime Movers upon Machines.

Results of experience as to the values of the daily work which animal motors can supply under different circumstances without exceeding the fatigue which sleep and nourishment are capable of repairing.

Theory of the Transmission of Work in Machines.

Principal resistance. Secondary resistances. Two manners in which bodies perform the duty of motors. Ratio of work done to work expended always inferior to unity. Different parts of machines; receiver; organs of transmission; tools as machines.

112

Calculation of the Work due to the passive resistances in machines.

Résumé of the notions previously acquired on friction. Application to the inclined plane, to the printing-press, to guides or grooves, to the screw with a square thread; different cases of uniform motion being impossible under the action of forces of given directions. Friction of trunnions, pivots, eccentrics, and insertions of winch-handles. Prony’s dynamometrical brake; conditions of its application. Resistance to rolling; its laws according to experiment. Use of rollers and friction-wheels; their practical inconveniences.

Mixed friction of toothed wheels; the Dobo escapement: friction of the teeth in the endless screw.

Stiffness and friction of cords. Results of experience. Friction of cords and straps running round drums. Different applications; brakes; transmission by cords, endless straps, or chains.

Examples and exercises; effects of passive resistances in the capstan, the crane, pulleys, &c.

Lesson 40. Revision.

SECOND YEAR.

PART I.—DYNAMICS.— DYNAMICS OF A MATERIAL POINT.

Lessons 1–2. Completion of the Notions acquired on this Subject.

Differential equations of the motion of a material point submitted to the continued action of one or more forces. The acceleration of the projection of a point upon any axis or plane is due to the projection of the forces on this axis or plane. The acceleration along the trajectory is due to the tangential force. Relation of the curvature to the centripetal force. Introduction of the force of inertia into the preceding enunciations.

The increase of the quantity of motion projected upon an axis or taken along the trajectory is equal to the impulsion of the projected resultant, or to that of the tangential force. The total impulsion of a force is got by methods of calculation and of experiment analogous to those which relate to work. The increase of the moment of the quantity of motion in relation to any axis is equal to the total moment of the impulsions of the forces during the same interval of time; direct geometrical demonstration of this theorem. In decomposing the velocity of the moving body into a velocity in the plane passing through the axis of the moments, and a velocity of revolution perpendicular to this plane, we may replace the moment of the quantity of motion in space by the quantity of motion of revolution. Particular case known under the name of the principle of areas.

Extension of the preceding theorems to the case of relative motions. Apparent forces which must be combined with the real ones that the relative motion of a point may be assimilated to an absolute motion. Particular case of relative equilibrium. Influence of the motion of the earth upon the accelerating force of gravity.

DYNAMICS OF ANY MATERIAL SYSTEMS.

Lessons 3–8.

Principle or general rule which reduces questions in dynamics to questions in equilibrium by the addition of the forces of inertia to the forces which really 113 act on the system. Equation of virtual work which expresses this equilibrium; it comprises in general the external and internal forces.

General Theorems.

These theorems, four in number, are founded upon the principle of the equality of action and reaction applied to internal forces. They may be deduced from the preceding rule, but the three last are obtained more simply by extending to a system of material points analogous theorems established for isolated material points.

General theorem of the motion of the center of gravity of a system. Particular case called principle of the conservation of the motion of the center of gravity.

General theorem on the quantities of motion and impulsions of exterior forces projected on any axis.

General theorems of moments of quantities of motion and impulsions of exterior forces, projected on any axis whatever.

General theorems of the moments of quantities of motion and impulsions of exterior forces about any axis. Analogy of these two theorems with the equations of the equilibrium of a solid, in which the forces are replaced by impulsions and quantities of motion.

Composition of impulsions, of quantities of motion, or the areas which represent them. All the equations which can be obtained by the application of the two theorems relative to quantities of motion and impulsions, reduce themselves to six distinct equations. Particular case called principle of the conservation of areas. Fixed plane of the resulting moment of the quantities of motion called plane of maximum areas.

General theorem of work and vis viva. Part which appertains to the interior forces in this theorem. Particular case called principle of the conservation of vires vivæ, where the sum of the elements of work done by the exterior and interior forces is the differential of a function of the co-ordinates of different points of the system. Application of the theorem of work to the stability of the equilibrium of heavy systems.

Extension of the preceding theorems to the case of relative motions. Particular case of relative equilibrium. Motion of any material system relative to axes always passing through the center of gravity, and moving parallel to themselves. Invariable plane of Laplace. Relation between the absolute vis viva of a material system, and that which would be due to its motion, referred to the system of movable axes above indicated.

Examples and Applications.

The following examples, amongst others, to be taken as applications or subjects of exercises relative to the general principles which precede.

Walking. Recoil of guns. Eolypile. Flight of rockets.

Pressure of fluid veins, resistance of mediums, &c. Direct collision of bodies more or less hard, elastic, or penetrable. Exchange of quantities of motion. Loss of vis viva under different hypotheses. Influence of vibrations and permanent molecular displacements.

Pile driving; advantage of large rammers. Comparison of effects of the 114 shocks and of simple pressures due to the weight of the construction. Oblique collision, and ricochet. Data furnished by experiment.

Oscillations of a vertical elastic prism suspended to a fixed point, and loaded with a weight, neglecting the inertia, and the weight of the material parts of this prism. Case of a sudden blow. What is meant by the “resistance vive” of a prism to rupture? Results of experiments.

Work developed by powder upon projectiles, estimated according to the vis viva which it impresses on them, as well as upon the gun and the gases upon hypothesis of a mean velocity.

SPECIAL DYNAMICS OF SOLID BODIES.

Lessons 9–12. Simple Rotation of an invariable Solid about its Axis.

In applying to this case the first general rule of dynamics, the theorem of the moments of the quantities of motion, and the theorem of work, we are led to the notion of the moment of inertia; explanation of the origin of this name. The angular acceleration is equal to the sum of the moments of the exterior forces divided by the moment of inertia about the axis of rotation. Sum of the moments of the quantities of motion relative to this axis. Vis viva of a solid simply turning about an axis. What is meant by radius of gyration?

Remind of the geometrical properties of moments of inertia, of the ellipsoid which represents them, of the principal axes at any point, of those which are referred to the center of gravity.

Pressure which a rotating body exercises on its supports. Reduction of the centrifugal and tangential forces of inertia to a force which is the force of inertia of the entire mass accumulated at the center of gravity, and a couple.

Particular case where the forces of inertia have a single resultant; different examples. Center of percussion. Compound pendulum; length of the corresponding simple pendulum. Center of oscillation; reciprocity of the centers or axes of suspension and oscillation. Pressure upon the axis. Influence of the medium; experience proves that the resistance, varying with the velocity, changes the extent of the oscillations, but does not sensibly affect the time. Experimental determination of the center of oscillation and the moment of inertia about an axis.

Motion of an invariable Solid subject to certain Forces.

General notions on this subject. Motion of the center of gravity; motion of rotation about this point.

Lessons 13–19. Various Applications.

Motion of a homogeneous sphere or cylinder rolling upon an inclined plane, taking friction into account.

Motion of a pulley with its axis horizontal, solicited by two weights suspended vertically to a thread or fine string passing round the neck of the pulley, the axle of which rests upon movable wheels. Atwood’s machine serving to demonstrate the laws of the communication of motion.

Motion of a horizontal wheel and axle acted on by a weight suspended vertically to a cord rolled round the axle, or upon a drum with the same axis, and presenting an eccentric mass. To take account of the variable friction of the 115 bearings, and the stiffness of the cord, with recourse, if necessary, to approximation by quadratures. Oscillations of the torsion balance.

Balistic pendulum. Condition that there may be no shock on the axis. Experimental determination of the direction in which the percussion should take place.

Theory of Huyghen’s conical pendulum considered as a regulator of machinery. How to take account of the inertia and friction of the jointed rods, as well as of the force necessary to move the regulating lever, &c.; appreciation of the degree of sensibility of the ball apparatus with a given uniform velocity.

Windlass with fly-wheel. Dynamical properties of the fly-wheel. Reduced formulæ for a crank with single or double action. Advantages and disadvantages of eccentric masses. Tendency of the tangential forces of inertia to break the arms. Numerical examples and computations.

Mutual action of rotating bodies connected by straps or toothed wheels in varying motion.

The wedge and punching-press. Stamping screw or lever used in coining, cams, lifting a pile or a hammer. To take account of the friction during the blow, and afterwards to estimate the loss of vis viva in cases which admit of it.

PART II.—SPECIAL MECHANICS OF FLUIDS.—HYDROSTATICS.

Lessons 20–22.

Principle of the equality of pressure in all directions. Propagation of the pressures from the surface to the interior of a fluid, and upon the sides of the vessel. Equations of equilibrium for any set of forces. Pressure exerted in the containing orifices. Measure of the pressure upon a plain portion of surface inclined or vertical (sluice-gate, embankments, &c.) Center of push or pressure. Pressure against the surfaces of a cylindrical tube. Effect, and resistance to oppose to the pressure. Manometer and piezometer. Equilibrium of a body plunged in a heavy fluid or floating at its surface. Stability of floating bodies. Metacenter. Laws of the pressure in the different atmospheric strata.

HYDRAULICS.

Lessons 23–27. Flow of Fluids through small Orifices.

Study of the phenomena which accompany this flow in the case of a thin envelop and a liquid kept at a constant level. Conditions of this constancy in the level, and the permanence of the motion in general. Motion of the lines of fluid; form; contraction; reversal and discontinuity of liquid veins. Fundamental formulæ for liquids and gases based upon the principle of vis viva, and Bernoulli’s hypothesis of parallel s or Borda’s of contiguous threads. Torricelli’s theorem relative to small orifices. What is called the theoretical expenditure, effective expenditure, and co-efficient of geometrical contraction. Co-efficient deduced from the effective expenditure. Its variations with the volume of the fluid contents, and the form of the inner surfaces of the reservoir. Results of the experiments of Michelotti, Borda, Bossut, &c. Phenomenon of adjutages. Venturi’s experiments; influence of atmospheric pressure; loss of vis viva; reduction of the velocity and augmentation of the expenditure. Results of experience relative to the co-efficient of expenditure, the form and range of the parabolic jets, showing the initial vis viva, and the loss of vis viva.

116

Large orifices.—Sluice holes and floodgates; reservoirs or open orifices; expenditure; practical formulæ and results of experiment. Influence of the proximity of the sides and the walls. Arrangement to avoid the effects of contraction or the losses of vis viva.

Flow through conducting Pipes and Open Canals.

Practical formulæ relative to the case of uniform s of great length. Measure of the pressures at different points of a conduit-pipe. Expression for the losses of effect due to corners and obstructions. Flow of gases. Principal methods of measuring the volume consumed adopted in practice. Floats. Pitot’s tube. Woltman’s mill. Register mill in air or gas. Waste in such instruments. Modulus and scale for water-supply.

PART III.—DIFFERENT MACHINES CONSIDERED IN THE STATE OF MOTION.

Lesson 28. General Considerations. Résumé of the Notions acquired on this Subject.

Equation of vis viva, and transmission of work in machines, account being taken of the different causes of power and resistance. Physical constitution of machines; receiver, communicators, and operator. Influence of the weights, of frictions, of shocks, and any changes in the vis viva. Parts with continuous or uniform motion, with alternating or oscillating motion. Laws of the motion on starting from rest, and when the stationary condition is established. The positions to which the maximum and minimum of the vis viva correspond are those in which there is equilibrium between all the forces, exclusive of the forces of inertia. Advantage of uniform or periodic motion. General methods for regulating the motion; symmetrical distribution of the masses and strains; flys and various regulators. Brakes and moderators; their inconveniences. Object and real advantages of machines.

Lessons 27–35. Hydraulic Wheels.

Vertical wheels with float-boards, with curved ladles, and with spouts. Figure of the surface of the fluid in these latter. Horizontal wheels working by float-boards, buckets, and reaction. Turbines. Description, play, and useful effects compared according to the results of experiment. Vertical wheels of windmills and steamboats. Screw propeller.

Windmills.

Description. Result of Coulomb’s observations.

On the principal kinds of Pumps.

Special organs of pumps. Valves and pistons, force pump, sucking pump; limit to the rise of the water. Sucking and force pump. Dynamical effects. Indication as to the losses of vis viva and the waste in different pumps. Explanation of the hydraulic ram. Air vessel. Fire pumps. Double action pumps.

Various Hydraulic Machines.

Hydraulic press. Water engine. Exhausting machines; norias; under and overshot wheels; Archimedes’ screw, construction and experimental data.

117

Lessons 36–39. Steam Engines.

Succinct description of the principal kinds of steam-engine with or without detent. Effects and advantages of the detent. Condenser. Air Pump. Furnace and feeding-pump.

Variable detent. Formulæ and experimental results.

Lessons 40–42. Revision.

Reflections on the totality of the subjects of the course.

IV. PHYSICS.—FIRST YEAR.

GENERAL PROPERTIES OF BODIES.—HYDROSTATICS.—HYDRODYNAMICS.

Lessons 1–5. Preliminary Notions.

Definitions of physics. Phenomena. Physical laws. Experiments are designed to make them spring out of the phenomena. Method of induction. Physical theories; different character of the experimental and mathematical methods.

General Properties of Bodies.

Extension. Measure of lengths. Vernier. Cathetometer. Micrometer screw. Spherometer. Dividing engine.

Divisibility. Porosity. Ideas generally received on the molecular constitution of bodies. These conceptions, which are purely hypothetical, must not be confounded with physical laws. Elasticity. Mobility. Inertia. Forces; their equilibrium, their effects, their numerical estimation.

Weight or Gravity.

Direction of gravity. Plumb-line. Relation between the direction of gravity and the surface of still water.

Weight. Center of gravity.

Experimental study of the motion produced by weight. In vacuum, all bodies fall with the same velocity. Disturbing influence of the air. Inclined plane of Galileo. Atwood’s machine. To prove by experiment; 1o the law of the spaces described; 2o the law of velocities. Morin’s self-registering apparatus with revolving cylinder.

Law of the independence of the effect produced by a force upon a body, and the motion anteriorily acquired by this body. Law of the independence of the effects of forces which act simultaneously upon the same body. Experimental demonstration and generalization of these laws. Law of the equality of action and reaction.

Mass. Acceleration. For equal masses the forces are as the accelerations which they produce. Relation between the force, mass, and acceleration. Collision.

General laws of uniformly accelerated motion. Formulæ.

Pendulum. Law of the isochronism of small oscillations and law of the lengths deduced from observation.

Method of coincidences or beats. Use of the pendulum as the measure of time. Simple pendulum; formulæ. Compound pendulum: the laws of the oscillations of a compound pendulum are the same as the laws of the oscillations of a simple pendulum whose length may be calculated.

118

Determination by means of the pendulum of the acceleration produced by gravity. This acceleration is independent of the nature of the body.

Remark that the formulæ for the motion of oscillation apply to the comparison of forces of any kind, that may be regarded as constant and parallel to themselves in all positions of the oscillating body.

Identity of gravity and universal attraction.

Measure of weights. Balance. Conditions to be attended to in making it. Absolute sensibility; proportional sensibility. Method of double weighing. Details of the precautions necessary in order to obtain an exact weight.

Different States of Bodies. Hydrostatics.

Solids. Cohesion. Transmission of external pressures.

Elasticity. The true laws of elasticity are unknown. Empirical laws in certain simple cases, and for a very small action. Elasticity of compression, extension, torsion. Experimental determination of the co-efficients of elasticity. Limits of elasticity. Limits of tenacity.

Ductility. Temper. Cold hammering. Annealing.

Liquids. Fluidity. Viscosity. Physical laws which form the basis of hydrostatics:—1o the transmission of external pressures is equal in all directions; 2o the pressure exercised in the interior of a liquid upon an element of a surface is normal to that element, and independent (as to amount) of its direction. These principles are demonstrated by the experimental verification of the consequences drawn from them.

Application to heavy liquids. Free surface, and surface de niveau. Pressure upon the parts of the containing vessel, and upon the bottom in particular; hydrostatic paradox; verificatory experiments. Haldat’s apparatus. Hydrostatic press.

Application to immersed or floating bodies (principle of Archimedes;) verificatory experiments. (In treating of the equilibrium of floating bodies, the conditions of stability are not gone into.)

Superposed liquids.

Communicating vessels. Water level. Spirit level; its use in instruments.

Densities of solids and liquids. Anemometers.

Compressibility of liquids. Piezometer. Correction due to the compressibility of the solid envelop.

Gas. Expansibility. Other properties common to liquids and gases. Principle of the equal transmission of pressures in all directions. Weight of gases. Pressure due to weight (principle of Archimedes.) Weight of body in air and in vacuum. Aerostation.

Superposed liquids and gases.

Communicating vessels. Barometer.

Detailed construction of barometer. Barometers of Fortin, Gay-Lussac, Bunten. Indication of the corrections necessary.

Mariotte’s law. Regnault’s experiments.

Manometer with atmospheric air—with compressed air. Bourdon’s manometer.

Law of the mixture of gases.

Air pump. Condensing pump.

119

Primary Notions of Hydrodynamics.

Toricelli’s principle. Mariotte’s vessel and syphon. Uniform flow of liquids. The same of gases.

Molecular Phenomena.

Cohesion of liquids. Adhesion of liquids to solids. Capillary phenomena. Apparent attractions and repulsions of floating bodies.

Adhesion of drops.

Molecular actions intervene as disturbing forces in the phenomena of the equilibrium and motion of liquids.

HEAT.

EFFECTS OF HEAT ON BODIES.

Lessons 6–9. Generalities.

General effects. Arbitrary choice of one of these effects to define the thermometric condition of a body. Conventional adoption of a thermometer. Definition of temperature.

Dilating Effects.

Definition of the co-efficients of linear, superficial, and cubic dilatation. Approximate relation between the numerical values of these three co-efficients. The value of the co-efficient of dilatation depends upon the thermometric substance and the temperature selected as the zero point. It becomes nearly independent of the zero point when the co-efficient is very small.

Relation between volume, density, and temperature. Linear dilatation of solid bodies. Ramsden’s instrument. Cubical dilatation of liquids. Dulong and Petit’s experiments on mercury. Discussion. Regnault’s experiments.

Cubical dilatation of solids and of other liquids when that of mercury is given.

Relations between the volume, density, and elasticity of a gas, and its temperature.

Cubical dilatation of gases. Experiments of Gay-Lussac, Rudberg, and M. Regnault. Advantage of varying the methods of experimenting in these delicate researches.

Methods based upon the changes of volume under a constant pressure, and upon the changes of pressure for a constant volume.

The disagreement of these two methods is due to deviations from the law of Mariotte.

The constancy of the co-efficients of dilatation previously defined is only approximately true.

Necessity of employing two different co-efficients of dilatation according as consideration is being had to the variations of volume to a given pressure, or of pressure to a given volume.

Empirical formulæ for the dilatation of liquids.

Graphical constructions.

Lesson 10. Thermometers.

Construction of thermometers. Mercurial thermometer. Details of construction. Fixed points. Different scales; their relation. Arbitrary scales. 120 Change which takes place in the zero point. Different precautions to be observed in using the mercurial thermometer.

General want of comparability of mercurial thermometers with tubes of different material.

Air thermometers. They are comparable with one another within the limits of the errors of experiment, whatever the nature of the tube employed. This property entitles the air thermometer to a preference for all accurate measures. Comparison of the air and mercurial thermometers.

THERMOSCOPE, DIFFERENTIAL THERMOMETER, PYROMETERS, BREGUET’S THERMOMETER.

Lessons 11–13. Changes of State produced by Heat.

Exposition of the phenomena which accompany the liquefaction of solids and the solidification of liquids. Constancy of the temperature whilst the phenomenon is going on.

Sudden melting and freezing. Persistance of the liquid state beneath the melting point.

Influence of pressure.

Exposition of the phenomena which accompany the conversion of liquids or solids into vapor, and the inverse passage from the gaseous to the liquid or solid state. Constancy of the temperatures whilst the phenomenon is going on.

Influence of pressure.

Phenomena of ebullition in free space. Augmentation of the temperature and pressure in a confined space. Papin’s digester.

Properties of vapors in spaces and in gases. Saturated vapors. Their tension does not depend upon the space which they occupy, but only upon their temperature.

Effects of a diminution or increase of pressure without change of temperature; the same without change of pressure. Effects of lowering the temperature in a limited region of space occupied by vapor.

Tension of a saturated vapor at the boiling point of its liquid.

Measure of the tensions of the vapor of water. Experiments of Dalton, Gay-Lussac, Dulong, and Arago, and of M. Regnault.

Tables of the tensions of steam. Empirical formulæ. Graphical constructions.

It is assumed that non-saturated vapors are subject to the same laws as gases.

APPLICATIONS. CORRECTION OF THE BOILING-POINT IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF THERMOMETERS. BAROMETRICAL THERMOMETERS.

Lessons 14–16. Various Applications of the Laws previously established.

A phenomenon can not always be separated from the accessory phenomena which concur with it in producing the final result. Necessity of corrections to render complex results comparable inter se.

Density of solids when regard is had to the temperature and weight of the gases displaced by them.

Precautions to be attended to in the experiments. Empirical formulæ for the 121 density of liquids. Maximum density of water. The temperature corresponding to the maximum must be determined graphically, or by interpolation.

Corrections for measures of capacity, for barometric measures.

The uncertainty of the corrections can not, in any considerable degree, affect the densities of solids and liquids.

Density of gases. Biot and Arago’s experiments. Special difficulties of the question. The uncertainty of the corrections may sensibly affect the results. Regnault’s method.

The same method may be applied to the determination of the co-efficient of dilatation for gases.

Density of vapors. Definition founded on the hypothetical application of the same laws to gases and vapors. Formulæ. Experimental method of Gay-Lussac and of Dumas. Corrections. Comparison of the two methods. Necessity of conducting the experiments at a distance from the saturation point. Latour’s experiments. Relations between the weight and volume of a gas, and its temperatures; between the weight and volume of a gas mixed with vapors, and its temperature. Various problems.

Hygrometry. Chemical hygrometry. Hygrometry by the dew-point. Psychrometry.

PROPAGATION OF HEAT.

Lessons 17–18. Propagation at a Distance.

Rapid propagation of heat at a distance, in vacuum, in gases, in certain liquid or solid mediums. Experiments which establish this.

Rays of heat. Velocity of propagation. Intensity of heat received at a distance. Intensity of heat received or emitted obliquely. Emitting power, power of absorption, reflection, diffusion. The emitting and absorbing power are expressible by the same number in terms of their proper units respectively.

Analysis of calorific radiations by absorption. Different effects of deathermanous or thermochroic medium. Different influences of increasing thicknesses of the combination of different mediums. Radiations proceeding from different sources, various effects of different mediums on these radiations.

The calorific radiations emanating from different sources, have all the characters of differently colored heterogeneous rays of light.

THEORY OF RADIATION AND OF THE DYNAMICAL EQUILIBRIUM OF TEMPERATURES. APPARENT REFLECTION OF COLD.

Lesson 19. Law of Cooling.

Definition of the rate of cooling. Many causes may conspire in the cooling of a body.

Cooling in space. Newton’s law only an approximation. Experimental investigation of the true law. Method to be followed in this investigation. The velocity of cooling is not a datum directly observable. It must be deduced provisionally from an empirical relation between the temperature and the time. Preliminary experiments. Course of the definitive experiments. Elementary experimental laws.

Hypothetical form of the function which expresses the velocity of cooling. To determine by means of the preceding experimental laws the unknown form 122 of the function which expresses the law of radiation. Relation between the temperatures and the times. This relation only contains data immediately observable, and may be verified à posteriori.

The contents which enter into the preceding relation depend upon thermometric constants and the nature of the radiating surface.

The contact of a gas modifies the law of cooling.

Lessons 20–21. Propagation by Contact.

Slow propagation of heat in the interior of bodies, in solids, liquids, and gases. Confirmatory experiments. Hypothesis of partial radiation. Theoretical law resulting from this hypothesis upon the decrease of temperatures in a solid limited by two indefinite parallel planes maintained at constant temperatures. Determination of the co-efficient of conductibility by the experimental realization of these conditions. This experiment determines a numerical value of the co-efficients; it is not of a nature to serve as a check upon the theoretical principles. Enunciation of the law resulting from the same theoretical principles upon the decrease of temperatures in a thin bar heated at one end.

CALORIMETRY.

Lessons 22–23. Specific Heats.

Comparison of the quantities of heat. The quantities of heat are not proportioned to the temperatures. Definitions of the unity of heat. General method of mixtures to estimate the quantities of heat. Experimental precautions and corrections.

Application of the general method of mixtures. Specific heats of solids and liquids. Law of the specific heat of atoms. Heat absorbed by expansion, restored by the compression of bodies. Experiments on gases. Specific heats of gases under constant pressure. Measure of specific heats of gases under constant pressure. Special difficulties of the question. Succinct indication of one of the methods. Specific heats to a constant volume.

Lesson 24. Latent Heat.

Component heat of liquids absorbed into the latent state during fusion, restored to the free state during solidification.

Influence of the viscous state. Latent heat of ice. Ice calorimeter; its defects.

Component heat of vapors, absorbed into the latent state during vaporization, restored to the free state during condensation. Measure of the latent heat of vapors. Regnault’s experiments.

Empirical laws on the latent heat of vaporization.

Applications of Calorimetry.

Means of producing heat or cold; 1, by changes in density; 2, by changes of state. Freezing mixtures. Vaporization of liquids. Condensation of vapors.

Steam-boilers. Warming by hot air and hot water. Various problems. Sensations produced by a jet of vapor.

Different physical and chemical sources of heat; percussion, friction, chemical combinations, animal heat, natural heat of the globe, solar heat, &c. It will be 123 remarked that mechanical work may become a source of heat, and heat a source of mechanical work.

STATICAL ELECTRICITY.—MAGNETISM.—STATICAL ELECTRICITY.

Lessons 25–27.

General phenomena. Distinction of bodies into conductors and non-conductors. Distinction of electricity into two kinds. Separation of the two electricities by friction. Hypothesis of electric fluids. Effects of vacuum of gases and vapors of points. Electrical attractions and repulsions. Electrization by influence. Case where the influenced body is already electrized. Sparks; power of points. Electrization by influence preceding the motion of light bodies.

Electroscopes.

Electrical machines of Van-Marum, Nairne, Armstrong.

Condenser. Accumulation of electricity upon its surface. Leyden jar. Batteries. Electrical discharges. Effects of electricity.

Condensing electroscope. Electrophorus.

Velocity of statical electricity.

Atmospherical electricity. Phenomena observed with a serene sky. Electricity of clouds. Storms. Lightning. Thunder. Effects of thunder. Return-shock. Lightning conductor.

Different sources of statical electricity.

MAGNETISM.

Lessons 28–30.

Natural magnets. Action upon iron and steel. Artificial magnets. The attractive action appears as if it were concentrated about the extremities of magnetic bars. First idea of poles.

Direction of a magnetized bar under the earth’s action. Reciprocal action of the poles of two magnets. Names given to the poles.

Phenomena of influence. Action of a magnet upon a bar of soft iron; upon a bar of steel. Coercive force. Effects of the rupture of a magnetized bar. Theoretical ideas on the constitution of magnets. More precise definition of the poles.

Action of the earth upon a magnet. The earth may be considered as a magnet. Its action may be destroyed by means of a magnet suitably placed. Astatic needles. The magnetic action of the earth is equivalent to a couple. Three constants define the couple of terrestrial action. Declination. Inclination. Intensity. Measure of the declination; of the inclination.

Magnetic metals. Influence of hammering, tempering, &c. Methods of magnetizing. Saturation. Loss of magnetism. Influence of heat. Magnetic lines. Armatures.

Magnetization by the earth’s influence. Means of determining the magnetic state of a body.

Measure of Magnetism and Electricity.

Lessons 31–32.

Coulomb’s balance. Distribution of magnetism on a magnetized bar; distribution 124 of electricity at the surface of isolated conductors. Comparative discussion of the conditions of the two problems and the methods of experiment.

Laws of the magnetic attractions and repulsions. Law of electric attractions and repulsions. Comparative discussion of the conditions of the two problems, and the methods of experiment.

Determination of the law of magnetic attractions and repulsions by the method of oscillations.

Comparison of the magnetic intensity at different points of the earth’s surface.

Lessons 33–34. Revision.

Considerations on the totality of the subjects of the course.

SECOND YEAR.

DYNAMICAL ELECTRICITY.—GALVANISM.

Lessons 1–2.

Chemical sources of electricity. Experimental proofs. Arrangement devised by Volta to accumulate, at least in part, at the extremities of a heterogeneous conductor the electricity developed by chemical actions.

Pile. Tension at the two isolated extremities; at one single isolated extremity; at the two extremities reunited by a conductor. Continuous current of electricity. Poles. Direction of the current, &c.

Various modifications of the pile of Volta. Woollaston’s pile, Münch’s pile, &c. Dry piles; their application to the electroscope.

Principal effects of electricity in motion, and means of making the currents perceptible. Experiment of Oersted. Galvanoscopes.

Currents produced by heat in heterogeneous circuits. Thermo-electric piles. Thermometric graduation of thermo-electric piles.

Currents produced by the sources of statical electricity.

PROPERTIES OF CURRENTS.

Lesson 3.   1. Chemical Actions.

Definitions. Phenomena of decomposition and transference. Reaction of the elements transferred upon electrodes of different kinds.

Principles of electrotyping.

Causes of the variation of the current in ordinary piles; means of remedying this; Daniell’s pile. Bunsen’s pile.

Lessons 4–8.   2. Mechanical Properties.

Reciprocal actions of rectilinear or sinuous currents parallel or inclined. Reaction of a current on itself.

Reciprocal actions of helices or solenoids. Continuous rotation of currents by their mutual action; by reaction. Analogy of magnets and solenoids. Electro-dynamical theory of magnetism. Action of magnets upon currents and solenoids. Action of currents upon magnets. Experiments of Biot and Savart. Continual rotation of a current by a magnet; of a magnet by a magnet.

Action of the earth upon currents; it acts as a rectilinear current directed from east to west, perpendicularly to the magnetic meridian.

125

Continual rotation of a current by the action of the earth.

Astatic conductors.

Lessons 9–10.   3. Magnetic Properties.

Action of an interposed conductor upon iron filings.

Electro-magnets. Magnetization temporary or permanent. Principles of the electric telegraph. Electrometers. Reference to diamagnetic phenomena.

4. Electro-motive Properties.

Phenomena of induction by currents, by magnets. Phenomena of magnetism in motion. Induction of a current upon itself.

Induction of different orders.

Interrupted currents. Clarke’s machine.

Lesson 11.   5. Calorific Properties.

Influence of the nature of the interposed conductor; of its ; of the intensity of the current. Unequal temperatures at the different junctions of a heterogeneous circuit.

6. Luminous Properties.

Incandescence of solid conductors. Spectrum of the electric light. Voltaic arc. Transfer of ponderable matter. Action of the magnet upon the Voltaic arc.

7. Physiological Action of Currents.

Some words on this subject. Muscles and nerves. Actions of discontinuous currents. Reotomic contrivances.

Reometry.

Compass of sines, of tangents. Experimental graduation of galvanometers.

The dynamical intensity of a current diminishes when the length of a current increases. Reostat.

Laws of the dynamical intensity of a current in a homogeneous circuit. Reduced length and resistance of a circuit. Specific co-efficients of resistance. Laws of the dynamic intensity of a current in a heterogeneous circuit.

The intensity of currents is in the inverse ratio of the total reduced length, and proportional to the sum of the electromotive forces. Formula of the pile. Discussion of the case of hydro-electric piles—thermo-electric piles. Conditions for the construction of a pile, with reference to the effects to be produced. Conditions for the construction of a galvanometer with reference to its intended application.

Laws of secondary currents in the simplest cases. The chemical intensity of a current is proportional to its dynamical intensity.

ACOUSTICS.

Lessons 12–15.

Noise, sound, quality of the sound, pitch, intensity, timbre. A state of vibration in a solid, liquid, or gaseous body is accompanied with the production of sound.

The pitch depends on the number of vibrations. Unison. Instruments for 126 counting the vibrations:—1st. Graphic method. 2nd. Toothed wheels. 3rd. Lever. Feeling of concord. Musical scale. Gamut. Limit of appreciable sounds.

Study of vibrating motions in solids. Vibrating cords. Vibrations transversal, longitudinal. Experimental laws. Sonometer.

Spontaneous division of a cord into segments. Fundamental sounds. Harmonic sounds.

Straight and curved rods. Transversal and longitudinal vibrations. Experimental laws. Division into segments. Nodes. Ventral segments. Membranes.

Plane and curved plates. The vibrations divide them into “concamerations.” Nodal lines. Harmonic sounds.

Study of the vibrations in liquids and in gases.

Theoretical ideas upon the propagation of a vibratory motion in indefinite elastic media, on an indefinite cylindrical tube. Waves of condensation of dilatation. Progressive nodes and ventral divisions. Laws of the intensities of sound. Direct measure of the velocity of the propagation of sound in water. Measure of the velocity of the propagation of sound in air. Formulæ without demonstration. Comparison of the formulæ with experiment.

Sonorous waves reflected in an indefinite medium.

Fixed nodes and ventral divisions. Sonorous waves reflected in closed and open tubes. Fixed nodes and ventral divisions; the vibratory state and density thereat.

Series of sounds afforded by the same tube. Effect of holes.

Sonorous reflected waves in rods. Series of sounds afforded by the same rod vibrating longitudinally. Indirect measure of the velocity of sound in gases, liquids, and solids.

Experiments on the communication of vibrating motion in heterogeneous mediums, on the general direction of the vibrating motion communicated.

Intensification of sounds. Interferences. Beats. Different stringed and wind instruments. Means of setting them in vibration.

A few words on the organs of voice and hearing. Incompleteness of our knowledge on this subject.

OPTICS.

Lessons 16–17. Propagation of Light.

Propagation of light in a straight line. Rays of light. Geometrical theory of shadows. Velocity of light. Rœmer’s observations. Laws of intensity of light. Photometers of Bouguer, Rumford. Intensity of oblique rays. Comparison of illuminating powers. Total brightness. Intrinsic brightness.

Reflection.

Reflection of light: its laws. Experimental demonstration. Images formed by one or more plane mirrors. To ascertain if a looking-glass has its two faces parallel.

Spherical mirrors. Foci, formulæ. Discussion. Images by reflection. Measure of the radius of a spherical mirror.

127

Definition of caustics by reflection. Definition of the two spherical aberrations in mirrors.

Woollaston’s goniometer.

Lesson 18. Refraction.

Refraction of light in homogeneous mediums. Descartes’ law. Experimental demonstration for solids and liquids.

Inverse return of the rays. Successive refractions. Indices of transmission in terms of the principal indices. Consequences of Descartes’ law. Total reflection. Manner of observing it.

Irregular refractions. Mirage.

Refraction is always accompanied with the accessory phenomenon of dispersion.

Geometrical consequences of the law of refraction. Focus of a plane surface. Focus of a medium bounded by two parallel plane surfaces; by two plane surfaces inclined in the form of a prism.

Foci of a spherical surface; of a medium limited by two spherical surfaces. Lenses.

Formula for lenses. Discussion. Varieties of lenses. Optic center. Images. Measure of the focal distance of lenses.

Definition of caustics by refraction. Definition of the two spherical aberrations of a lens.

Lessons 19–20. Dispersion.

Unequal refrangibility of the differently colored rays which compose white light. Analysis of heterogeneous light by the prisms. Newton’s method. Solar spectrum. Homogeneity of the different colors. Second refraction of a homogeneous pencil. Experiment with crossed prisms. Precautions to be attended to in the experiments. The spectrum, obtained by Newton’s method, differs from the spectrum produced at the focus of a lens placed between the prism and the picture, according to the method of Fraunhofer. Reasons of the comparative purity of this latter spectrum. Fraunhofer’s lines. Different spectra of different sources of heterogeneous light. Marginal iridescence of a large pencil of natural light traversing a prism. Dispersion of light by lenses. Iridescence of focal images. Recomposition of light, by means of a prism at the focus of a spherical mirror or a lens, by the rapid rotation of a plane mirror, by the rotation of a disk with party-colored sectors. Compound colors.

Chemical and calorific radiations accompany luminous radiations.

Analysis of light by absorption. Characteristic action of transparent colored mediums upon different sorts of compound light. Different influences of increasing thickness. Effects of differently colored mediums upon heterogeneous light. Effects of differently colored mediums upon homogeneous rays separated by the prism.

Lesson 21. Measure of the Indices of Refraction.

Determination of the indices of refraction.

1. In solids. Measure of the refracting angles. Minimum of deviation. Measure of the corresponding deviation. Use of Fraunhofer’s lines.

2. In liquids.

3. In gases. Special difficulties of the question. Experimental method. Biot’s and Arago’s experiments.

128

Any power whatever of the index of refraction diminished by unit is sensibly proportional to the density of the gas. Method of Dulong founded on this remark.

Lessons 22–23. Application of the preceding Laws.

Rainbow. Different orders of bow.

Achromatism.

Achromatic prisms. Diasperometer achromatism of lenses; how to verify it. Definition of secondary spectra: their nature gives the means of recognizing, whether flint or crown glass predominates, in an imperfectly achromatic lens.

Instruments essentially consisting of an achromatic lens. Magic lantern; megascope; solar microscope; camera obscura; collimators.

Vision.

Summary description of the principal optical parts of the eye. They act like the lens of a camera obscura to form an image upon the retina. Distinct vision; optometers; short sight; long sight; spectacles.

Binocular vision; perspective peculiar to each eye; estimation of distances; sensation of solidity; stereoscope; estimation of magnitudes.

PERSISTENCE OF IMPRESSIONS; DIVERS EXPERIMENTS.

Lessons 24–26. Optical Instruments.

Camera lucida. A lens is necessary to reduce to the same apparent distance the two objects seen simultaneously. Instruments to assist the sight; simple microscope; the magnifying power; distinctness; field; advantage of a diaphragm; it modifies the field and the brightness variously according to its position.

Woollaston’s double glass; its advantages.

General principle of compound dioptrical instruments.

Compound microscope; experimental measure of its magnifying power, by means of the diaphragm, by means of the camera lucida.

Astronomical telescope; object glass; simple eye-glass. Necessity for a diaphragm; its place; the wires, their place; optic axis of a telescope. Parallax of the threads of the wires; magnifying power of the object-glass; of the eye-glass; field of view of a telescope.

Optic ring; different methods of measuring the magnifying power.

Distinctness of a telescope; night-glass.

Different distances of drawing out the eye-glass for short-sighted and long-sighted observers.

Different sorts of eye-pieces; positive eye-pieces; ordinary double eye-piece of the astronomical telescope. Ramsden’s eye-piece; treble eye-piece of the terrestrial telescope. Negative eye-pieces; simple eye-piece of Galileo. Compound ditto of Huyghens; advantages and disadvantages of these different combinations; general principle of catadioptrical instruments.

Lessons 27–29. Double Refraction.

Crystallized mediums do not all act upon light like homogeneous mediums.

Double refraction of Iceland spar: the extraordinary image turns round the ordinary image. The ordinary and extraordinary rays cross at the interior of the crystal.

129

Huyghens’ construction; measure of the ordinary and extraordinary indices of refraction; attractive and repulsive crystals; a ray falling perpendicularly does not always bifurcate in a camera with parallel faces, nor in a prism. Definition of uniaxial and biaxial crystals.

The dispersion of the ordinary ray differs from that of the extraordinary ray.

The two rays are unequally absorbed in many colored mediums. Tourmaline.

Doubly-refracting prisms; their construction. Use of doubly-refracting prisms to measure apparent diameters, &c.

Lessons 30–31. Polarization.

Successive refractions in doubly-refracting prisms. Special properties of the two rays emerging from the first doubly refracting crystal. Polarization by double refraction.

Reflection from transparent media polarizes the light partially or wholly according to the incidence. Brewster’s law. Reflection of polarized light from a transparent medium.

Simple refraction partially polarizes the light. Many successive refractions polarize it almost totally. Piles of glasses.

Different methods to obtain a ray of polarized light, 1st, by reflection; 2nd, by simple refraction; 3rd, by double refraction, by eliminating one of the refracted pencils;—by a screen,—by total reflection, Nicol’s prism, by absoption, tourmaline.

Distinctive characters of light completely or partially polarized.

Lessons 32–34. Theory of Undulations.

Hypothesis of luminous undulations.

Vibratory state of a simple ray of homogeneous light. Vibratory state at the inter of two simple rays of homogeneous light intersecting at a very small angle.

Experimental proofs in support of this hypothesis:

1st. Experiment with interferences, fringes. Their breadth is different for different colors; they give the various colors of the prism in white light. The alternately bright and dark sheets are hyperboloids of revolution. The measure of the fringes give the means of estimating the lengths of the undulations corresponding to different colors.

2nd. Colored rings of Newton, observed by reflection, by refraction. Law of the diameters; these vary in absolute length for different colors. Variously colored rings with white light. Reflected rings with a white spot at the center.

The theory of the undulations does not apply merely to theses phenomena. Explication of the laws of reflection and refraction. Definition of polarization in the system of waves. Elementary application of double refraction and the polarization which accompanies it in uniaxial crystals when the face of the crystal is parallel to the axis, and the plane of incidence normal or parallel to this axis.

Chemical and Calorific Radiations.

Chemical and calorific radiations are subject, like luminous radiations, to the laws of reflection, refraction, dispersion, double refraction, polarization, interferences.

Lessons 35–36. Revision.

Considerations on the totality of the subjects of the course.

130

MANIPULATIONS IN PHYSICS.

The practical exercises which constitute the subject of this programme will be performed in part by the pupils under the direction of the professors and répétiteurs, in part by the professors and répétiteurs, with the coöperation of the pupils.

FIRST YEAR.

Use of various instruments, designed for measuring lengths. Experiments on weight with Atwood’s machine, the inclined plane, Morin’s apparatus, and the pendulum.

Some experiments on elasticity.

Various verifications of the principles of hydrostatics and hydrodynamics.

Construction of aerometers.

Construction of a barometer, of a manometer. Various verifications of the law of Mariotte.

Various experiments with the air-pump.

Determination the density of solids or liquids by different methods.

Construction of a thermometer.

Experiments on the dilatation of liquids and solids by means of the ordinary thermometer and by means of the statical thermometer.

Experiments upon the dilatation of air by various methods.

Experiments upon the tension of vapors by different methods.

Determination of the density of vapors and gases by various methods.

Leading experiments on calorific radiation.

Experiments on cooling.

Determination of specific heats, heats of fusion, heats at which bodies pass into vapor.

Cooling mixtures.

Use of the chemical hygrometer, the wet bulb hygrometer.

Rehearsal of the leading experiments on magnetism.

To magnetize a needle, to reverse its poles.

Rehearsal of the principal experiments of statical electricity.

Experiments verificatory of the laws of electricity and magnetism.

Use of compasses.

SECOND YEAR.

Experiments upon the chemical actions of poles.

Leading experiments in electro-dynamics.

Leading experiments upon the magnetic properties of currents.

Experiments on induction.

Experiments on the calorific and luminous actions of currents.

Quantitative experiments on the laws of currents.

Experiments on the propagation of sound; on the vibrations of rods of plane or curved plates, membranes, sonorous tubes.

Experiments on mirrors, plane or curved.

Experiments on lenses. Experiments on the decomposition of light by the prism—by absorption. Measures of the indices of the refraction of solids. Use of the magnifying glass and microscope; measure of the magnifying power. Use of different telescopes, with and without corrections. Measure of the magnifying power. Experiments on double refraction and polarization. Experiments on interferences and colored rings.

131

ORGANIZATION AND CONDITION IN 1869.

The organization of the school, which is fixed by a Decree dated Nov. 30th, 1863, is of a military character. There is a staff of military officers in addition to, and quite separate from, the staff employed in the duties of instruction. The pupils wear uniform, which, however, is more civil than military in appearance. They are formed into four companies which together constitute a battalion; and, although they are not actually subject to the penal code of the army, the discipline maintained and the punishments inflicted are entirety military in character.

The military establishment remains exactly as it was in 1856, and consists of:

The Commandant, a General Officer, usually of the Artillery or the Engineers, at present a General of Artillery.

A Second Commandant, a colonel or lieutenant-colonel, chosen from among the former pupils of the school; at present a colonel of Engineers.

Three captains of Artillery and three captains of Engineers, as inspectors of studies, chosen also from former pupils of the school.

Six adjutants (adjudants), non-commissioned officers, usually such as have been recommended for promotion.

Slight changes have been made in the civil establishment; it now consists of:—

1. A Director of Studies, at present a colonel of Engineers.

2. Seventeen professors,12 (two additional professors for history) seventeen Répétiteurs and assistant Répétiteurs, and five drawing masters. Of the 17 professors, two are at present officers of Engineers, and one an officer of Artillery; the remainder are civilians, of whom three are members of the Academy of Sciences.

3. Five examiners for admission, and five for conducting the examinations at the school. All of these at present are civilians.

4. An administrative staff consisting of a treasurer, librarian, &c.; and a medical staff.

The general control or supervision of the school is vested, under the War Department, in four great boards or councils, viz.:—

1. A Board of Administration, composed of the Commandant, the Second Commandant, the Director of Studies, two professors, two captains of the military staff, and two members of the administrative staff. This board has the superintendence of all the financial business, and all the minutiæ of the internal administration of the school.

2. A Board of Discipline, consisting of the Second Commandant, the Director of Studies, three captains of the Military Staff, and one major of the army, selected from former pupils of the school.13 The duty of this board is to decide upon cases of misconduct.

3. A Board of Instruction, whose members are, the Commandant, the Second Commandant, the Director of Studies, the Examiners of Students, the Professors, and two captains of the Military Staff; and whose chief duty is to make recommendations relating to ameliorations in the studies and the programmes of admission and of instruction in the school to—

132

4. A Board of Improvement (Conseil de Perfectionnement), charged with the general control of the studies, and formed of:—

The Commandant, president,

The Second Commandant,

The Director of Studies,

Two delegates from the Naval Department,

Two delegates from the Department of Public Works,

One delegate from the Home or Finance Department,

Three delegates from the War Department,

Two members of the Academy of Sciences,

Two examiners of students,

Three professors of the school.

The delegates from the public departments are appointed by the respective ministers; the members of the Academy, the examiners, and the professors are selected by the Minister of War. The real management of the school, so far as the course of instruction is concerned, is in the hands of the Conseil de Perfectionnement; it will be seen that of the 18 members composing it more than half are entirely independent of the school, and are men of eminence in the various public services for which the instruction at the Polytechnic is preparatory. One of the chief duties of the Council is to see that the studies form a good preparation for those of the more special schools (Ecoles d’ Application) for the civil and military services; and the eminent character of its members gives great weight to the recommendations they make to the Minister of War.

The annual expenses of the school, as extracted from the Budget for 1869, are as follows:—

Francs.
Pay of staff, professors, &c., 331,850

Instruction, maintenance, examination of candidates, clothing, books, &c.,

321,073
Francs.
Outfits for 30 new pupils at 600 francs each 18,000

Allowances (premières mises) to 25 exhibitioners on admission to the military services at 750 fr. each

18,750
  36,750
Maintenance and repair of buildings, 30,000
 
Total sum charged in the schools estimate, 719,673

Add regimental pay of 28 officers and non-commissioned officers employed at the school,

85,515
 
Total expenditure 805,188
Deduct repayments from pupils, 237,000
 
Cost to the State, 568,188
Or about 22,720l.

The chief changes that have been made in regard to the course of instruction since 1856, may be summarized as follows:

1. The more elementary portions of chemistry and physics which are required in the entrance examination, but which were formerly repeated at the school, have been omitted. The course of instruction in these subjects is now confined to the more advanced portions which do not enter into the entrance examination.

2. The mathematical courses have in some points been slightly curtailed, and the number of lectures in French literature and German have been diminished. By the modifications thus made in the programmes, it has been found possible to shorten the whole course of study and to increase the length of the vacations.

3. The subject of “Military Art,” which formerly entered into the final examination 133 is no longer taken into consideration in determining the order of merit of the pupils. In this respect the course of instruction may be said to have even less of a military character than formerly. Topographical drawing is the single military subject which has any influence on the final classification of the pupils, and this only to a very slight extent.

4. History has been introduced as a subject of instruction. This change was made in 1862. The course comprises general history, both ancient and modern, but more especially the history of France in modern times. The introduction of this subject appears to have arisen partly from a feeling that an acquaintance with history was a necessary element of a liberal education, and partly from a wish to meet, to some extent, an objection often made to the Polytechnic course of instruction, that it was too deficient in studies of a literary character. History, however, like military art, is evidently still regarded as a subject of only secondary importance and has no influence on the final classification.

5. A diminution has been made in the number of examinations during the course, by the suppression of one of the half-yearly examinations by the professors (interrogations générales, as distinct from the interrogations particulières) in each year. Further reference will be made to this point when speaking of the examinations at the school.

6. The importance of written exercises in determining the respective merits of the pupils has been decreased, apparently from the difficulty of establishing a security that such compositions were the unaided work of the individual.

The following table shows the present course of instruction during the two years, and the alterations which have been made in the number of lectures in each subject since 1856:—

Subject.—First Year’s Course. Lectures in—1868. 1856.
Analysis Differential calculus, 25 28
Integral calculus, 18 20
Descriptive geometry and geometrical drawing, 32 38
Mechanics and machinery, 40 40
Physics, comprising heat and electricity, 30 34
Chemistry:—The metals, 30 38
Astronomy and geodesy, 30 35
French composition and literature, 25 30
History, 25 0*
German, 25 30
Figure and landscape drawing, 48 50
Second Year’s Course.
Analysis:—Integral calculus, 32 32
Stereotomy:—Geometrical drawing of constructions in timber and masonry, 28 32
Mechanics:—Dynamics, hydrostatics, and machinery, 40 42
Physics:—Acoustics, optics, and heat, 30 36
Chemistry:—Continuation of the metals and organic chemistry, 30 38
Architecture and buildings, construction of roads, canals, and railways, 40 40
French composition and literature, 25 30
History, 25 0*
German, 25 30
Military art, 20 20
Topography, 2 10
Figure and landscape drawing, 48 48

* Introduced in 1862.

134

In connection with several of the courses, such as descriptive geometry, stereotomy, machinery, and architecture, much drawing is done by the pupils; hand sketches are taken of the diagrams shown in the lecture-room, and finished drawings are afterwards executed in the salles d’étude. In addition to this, 30 attendances of two or three hours each, distributed over the two years, are especially devoted to drawing more elaborate plans and elevations of architectural constructions and machinery. The practical applications of the theoretical instruction are limited to manipulations in the laboratory in connection with the course of lectures on chemistry and physics. Towards the close of the second year the pupils are also taken to visit some of the large manufacturing establishments in Paris, in order to gain a practical acquaintance with machinery.

All the subjects taught at the school are obligatory, but history and military art, as already stated, have no influence in determining the order of merit of the pupils in the final result.

The only instruction in practical military exercises, which is compulsory upon all, is that in drill. The pupils are exercised under arms in company drill, and are also occasionally drilled as a battalion; but very little importance is attached to this point—the only really military portion of their training. Drill goes on only for about three months in each year during the spring and summer, and even during this brief period only takes place about twice a week. By the regulations of the school the pupils should be exercised in musketry practice, but although they are armed with the Chassepot rifle this regulation is never carried out. Instruction is given in fencing and gymnastics, but attendance at both is voluntary, and scarcely more than half the pupils take advantage of it. Neither riding nor swimming are taught at the school.

The school year commences about the 1st of November, and terminates about the first of August. Some seven months of the year are given up to lectures and the ordinary routine of study; about two months are occupied with the annual examinations and private preparation for them; the remaining three months—August, September, and October—are the vacation. In addition to this long vacation, from eight to twelve days are allowed after the periodical examination, which takes place near the end of February, at the close of the first portion of each year’s study.

One peculiarity in the arrangements of the school is that the subjects of each year’s course are not all studied simultaneously. The lectures in the main subjects of instruction—those which, as a rule, present the most difficulty—are divided into courses which continue only during a certain portion of each year. Thus in the junior division, analysis and descriptive geometry are the mathematical subjects studied during the first three months, or three months and a half. The course in them is then concluded; an examination by the professors (interrogation générale) is held in these subjects, and they are laid aside for the remainder of the year, though they enter into the examination at the close of the year. Their place is then taken by a course of lectures in mechanics and geodesy. Similarly in the second year, analysis and mechanics are the subjects of the first course of lectures, at the termination of which there is an examination; and for the remainder of the year no further lectures in them are given, stereotomy and military art taking their place.

The subjects involving as a rule less difficulty—such as history, French literature, German, and drawing—are spread over the whole year, forming generally the evenings’ occupation.

135

THE SPECIAL MILITARY SCHOOLS OF FRANCE.

137

SCHOOL FOR ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS
AT METZ.

HISTORY AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION,

The first French Artillery School was founded in the time of Louis XIV. (in 1679) at Douai. It had but a short existence: and it was only in 1720 (under the Regency,) when the Royal Regiment of Artillery received a new organization, that schools of theory were permanently founded in each of the seven towns where there were garrisons of artillery. But no academy properly so called was established before that founded by D’Argenson at La Fère, in 1756, with a staff of two professors of mathematics, and two of drawing. This was transferred to Bapaume, near the Flemish frontier, in 1766, re-transferred to La Fère, and suppressed, among other schools, at the beginning of the Revolution.

Of early Engineer Schools there was only one, the very distinguished School of Mézières, near the northern frontier. This was founded in 1749, also under the ministry of D’Argenson; Monge was a professor there; and it had a very high reputation down to its suppression in the Revolution.

When the wars of the Revolution broke out, Provisional Schools for giving a brief course of rapid instruction was established at Metz for the engineers, and at Chalons-sur-Marne for the artillery. These had to supply, at a great disadvantage, the officers needed for the protection of the invaded frontier.

It was intended originally that the Polytechnic, established in 1794, should send engineers direct to the army; but it was quickly found to be a better plan to allow the pupils destined for this service first to spend some little time at Metz; which thus, in October, 1795, became a School of Application for Engineers. The artillery pupils in like manner went to Châlons. This separate system of two Schools of Application continued till 1802, when the establishment at Châlons was united with that of Metz, and Metz became what it has since continued to be, the seat of the United School of Application for the two services. The Polytechnic students who 138 select the Artillerie de terre, Artillerie de mer, or the Génie militaire, enter here to receive the special and professional instruction deemed requisite to fit them for actual employment.

The students quitting the Polytechnic in the manner described in the account of that school, at the average age of twenty-one, enter the School of Application, with the provisional rank, the uniform, and the pay of sub-lieutenants (sous-lieutenants.) The ordinary term of residence is two years. Under special circumstances this may be shortened; and in case of illness or want of application individual students are occasionally retained for a third year. Each new body of students, each admission or promotion, is classified at the end of the first year, and the students composing it are arranged in order of merit in accordance with the reports of the professors, but without an examination; at the close of the second year they pass a final examination before the Board of Officers, and are definitively placed in the corps they have chosen, the artillery or engineers, according to the order of merit. They are allowed to count, as regards retirement from the service and towards military decorations, four year’s service on account of the two years passed at the Polytechnic School, and of the time passed in preparing for admission to it, reckoning from the day of their admission to the School of Application.

Metz is a fortified place on the Prussian frontier, the seat of war at the time of the school’s first foundation; it is on the line of railway to Mannheim, about thirty miles from the point where this branch diverges from the main line to Strasburg. The Moselle flows through the town, and is employed, with its little affluent the Seille, in the military defenses. The garrison numbers 10,000 men; there is an Arsenal, a school of Pyrotechny for the manufacture of rockets, two Regimental Schools, one of Artillery and the other of Engineers. The School of Application occupies buildings erected on the site, and partly the original buildings themselves, of a suppressed Benedictine monastery. Three sides of the cloistered monastic quadrangle are devoted to the offices, lecture-rooms, galleries and halls of study. A fourth, formerly the ancient church, is converted into a salle des manœuvres. There is an adjoining residence for the commandant; and a separate modern building, four stories in height, affords lodging to the young men.

The salle des manœuvres is a large area under a lofty roof, rising to the whole height of the buildings of the quadrangle; it contains artillery of various descriptions, mortars, field and siege guns placed as in a battery, and is amply large enough to allow cannon to be 139 moved and exercises performed when the state of the weather may make it desirable.

The amphitheaters or lecture rooms, much on the same system as those at the Polytechnic, are two in number, one for each of the two divisions. Officers of the artillery and engineers who are in garrison, are entitled, if they please, to attend the lectures, and other officers also may be admitted by permission.

The galleries, partly on the ground floor, partly on the first floor, contain very good collections of models of artillery, ancient and modern, of sets of small arms, of tools, of locks, barrels and other portions of muskets in various stages of the process of their manufacture, of specimens of carpentry and roofing, of minerals, of models of fortifications, bridges, coffer-dams, locks, &c.

The library on the first floor has an adjoining reading room; and near it is the examination room, of which further mention will be made. The three halls of study (salles d’étude) on the first floor are on a different plan from those of the Polytechnic, each one being large enough to accommodate a whole division (seventy students.) Three rooms are also provided for the professors to prepare their lectures in.

The barracks, on the opposite side of the open space used for drill and exercises, form a lofty and handsome building, entered by separate staircases, the ground-floor rooms of each being assigned to a servant, who undertakes to provide attendance for all the young men lodging in the rooms above. The rooms are comfortable, mostly double-bedded, the bedroom serving also as a sitting room, and a small adjoining closet being used for washing, &c. Twenty or twenty-two appear to be thus accommodated on each staircase; there are lodgings altogether for one hundred and forty-five. A certain number of the senior sub-lieutenants would, probably, on the arrival of the new cadets from the Polytechnic, be removed to lodge in the town.

There is a riding-school adjoining the court; stables, for thirty-three horses, which are kept for the use of the pupils, and lodgings for the attendants are provided in the neighborhood.

The mere description of the buildings shows at once that the system is different in many respects from that of the Polytechnic. Young men of twenty-one and twenty-two years of age, already holding provisional commissions in the service, receiving the pay and wearing the uniform of sub-lieutenants, are naturally allowed much greater freedom of action. They live, and partly also study, not in the halls of study, but in their own rooms; they take their 140 meals in the town, where they frequent the cafés and restaurants of their choice. The rappel summons them every morning to rise and attend a roll-call at half-past five or six; military exercises, riding, or interrogations, similar to the interrogations particulières, require the presence of a portion of the number, but the rest are free to return to their rooms. At ten they have to attend either the day’s lecture, followed by employment in the halls of study, till four o’clock P.M., or they proceed at once to the halls of study, and set to work on the drawings, designs, projects, &c., which are described hereafter in the account of the studies. From four to half-past five P.M.; drill, exercises, and riding occupy a portion of the number, probably those who were not called for in the morning. After half-past five they are left to themselves.

This ordinary routine of studies is interrupted in the summer months by the occurrence of expeditions for making surveys, and for measuring and sketching machines in manufactories. The young men are sent, two together, to survey (lever à boussole;) singly for the reconnaissance sketch (lever à vue ;) and generally, a certain number are distributed about a district not too large for an officer to make his round in it, and see each day that all are at work. The railways afford considerable facilities; the expeditions never occupy more than ten days at a time, but they may be extended as far as Strasburg.

There are no répétiteurs in the school; but the system of interrogations particulières is carried on; and an examination by the professor and an assistant professor takes place after, about, every eight or ten lectures.

THE STAFF AND GOVERNMENT.

The Staff of the Institution consists of—

1 General Officer, at present a General of Brigade of Artillery, as Commandant.

1 Colonel or Lieutenant-Colonel, Second in Command and Director of Studies, at present a Lieutenant-Colonel of Engineers.

1 Major of Artillery.

1 Major of Engineers.

5 Captains of Artillery.

8 Captains of Engineers.

1 Surgeon (Médecin-Major.)

The Commandant is taken alternately from the Artillery and Engineers, and the command lasts for five years only.

The Second in Command is always chosen from that arm of the service which does not supply the Commandant.

The inferior officers of each rank are taken in equal numbers from the two arms.

141

The Staff of Instructors is as follows:—

1 Professor of Artillery, at present a Captain of Artillery.

1 Assistant   ditto   also a Captain of Artillery.

1 Professor of Military Art, charged also with the Course of Military Legislation and Administration (a Captain of Engineers.)

1 Professor of Permanent Fortification and of the Attack and Defense of places (a Captain of Engineers.)

1 Assistant   ditto   ditto   (a Captain of Engineers.)

1 Professor of the Course of Topography and Geodesy (a Captain of Engineers.)

1 Professor of Sciences applied to the Military Arts.

1 Professor of Mechanics applied to Machines (a Captain of Artillery.)

1 Professor of the Course of Construction (a Captain of Engineers.)

1 Assistant   ditto.

1 Professor of the German language (a civilian.)

1 Professor of Veterinary Art and Riding (a Captain of Artillery.)

1 Assistant   ditto   (a civilian.)

1 Drawing Master, Chief of the Drawing Department (a civilian.)

In all, nine Professors, four Assistant Professors, and one Drawing Master.

The School employs in addition an administrative staff, consisting of—

A Treasurer,
A Librarian,
both of whom must have been Officers in the Artillery or Engineers.

A Principal Clerk.

An Assistant Librarian.

Two Storekeepers, intrusted with the materiel belonging to the two arms.

One skilled Mechanic.

One skilled Lithographer.

One Fencing Master.

Clerks and draughtsmen are provided as required.

The school is under the general superintendence of two hoards or councils, the Superior Council and the Administrative Council.

The Superior Council consists of the General Commandant, as President, the Second in Command, the Director of Studies, as Vice-President; the Major of Artillery, and the Major of Engineers, as permanent members; two Captains of the Establishment, one of each arm; two Military Professors, one of each arm; and one Captain of the Establishment; these five last being all removable at the General Inspections.

The Superior Council has the duty of drawing up the programme of the studies of the year, of suggesting changes in the regulations relating both to studies and discipline, all subject to the approval of the Minister of War; of preparing at the end of the year the classified list of the students, drawn up according to their conduct and progress in their studies, and of pointing out to the Jury of Examiners any students who should go again through the courses 142 of the year, and stay in consequence an additional year at the school.

When questions relating to the instruction are brought before the Superior Council, the whole body of military professors attend and take part in the proceedings, and the Council is thus said to be constituted as a Board or Council of Instruction. Improvements are here suggested, and are subsequently submitted to the Jury of Examiners, and to the Minister of War; the value to be attached, in the system of marks or credits, to each particular course of study is determined; a statement is drawn up showing what printed works, models, &c., are wanted. The budget itself, to be submitted to the Minister of War, is finally drawn up by the Superior Council in its ordinary sittings.

The Administrative Council, composed of the Second in Command as President, the two Majors of Artillery and of Engineers, one Captain and one Military Professor, and the Treasurer as Secretary without the right of voting, takes cognizance of all the financial and other business matters of the school.

SUBJECTS AND METHOD OF STUDY.

The studies at Metz consist of topography and geodesy, including military drawing and surveying under special circumstances; field fortification, military art and legislation, permanent fortification, and the attack and defense of fortified places, accompanied by a sham siege, without, however, executing the details practically on the ground; architecture, as applicable to military buildings and fortifications; the theory and practice of construction, and artillery. The programmes of these studies are inserted at length in the Appendix.

The instruction is given principally (as at the Polytechnic) by means of a series of lectures, and the knowledge which the students have acquired is first directly tested by requiring them to execute various kinds of surveys of ground, either with or without the use of instruments; to prepare drawings of buildings, workshops, and machines in full detail (plan, elevation, and s) from the measurements they have recorded in their note-books or on their sketches, and to accompany such drawings with descriptive memoirs of all particulars and calculations that may be necessary to exhibit their purpose or efficiency; to draw up projects and lay out works of field and permanent fortification, or of those of attack or defense of a particular place on certain given data, or according to the nature of the ground; to design a military building, bridge, 143 machine, or piece of ordnance, accompanied by estimates and descriptive memoirs, showing in what manner the instructions and conditions under which it was drawn up have been complied with; and to prepare a project for the amelioration of the works of defense of a specified portion of a fortified place known to be defective in some respects.

The instruction during the first year’s residence is common to the two arms; and the time is appropriated in the following manner, namely:—

  Days.
Military art and legislation, 33
Topography and geodesy, 47
Field fortification, 39
Permanent fortification, 88
Theory and practice of construction, 77
Total, 284

The sous-lieutenants who complete their first year’s work are allowed nearly a month’s vacation during November.

The instruction given to the Artillery and Engineers during the second year’s residence is not entirely the same, as will be seen by comparing the accompanying table of the year’s study:—

  Artillery.
Days.
Engineers.
Days.
Military art and legislation, 2 2
Topography and geodesy, 28 28
Attack and defense of places, 44 44
Permanent fortification, 44 129
Artillery, machines, &c., 81
Theory and practice of construction, 46 42
  245 245
Brought forward from first year, 284 284
Total, 529 529

We should not omit to state that there is a short course on the Veterinary Art.

The lectures, as before said, begin at 10 A.M., and they last usually an hour and a half, and are followed by work in the halls of study. It would appear, however, that very frequently the day’s occupation consists simply of work in the halls of study (or occasionally out of the school buildings, when the students are sent on some excursion;) and, accordingly, in giving the account of the studies, a day or day’s work will sometimes mean a lecture followed by drawing or other employment, sometimes this drawing or other employment without any lecture preceding. Taking a general 144 average, the proportion appears to be about two lectures to five séances, i.e., sittings without lectures.

The system will be better understood by referring to the accompanying tables, which are translated from the Project for the Employment of Time for the year 1851–2, submitted for the approval of the Minister of War. The dates in the first column indicate the days of the commencement of each particular study. The school year, it should be said, begins on the 1st of December.

EMPLOYMENT OF TIME FOR THE YEARS 1851–1852.

Att Attendances.

LbW Lectures before Work.

TL Total of Lectures.

Month and Date. Second Division. First Year’s Instruction. Number of
Att LbW TL
December 1
December 2

Lectures on Military Art in Topography—Conventional Tints,

2    
December 4

Study of Hill Drawing (in sepia with contour lines,)

2    
December 6 Military Art, Plate 1 . . . 5
Plate 2 . . . 5
Plate 3 . . . 5
Plate 4 . . . 5
Plate 5 . . . 9
 
29 4 39
January 12 Front of Cormontaige 24 3 13
February 9 Project of Field Fortification, Plate 1. Plan of the whole, . . . 3
Plate 2. Organization of a work, . . . 8
Plate 3. Details of Construction, . . . 4
Memoir . . . 4
 
19 5 7
March 3

Plan of Stability of Revetments, &c.,

9 9 9
March 13

Study of the Drawing showing the effect,

8 1 1
March 23 Plan of a Building, Out-of-door work, . . . 9
Laying down and drawing,
Memoir, . . . 23
 
32    
April 29

Topographical Triangulation,

4 4 6
May 5

Defilement and Profiling on the Ground,

3    
  Project of a Building, Sketches, . . . 14
Drawing, . . . 24
Memoir, . . . 4
Estimate, . . . 3
 
45 12 22
June 28 Survey with a plane-table, Out-of-door work . . . 0
Laying down and drawing, . . . 3
 
13 1  
 

One day free in case of bad weather,

1    
July 14

To find the Variation of the Needle,

1 1  
July 17 Survey of Ground with the Compass, Out-of-door work, . . . 8
Laying down and drawing, . . . 2
 
10 1  
 

One day free in case of bad weather,

1    
August   2

Reconnaissance Plan—Out-of-door work,

6 1  
 

One day free in case of bad weather,

1    
August 10 Study of Shaded Drawing (Hachures and colored.) 8 1  
August 18

Laying down and drawing the Survey made with the Compass,

2    
August 20 Project of Fortification on Level Ground, Plate 1 . . . 6
Plate 2 . . . 30
Memoir, . . . 6
 
42 3 19
September  
October 8 Project of Fortification on Hilly Ground, Plate 1 . . . 19
Memoir, . . . 3
 
22 8 10
Nov.   3 Last day of week,      
Nov.   6

Leave for their Vacation,

     
 

  There remains therefore in this division:—1st. Three free days in case of bad weather; one after each survey. 2nd. Two days at the end of the year, the 4th and 5th November. Total five free day.

     
  Total of the days employed 279 + 5 days free, 284    
145

EMPLOYMENT OF TIME FOR THE YEAR 1851–1852.

Month and Date. First Division. Second Year’s Instruction. Number of
Att LbW TL
  Brought forward, 284    
Dec. 6

Laying down the First Survey by Reconnaissance,

8    
Dec. 16

Attack and Defense:—Plate, Batteries, with Plan and Sections of Detail,

4 5 6
Dec. 20 Ditto, Plate 1, . . . 25
Journal, . . . 2
Plate 2 . . . 13
 
40 6 20
January      
Feb. 7

Designs and Constructions of Revetments, Arches, &c.,

9 9 9
Feb.18 Project and Permanent Fortification in Hilly Ground, Plate 1 . . . 19
Memoir, . . . 3
Plate 2 . . . 8
 
30 8 19
  SPECIAL WORKS.      
  ARTILLERY. ENGINEERS.      
March 25

Measurement and Drawings of a Cannon,

Project of Fortification in hilly ground, Plate 2 cont.

12    
April 8

Measurement of a Workshop,

Out-of-door Work, 9 30 30
April 19

Laying down the Measurement, . . . 28

Laying down the Measurement, . . . 24

   
May 18  

Project of Fortification in hilly ground, Plate 3, . . . 14

97 2 2
May 24

Project for Machines, . . . 14

 
June 4  

Abstracting and calculating Measurements, . . . 3

June 8   Plate 4, . . . 11
June 9

Questions in Artillery, . . . 5

 
 

1st. Measurement of Matériel, Gun Carriages, &c., . . . 8

Register of the removal of Earth, . . . 3

  Laying down ditto, . . . 10 Estimate, . . . 2
    Memoir, . . . 2
    Project for Improvements, Plate 1 . . . 30
Plate 2 . . . 6
Memoir, . . . 2
 
   
July 6

2nd. Measurement of Matériel, . . . 8

     
July 15

Project for a Cannon, . . . 24

     
August 12

Second Reconnaissance Survey,

     
 

Out-of-door Work and Tracing of the Lines on the Reconnaissance Plan,

7    
 

One day free in case of bad weather,

1    
August 21 Geodetical Calculations, 4    
August 26

Laying down the Reconnaissance Survey,

8    
Sept. 4

Memoir on Entrenched Lines,

1    
Sept. 6

Tracing or laying out Camps,

1    
Sept. 7

Operations of a Sham Siege,

13    
  One day free, 1    
Sept.19

Preparing for the Examination,

     
October        
Nov. 1 Examination for leaving,      
  Total of the days employed, 522 + 7 days free 529    

EXAMINATION AND CLASSIFICATION.

FINAL EXAMINATION.

About six weeks of free or voluntary study is allowed, immediately prior to the Final Examination, for the sub-lieutenants to prepare for their last effort.

146

The examination which takes place prior to their leaving the School of Application, is entirely conducted by a board of six officers, under the presidency of a general officer alternately of the artillery or engineers, the remaining members of the board consisting of a general officer of each corps and three field officers of these corps; the last three being specially charged with the duty of examining. It takes place in a room set apart for the purpose, with a small interior room in connection with it, into which the members of the board retire to deliberate at the end of each student’s examination. The jury assembles each year at the period fixed by the minister of war.

The three examining members conduct the examination of the students in three different branches of study; the first more particularly relating to artillery science, the second to engineering science, and the third to mechanical science in its connection with the art of war. The whole of the students who are to leave the school are first examined in such one or other of these branches of study as may be determined on.

The student under examination is specially questioned by the examining officer in his subject, and occasionally by the president or any other member of the board that may wish to do so, for three-quarters of an hour. As soon as the examination of the student has been concluded, the board retire to the adjoining room and compare their notes of the credits they have severally awarded to the student under examination, and they also examine his drawings, sketches, and memoirs relating to the subjects on which he has been questioned, and prepared during his two years of residence in the school. They severally note the credits to which they consider him to be entitled for them, and adopt the general mean.

As soon as the examination of the whole of the students in this particular study has been finished, the examination in the next branch is commenced, so that five or six days elapse between the first and second examinations of the same student; and the same interval of time occurs between the second and third examinations.

The credit allotted to each student by the board of examiners represents, on the scale of 0 to 20, the manner in which he has replied to the questions, or executed the drawings, sketches, memoirs, &c., belonging to each course. The importance attached to each particular branch of study is estimated very nearly by the amount of time allowed for its execution divided by 20; and the definitive marks which each student obtains for that branch of study is obtained from the products of the numbers respectively representing 147 the credit for answering, and that for the importance of the subjects on which he has been examined.

The final classification of the order of merit, in each arm of the service, is arranged after a comparison of the total of the marks obtained by each student. This total is the sum of the definitive marks gained by each student in the sciences bearing on artillery, engineering, and mechanics in connection with the art of war, for the talent displayed in drawing, sketching, and writing memoirs, and for skill in practical exercises, as determined by the results of the examination conducted by the jury of examiners, added to the marks due to the previous classification in the school, with the weight or influence equal to one-third of that allowed for the examination by the jury.

The co-efficients of influence for the present year are—

For those particularly relating to Artillery Science, 39.29
For those particularly relating to Engineering Science, 53.75
For those particularly relating to Mechanical Science, 43.00
For talent in drawing, sketching, writing memoirs, &c., 6.80
For practical exercises, 16.75
Previous classification in the school, 45.30

So that the examination conducted by the jury of examiners exercises an influence on the position of the students very nearly approaching to two-thirds of the whole amount.

It is this final classification which determines their seniority in the respective services. We were permitted to be present during the examination, which was entirely oral, of two of the sous-lieutenants, before the jury of examiners.

The questions were replied to with great fluency and readiness, but it seemed to us that the examination was somewhat limited for the object in view, viz., that of awarding a credit representing the progress which each student had made in the particular science on which he had been questioned, especially as that credit would have very great weight in determining the candidate’s future position.14

On quitting the School of Application at Metz, the sub-lieutenants of artillery and engineers respectively join the regiments, to which they are then definitely assigned as second lieutenants, and continue to be employed in doing duty, and in receiving practical instruction with them, until they are promoted.

148

SUBSEQUENT INSTRUCTION AND EMPLOYMENT.

The lieutenants of the artillery are employed on all duties that will tend to make them efficient artillery officers, and fully acquainted with all details connected with the drill, practice, and manœuvres of the artillery, and also with the interior economy and discipline of a regiment of artillery.

After the officers of artillery are promoted to the rank of second captain, but not before, they are detached from their regiments and successively sent into the various arsenals, cannon foundries, powder mills, and small arm manufactories, pyrotechnic establishments, and workshops, in order that they may become practically acquainted with the whole of the processes connected with the manufacture and supply of artillery, rockets, small arms, powder, material of all kinds, tools, &c., and also with the construction and repair of the buildings and factories required for these purposes. Sometimes they are employed as assistants in these establishments. The inspectors of the arms of regiments are selected from among those who have become acquainted with the manufacture of small arms.

When promoted to first captains they again rejoin their regiments, so that they may not lose the qualifications and knowledge required from a good practical artillery officer.

Field-officers of artillery are employed as superintendents and directors, and captains as sub-directors, of the important works intrusted to their arm.

In time of war, the officers of artillery have the construction of their own batteries, and the direction of the ordnance in battles and sieges, together with the formation of movable bridges and passages by boats.

It must be noticed, in contradistinction to the practice which prevails in England, that the artillery and engineer services manufacture their own tools.

The young engineer officers are employed with the men of their regiments, and with them pass through courses of practical instruction in the field, in sapping, mining, field fortification, sham-sieges, 149 bridges, and castrametation. During this practical instruction one of the lieutenants belonging to each company is always present, and the captain of the company visits the work once in the course of the day.

The duties of the officers of engineers in time of peace are the construction, preservation, and repairs of fortresses and military buildings, and the command and instruction of the engineer soldiers.

In time of war, the officers of engineers are intrusted with the construction of works of permanent fortification, of the general works in the attack and defense of fortresses, and the reconnaissance connected therewith.

They may also be charged—

With the construction of such works of field fortifications as the commander-in-chief or the generals of division consider necessary; such as épaulments, trenches, redoubts, forts, blockhouses, bridgeheads, intrenched camps, as well as the opening of communications, the establishment of bridges resting on fixed supports, and the formation and destruction of roads.

After the officers of engineers have been promoted to the rank of second captain, and not before, they are mostly employed apart from their regiments, on the état major of the engineers in fortified towns and places, either in charge of the existing military buildings and fortifications, or with the duty of carrying on, or assisting to carry on, such new works as are in course of construction from time to time.

We have already stated that by the law in France one-third of the officers of the army is obtained from the military schools; one-third from the non-commissioned officers who have been raised to that grade from the ranks; while the remaining third is placed at the disposal of the supreme executive power. As regards the artillery and engineers this last third is in actual practice obtained, like the first third part, from the Polytechnic School, so that only one-third of the officers of those arms are promoted from among the non-commissioned officers, and these seldom rise above the rank of captain. Much attention is, however, paid to the improvement of the education of these latter officers, and we found that four officers of engineers and one officer of artillery so promoted were, by order of the minister of war, on the recommendation of the inspectors-general, passing through the School of Application at Metz, the course of instruction for them being modified on their account. And it was confidently expected that a large number of those officers who 150 had been promoted in this way during the war would be ordered to the School of Application at Metz.

We should not omit to mention that occasional exchanges of service take place, during the first year of residence at Metz, among the pupils destined for the artillery, and those destined for the engineers.

The pay of officers of the artillery and of the engineers is the same. A small additional allowance is granted to officers of artillery when mounted.

REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.

ARTILLERY REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.

There are ten regimental artillery schools established in places or towns that are usually garrisoned by the troops of this arm, and one of these schools exists at Metz.

ENGINEER REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.

The soldiers of the engineers appear to be very well taught in their regimental schools, of which there are three, one for each regiment, established at Metz, Arras, and Montpellier, where the regiments are usually in garrison. The strength of each regiment is 4,500 men.

The instruction given in these schools has for its object to afford, to its full extent, to the officers, sous-officiers, and soldiers of the engineers, the requisite theoretical and practical knowledge to enable them satisfactorily to fulfill the duties of their various ranks, and to qualify them for promotion to higher rank.

It is so regulated that at the end of the first year the men have learnt the nature of the service and duties of a soldier; and that at the close of the second year, the practiced sapper is cognizant of mining, and the practical miner is acquainted with sapping.

In the lowest classes the men begin with learning to read and write; this if followed by arithmetic, grammar, writing from dictation, and composition. The next subjects are special mathematics, landscape, plan, topographical and architectural drawing. We attended a class in which a corporal of sappers was explaining to the mathematical teacher (a civilian) the theory of the inclined plane, and we saw a large number of their drawings, topographical and architectural, many of which were very well executed.

The theoretical instruction is given between the months of November and March, the practical instruction in the field, (already noticed) occupies the rest of the year. The combined courses are completed in two years.

151

REGULATIONS AND PROGRAMMES OF INSTRUCTION
OF THE
IMPERIAL SCHOOL OF APPLICATION FOR THE ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS AT METZ.

(Abridged.)

I. POLICE REGULATIONS.

The chief Regulations for the Police of the Establishment are as follows:—

I. Barracks.—The Students are lodged in Barracks in the School, under the command of a Captain of the Staff, with the title of Commandant of the Quarter. They take their meals, however, out of the Barracks, in the town. They are allowed free egress and ingress from and to their Barracks, from the call at 6 in the morning to 10 at night, excepting during the hours devoted to lectures and the studies in the rooms. During these hours they must give special notice o£ their times of going out and coming in.

II. Organization into Brigades and Sections.—Each Division is arranged in Brigades of thirty Students at the utmost, and each Brigade in two s. The Students of Artillery and those of the Engineers constitute, as far as possible, separate Brigades. A Captain of the Staff is attached to each Brigade for its superintendence. The students in these Brigades and Sections are arranged in the order of merit which they held on entrance, and the first Student on the list of each Brigade and of each of a Brigade is called its Chief. This arrangement is preserved at their messes, which are held at the Restaurateurs’, each of fifteen having its own table, and its chief being the head of the mess. Private bills or private additions to the mess are forbidden, the maximum price for the daily fare being fixed by the Commandant of the School.

III. Conduct of the Students.—All games of chance are forbidden; and any debts discovered are punished. If a Student continues long without paying such, he is reported to the Minister of War.

IV. Inspection of Work Done Within the House.—No work or drawing may be done out of the rooms of study, except in cases of illness.

All works to be executed by the Students are considered as service ordered to be done, which must be completed at the hours and within the period fixed in the order of the day. Students who are in arrears of work at the end of their first year are required to finish them during the time of vacation.

V. Superintendence of out-of-door Work.—After describing facilities afforded to the Students for working in the country, and stating minutely the method to be followed, the directions add that “on bringing back their plans, Students must present their sketches, and all the notes taken by them, in their rough state, to the Officer of the Staff intrusted to inspect them. They can not begin to put their work into shape till this Officer’s visa has been affixed to the sketches, notes,” &c.

VI. Vacation.—There is one vacation at the end of the first year. Any class, or any single student, under punishment, may be deprived of this. Any work to which the Professor gives a mark below 7, must be considered incomplete, and to be done again. Students are kept up in vacation to finish their work; but if it is done within fifteen days, and marked by the Professor’s visa, they are allowed to go away for the rest of the vacation.

152

Young Officers, after their final examination, are subject to all the Regulations of the School, down to the moment of their leaving the town.

II. REGULATIONS FOR ESTIMATING THE VALUE OF THE WORK EXECUTED.

The time devoted to each of the courses in the School, to the works of every kind which belong to it, to the exercises, drill, theoretical instructions, &c., is fixed in accordance with programmes approved by the Minister of War; and the Table similar to that given at pages 180–181, exhibiting the employment, is each year submitted for his approbation by the Superior Council of the School.

Every kind of work, such as the out-door operations, sketches, drawings, memoirs, calculations, interrogations, manipulations, manœuvres, drill, &c., is valued by the Professor or Officer of the Staff charged with its direction, by the product of two numbers, one representing the merit of its execution, and the other the importance of the work.

The numbers representing the merit of the execution or instruction are regulated by the scale of 0 to 20, as at the Polytechnic School.

The co-efficient of importance is found by dividing the number representing the maximum value allowed for the execution of any work by 20, the maximum credit for merit; and the number representing the maximum value, allowed for the execution of any work has reference to all the circumstances bearing upon its execution. It is regulated by the number of hours appropriated to its execution; and in estimating this number of hours, regard is had, not only to the time occupied in making the drawing, but also to that which is necessary for the calculations, essays, and sketches indispensable to its execution. The lectures are reckoned at one and a half hours, and the sittings in the Halls of Study at four and a half hours.

The number of hours inserted in the Table giving the distribution of the time employed, being insufficient for the composition of the memoirs, specifications, estimates, &c., the value given for this kind of work, of which a great part is performed out of the Halls of Study, is fixed at twice the number of hours inserted in the Table showing the distribution of the time employed.

The interrogations are the subject of a special credit, the maximum being equal to the number of hours devoted to the lectures, multiplied by one and a half hour, the length of each lecture.

The credit given for a work performed outside the school is divided into two parts: one, equal to one-third of the total credit, is in the hands of the Officer charged with the superintendence of the work, who estimates the zeal and aptitude of the student; the other, equal to two-thirds, is applied by the Professor, and given according to the merit of the work.

The sum of the credits, given for work of all kinds in a course of study, forms the maximum credit for the course.

The method of fixing the credit for the execution of works, according to the time devoted to them, is equally applicable to the exercises, practice, and drill.

When the time granted for the execution of any work has expired, the Director of Studies sends this work to the Professor for his examination, who establishes the number or credit, showing its importance, and returns it to the Director of Studies.

153

Every work which has been finished and examined, is marked by the Professor by a number representing its merit, which number may be fractional.

This is multiplied by the number representing its importance, and the nearest whole number resulting from this product expresses the value of the examined work.

Every unfinished work receives a provisional value, and is then returned to the person executing it, and as soon as it has been completed a second evaluation is made, but only two-thirds of the difference between the first and second evaluations is added to the first; the same principle is applied to the works which have been valued below seven, or to those which have been amended or recommenced.

Every work which has not been executed by the student is marked 0; but the grounds for its non-execution are placed before the Jury of Examination.

In the event of two papers being so similar that it is evident one must have been copied from the other, and that it is not possible to decide which has been copied from the other, both are marked 0.

And on the other hand, if it is proved that there was no complicity between the authors of the two papers, the copied paper is the only one canceled.

At the end of each year’s study, the Council of the School makes a classification of the students of the two divisions.

Each of these classifications is formed of the following elements:—

1st. Notes of conduct given by the General commanding and the Colonel Second in Command.

2nd. Notes of appreciation given by the General Commanding, and the Colonel Second in Command, and by the Officers of the Staff of the School.

3rd. Tables of credits given by two Field Officers of the Artillery and Engineers on the theoretical and practical instruction with which they are charged.

4th. Tables of credits given by each Professor for the works of all kinds, interrogations, &c., of his course.

The classification of the first year comprehends all the works, drill, and practice, executed during the first year, which have been valued, as well as the notes of appreciation and of conduct.

The number appropriated to these notes at the end of the first year is equal to the moiety of the total number allowed for the two years of study.

The classification of the students of the second year presents the reunion of the works executed by them since their entrance into the school.

The maximum number of credits appropriated to all the Officers of the Staff, as a note of appreciation, is equal to one-sixth of the total of all the courses taken together.

The same number, divided into two equal parts, is assigned to the notes of appreciation given by the General commanding and the Second in Command.

Lastly, the notes of conduct given by the General commanding and the Second in Command form one-fiftieth of the total value.

For the classification of each division the Director of Studies abstracts into a Table, for each arm, all the elements which should enter into this classification. Below the name of each student are inserted all the credits which belong to him, and the total, reduced in the ratio of the maximum 20, is the definitive number of the classification of each student.

The Director of Studies appends to these Tables a report containing everything which affords a means of estimating the work, the conduct of each 154 student, the delays, and the causes, &c. In giving the names of the students whose credits are less than 7, he proposes, conformably with the Regulations, the measures that should be taken with regard to them.

The Superior Council of the School being assembled, the different Tables furnished by the Professors and by the Officers of the Staff, as well as those in which they are summed up, are collated, and the list of classifications for each division and for each arm is fixed separately, with the definitive numbers representing the credits.

These classified lists indicate for each arm the new rank of the Students, their rank at admission to the School of Application and of passage to the first division, the sum of the values for the works executed by them, and all the elements which would tend to enable a proper judgment to be formed of their merits and conduct.

The Superior Council adds to it, if there be any necessity for it, notes, exposing the grounds which have contributed to the principal alterations in the relative position of the Student, and points out those whose credit is less than 7, as well as those who by their bad conduct deserve to become the object of exceptional measures.

Examination for Leaving.

Each year the General commanding the School determines by lot, at least one month in advance, the order in which the examinations for the promotions in the Artillery and Engineers are to take place. The Students belonging to the same arm can change among themselves, but eight days after the lots have been drawn the list of the order of examination is definitely closed. The General commanding the School makes known at the same period the order of the examinations and the division of the subjects between these examinations.

The General commanding the School places before the General of Division, President of the Jury of Examination, the following:—

1st. The division of the subjects between the three examinations.

2nd. The order of examination of the Arms, and of the students of each Arm.

3rd. The provisional classification of the students of the first division made by the Superior Council.

4th. The particular reports relating to each student made by the General commanding the School.

5th. The list of the propositions made by the Superior Council and the proceedings of the sitting at which it was agreed to.

6th. The classification of the Students of the second Division.

7th. Tables of questions established for each course.

8th. The abstracts of the sittings of the Superior Council held since the last examination.

The Student Sub-lieutenants are successively examined in all the branches composing the theoretical and practical instruction of the School. The theoretical knowledge is grouped in three series, each of which is the object of a particular trial.

The drill and practice are executed in the presence of the Jury, who cause the command to be given to the Sub-lieutenant, in order to satisfy themselves of the amount of their instruction, and to assign marks of merit to them individually.

155

The subjects of the three examinations are divided in the following manner:

First. Examination, made by the Field Officer of Artillery in the—

Course of Military Art.

Course of Artillery.

Course of Veterinary Art.

Sham Siege (part relating to Artillery.)

Course of Military Law and Administration.

Second. Examination, held by the Field Officer of Engineers.

Course of Permanent Fortification and the Attack and Defense of Places.

Course of Construction.

Sham Siege (part relating to the Engineering.)

Third. Examination, held by the third Examiner, taken either from the Artillery or Engineers, in the—

Course of Mechanics.

Course of Applied Sciences.

Course of Topography and Geodesy.

German Language.

Every Student, on presenting himself before the Examiners, submits for their approbation the drawings and manuscripts relating to the subjects on which the examination is to bear. Independent of the questions which are placed before him by the Examiners, the Student Sub-lieutenant must reply to any objections or questions which the members of the Jury may think fit to address to him.

The German Master directly questions the Students, if the Jury wish it. The Professors or their Assistants must be present at the examinations relating to their course.

As soon as the examination is ended, the members of the Jury retire to an adjoining room with closed doors, to determine on the amount of marks to be given to the Student examined.

When the trials of all kinds are finished, the Jury proceed to the definitive classification of the Students belonging to each arm. In making this classification, regard is had to the following considerations:—

1st. Each examination has a co-efficient of importance equal to the sum of all the different courses which are included in it.

2nd. The co-efficient of importance for drawing is equal to the 1/20 of the sum of the co-efficients of the three examinations.

3rd. The co-efficient of importance of the practice, drill, &c., is, as for the courses, the sum of the co-efficients appropriated to the works taught in the School.

By multiplying the co-efficients of importance by the mean number of marks of merit obtained by the Students in the different examinations, the definitive credit which must be assigned to each Student in the Table of Classification is obtained.

The classification of the School enters into the definitive classification for a value equal to one-third of the total number of the three examinations, without comprising the valuation of the drawings; this value is added to the credits determined above.

The Jury give an account of the proceedings of the examinations in a “procès-verbal” addressed to the Minister by the General acting as President.

156

III. PROGRAMME OF THE ARTILLERY COURSE.

FIRST PART.—INTRODUCTION.

Twenty-six Lectures common to Students of both Arms.

First Lecture.—(1.) Definition of the word Artillery. Material, personnel, science. Object and division of the course.

FIRST SECTION.—EFFECTS OF POWDER.

Ideas on the origin of powder and its use in fire-arms; mealed or pulverized powder; powder in grain. General conditions which powder ought to satisfy; action of each of its component parts. Proportion of component parts used in France. Fulmi-ligneux.

Considerations on the physical properties of powder. Size of the grains expressed by the number of grains to the gramme. Density of the grains and specific density of the powder; circumstances causing them to vary. Effects of damp upon powder.

Second Lecture.—(2.) Combustion of powder. Different modes of ignition of powder. Research respecting the laws of its combustion, process of observation employed, laws discovered. Influence of the density, the composition, the mode of manufacture, the damp, the tension and temperature of the surrounding gases.

Combustion of the grains of powder. Calculation applied to the spherical grain. The formula is applicable to the irregular grains of ordinary powder.

Calculation of the density of the gases of powder in a fixed space, on the hypothesis of a simultaneous ignition of the grains. Discussion of the formula obtained; influence of the density of the grains, of the duration of their combustion and of the space in which the powder is inclosed.

Inquiry into the rapidity of ignition of charges of powder. Experiments made upon trains of powder, and upon gun-barrels filled with powder. Conclusions drawn from the results obtained.

Third Lecture.—(3.) Calculation of the density of the gases of the powder on the hypothesis of successive ignition.

Results of the application of the formula to charges of a spherical and a truncated form.

Tension of the gases of powder. Impossibility of determining it by considerations of a purely theoretical nature. Experimental solution of this question. Experiments by Rumfort; description of his apparatus. Results obtained. Formula representing them. Observations on these results.

Fourth Lecture.—(4.) Effects of powder in a fixed space.

Hollow projectiles. The readiest bursting of a hollow sphere takes place in the direction of the plane of a great circle. Determination of the minimum bursting charge; law by which this charge varies with the thickness of the envelope. Influence of the fuse-hole of hollow projectiles; weakening of the envelope of the shell, diminution of the charge; loss of gas, increase of the charge. Effects of the shock of the exploding gases; means of estimating it. Influence of the vivacity of the powder in burning. Number and rapidity of the explosions.

Hollow cylinders burst more easily longitudinally than transversely. Consequences 157 of this principle relatively to the employment of a fibrous metal for the manufacture of arms. Thickness necessary to resist bursting.

Fifth Lecture.—(5.) Effects of powder in cannon.

Analytical theory of the effects of powder in cannon.

Equation of the problem. General expressions of the quantity of force exercised by the expansion of the gases,—of the density of the different s of gas and of their tension. Differential equations of the motion of the gases, of the projectile, and of the gun. Equation of condition leading to the establishment of the general formula which determines the position of a stratum of gas in the terms of the function of its original position, and of the other data of the question. General relations between the velocity of the projectile and that of the gun.

Density of the stratum of gas at a given moment. Position of the stratum which has a maximum density.

Sixth Lecture.—(6.) Approximative solution applicable to the cases ordinarily met with in practice. Hypothesis relating to the velocity and the tension of different strata of gas.

Relations between the velocity of the projectile and that of the gun. Approximate expression of the amount of force due to the expansion of the gases; line to be followed in the execution of the arithmetical calculations. Formula serving to determine the velocity of the projectile. General considerations on the state of the gases of powder during the burning of the charge. Influence of the motions of the projectile and of the bottom of the bore on the distribution of the gases at each instant. Influence of the successive generation of the gases combined with the enlargement of the space which incloses them on their density throughout the whole duration of the phenomenon.

Seventh Lecture.—(7.) Influence of the vent and of the windage of the projectile on the effects of powder in cannon.

Determination of the loss of velocity occasioned by the windage of the projectile. Influence of the weight of the piece upon the velocity of the projectile. Influence of the weight of the projectile on tension of the gases and upon the velocities of the two bodies set in motion. Influence of the weight of the charge of powder. Charge giving the maximum of velocity. Influence of the size and density of the grains of the powder as well as other circumstances which cause a variation in the law of generation of the gases. Advantage of very rapid combustion in short pieces and of slower combustion in long ones.

Eighth Lecture.—(8.) Influence of the length of bore; circumstances which modify it; length corresponding to the maximum of velocity. Comparison of the quantities of motion of the projectile and of the gun. Trial of a formula fitted to represent their relation. Determination of this relation with the help of the balistic pendulum.

Mean pressure exercised on the projectile during its passage through the bore. Injuries produced in guns by firing; enlargement of metal and cracks; lodgment and percussion of the projectile.

Different effects of the percussion; means tried to prevent injuries (in general.) Considerations on the metals employed in the manufacture of ordnance. Charging with elongated cartridge; use of wooden bottoms and wads.

Ninth Lecture.—(9.) Examination of the proper means for measuring the effects of powder. Eprouvettes of different sorts. Experimental processes 158 founded on the measure of the velocity of the projectile. Grobert’s rotatory machine. Process of Colonel Debooz. Process based on the employment of an electric current. Method by ranges (mentioned here by way of note.)

Balistic pendulum. Pendulum of Robins, of d’Arcy, of Hutton. Improvements introduced in France into the construction of these apparatus. Description of the pendulums in use at the present day; cannon pendulum; musket pendulum.

Tenth Lecture.—(10.) Analytical theory of the balistic pendulum.

1. Receiver pendulum; formula which gives the velocity of the projectile. Determination of the elements which enter into the formula, and the degree of approximation necessary. Simplification of the calculation of the velocities in the case of firing several times consecutively.

2. Cannon pendulum. Amount of recoil in the gun. Percussion of the knife-edges of the pendulum. Case where there is none. Means of correcting the position of the center of percussion.

Eleventh Lecture.—(11.) Examination of the effects of the recoil upon guns and their carriages. The question may be considered as resolving itself into two others.

1. Percussions of the carriage upon the points supporting it; analytical solution. Determination of the percussions and of the force of the recoil in the case of carriages on wheels, and that of mortar beds. Graphic solution of the same question by an analysis of the force which acts upon the bottom of the bore. Modification of the sketch according to the different cases presented by the direction of fire relatively to the ground.

Twelfth Lecture.—(12.) Discussion of points relating to the percussion of the carriage upon its supports, and to the force of the recoil. Influence of the elevation of the line of fire; of the inclination of the ground or of the platform; of the length of the carriage in proportion to its height and of the friction which results from the contact of the trail with the ground. Velocity of recoil of the collective apparatus. Determination of the extent of the recoil on a given ground. Recoil of the different pieces of ordnance in use. Case in which the forepart of the carriage has a tendency to be lifted up; velocity of this motion; determination of the effect resulting from it.

Thirteenth Lecture.—(13.)

2. Percussions produced by the gun upon its carriage. Determination of the amount of percussion of the breech upon the elevating screw, and of that of the trunnions upon the trunnion holes. Discussion of points relative to the effects produced. Influence of the elevation; of the dimensions of the gun, and of the proportion of its weight to that of the entire apparatus.

Effect of the elasticity of the different parts of the apparatus. It diminishes the wear of the parts struck, and renders it necessary to take into account the velocity of the parts striking.

Fourteenth Lecture.—(14.) Effects of powder in mines. Historical notices. Dimensions of the boxes containing the powder. Considerations on the effects of the expansion of the gases in an indefinite or limited compressible medium.

Definitions having reference to craters and chambers of mines. Ordinary charge of the chamber. The old rule for miners; its entire alteration. Table 159 relating to different kinds of medium. Overcharged chamber. Overcharged chamber or “camouflet.” Limit of the effects of compression which result from the action of the chambers. Use of gun cotton. Considerations on the effects of the petard. Dimensions of the cavity reserved for the powder. Means employed or proposed to diminish the charge of powder proportioned to a given effect.

SECOND SECTION.—MOTION OF PROJECTILES IN SPACE.

Fifteenth Lecture.—(15.) Science of projectiles. Historical notices. Utility of an acquaintance with the laws of the motion of projectiles in a vacuum. Definitions relating to the trajectory. Differential equations of the motion in vacuo. Equation of the trajectory. Inclination of its elements. Velocity of the projectile at any one point. Duration of its passage. Determination of the range and of the angle of greatest range. Relations between the ranges; the initial velocities; and the angles of projection. Examination of the cases where the theory of the parabola is applicable.

Preliminary ideas on the resistance of fluids; difficulties inherent in this question. Approximative formula of the resistance, established by the help of the principle of active forces; circumstances not taken into consideration by it.

Sixteenth Lecture.—(16.) Experiments relating to the determination of the resistance of the air.

1. Case of small velocities. Rotatory apparatus; results furnished by them in the case of thin planes; their essential defect. Apparatus with rectilinear movement. Mean value of the co-efficient of the theoretical resistance in the case of thin planes; modification of this value for the case of spheres, &c.

2. Case of great velocities. Direct determination of the resistance of the air by the aid of the balistic pendulum. Experiments of Hutton, their results. Experiments made at Metz in 1839 and 1840. General expression of the resistance based upon the total of the results obtained, and containing a function of the velocity in three terms. Search after a function in two terms fit to replace in each particular case the general expression.

Seventeenth Lecture.—(17.) Theory of the motion of projectiles in the air. Differential equations of the motion. Hypothesis on the relation of the element of the trajectory to its projection. Calculations based on this hypothesis, and leading to the final equation of the arc of the trajectory. Inclination of the element of the trajectory. Velocity of the projectile at a given point. Duration of the passage.

Eighteenth Lecture.—(18.) Examination of the functions employed in the formulas of the science of projectiles. Formation of the balistic co-efficient, and the series contained in the functions. Relations of the series and the functions to each other. Arithmetical tables designed to give their values. Determination of the relation of an arc of the trajectory to its projection. Error resulting from the introduction of the constant relation in balistic calculations.

Nineteenth Lecture.—(19.) Application of balistic theories to the movement of projectiles thrown at great angles. Analysis of the trajectory, and determination of all the circumstances of the movement. Trajectory of shells considered as a single arc. Solution of several problems involved in this hypothesis. Determination of the range. Velocity corresponding to a given range 160 and angle of projection. Angle of projection corresponding to a known initial velocity and range. Angle of greatest range. Variation of the velocity of the projectile during the whole of its passage. Limit of velocity of projectiles falling vertically in the air.

Twentieth Lecture.—(20.) Application of balistic theories to the motion of projectiles thrown at low angles. Case where the relation of the arc to its projection can be supposed sensibly equal to unity. Problems relative to direct fire; distinction established between the angle of projection and the angle of fire. In ordinary cases in practice the angle of fire is very nearly independent of the height of the object aimed at. Relations between the angle of projection, the angle of elevation of the object aimed at, and the angle of descent. Problems relating to plunging fire. (Ricochet fire.) Determination of the initial velocity and the angle of projection for a projectile which has to pass, firstly, through two given points; secondly, through one given point, the trajectory having at this point a known direction. Case of practical impossibility.

Twenty-first Lecture.—(21.) Relations between the velocities, the spaces traversed, and the durations of passage in the rectilinear movement of projectiles. They are applicable to direct fire, and are independent of the function of the velocity which enters into the expression of the resistance of the air. Case where the resistance of the air can be supposed proportional to the square of the velocity. Establishment of balistic formulas in this hypothesis. Application of the formulas to the resolution of one of the problems connected with a plunging fire. Comparison of the results obtained with those arrived at by the use of general formulas. Indication of methods applicable to the resolution of several questions in projectiles.

Twenty-second Lecture.—(22.) Examination of disturbing causes which influence the motion of projectiles.

1. Disturbing causes acting on the projectile during its passage through the bore. Imperfections of form, such as want of straightness in the bore, faulty position of the line of sight and the trunnions.

Influence of the windage of the projectile and of the percussions which result from it. Deviation from the original direction; its consequence in the different kinds of fire. Effect of the recoil and the vibrations of the barrel in the fire of small-arms.

Influence of the various causes which are capable of modifying the initial velocity.

2. Disturbing causes acting upon the projectile during its passage through the air. Influence of the rotatory motion which results from the last percussion within the bore. Effects of the eccentricity of projectiles. Case where the rotation occasions no deviation. Influence of the proximity of the ground. Deviation produced by the wind (air in motion.) Influence of atmospheric changes.

THIRD SECTION.—MOTION OF CARRIAGES.

Twenty-third Lecture.—(23.) Importance of the question. Preliminary ideas. Resistance due to the motion of a carriage and determination of the effort necessary for drawing it in the case of uniform motion. Two-wheeled carriage on level ground; the effort of draught in a direction parallel to the ground; first, resistance referable to the friction of the wheels on the axle; secondly, resistance referable to their revolution upon the ground. Influence of the weight of 161 the carriage. Advantage of large wheels over small ones, demonstrated in the two cases of a yielding soil and a hard soil scattered over with obstacles. Expression of the power of draught necessary to overcome the two resistances united.

Twenty-fourth Lecture.—(24.) General expressions of the effort of draught necessary for two-wheeled and four-wheeled carriages; case of a locked wheel. Influence of the direction of the traces and of the inclination of the ground upon the draught. Advantage of rolling over dragging for the transport of burdens. Examination of resistances which are developed in the passage from repose to motion. Considerations on the position of the fillet in the box, and determination of the co-efficient of friction for the case of the revolution of the wheel about the axle.

Influence of the length of the nave on the frictions when the axle is thrown out of a horizontal position.

Twenty-fifth Lecture.—(25.) Turning of carriages considered successively in the case of two-wheeled and four-wheeled carriages. Center and angle of the turn in four-wheeled carriages. Calculations of the angle of the turn and of the space required by the carriage to execute a half turn. Examination of the dimensions of the carriage which influence the angle of the turn. Diameter of the fore-wheels and height of the body of the carriage; distance between the wheels and breadth of the body of the carriage; position of the point of reunion of its fore and hind parts. Examination of the circumstances favorable or unfavorable to the action of the horse. Relation between the forces to which he is subjected, and the pressure of his feet on the ground. Sliding of the feet; influence of the weight of the animal; of the co-efficient of friction; and of the direction of the traces. Lifting of the fore-hand; influence of the weight of the horse, and of the increased distance between the points on which he rests; of the position of his center of gravity; and of the direction of the traces.

Twenty-sixth Lecture.—(26.) Considerations on the mode of action of the draught-horse. Effect of his weight, and of the inclination of the traces. Effort of draught of which the horse is capable, both momentarily and continuously; results of experiments. Composition of artillery harness. Harness à limonière (with shafts and cross-bar,) or on the French system; on the German system, with pole and support. Use and discontinuance of swing bars. Arrangement of the traces. General arrangement of harness. Bât-saddle.

SECOND PART.

CLASSIFIED ACCOUNT OF SMALL ARMS AND OF ARTILLERY MATERIAL.

Twenty Lectures, of which Fourteen are common to the Students of both Arms and Six confined to Artillery Students.

FIRST SECTION.—SMALL ARMS.

Twenty-seventh Lecture.—(1.) Classification of small arms. Arms not fire-arms. Classification of hand-weapons. Considerations on the profile and outline of cutting weapons. Effect of the curve. Division of the mass. Form of the hilt.

Considerations on the profile and outline of thrusting weapons.

162

Position of the center of gravity; form of the point. Description of arms other than fire-arms now in use. Sabres and swords. General ideas respecting their component parts; blade, hilt, and scabbard. Regimental arms. Infantry sword. Sword-bayonet of the artillery and chasseurs, cavalry sword; peculiar requisites. Sword of cavalry of reserve, of cavalry of the line, and of light cavalry. Horse artillery sword.

Officers’ and non-commissioned officers’ arms. Cavalry lance. Camping axe. Side-arms in use in the navy. Sword, pike, boarding-axe, dirk.

Defensive armor. Cuirassiers and carabineers’ cuirasses. Cuirass and helmet of the sapper.

Twenty-eighth Lecture.—(2.) Fire-arms. Historical notices. First attempts in fire-arms. Hand cannons. Arquebuses, culverines, &c. Poitrinal, matchlock, firelock, pistol, and blunderbuss.

Means employed successively for loading and ignition of the charge. Twisted match, wheel-lock, flint-lock, percussion-lock, (the two last mentioned here by way of note.) Classified account of fire-arms now in use. Muskets. Considerations on the weight and principal dimensions of muskets. Detailed description of the infantry musket. Action of the flint and the percussion lock.

Twenty-ninth Lecture.—(3.) Comparison of the flint and the percussion musket. Voltigeur’s, dragoon’s, and double-barreled musket. Gendarmerie and cavalry carbine. Cavalry and gendarmerie pistol. Arms in which precision of aim is studied. Means employed to prevent the deviations caused by the windage of the projectiles and their rotatory-movement in the air. Diminution and suppression of the windage; straight grooves in the barrel, spiral grooves, rifled arms. Rotation of the ball about its axis of flight.

Principles of arrangement of rifled arms. Charge of powder and inclination of the grooves; two modes of solution, powerful charge and long spiral, weak charge and short spiral. Length of the barrel: conditions which determine it; number and form of the grooves.

Thirtieth Lecture.—(4.) Loading of rifled arms; ramming the ball home; loading at the breech. Different methods tried. Loading with a flattened ball; effect of the flattening of the ball. Examination of the successive improvements to which this idea has served as a basis. Chambered arms; use of the short bottom and the patch. Arms à tige. Elongation of the ball; shortening of the spiral groove; diminution of the charge: advantages resulting from it. Pointed cylindrical ball; principles of its outline; effect of the notches of the ball; superiority of this projectile over the spherical balls. Summary examination of the different models of rifled arms which have been successively in use. Versailles rifles.

Wall-piece, pattern 1831. Common rifle, pattern 1842. Wall-piece, pattern 1840. Bored-up wall-piece, pattern 1842. Pistols for officers of cavalry and gendarmerie. Rifles à tige, pattern 1846, and artillery carbine à tige. Description of these two arms. Superiority of the rifle à tige over the arms for precise aim previously adopted. Trial relating to a new improvement in the construction of rifled arms. Disuse of the “tige.” Ball with cup. Comparative notice of the fire-arms of the different European powers.

SECOND SECTION.—PROJECTILES AND CANNON.

Thirty-first Lecture.—(5.) Principles of construction of projectiles.

Considerations on the substances which may be chosen for the manufacture 163 of projectiles. Essential conditions, density, hardness, tenacity, cheapness. Projectiles of stone, lead, cast-iron, iron, copper, gun-metal. Forms of projectiles.

Exterior form; conditions which serve to determine it. The spherical form preferable to any other in the actual state of artillery. Advantage of elongated projectiles. Conditions relating to their use. First attempts. Interior form of hollow projectiles; howitzer shells, bombs, and grenades. Thickness of the metal; fuse-hole; charging-hole of naval hollow projectiles; lugs or handles of shells. Density of projectiles. Recapitulation of the balls; howitzer shells; shells and grenades in use, their nomenclature, dimensions, weight. Cannon-balls. Choice of metal and weights. Different arrangements for the use of shot, case-shot, canister or naval grape-shot. Spherical case; conditions relating to their use. Charge of spherical case. Bar-shot. Rescue shells.

Thirty-second Lecture.—(6.) Cannon. Historical ideas on the subject. Principle of arrangement of ancient arms and machines of war. Motive force employed; its inferiority compared to that furnished by the combustion of powder. Earliest cannon.

Historical view of the different systems of ordnance which have been successively in use in France.

1. Cannon. Calibres in use in the 16th century. Edict of Blois, 1572. Cannon employed in the reign of Louis XIV. Regulation of 1732. System of Vallière. Modifications introduced by Gribeauval in 1765. Cannon of the year XI. Cannon in use at the present day.

2. Ordnance adapted to hollow projectiles. Difficulties inseparable from the throwing of hollow projectiles; first attempts. Mortars. Double fire. Ancient calibres. Mortars in use at the present day. Stone mortar. Howitzers, their first use in the French artillery; howitzers of 1765; of the year XI. Calibres in use at the present day. Considerations on the calibres of different kinds of cannon. Siege, garrison, field, coast, and naval ordnance. Siege, garrison, field, mountain, coast, and naval howitzers. Mortars and stone mortars. Considerations on the metals which may be employed in the manufacture of cannon for siege, garrison, field, coast, and naval purposes. Interior form of ordnance.

1. Part of the bore traversed by the projectile, transverse ; trial of rifled cannon, longitudinal .

2. Part of the bore occupied by the charge; influence of its form; the spherical, cylindrical, truncated form. Chambers of mortars; reason for their adoption. Cylindrical and truncated chambers; comparison of their effects. Spherical chamber; pyriform chamber: interior form of the naval mortar à semelle (cast in one piece with the bed.) Chamber of howitzers; experiments with reference to their adoption for field howitzers. Dimension. Howitzers without chamber. Chamber of carronades. Junction of the chambers with the rest of the bore: form of the bottom of the bore or of the chamber.

Thirty-third Lecture.—(7.) Vent; its object, its dimensions. Bushes inserted before casting, (masses de lumière;) after casting, (grains de lumière.) Considerations on the position of the vent relatively to the charge. Experiments made with the infantry musket, and with 24 and 16 pounder guns.

Arrangement of the vent in guns of 1732; portfire chamber. Vent of mortars. Priming pans. Windage of projectiles; conditions which determine it for the different services. Rules received with respect to ancient guns. Dimensions 164 in use at the present day. Different characteristics resulting from the windage of projectiles. Length of the bore. Question of the length of the bore considered with reference to the projectile effect of the powder. The length of ordnance is determined by considerations unconnected with this effect.

Length of bore of siege and defensive artillery, of field, coast, and naval guns. Length of bore of mortars, and of the stone mortar. Length of bore of howitzers. Thickness of metal and external outline. Cannon:—Theoretical determination of the external outline necessary for resistance to the effect of the gases of the powder. Co-efficient of resistance, its value in the guns in use. Thickness in the chase necessary for resistance to the percussions of the projectile.

Swell or moulding of the muzzle. Thickness at the position occupied by the trunnions. Thickness of metal of the different systems of cannon which have been successively in use in France. Thickness of metal in howitzers. Form resulting from the diminution of internal diameter, at the position occupied by the chamber. Exceptional form of the siege howitzer. Outline of the interior of mortars.

Thirty-fourth Lecture.—(8.) Line of sight; its object and arrangement. Considerations on the inclination of the line of sight relatively to the axis of the gun. Trunnions; object and arrangement of trunnions and their shoulders. Position of trunnions relatively to the center of gravity of the gun. Preponderance of the breech over the chase; manner of estimating it; preponderance allowed in the different guns in use. General principle serving as the basis for its adoption. Position of trunnions relatively to the axis of guns. Reasons for their depression; circumstances which cause it to vary. Trunnions of mortars; their reinforces. Dolphins of ordnance. Weight of ordnance; necessary relation between the weight of a gun, and the quantity of movement of its projectile. Conditions serving to determine the weight of the different species of cannon, howitzers, and mortars in use. Examination of the weights adopted for the pieces of ordnance of all sorts, which have been successively employed. General recapitulation of the different species of ordnance in use. Nomenclature. Dimensions, weight. Land artillery. Siege, garrison, and field guns. Siege, garrison, field, and mountain howitzers, mortars, and stone mortars. Naval artillery. Cannon, carronades, howitzers, mortars, stone mortar, blunderbuss. Observations on ordnance. Exceptional ordnance. Villantroy’s howitzers. Belgian mortar of 60 c., &c. Description of the artillery petard.

THIRD SECTION.—WAR AND SIGNAL ROCKETS.

Thirty-fifth Lecture.—(9.) Historical ideas on the subject. Cause of the motion of rockets. Their exterior and interior form. Relation which should exist between the law of generation of the gases and the orifice for their escape. Measure of the tension of the gases in rockets. Results of experiments. Motion of the rocket. Variation of the velocity during its passage. Means of regulating the motion; effect of the directing stick. Influence of the wind upon the trajectory of the rocket.

Description of rockets in use.—1st. War rockets; calibres employed; body of the rocket; arrangement of the stick. Projectiles fitted to the head of the rocket; rockets without stick. 2d. Signal rockets; their calibres and composition.

165

FOURTH SECTION.—CARRIAGES.

Thirty-sixth Lecture.—(10.) Historical ideas on the subject. Arrangements originally in use for the service of ordnance. Successive improvements. Carriages on wheels. Introduction of limbers. General conditions which gun-carriages should satisfy.

General principles of their construction:—1st. With reference to the act of firing. 2dly. With a view to transport.

Mortar carriages. Particular requisites. Description of the carriages in use. Siege carriages; particular conditions. General arrangement of ancient siege carriages. Detailed description of the present siege carriage and its limber; its weight and different characteristics. Field carriage; particular requisites; general arrangement of the carriages employed before 1765. Field carriages of the system of Gribeauval; its defects. General arrangement and detailed description of the present field carriage and of its limber. Weight and different characteristics. Mountain carriages; particular requisites; description of the carriage and of the arrangement of its shafts (limonière.)

Thirty-seventh Lecture.—(11.) Garrison and coast carriages; particular requisites; object of the platform for the two systems; its principal dimensions; position of the pintle or working bolt (cheville ouvrière.) General arrangement of ancient garrison and coast gun-carriages. Description of the present garrison carriage; change of the carriage into a movable one on four wheels; weight and different characteristics. Replacement of the platform by a directing transom bed under certain circumstances of the service. Casemate carriage. Iron carriages; inconveniences of this kind of construction for siege purposes and on the field of battle; its advantages for the armament of coasts. Description of the coast carriage actually in use; weight and different characteristics. Naval carriages; particular requisites. General arrangement of naval carriages in use. Carriage on four small wheels for cannon. Bracket carriage (à échantignolle,) and carriage with double pivot platform for howitzers. Carronade carriage. Mortar bed, cast in one piece with the mortar, (à plaque.) Exceptional methods of construction. Depressing gun carriages for a very plunging fire. Villantroy’s howitzer beds, those of the Belgian mortar of 60 c., &c.

FIFTH SECTION.—CARRIAGES AND OTHER PARTS OF AN ARTILLERY TRAIN. ARTILLERY OF FOREIGN POWERS.

Thirty-eighth Lecture.—(12.) Battery carriages. Ammunition wagon. Historical ideas on the subject. Requisites for carriages used for the transport of munitions of war. General arrangement and description of the present ammunition wagon. Principles of arrangement of the ammunition chest. Loading of the chest with munitions of various kinds. Mountain ammunition chest. Loading of the chest with howitzer ammunition and infantry cartridges.

Battery wagon; object of this carriage; patterns successively adopted. Description of the wagon, pattern 1833. Field forge; object of this carriage. Description of the forge in use. Arrangement and play of the bellows. Mountain forge. Description and loading of it.

Thirty-ninth Lecture.—(13.) Park carriages and machines.

Park wagon. General arrangement and description of the park wagon and its limber. Carriages destined to the transport of heavy burdens. Ancient gun wagon. Truck. Block carriage. General arrangement and description 166 of the carriage. Siege cart; its object and description. Devil carriages. Arrangement of the ancient devil carriages with perch and with screw. Devil carriage with roller. Description of the carriage and of its mechanism. Gin. General arrangement of the different patterns successively employed. Description of the gin at present in use. Handscrew; its use, general arrangement, and description.

Fortieth Lecture.—(14.) Pontoon equipages. Conditions which military pontoon equipages should satisfy. Considerations on the nature of the supports to be employed. Reserve pontoon equipage. Boat of the reserve equipage; its general form and dimensions. Description of the boat and skiff; use of the boat for navigation; its weight and different properties.

Tackle and machines employed for bridge-making. Balks, moorings, chesses, blocks, and balk collar. Framework, with movable head; different kinds of piles. Means of anchorage. Common anchor; its properties. Anchor basket and chest. Buoy. Cordage. Ideas on its arrangement and on the measure of its resistance. Capstan. Windlass. Tackling. Handscrew. Pile driver. Hand rammer. Grapnel and hooks.

General arrangement of the boat carriage. Description. Its weight and properties. Light equipage.

Forty-first Lecture.—(15.) General ideas on the artillery of the different European powers, and comparison with the French material.

Ordnance; description, species, and calibres. Gun-carriages, carriages, and other parts of the train. General arrangement; facility of movement; modes of harnessing, &c.

SIXTH SECTION.—DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION OF GUN CARRIAGES AND ARTILLERY CARRIAGES, AND MEANS OF PRESERVATION OF MATERIAL.

Forty-second Lecture.—(16.) Knowledge of woods. Preliminary ideas. Structures and general properties of woods. Diseases and defects of woods. Description and properties of the principal substances employed in the construction of the material; uses to which the different kinds of wood are specially destined. Selection of standing timber; felling; transport; reception of woods; cubature. Cutting up in large and small sizes. Observations on the shrinking of wood. Preservation of woods. Drying in the air. Round, squared, and blocked-out timber. Preservation in store; preservation in water. Steeping. Influence of the contact of woods with other woods, and with metals.

Forty-third Lecture.—(17.) General considerations on the substances employed in the manufacture of gun and artillery carriages. Different properties of metals. Choice of kinds of wood; effects of their being dried. Classified account of axles and wheels. Axles; substance employed, their forms and dimensions. Wheels; essential requisites. Importance of the elasticity of wheels. Effects of the dishing of a wheel, form of the spokes, coupling of the spokes with the nave and the felloes. Tires. Form and number of the felloes determined by the effects of the drying. Form of the nave. Wheel-boxes.

Forty-fourth Lecture.—(18.) Means employed for the connection of the pieces which enter into the composition of gun-carriages, carriages, and other furniture of the train. Nails, clinch nails, rivets, bolts, screws, &c. Examination of the joinings employed in the construction of gun-carriages, carriages, and other furniture of the train.

167

General principles. Joinings of gun-carriages. Joint plates (“rondelles d’assemblage.”) Mortar beds, siege, field, and garrison carriages.

Forty-fifth Lecture.—(19.) Joining of other carriages and furniture. Hind parts, ammunition wagon, battery wagon, forge, park wagon, block carriage, cart, devil carriage, and drays. Boat and wherry. Fore parts, particular requisites. Fore parts of the field and siege carriage, of the park wagon, devil carriage, and drays. Barrels and cases.

Forty-sixth Lecture.—(20.) Means employed for the preservation of the material. Cost price of the principal parts of the material. Ordnance, projectiles, powder, carriages, and other furniture of the train. Small-arms. Preservation of ordnance in gun-metal and cast-iron. Preservation of projectiles. Formation and counting of piles. Rust-cleaning machine. Preservation of gun-carriages, carriages, and other furniture of the train. Different methods of stacking in use. Preservation of powder and made-up ammunition; stacking in powder magazines. Means proposed for avoiding the danger of explosion. Preservation of small-arms. Armories. Preservation of iron and cut wood.

THIRD PART.

FIRE OF ORDNANCE AND PORTABLE FIRE-ARMS. EFFECTS OF PROJECTILES.

Forty-seventh Lecture.—(1.) Fire of ordnance. Kinds of fire in use with ordnance. Choice of charges of powder. Charges of powder formerly in use; their progressive reduction. Charges of field, siege, garrison, coast, and ships’ cannon; of howitzers and mortars.

Arrangement of the charge. Shot cartridge for field guns. Loading of the other kinds of guns, of howitzers, mortars, and the stone mortar. Loading for fire with red-hot shot. Armaments for the service of ordnance. Methods of igniting the charges of powder; tubes formerly in use, friction tubes. Percussion system; Swedish tube. Ignition of the charge of hollow projectiles, fuses of hollow projectiles, fuse with several pipes for the fire of spherical case, hand grenade fuse. Rapidity of fire. Laying of ordnance. Principal methods of laying guns; laying them by the help of the line of sight. Determination of the elevation. Instruments in use to obtain elevations. Negative elevations, means of using them. Laying guns for fire parallel to the ground; for breaching fire at a short distance.

Forty-eighth Lecture.—(2.) Determinations of elevations by experiment; construction of practice tables. Laying guns when the axis of the trunnions is not horizontal. Laying guns with the help of the plumb-line and quadrant; plunging fire, rectification of the aim.

Fire of mortars, means for directing it in use; use of pickets, of the line, of the quadrant. Laying pieces in the case of a defective platform. Means of laying them for night-firing. Laying naval ordnance; use of the front sight. Initial velocities of projectiles with the different charges in use. Angles of sight, and point-blank ranges of ordnance. Ranges at different sights. Maximum ranges.

Forty-ninth Lecture.—(3.) Probabilities in the fire of ordnance; known laws, facts ascertained by experiment. Distribution of projectiles over an object aimed at of indefinite extent. Mean point of impact. Fire of canister; effects of the dispersion.

168

Fire of spherical case. Effects of the bursting of the projectile; dispersion of the balls and of the explosions. Fire of the stone mortar; use of mortars for the same purpose.

Fire of small arms: charges of powder adopted. Ball cartridge. Initial velocities of balls with the different arms. Angles of sight and point-blank ranges. Rules for fire according to distances, for muskets, carbines, and pistols. Fire of rifled arms; use of the tangent scale. Probability of the fire of small-arms; comparison of arms with smooth-bored and rifled barrels. Different means employed for the estimation of distances.

Fiftieth Lecture.—(4.) Effects of projectiles on the different substances fired at. Effects of concussion and penetration. Effects on earth. Theory of the penetration of a projectile into a resisting medium. Formula to express the penetration, based on the results of calculation and experiment. Effects of penetration into wood. Effects on metals, cast-iron, iron, lead. Effects on masonry and on rock. Application to a breaching fire delivered in a regular direction relatively to the revetment. Effects of the shock of projectiles upon living bodies. Effects of hollow projectiles bursting in different media; earth, wood. Method of bursting employed against troops.

Effects of spherical case. Incendiary effects. Effects of war rockets. Explosive rockets. Incendiary rockets. Effects of concussion.

FOURTH PART.

TRACE AND CONSTRUCTION OF BATTERIES.

Six Lectures, common to the Students of both Arms.

Fifty-first Lecture.—(1.) Definitions. Meaning attached to the word “battery.” Different denominations given to batteries: first, according to the circumstances of the war in which they are employed; secondly, according to their mode of construction; thirdly, according to the kind of ordnance with which they are armed; fourthly, according to the kind of fire for which they are intended; fifthly, according to the direction of their fire.

Principles of construction. General considerations on the elements which constitute the different kinds of batteries which have reference to them. Epaulment; its length, height, and thickness in different cases. Section of the epaulment. Ground-plan of the epaulment of the different kinds of batteries; returns at its extremities. Case where the battery is in advance of a parallel. Epaulment with redans; its trace.

Embrasures opened in the epaulment; their construction in different cases; slope of the bottom; interior opening; exterior opening; form of the cheeks.

Genouillère; fixing of its height for the different kinds of fire. Limit of the obliquity of the embrasures.

Fifty-second Lecture.—(2.) Terre-Plein; its position relatively to the ground; its length for the different kinds of batteries. Disposition of the part unoccupied by the platforms. Terre-plein of garrison, field, coast, and barbette batteries.

Ditch; cases in which it is employed. Its position with reference to the epaulment. Depth, breadth, , and plan of the ditch.

169

Communications between the battery and the works, in its neighborhood; parallels or trenches; plan and construction. Communication between the battery and its ditch.

Powder magazines: their object. Discussion respecting their site and capacity with a view to the different kinds of batteries, viz., siege, garrison, and field batteries.

Traverses of crownwork and garrison batteries. Width between them and dimensions.

Fifty-third Lecture.—(3.) Details of construction. Different materials employed in the construction of batteries. First, materials for revetments, fascines, gabions, hurdles, sods, bags of earth, withy-bands, stakes, &c. Secondly, materials for platforms; hurtoir, sleepers, planks, beams, pickets. Construction of revetments of different kinds employed in batteries. First, revetment of the interior slope of a battery upon the natural ground. Secondly, revetment in use when the terre-plein is more or less sunken. Ordinary siege battery, battery in a parallel, battery in a crownwork. Third, revetment of the checks of embrasures in the different cases met with in practice; direct batteries with point-blank range; ricochet, breaching, garrison, and field batteries.

Fifty-fourth Lecture.—(4.) Construction of platforms. Ordinary siege platforms, movable platforms (à la Prussienne,) garrison and coast platforms, ordinary mortar platforms, platforms for coast mortars of great range. Peculiar case where the fire has to be elevated or greatly depressed. Construction of the communications from the battery to the parallel and to its fosse. Construction of powder magazines in batteries. Magazines of siege batteries, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4. Case of breaching batteries; garrison battery and field battery. Magazines. Degree of resistance offered by blinded magazines. Modifications adopted for the strengthening of magazines whose construction is already fixed.

Fifty-fifth Lecture.—(5.) Number of workmen to be employed on the construction of the different parts of batteries: revetments, platforms, communications, powder magazines. Earthworks.

Duration of the total labor necessary for the construction of each kind of battery. Duration of the duty for the different parts of the personnel employed upon the construction; officers, gunners, assistants. Definitive number of workmen necessary for the construction of the different kinds of batteries. Tools of different kinds.

Simultaneous execution. Preliminary operations. Reconnaissance. Prolongations. Sketch of the plan of a battery. Formation of the working party. Transport of materials. Plan of the battery. First, battery having its terre-plein on the level of the ground. Disposition of the working party. Work of the first night, of the following day, of the second night. Second, a battery sunk outside a parallel. Third, battery in a parallel or trench of some kind already established. Day labor, night labor.

(4.) Particular case of crownwork batteries.

Fifty-sixth Lecture.—(6.) Exceptional constructions. Blinded batteries for cannon or howitzers; for mortars. Batteries of earth-bags. Batteries on stony ground, on the rock, or marshy soil. Floating batteries. Construction on sites deficient in space. Case where the fire of the place is too dangerous. Coast batteries. General arrangement.

Instruction preparatory to working at the plans of batteries. (Course.)

170
FIFTH PART.

UNIFORM ORGANIZATION AND SERVICE OF THE ARTILLERY.

Ten Lectures common to Students of both Arms.

FIRST SECTION.—UNIFORM ORGANIZATION OF THE ARTILLERY.

Fifty-seventh Lecture.—(1.) Historical résumé. Progress of modern artillery, from its origin down to our time. Artillery of Charles VII. and of Louis XI. Progress under Francis I. Effects of the wars of religion. Edict of Blois, 1572. Improvements by Sully. Creation by Gustavus Adolphus. State of the artillery under Louis XIV. Employment of artillery on the field of battle at the commencement of the 18th century. Regulation of 1732. Introduction of howitzers into the French artillery. Regimental pieces. Progress of the artillery in Prussia and in Austria in the Seven Years’ War. Reorganization of the French artillery in 1765. Résumé of the improvements owing to Gribeauval. System of the year XI. Present system.

Historical ideas on the personnel of the artillery. State of the personnel at the commencement of the use of fire-arms. Masters and grand-masters of the artillery, &c. Personnel employed originally on the service, and the guard of ordnance. Creation by Louis XIV. Account of the successive modifications in the personnel from this epoch down to 1765. Organization of 1765. Horse artillery. Pontoneers. Artillery train. Artillery of the Imperial Guard. Organization of 1829. Present state of the personnel. Regiments of artillery. Composition of the personnel of the different kinds of batteries. Companies of pontoneers, workmen, armorers, veteran gunners. Driver-corps (“train de pare.”) Naval artillery.

Fifty-eighth Lecture.—(2.) Committee and central depôt of artillery. Organization of artillery commands. Establishments for the instruction of the personnel; artillery schools. Creation in 1679. Present schools; personnel attached to them. Central school of military pyrotechnics. Establishments for the preservation of the material. Importance of the material of artillery. Its state in France at different epochs. Artillery directions. Division of the territory of France. Personnel of the directions.

Establishments for the manufacture of the material. Ideas on the subject of their management. Arsenals; their object, management, number, personnel. Forges; their object, management, districts, personnel, inspection. Foundries for land artillery; their number, management, personnel, inspection. Naval foundries. Manufactures of arms; their special management, number, personnel, inspection. Branch of the service connected with gunpowder and saltpetre. Powder manufactories and refineries; management, personnel. Direction of the service. Establishments existing in France. Percussion cap manufactory.

SECOND SECTION.—SERVICE OF THE ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. ORGANIZATION OF THE FIELD ARTILLERY TRAIN, ETC.

Selection of ordnance, conditions which determine it; cannon, howitzers, relation between them. Proportion of the number of pieces of ordnance to that of the combatants. Mean proportion received in France; circumstances 171 which may lead to a modification of it. Organization of ordnance in batteries. Account of the arrangements formerly adopted. Present system. Distribution of the batteries in the army. Principles received. Application of these principles to the artillery train of an army of a given strength. Infantry divisional batteries; cavalry divisional batteries; reserve batteries. Case of the formation of army corps. Composition and supply of batteries. Principles and details of the supply of batteries with ammunition for the guns and for the troops. Second supply distributed amongst the parks.

Fifty-ninth Lecture.—(3.) Field parks. Their composition, in carriages of all kinds. Application of the principles to the artillery train of an army of a given strength. Approximate relation of the number of the carriages and of the horses of the train to that of the pieces of ordnance. Means of renewing the supply of the parks.

Personnel of the field train. Personnel of the batteries; working companies. Companies forming part of the train. Personnel attached to the parks. Staff. Particular conditions, having reference to war in a mountainous country. Selection of pieces of ordnance. Proportion between their number and that of the combatants. Composition of some artillery trains employed in our African expeditions. Composition and supply of the mountain battery. Lading of the mules. Composition of pontoon trains. Reserve train, boats, wherries, tackle, carriages, and horses. Personnel of the train. Light train: material, personnel.

Sixtieth Lecture.—(4.) Marches of the artillery. Reception of a battery or of a park. Precautions to be taken before the departure. March at a distance from the enemy. Order of march. Distribution of the personnel; halts. Case of an accident to a carriage; ascents; descents; deep-bedded roads; passage through inhabited places; passage of bridges; of fords. Passage over ice. Night march. Transport of mountain artillery. March of pontoon trains. Transport of the trains by water; navigation by convoys; by isolated boats. Transport of ordnance, powder and projectiles in the boats. Transport of artillery trains by sea.

March in the vicinity of the enemy. Isolated convoys; rule with reference to their command; order of march; general measures of security; precautions to be taken during halts; manner of receiving an attack. Case where resistance becomes impossible; arrangements for the night.

Artillery in the march with other troops. Order of march. Relation of the different corps to each other. Exceptional difficulties which may occur on marches; privations of all kinds; bad weather; bad state of the roads; instances. March among high mountains; passes strongly occupied by the enemy; examples.

Encampments and bivouacs. Choice of ground convenient for a camp; disposition of the artillery camp. Establishment of artillery bivouacs. Disposition of the park; precautions relating to the superintendence. Different measures to be taken on arriving on the place of encampment or of bivouac. Attention to be paid to the horses: special precautions for the mules of the mountain artillery. Precautionary measures variable according to circumstances.

Sixty-first Lecture.—(5.) Artillery on the field of battle. Measures to be taken on arriving in the neighborhood of the enemy.

172

Choice of positions adapted for artillery.

1. Different considerations relative to the ground to be occupied; form of the ground; cultivated lands; nature of the ground; communications, &c.

2. Position of the artillery relatively to the enemy.

3. Position of the artillery relatively to the troops to be supported.

Execution of the fire. Choice of the different kinds of fire according to the nature of the object aimed at and the distance. Fire of cannon, with ball, with shot. Fire of field and mountain howitzers. Fire parallel to the ground.

Use of war rockets. General principles relating to the effects to be produced by artillery, and to the warmth of the fire. Proper use of stores; their replacement. Use of the prolong. Arrangements to be made after the engagement. Spiking and unspiking of ordnance.

Use of artillery in the principal circumstances of a campaign. General case of an offensive engagement. Part played by the artillery in supporting infantry and cavalry marching to the attack. Importance of the artillery for following up a first advantage which has been obtained. Examples. Use of the artillery in masses to strike a decisive blow. Examples. Defensive engagement.

Disposition and use of the artillery for the defense of fortified positions. Attack of entrenchments. Reconnaissance. Disposition and use of artillery; attack of lunettes by the gorge. Examples. Attack and defense of villages; disposition of the artillery under these two circumstances. Attack of squares. Importance of artillery towards preparing for it. Examples. Defense of squares; disposition of artillery. Examples. Case of a charge of cavalry upon artillery. Use of artillery in the advanced guard, in the rearguard, in a retreat.

Use of artillery in the passage of streams. Examples. Use of artillery to defend or force the passage of valleys or defiles. Examples.

THIRD SECTION.—SERVICE OF ARTILLERY IN THE ATTACK AND DEFENSE OF PLACES, AND IN THE DEFENSE OF COASTS.

Sixty-second Lecture.—(6.) Object to be attained with the use of artillery in the attack of places. Selection of ordnance, cannon, howitzers, mortars. Composition of the siege train. Method to be followed in order to determine it. Examples of trains employed in different sieges. Carriages of the train. Supply of the siege train with projectiles, powder, &c.

Personnel of the siege train; troops and staff. Transport of the siege train. Horses to be employed. Limit in either direction. Employment of watercourses. Examples. Establishment of the train before the place. Encampment of the artillery force. Organization of the parks. Workshops, powder magazines, trench-depots. Rules relating to the direction of artillery works.

Commanding officers of attack.

Sixty-third Lecture.—(7.) Considerations on the different kinds of batteries to be employed in the attack of fortified places. Position of the batteries relatively to the point to be breached. Direct battery within point-blank range; enfilading battery, for a plunging fire, for direct fire within point-blank range, for plunging fire. Mortar batteries. Composition of the different kinds of batteries. Position of the directing lines of an enfilading battery, relative positions of the cannon, the howitzers, or the mortars. Position of the batteries relatively 173 to the parallels and the rest of the trenches. Examination of the circumstances which affect the power of a plunging fire, command of the work over the battery; distance between the height of the traverses. Slope of the crests of the work.

General principles relating to the order of the works of the artillery, commencing from the opening of the trenches.

Times for the construction of the first batteries. Batteries of the first and second parallels. Use of field artillery to defend the flank of the attacks. Replacement of the fire covered by the advance of the works; batteries of the third parallel. Use of vertical fire. Mortars of 15c. Throwing of grenades. Breaching and counter batteries. Considerations relating to their position. Batteries in the covered way.

Case of a breach into an interior work. Composition of the breaching and counter batteries. Calibres to be used. Number of pieces of ordnance.

Ideas upon the operation of arming batteries. Precautions to be taken. Passage out of the parallels or trenches. March in the trenches; examples of some operations of this kind. Supply of the different kinds of batteries. Rule relating to their daily service. Firing of siege batteries. Opening of the fire. Direct fire within point-blank range. Plunging fire. Fire of mortars. Warmth of the fire by day and by night; mean consumption of material. Fire of breaching batteries. Effects to be produced. Height of the horizontal cutting, number of the vertical ones. Execution of the fire; fall of the revetment. Fire upon the counter forts. Fire to render the breach practicable; balls, shells, war-rockets, facts ascertained by experiment.

Consumption of powder and projectiles, length of the operation. Breaching fire in a very oblique direction. Fire upon masked masonry. Breach into an unreveted work. Fire of counter-batteries. Bombardment. Case where it can be employed; manner of executing it.

Occupation of the place; arrangements which must be made by the artillery. Case of raising the siege. Case of its transformation into a blockade.

Sixty-fourth Lecture.—(8.) Service of artillery in the defense of places. Object to be attained with artillery. Selection of ordnance, guns, howitzers, mortars. Use of war-rockets and arms of precise aim. Field artillery. Basis of the supply of fortified places. Projectiles, powder, small-arms, various carriages. Personnel of the artillery. Troops. Staff.

Measures to be taken before the siege. Reconnaissances. Arrangement of the material. Organization of the personnel, of the duty by local divisions, of the workshops of all sorts. Precautionary armament. Basis of its organization. Supply of ordnance. Defensive armament. General principles relating to the armament of different kinds of works. Bastions, cavaliers, demilunes, approaches, &c. Organization of the armament. Traverses, embrasures, gun-carriages to be employed. Powder magazines. Supplies. Service of pieces.

Employment of the artillery against the first works of the besiegers, against the construction and armament of batteries; against the besieging artillery. Partial disarmament in case of inferiority. Part played by artillery in sorties. Modification of the defensive armament in proportion to the progress of the attack. Last defensive armament. Principles relating to its disposition. Armament of the flanking part of the fortification. Increased use of vertical fire. Use of war-rockets against works in close proximity. Crowning batteries, 174 cavaliers of the trenches. Heads of saps, &c. Blinded batteries. Conditions of the establishment. Defense of breaches.

Service of artillery in the defense of coasts. General considerations on the degree of extension admissible in the armament of coasts. Principal points to be defended. Selection of ordnance intended for the armament of coast. Objects to be effected. Effects of balls (utility of large calibres;) of howitzer shells and of shells. Fire with red-hot balls. Material appropriated to the defense of coasts.

Position of coast batteries, conditions which determine it. Composition of coast batteries; their supply. Ideas upon the organization of the batteries and their small redoubts (réduits.) Use of the fleet and of field artillery. Personnel allotted to the service of artillery on the coasts.

FOURTH SECTION.—APPLICATION OF THE PRINCIPLES PREVIOUSLY SET FORTH TO THE ATTACK AND DEFENSE OF THE FORTRESS OF METZ, (SHAM SIEGE.)

Sixty-fifth Lecture.—(9.) Composition of the siege train necessary for the attack of Metz. Carriages of the train.

Supply of the train with projectiles, powder, &c. Personnel of the train, troops and staff. Transport of the siege train. Establishment of the train before the place; encampment of the artillery force. Organization of the parks. Work-shops, powder magazines and depôts.

Sixty-sixth Lecture.—(10.) Object, disposition, and armament of all the batteries from the first opening of the trenches to the capture of the place. Use of field artillery to flank the batteries, &c.

Service of artillery in the defense of the place. Supply of ordnance, projectiles, powder, small-arms, and different carriages.

Personnel of the artillery. Troops, staff. Organization of the personnel and of the duties by local divisions. Precautionary armament; supply of ordnance. Defensive armament. Armament of the different works. Service of the pieces. Last defensive armament.

Lectures Preparatory to the Labors of the Course.

1. Drawing and tracing of ordnance, 3 lessons.
2. Design for ordnance, 4     “
3. Application of the theories of the course, 1     “
4. Drawing of artillery material, 1     “
5. Tracing of batteries, 1     “

The sixth lecture of the fourth part of the course (the fifty-sixth) is partly devoted to the communication of the instructions necessary for the execution of the work of tracing plans of batteries.

Studies in connection with the Artillery Course.

The practical studies which are connected with the artillery course, are,—

1. Drawing of ordnance, 12 days.
2. The designs for ordnance, 24   “
3. The application of the theories of the artillery course, 6   “
4. The drawings of artillery material, 26   “
5. The tracing of batteries, 4   “
Total, 72 days.
175

The tracing of batteries is executed by the students of both arms, the other tasks by the artillery students alone.

I. DRAWING ORDNANCE (12 DAYS.)

The survey of ordnance consists in constructing accurate sketches of a gun, howitzer, and mortar, in measuring their dimensions, and in giving a description of each of the pieces drawn. It is on this occasion that the students are practiced in the management of instruments to insure precision, such as the étoile mobile, and the sliding compass, &c. One day is devoted to this work.

The tracing of ordnance consists in the execution of a drawing upon colombier paper, containing an exact and detailed representation of a gun, a howitzer, and a mortar, with their projectiles.

This work is performed with the help of the tables for the construction of ordnance. Eleven days are devoted to it.

Detailed Programme of the Drawing.

1. For each gun, howitzer, or mortar, a longitudinal in the direction of the axis, and at right angles to the axis of the trunnions, and a plan parallel to the axis of the bore and of the trunnions.

Besides this, for those cannon and howitzers which have dolphins, a transverse taken across the middle of the dolphins and the axis of the trunnions. For mortars, a transverse made by a plane passing in front of the dolphins, the whole on a scale of one-fifth.

2. Detail of the button (comprising the cascable and breeching loop for naval ordnance) on a scale of two-fifths.

3. Detail of the tracing of a dolphin, on the scale of two-fifths.

4. Tracing of the bush of a gun, on a scale of two-fifths, and tracing of a priming-pan at the real size.

5. For garrison ordnance, in cast-iron, detail of the widening of the base ring on a scale of two-fifths.

6. Tracing of a cannon-ball, of a howitzer-shell, and of a shell, on a scale of one-fifth.

Tracing of the lugs of a shell, ring and lug at the real size.

All the parts of the drawing must be colored in uniform tints in conformity to the table of conventional colors; the annexation of the figures of measurement is not required.

This work is preceded by three or four lectures intended to make the students familiar with the tracings which they have to execute, and the solution of the problems in geometry and descriptive geometry, to which the representation on paper of pieces of ordnance and their projectiles give rise.

II. DESIGN FOR ORDNANCE (24 DAYS.)

The design for ordnance has for its object the complete determination of the nature of a projectile, and of a piece of ordnance in accordance with certain special conditions, inquiring into the laws of the motion of the projectile, and into its principal destructive effects, and the settlement of practice-tables for the 176 gun. The general case for treatment is that of a howitzer, which comprehends the gun and the mortar as particular cases.

The data usually adopted are,—

1. For the projectile, its weight and the quantity of powder which it is capable of containing.

2. For the piece, the initial velocity of its projectile. This operation comprises calculations, a drawing, and a memoir.

The drawing, on colombier paper, which must be figured in all its parts, contains,—

1. The tracing of the profile of the piece, as it is determined by calculation, so as to satisfy the different conditions of resistance, on a scale of one-fifth.

2. The complete tracing of the piece executed in conformity with the rules laid down for the tracing of ordnance on a scale of one-fifth.

3. Tracing of the projectile on a scale of one-fifth.

4. Tracing of the wooden bottom and of the fuse of the projectile, executed in the case of each of these objects in two figures—the one on a large scale (two-thirds, or even the size of nature,) representing the inquiry into their forms and dimensions, the other giving on a scale of one-fifth the results of this inquiry. To this is added, for the mountain howitzer, or any other howitzer for which it is admissible, a tracing of the mounted howitzer carriage.

5. The representation in drawing of the laws of the motion of the projectile, the trajectory, inclinations, remaining velocities, durations of the passage.

In addition, the scale of the elevations and that of the angles of fire, for an object of aim placed at different distances.

6. An inscription showing all the essential elements by which the projectile and the piece are distinguished.

The final tracings of the gun, the projectile, the bottom, and the fuse, must be colored in uniform tints conformably to the table of conventional colors.

As to the tracing of the profile founded upon the calculation, it should receive merely an edging of the color which represents the metal used.

PROGRAMME OF THE MEMORANDUM ON THE DESIGN FOR ORDNANCE.

INTRODUCTION.

Object of the work. Data of the Question.

A. PROJECTILE.

First Section.—Substance, Forms, and Dimensions.

1. Choice of the metal employed in the manufacture of this projectile.

2. Forms of the projectile.

3. Internal diameter.

4. External diameter.

5. Dimensions of the vent.

6. Diameters of the high and low gauges.

177

7. Densities of the projectile empty and filled with powder.

8. Weight of the cast-iron ball of the same calibre as the howitzer shell.

Second Section.—Minimum Bursting Charge.

9. Theoretical bursting charge for the hollow sphere.

10. Effect of the shock of the gases, and of their loss through the vent.

11. Résumé of the results arrived at in this chapter.

B. ORDNANCE.

First Section.—Metal, Calibre, and Length of Bore.

12. Choice of the metal of which the piece is to be formed.

13. Windage of the projectile and diameter of the bore.

14. Effect of the windage on the velocity of the projectile.

15. Length of the bore and charge of powder which satisfy the data of the programme.

16. Résumé of the results arrived at in this .

Second Section.—Thickness of Metal necessary in order that the Piece may resist the Expansion of the Gases.

17. Explanation of the method employed to resolve the question of the thicknesses of metal.

18. First propulsion of the projectile, mean density of the gases after this propulsion.

19. Second propulsion of the projectile, mean density of the gases after this propulsion.

20. Third, fourth, &c., propulsions of the projectile, mean density of the gases after each of them.

21. Density and position of the strata (of gas) at the moment of the maximum of mean density.

22. Density of the last stratum for the positions which come after that of the maximum of mean density.

23. Tensions which result from the densities found.

24. Corresponding thicknesses of metal.

25. Résumé of the results obtained.

Third Section.—Profile of the Piece.

26. Inclosing curve, resulting from the calculations of the second .

27. Modification rendered necessary by the form of the posterior part of the projectile.

28. Utility of the chamber and its dimensions.

29. Tracing of the chamber and of its junction with the bore.

30. Thickness of metal around the chamber.

31. Chase and reinforce.

32. Determination of the angle of sight.

33. Vent and base ring.

34. Minimum weight of the piece for the resistance of the carriage.

178

35. Approximate calculation of the weight given by the profile previously obtained. Modification of this profile, if there is any.

Fourth Section.—Trunnions, Breech, and Handles.

36. Dimensions of the trunnions and of the shoulders.

37. Tracing of the breech.

38. Base rings and other moldings.

39. Object and fixing of the preponderance of the breech.

40. Exact settlement of the position of the trunnions, definitive length of the reinforce.

41. Center of gravity of the piece; dimensions and position of the handles.

42. Means of executing the calculations indicated in the two preceding articles.

43. Table of the dimensions of the piece.

C. FIRE OF THE HOWITZER. EFFECTS OF THE PROJECTILE.

First Section.—Elements of the Charging of a Howitzer.

44. Tracing of the shot bottom.

45. Tracing of the fuse.

46. Diameter of the cartridge (or of the bag.)

47. Charge of powder for firing with ball.

Second Section.—Laws of the Motion of the Projectile. Establishment of Practice Tables.

48. Preliminary calculations.

49. Trajectory.

50. Curve of the inclinations.

51. Curve of the remaining velocities.

52. Curve of the durations of the passage.

53. Determination of the elevations for the fire at different distances.

54. Angle of fire, corresponding to the different distances of the object aimed at.

55. Angles of descent.

56. Résumé of the laws of the motion and of the practice tables.

Third Section.—Effects of the Projectile.

57. Depth of penetration in the media indicated by the programme.

58. Effects of explosion in earth.

59. Résumé of the results relating to the effects of the projectile.

Note.—The formulas cited in the memoir need not be accompanied by their demonstration, except in the case of the latter not having been already developed in the lessons of the artillery course. It will be sufficient to insert in this notice only the final result of the calculation relating to each formula, without entering into the details of such calculations.

The study of the design for ordnance is preceded by four lessons intended to make the students acquainted with all the details of its execution, and the substance of which is indicated in the programme of the memoir.

179

III. APPLICATION OF THE THEORIES OF THE ARTILLERY COURSE (6 DAYS.)

This study is intended to apply to the students those theories of the course which have not found their application in the design for ordnance. It comprises the solution by arithmetical calculations of certain questions on the effects of powder, the balistic pendulum, the effects of recoil, the science of projectiles, the draught of carriages, &c. The number of the questions may vary according to their nature and the time which their solution requires. The stating of the questions and the results of the calculations are inscribed on separate papers. This study is preceded by a lesson in which the students have recalled to them the formulas which they have to employ.

IV. DRAWING OF ARTILLERY MATERIAL (26 DAYS.)

The drawing of artillery material has for its object the representation by figured sketches of a gun-carriage, carriage, or other furniture of artillery material. The sketches, on paper put together in the form of a book, and headed by a special programme for the object to be drawn, consist of plans, s, or elevations of the object, executed on certain scales, and of detailed projections of the principal iron-work and joints. The whole fixed by the special programme in question.

All the simultaneous projections of any one part of the object drawn (fore part or hind part for carriages) must be completely figured; they are accompanied by explanatory inscriptions, with letters of reference to show the names of the pieces in wood or metal which they comprise.

Each collection of sketches must contain as well a notice in confirmation of the drawing, giving the complete description and the properties of the object to which it refers.

The students make two surveys of the same kind; eight days are allowed for each of these surveys, including the composition of the confirmatory notice.

The first survey is followed by the execution of an unfigured drawing, containing a complete representation of the object surveyed (elevation and plan,) obtained by the combination of the partial projections contained in the sketch. The drawing should be colored in the conventional uniform tints, and accompanied by an explanatory inscription, with letters of reference. Ten days are devoted to this work of composition.

V. TRACING OF BATTERIES (4 DAYS.)

This work consists in executing sketches showing, each in accordance with a separate programme, the complete plan of a battery and the essential data having reference to its construction and to its armament. The sketches, made by scale and completely figured, must comprise in the case of each battery to be represented—

1. The general plan of the battery, on the scale of 1/200.

2. The s or elevations necessary for the understanding of this plan, including the detail of the powder magazines, lines of communication, &c., on the scale of 1/100.

3. An inscription giving the object of the battery, its armament, its general arrangement (terre-plein, embrasures, revetment, communications, 180 magazines, &c.,) the workmen, materials, and tools necessary for its construction, and finally the duration of the labor and its distribution by day and night.

Four days are devoted to this work, which must be executed on a half sheet of colombier paper. The separate programmes relating to each of these batteries are shown on the study orders of the rooms.

RECAPITULATIVE TABLE.—ARTILLERY STUDENTS.

NL Number of the Lectures.

+A With application at 1h 50m.

-A Without application at 3h.

TC Total Credits.

Q Number of the Questions.

Lectures. NL Credits given
for the Lectures.
TC Q
+A -A
Division of the Course—              
First Part. Theory, Sections 1, 2, 3, 26 18   42 60   4
Second Part. Description of the Material, Sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 20 30   .. 30   3
Third Part. Fire of Ordnance, 4 ..   12 12   1
Fourth Part. Construction of Batteries, 6 9   .. 9   2
Fifth Part. Organization and Service of the Artillery, Sections 1, 2, 3, 8 ..   24 24   1
Sham Siege, 2 3   .. 3   ..
Lectures in preparation for the Studies, 9 13 50 .. 13 50 ..
Totals, 75 73 50 78 151 50 10

S Sketches

D Drawings.

M Memoirs.

Inv Inventories.

ID In-door Attendance. 1½ hours.

OD Out-door Attendance. 1½ hours.

C Credits in round Numbers.

Studies. Number of C
S D M Inv ID OD
Survey of Ordnance, 1 .. .. .. .. 1 5
Tracing of Ordnance, .. 1 .. .. 11 .. 50
Design for Ordnance—              
Calculations, .. .. .. 1 10 .. 45
Drawings, .. 1 .. .. 8 .. 35
Memoir, .. .. 1 .. 6 .. * 55
Application of Theories—(Artillery Question) .. .. 1 .. 6 .. † 55
First Survey of Material—              
Sketch, 1 .. .. .. .. 8 35
Composition of Notice, .. 1 .. .. 10 .. 45
Second Survey—Sketch, 1 .. .. .. .. 8 35
Sketch of Batteries, 1 .. .. .. 4 .. 20
Totals, 4 3 2 1 55 17 ..

* The time is doubled for the memoirs.

† Ditto.

RECAPITULATION.

Lectures,     150
Studies,       380
530

181

RECAPITULATIVE TABLE.—ENGINEER STUDENTS.

NL Number of the Lectures.

+A With application at 1h 50m.

-A Without application at 3h.

TC Total Credits.

Q Number of the Questions.

Lectures. NL Credits given
for the Lectures.
TC Q
+A -A
Division of the Course—          
First Part. Theories, Sections 1, 2, 3, 24 ... 72 72 4
Second Part. Description of the Material, Sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 14 ... 42 42 2
Third Part. Fire of Ordnance, 4 ... 12 12 1
Fourth Part. Construction of Batteries, 6 9 .. 9 1
Fifth Part. Organization and Service of the Artillery, Sections 1, 2, 3, 8 ... 24 24 1
Mock Siege, 2 3 .. 3 ..
Totals, 58 12 150 162 9
Studies Number of Credit
Sketches. In-door
Attendance
Sketches of Batteries, 1 4 20

RECAPITULATION

Lectures,   162
Studies,       20
182. Round number, 180.

IV. PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE OF MILITARY ART AND FIELD FORTIFICATION.

The course is divided into six parts, and is made up of lectures and works of Application in the Halls of Study and on the ground.

I. LECTURES.

The 1st part contains sundry historical notices on the Organization of Armies,

6 Lectures.
2d part is on Tactics, 3     “
3d part is on Castrametation, 2     “
4thpart is on Field Fortification, 16     “
5thpart is on Military Communication, 10     “
6thpart is on Strategy, 6     “
Total 43  

FIRST PART.—HISTORICAL NOTICES ON THE ORGANIZATION OF ARMIES.

The first lecture commences with explanations relating to the Greek and Roman armies; their order of battle, mode of marching; comparison of the 182 Roman Legion with the Greek Phalanx, and of the Roman Legion under Marius and under the Emperors.

2. Military organization of the Franks under the Kings of the first race. Consequences of the feudal system, acting on the military organization. Feudal armies. Chivalry. Crusades, and war against England. Establishment of the first standing armies. Results dependent on the introduction of fire-arms. Progress made in the Art of War and in the organization of armies, from the sixteenth century to the present time.

3. Necessity for standing armies. Their proper character. Recruiting. Promotion. Degrees of rank. Station of the officers. Various positions of military men. On the composition of armies, Infantry, Cavalry, Artillery, Engineers. Corps d’Etat-Major. Composition of the army during the Revolution and during the Empire. Actual formation of a French army.

General Staff. Commissariat. (Intendance.)—Different services dependent on it.

Relations between the strength of each of the arms that make up an army. On other corps which are not classed among the principal arms.

4, 5, 6. Summary relating to the military organization of the principal Powers of Europe.

SECOND PART—ON TACTICS.

1. Definitions. Formations. Manœuvers; character of a good manœuver. Order of battle: first, of the Infantry; second, of Cavalry; third, of the Artillery; relating to Sharpshooters (tirailleurs.)

2. Brief summary of the principal movements in battalion drill to pass from line to the order in columns and reciprocally. Movements in column. Movements in battle. Dispositions to be made against Cavalry.

3. Of the principal movements in line. Order of battle. Line of battle. Formation of Infantry to advance against the enemy. Action of Cavalry. Principal formations. Charges of Artillery. Use of the Three Arms.

THIRD PART.—CASTRAMETATION.

1. General principles of castrametation. Situation. Construction and disposition of barracks. Camp of a Regiment of Infantry, of Cavalry, and of a Battery of Artillery.

2. Manner of tracing a camp on the ground. Huts; details relating to their construction. Tents. Bivouacs. Screens. Kitchens and camp ovens. Choice of the site of a camp; precautions to be taken for its security. Main guards. Advanced posts. Patrols and sentinels.

FOURTH PART.—FIELD FORTIFICATION.

1. Definition of fortification in general. Object and character of field fortification; its utility demonstrated by historical examples. Napoleon’s opinion. Essential principle of field fortification. Discussion on the ordinary profile of earthen entrenchments; on the dimensions to be given to the ditch in level ground.

2. Definitions relating to the trace; general principles. Redoubts.

3. On the elements of lines. Relation that should exist between the crest and the internal size of a closed work. Maximum and minimum of the sides of a square redoubt. Defects inherent to the trace of this kind of redoubt. Circular redoubts. Redoubts en crémaillères. Star forts. Lines with bastions.

183

4. Revetments of various kinds; case in which the slope of the ditch should be reveted; choice to be made of the different kinds of revetments.

5. Exterior dispositions; accessories to the defense; abattis; trous de loups; palisades; chevaux de frise, &c. Precautions to be adopted with reference to such accessories.

6. Interior dispositions; armament of musketry, artillery, barbettes, and embrasures; their advantages and disadvantages; construction of.

7. Powder magazines of different kinds. Small earthen entrenchments; palisades, carpentry, or blockhouses; advantages and disadvantages of blockhouses. African blockhouse. Closing of field-works.

8. Artificial inundations; under what circumstances they can be considered as obstacles. Positions and dimensions of dikes. Details of their execution; what advantage can be drawn from an inundation having less than five feet depth of water.

9. What is understood by the defilading of a work. The defilading of fieldworks should, above all things, be made to depend on their trace and situation. Definitions: dangerous ground; dangerous points. Defilement of an isolated and closed work; in what case it is practicable. Use of traverses. A partial defilement may sometimes be sufficient.

10. Continuous lines. Broken lines. Traces of redan, tenailles, cromailleres. Bastioned lines. Comparison between continuous and broken lines. Principal objections to their use. Utility of each demonstrated under certain circumstances.

11. Lines in broken ground: their form should depend on the nature of the ground. On the manner of fortifying a table-land. Expedients for defilading portions of lines. On the manner of making use of the natural obstacles of the ground; forests, scarps, marshes, water-courses, &c. Method of fortifying a house, village, an open town. Defense of a bridge or road.

12. Têtes de pont. Utility of small earthen entrenchments in these cases to facilitate the passage of a retreating army. Traces of a large tête de pont. Principal circumstances relating to the use of lines in war. Lines of circumvallation and countervallation. Frontier lines. Retrenchments against a descent. Lines that an army should make in an enemy’s country, far from its base of operations. Entrenchment on the field of battle. Lines, mixed, proposed by General Rogniat.

13. Attack and defense of entrenchments, of a continuous line; of a line at intervals; of an isolated work, &c. Examples of the attack and defense of lines.

14. Instruction relating to the operations for profiling and defilading on the ground.

15. Instruction on the project of field fortification. Calculation of the dimensions of a ditch corresponding to the face of a work of a variable relief, and to be constructed in level or other ground. Details relating to traverses, small entrenchments; defensive caponnieres, and accessories to defense, &c.

16. On the construction of entrenchments. Practical operations and organization of workshops to obtain durable and solid work. Necessity, in most cases, for accelerating the construction of entrenchments. Vauban’s precepts. In what manner the work must proceed to obtain a useful result; and, in the event of plenty of hands, how to finish it promptly.

184

FIFTH PART.—ON MILITARY COMMUNICATIONS.

1. On roads. 1 and 2, Classification of roads. Section and trace of roads in level and mountain country. Details connected with the study of a project for a road. Particular conditions relating to military roads. Execution of paved and macadamized roads. Roads for passing difficult places by the use of fascines, logs, &c. Maintenance and destruction of roads.

2. On military bridges.

3. Observations on the currents and change of form in the bed of rivers. Fords. Transverse s, &c. Reconnaissances of rivers. Properties essential to military bridges. Relation between the buoyancy and the load in the case of floating supports. Anchorage. Construction of the abutments. Means of rendering bridges stable.

4. Construction of a bridge of boats in different ways. Bridges made of ordinary boats. Method of withdrawing a bridge of boats.

5. Raft bridge. Relation between the weight and the extrinsic load of a raft. Number of trunks of trees required for a raft bridge on a river of given dimensions. Weight of the trunk of a tree. Number and space between rafts. Construction of a raft and a bridge of rafts. Bridges of casks and trestles.

6. Rope bridges; their use. Calculations respecting the tension and diameters of ropes. Construction of a suspension bridge, and calculations relating to it.

7. Bridges on piles, carriages, gabions, &c.

8. Measures to be taken for the preservation of military bridges. Destruction of military bridges; also of masonry bridges. Reëstablishment of bridges.

9. Flying bridges. Ferry-boats, tubs, passage by fords, on the ice, by swimming.

10. Execution of the passage of rivers. Advancing and in retreating. Examples.

SIXTH PART.—STRATEGY.

1. Definition. Fundamental principles of all operations in war. In all cases there are—first, the base of operations; second, the point to be arrived at; third, the line of operations. Strategetical points and lines.

2. On marching. Preparatory and manœuvering marches. Advanced and rear guard. On provisions. System of magazines. Requisitions. Invasions. Battle. Examples.

3. On positions. War in a mountainous district. Retreats. Pursuit. Convoys. Partizans.

4. Winter quarters. Cantonments. War against irregular bands. Military reconnaissances.

5. Precis of the campaigns of the French armies.

6. Analysis of the principal campaigns of great captains.

II. PROGRAMME OF THE WORKS OF APPLICATION EXECUTED IN THE HALLS OF STUDY.

These works consist of four Plates of Drawings, two Memoirs, and a Project, of Field Fortification. Of the four Plates of Drawings, two relate to Field Fortification, and two, accompanied by Memoirs, relate to Military Communications.

185

Plate 1—Elements of lines. Tracing, on the scale of 1/1000 of the interior crest (only) of a redan, lunette, redoubt, star fort, bastioned fort, according to particular data given to each Sous-Lieutenant. Construction on the scale of 1/200 of a complete profile for each of these works, supposed to be established on level ground. Complete calculation of the deblais and remblais for one of the preceding works, according to the instructions of the Professor.

Plate 2.—Details of a field-work. Trace on the scale of 1/200 of a portion of the work of which the deblais and remblais has been calculated. Graphic construction of a barbette and of a direct or oblique embrasure. Details of revetments in fascines, hurdles, turf. Pisé. Drawing of a blockhouse.

Plate 3.—Accompanied by a Memoir. Project of a portion of road on ground represented by certain lines, according to certain data.

Plate 4.—Accompanied by a Memoir. Military bridges.

1. Drawing of a portion of a bridge of boats, three openings being shown; the two first relating to the successive construction of the bridge, and the third, of the construction by portions.

2. Project for establishing a raft bridge; the width of the river; the kind of troops to pass over the bridge; the length; mean diameter of the available trunks of trees and the length and scantling of the joints being given. The drawing to exhibit a plan of two openings of the bridge, and a transverse .

3. Tressel bridge. To draw a longitudinal elevation and a transverse of a tressel bridge, being given the length of the top and of the feet of the tressels up and down the stream.

4. Project for the repair of a broken arch; being given the opening of the head, the elevation of the roadway of the bridge above the level of the water; the depth of the water, the rapidity of the current, the kind of troops to pass over the bridge, and the available time and the resources as regards men and materials which can be had recourse to.

Programme of the Project of Field Fortification.

This project is made by the Sub-Lieutenants, according to certain data given to each of them. It has for its object to cause them to study:—1st. The trace. 2d. The complete organization necessary for its defense. 3d. The details of construction of a field-work. In consequence, the work comprises three Plates of Drawings and a Memoir divided into three parts.

Programme of the Drawings.

Plate 1.—Plan of the whole. This plate has for its object the research of a trace and of a combination of suitable works for the fortification of a certain portion of ground under certain circumstances of war defined by particular data. Each Sub-Lieutenant receives a lithographed sheet representing the ground to be fortified, and he has to exhibit on this sheet the works he proposes, in tracing in plain lines the horizontal projections of the interior crests and superior limits of the ditch, and in dotted lines the stockades or palisades; to show in black figures at the angles of the works the relief of the interior crests; the sites of barbettes, embrasures, traverses, barriers, &c., being indicated by reference letters and explanatory notes, the lines in red showing the directions and objects of the line of fire.

186

Plate 2.—Organization of a work.

This plate has for its object the study of the details of the interior and exterior organization of a work of a certain form, in order to render it susceptible of making a good defense.

Each Sub-Lieutenant will draw a complete plan of such one of the works shown on Plate 1, as may be pointed out by the Professor. He will represent the ditches, parapets, embrasures, accessory defenses, small entrenchments, descents into the ditch, &c., according to the particular data furnished to him; the figures of the relief of the crests of all kinds, the deblais and remblais being marked at all the angles. The figures of the natural ground will be underlined. The same plate will contain figured profiles which have served for the determination of the complete projection of the work. Scale 1/250.

Plate 3.—Details of construction.

The object of this plate is to show the composition of workshops and the manner that should be adopted in the construction of field-works, according to circumstances, for the execution of the deblais and remblais.

Each Sub-Lieutenant will indicate the manner in which the work drawn on Plate 2 should be constructed:—1st. To render it durable and solid. 2d. To arrive rapidly at a useful result, even with limited resources of workmen and tools. 3d. To finish the work in the shortest possible time, by making use of all the necessary means. A plan will show the composition of the workshops under each of these hypotheses, and the successive advancement of the work will be represented by certain profiles supposed to be made at certain periods of the construction through the center of one of the faces of the work. In these profiles a firm trace, figured with altitudes, will show the limits of the deblais and remblais at the period represented by the profiles; and in addition by dotted lines, the final results proposed to be obtained. All these projects must be accompanied by a figured plan, showing the principal altitudes in meters. The remblais will be colored with gamboge, the undisturbed earth in bistre, and the deblais will be left white.

Programme of the Memoir.

Each Sub-Lieutenant will write at the head of his Memoir the text of the particular programme, to which he is obliged to conform in the preparation of his project, and he should add to the text of the Memoir all the sketches properly figured, which are necessary for the proper appreciation of the dispositions which are not sufficiently detailed on the Drawings.

The Memoir is divided into three parts, corresponding to the three Plates of Drawings.

FIRST PART.—CONSIDERATIONS RESPECTING THE WHOLE PROJECT.

1st. General principles, according to which it would be proper to trace the works indicated in the particular programme, such as lines at intervals, continuous lines, têtes de pont, &c.

2d. Description of the tracing in Plate 1. Reasons deduced from the form of the ground or the nature of the military operations that led to the adoption of the trace. Object of the works, and their connection with each other.

3d. Number, description, and position of the pieces of artillery composing the armament.

187

4th. Maximum and minimum of troops that could be employed in the defense of these works.

5th. Dispositions which should be adopted (relatively to the necessary preparations in materials and to the separation and movement of troops) for the attack and for the defense.

SECOND PART.—COMPLETE ORGANIZATION OF A WORK.

1st. Particular object of the work shown in Plate 2. Trace of the complete projections of the parapets, barbettes, ramps, embrasures, traverses, &c.

2d. Conditions that should be fulfilled by the ditch. Approximate calculation of dimensions which should be given to it, taking into account the increased means of providing for an excess or defect of the deblais.

3d. Discussion on the site and the part which might be expected from small entrenchments, accessory defenses, shutters, descents of ditches, &c.

4th. Site of powder magazines; capacity that should be given to them, suitable to the state of the munitions necessary for the armament of the work.

THIRD PART.—DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTIONS.

1st. Means of ascertaining the nature of the earth; considerations respecting relays for the transport of earth with the shovel.

2d. Description, number and disposition of the workmen in a shed for deblai and remblai, according to the nature of the ground and number of relays.

3d. Explanation of Plate 3. Organization of the sheds and conduct of the work where the duration and solidity of the work are the greatest essentials; where, on the other hand, rapidity of execution is the principal thing to be fulfilled.

4th. Which of the modes of construction exhibited in Plate 3 it would be desirable to employ for the proposed works, according to the circumstance specified in the particular programme. Calculation for this mode of construction, of the time and of the numbers of men and tools necessary for the execution of the deblais and remblais of the work given in the plate.

5th. Details of construction of the revetments, magazines, shutters, accessory defenses, artillery platforms, &c.

III. PROGRAMME OF EXTERIOR WORKS.

These works consist of an exercise in tracing out a camp, and an exercise on the profiling and defilement of field-works.

The exercise on tracing camps has no particular programme, but is preceded by a lecture given by the Professor.

Programme of Practical Exercises on the Defilement and Profiling of Field Works.

This exercise comprehends: 1st, work on the ground; 2d, a Memoir.

The work on the ground has for its object: 1st, the trace of the projections of the interior crest of a work, whose position and form are known; 2d, the determination of the relief of the interior crest; 3d, the profiling of the different parts, so that the relief of the different parts of the parapet, barbettes, traverses, &c., may all be fixed.

The Sub-Lieutenants for this kind of work are divided into groups of six or eight, employed together on the same work, each group being divided into two squads. The work may be a lunette or a redan of given dimensions, having a 188 parapet of three meters thick, and a natural slope of one to one.

1st. The direction of the capital will be marked out in front by two numbered pickets.

2d. The tracing will be executed by means of poles or pickets placed at all the angles, and at the extremities of the gorge; the relief will be determined by the practical methods of defilement adverted to in the lecture which preceded the work.

3d. The relief obtained by the defilement will be marked on all the poles or pickets placed at the angles, and at the extremities of the sides of the work.

4th. On each face two vertical profiles will be executed, perpendicular to the horizontal projections of its interior crest. In order that these profiles shall not interfere with those placed at the angles, they must be established at several meters distant from the extremity of each face.

5th. The profiles of the angles will be deducted by simple prolongations, and the same for the profiles of the gorge. If the homologous crests of two contiguous faces do not meet each other, they should be reconciled by joining two points taken on each of them at half a meter from the inter of their projections.

6th. On the traverse, designed to secure the defenders from a reverse fire, two profiles are constructed, near to its extremities if its crest is a right line, but if it is bent, another profile must be set up at the junction.

7th. The data of all these profiles are, the relief of the interior crest at the point where it is encountered by the profile, the thickness of the parapet, the constant parts of every profile, and the natural slope of the ground; the portion of the slope of the traverses exposed to the view of the dominant heights should not be reveted, the others should be.

8th. At the points of inter of the profiles with the projections of the ridges of the works, as well as at the points used for adjusting, poles or pickets are placed, on which the points belonging to the ridges are marked. These points will be joined together in each profile by twine, indicating the different planes of the work.

9th. The form and dimensions of the batteries, either of barbettes or embrasures, will be equally determined by poles or pickets placed at all their angles, and united together by twine in the manner that will be subsequently explained.

10th. For the barbette batteries, the first thing to be done is to establish and to construct the front coupé of the salient of the interior crest, and substitute an interior horizontal crest throughout the extent of the barbette for that situated in the plane of defilement. The necessary adjustments are then made between the slope of the parapet of the barbette and that of the rest of the face, and indicate by means of twine the inters of the terre-plein of the barbette and of its slope with the different planes of the work.

11th. For the embrasures, after having determined their direction, the inters of the cheeks and bottom, with the interior and exterior slope of the parapet, and with its slope; also the slope which terminates the interruption of the banquette throughout the extent of the battery. In the case where the platform is formed more than 0m 4 elevated above the soil, a ramp is constructed with its slope, and the inters with the slope from the platform are shown.

12th. After the batteries, the slope of the ends of the traverses and of the passages for entry and exit are constructed.

13th. The traverse will be finished by adjusting its different planes with 189 those of the parapet. In the particular case, where it was interfered with to make a passage over the banquette, it is finished by reveting the slope passing by the crest of the banquette of the work.

14th. At the passages of entry and exit from the work, the parapets will be finished by the slope of the revetment, whose inters with the different planes of the parapets must be determined.

15th. For each squad of workmen, the distance of the salient of the work to the point on which it will be defiladed must be determined.

MEMOIR.

1st. Object of defilement—which is considered to be dangerous ground, dangerous point, plane of defilement.

2d. Position of the dangerous point relatively to the work which is to be defiladed. Practical method on the ground. Results to which it leads.

3d. On the field this method is not always applicable to an isolated work, and never is so to entrenchments of a great development, such as lines, large têtes-de-pont, &c. By what proceeding is it generally expedient to attempt to fulfill in war the indisputable condition of defilement.

RECAPITULATION FOR THE SUB-LIEUTENANTS OF ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS.

NL Number of the Lectures.

+A With application.

-A Without application.

I No. of Interrogations.

First Lectures.—Parts of the Course. NL Credits for Lectures. I
+A -A Total
1st Part. Historical notions on the Organization of Armies 6   18 18 1
2nd Part. Tactics 3   9 9
3rd    “    Castrametation 2   6 6
4th    “    Field Fortification 16 24   24 2
5th    “    Military Communications 10 15   15 1
6th    “    Strategy 6   18 18 1
Totals 43 39 51 * 90 5

* The number 90 is applied to the interrogations and to the obligations of the notes.

D Drawings

M Memoirs

I In the Halls

O Outside

C Credits

Execution of Work. Number of
D M Attendances C
I O
Drawings of Military Art,—          
Plate 1. Elements of Lines 1 .. 4 .. 20
Plate 2. Details of a Field-work 1 .. 8 .. 35
Plate 3. Project of a Road 1 .. 8 .. 35
Memoir .. 1 2 .. 20
Plate 4. Military Bridges 1 .. 8 .. 35
Memoir .. 1 2 .. 20
Project of Field Fortification,—          
Plate 1. Plan of the whole 1 .. 3 .. 15
Plate 2. Organization of a work 1 .. 8 .. 35
Plate 3. Details of Construction 1 .. 5 .. 20
Memoir .. 1 .. 3 30
Tracing of Camps .. .. .. 1 5
Tracing on the Ground .. .. .. 2 10
Memoir .. 1 1 .. 10
Totals 7 4 51 3 280

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF INFLUENCE.

Lectures, 90
Execution of Work, 280
Totals 370
190

4th. Methods of defilement employed. Determination of the different planes of barbettes, of their ramps, of the profiles of the gorge, &c. Construction of embrasures.

5th. Means made use of in practice for determining the distance of the salient of the work to the dangerous point on which it is defiladed.

V.—PROGRAMME OF PERMANENT FORTIFICATION, AND THE ATTACK AND DEFENSE OF PLACES.

The course of instruction in Permanent Fortification and the Attack and Defense of Places, is divided into three parts, viz:—

  No of lectures to
Artillery Engineers

The first part consists of the study of the Construction of existing Fortifications, and it is common to the two services; it comprises,

10 10

The second part contains principles of the Art of Fortification, divided into three s, of which the

1st relates to Fortification on level ground

19 19

2nd relates to Fortification on hilly ground

19 26

3rd relates to general questions of Fortifications

4 5

Third part relates to the Attack and Defense of Places,

24 24
Total number of Lectures, 76 84

The first part contains a description of the various works of permanent fortification, their respective uses, and the changes that have been successively made in them, together with a short history of ancient fortification prior to the invention of powder, and the changes introduced by the use of fire-arms.

The systems of Errard, Beville, Pagan, Vauban, Cochorn, and Cormontaigne.

The first of the second part describes the principles on which the various parts of a front of fortification on level ground, and according to Cormontaigne’s system, are regulated, such as the command, relief, defilement, form, length, and material of which the various parts should be constructed; the modifications required by the absence or presence of water; the changes which are necessary as regards exterior or advanced works, and ending with a comparison of a front of fortification according to Cormontaigne, with a modification of the same system introduced by the French engineers.

The second commences with the principles of defilement and its application under various given circumstances, proceeds with the description of an imaginary work founded on certain given data, and furnishes the data of its proposed construction. It then supplies the theory relating to mines, and their use in the attack, defense, and destruction of places, and points out the particular duties of engineers in fortified places, and the proper and most efficient manner of carrying them on.

The third relates to the preparation of projects for the improvement of inefficiently fortified places, and to the utility, particular organization, and proper position of fortified places on a frontier line. It then explains the necessity for military law in providing for the security of fortified places and districts along the frontiers of a state.

The third part describes the various operations connected with the attack and defense of a bastioned fortification, commencing with the operations preliminary to the siege and investment of the place, and continuing to describe the 191 several processes to be employed in the attack of the place, with the corresponding efforts that should be made during its defense, and ending with an historical account of certain sieges.

This course requires the practical completion of the following:

T Time allowed for its completion.

O Observations.

Nature of the Work. T Subject of the Work. Scale. O
   

1st Part.—On existing fortifications.

  *
Single Plate, 20 days,

Complete projection of the front of Cormontaigne without counterguard or cavalier,

1/1000
   

Three profiles of the front,

1/500
   

2d Part.—Principles of the Art of Fortification.

 
Plate, No. 1,   8   “

1st Section: Fortifications on level ground.—Principal graphical constructions of the front on level ground according to particular data given to each Student

1/1000
Plate, No. 2, 28   “

Complete projection of the whole of the visible and underground parts of the same front,

1/1000
   

Three profiles of the front.

1/500
Memoir,   6   “

Description of the principles of the Fortification, with a detailed discussion of the dispositions adopted in the particular case treated by the Students.

 
Plate 3, 20   “

2d Section: Fortification on hilly ground.—Drawing of the ideal fortress and of its Tête-du-pont, with the interior entrenchments, inundation, sluices, and all necessary details to enable a proper comprehension to be had of the action of the water.

 
   

Drawing complete of one of the fronts of the place and its outworks, described by a particular programme. Defilement of all the works of this front and of the masonry of one of its faces,

1/5000
Memoir,   3   “

On the situation of the fortification; description of the imaginary fortress, and of the management of the water; explanation of the operations of defilement drawn on Plate 3.

 

Plate 4, (Artillerie.)

10   “

Plan and profile of a full revetment of the escarp with its counterforts.

1/200
   

Plan, profiles, and elevation of a revetment “en décharge.”

1/200
   

Detail of a gallery and small chamber of a mine, of its tamping and mode of firing.

1/50

Plate 4, (Engineers.)

20   “

Detailed project of one of the parts of the front of fortification defiladed in Plate 3. Plans at different height; disposition of the galleries and small chambers of mines required for blowing up the whole of the ground between two listening galleries.

1/250
Plate 5, 10   “

Sections and elevations of the preceding project. Foundations, coping of vaults, dressing of cut stones, &c.,

1/125
   

Detail of a small gallery and chamber of a mine, comprised in the dispositions of Plate 4. Tamping and mode of firing.

 
Avant,   3   “

Abstractions of measurement of a part of the preceding project.

...
Plate 6, 11   “

Study of the alterations in the earth of the same part of the projects, representing the four principal periods of the work, by a plan and , with an elevation of the 4th period.

1/250
Memoir,   2   “

General theory of the removal of earth. Application to a particular project,

 
Register,   3   “

Register of the removal of earth as represented in Plate 6.

 
Estimate,   1   “

Estimate of the part of the project to which the abstraction of measurements has been applied.

 
   

3d Section: Projection of the improvement of an existing fortified place.

 
Plate 7, 30   “

Complete projection of the project for improving an existing fortified place

1/1000
Plate 8,   6   “

Details of the most interesting parts of the project, in plans, s, and elevations.

1/250
Memoir,   2   “

Marginal notes on the defects presented by the existing system, and on the means employed for correcting them.

 
Calculation,   5   “

Balance of the “deblais” and “remblais” of the project.

 
   

3d Part.—Attack and Defense of Places.

  *
Single Plate, 30   “

Project of attack of a front of fortification on level ground,

1/2000
   

Details of the attack.

 
Journal,   4   “

Journal of the siege. Details relating to the composition of the garrison and of the besieging army; also on the material for the Artillery and Engineers required for the attack and defense. Pen sketch of the most elementary works of attack.

1/200

* Common to Students of Both Services.

† Artillery.

‡ Special to Engineer Students.

192

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ARTILLERY.

NL Number of Lectures

+A With application (a.) *

-A Without application (b.) †

T Total.

I Number of Interrogations.

I. Lectures. Parts of the Course. NL Credits for the Lectures. I
+A -A T
First Part. Study of existing Fortifications, 10 4.5 21 26 1
Second Part. Principles of the Art of Fortification, . . . . . . . . . .
First Section. Fortification on level ground, 19 24.0 9 33 2
Second Section. Fortification on hilly ground, 19 19.5 18 38 2
Third Section. General questions of Fortification, 4 . . 12 12 . .
Third Part. Attack and Defence of Places, 24 24 24 48 2
Totals, 76 72 84 157 7

* (a.) The lectures with application count for 1 hour 5 minutes.

† (b.) Those without application for 3 hours.

D Drawings.

M Memoirs.

V Various.

S Sitting in the Halls of Study.

Cr Credits

II. Execution of Work. Number of Cr
D M V S
First Part. Front of Cormontaigne 1     20 90
Second Part. Plate 1. Construction of Project on Level Ground 1     8 35
Plate 2. Project on Level Ground 1     28 125
Memoir on ditto   1   6 55
Plate 3. Project on Hilly Ground 1     20 90
Memoir on ditto   1   3 30
Plate 4. Project of Details. Plan 1     20 90
Plate 5. Project of Section. Plan 1     10 45
Abstraction of Measurements     1 3 25
Plate 6. Removal of Earth 1     11 50
Memoir on ditto   1   2 20
Register of ditto     1 3 25
Estimate of the Project     1 1 10
Plate 7. Project of Improvements 1     30 135
Plate 8. Details of ditto, 1     6 25
Memoir on ditto   1   2 20
Balance of Deblais and Remblais     1 5 45
Third Part. Project of Attack 1     30 135
Journal of the Siege   1   4 35
  Totals 10 5 4 212 1085

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF INFLUENCE.

Lectures, 165
Execution of Works,     1,085
1,250

193
II. Studies and Execution of Work. Number of Cr
D M S
First Part. Front of Cormontaigne, 1   20 90
Second Part. Plate 1. Construction of the Project on Level Ground, 1   8 35
Plate 2. Project on Level Ground, 1   28 125
Memoir,   1 6 55
Plate 3. Project on Hilly Ground, 1   20 90
Plate 4. Details of the Project, 1   10 45
Memoir,   1 3 30
Third Part. Plate. Project of Attack, 1   30 135
Journal of Attack,   1 4 35
  Totals 6 3 129 640

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF INFLUENCE.

Lectures, 160
Execution of Works,     640
800

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ENGINEERS.

NL Number of Lectures.

+A With application.

-A Without application.

T Total.

I Number of Interrogations.

I. Lectures. NL Credits for Lectures. I
+A -A T
First Part. Study of Existing Fortification, 10 4.5 21 26 1
Second Part. Principles of the Art of Fortification, . . . . . . . . . .
First Section. Fortification on Level Ground, 19 24.0 9 33 2
Second Section. Fortification on Hilly Ground, 26 36.0 6 42 2
Third Section. General Questions on Fortification, 5 1.5 12 13 . .
Third Part. Attack and Defense Places, 24 24.0 24 48 2
  Totals 84 90.0 72 162* 7

* The number 162 is applicable to the Interrogations.

194

VI. PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE OF TOPOGRAPHY.

The course of Topography comprehends two parts.

The first relates to the art of topographical drawing, and the second to the art of making topographical surveys. Both parts are carried on pari passu; but as the order in which the different branches of the instruction can be given depends very much on the other works carried on in the School, it will be more convenient to give the programme for each separately.

FIRST PART.—INSTRUCTION IN TOPOGRAPHICAL DRAWING.

The instruction in topographical drawing comprehends lectures and exercises in graphical representation. It is based on a complete exposition of the conventional principles of this species of drawing, and it is illustrated by engraved examples of the characteristics adopted for the representation of the various details.

First Section.—Lectures.

The lectures have for their object the explanation of the general principles of the instruction in topographical drawing, and the geometrical conditions which should regulate the shading of maps and their reduction. They immediately precede the exercise to which they relate.

Lecture 1 relates to small maps, copies, and reductions of these; and it explains the object of topographical maps, the various kinds and the different scales generally used. The manner in which the form of the ground is represented by equi-distant contour or level lines is also explained, and mention is made of the conventional tints used, and the species of writing and value of the scale employed.

Lectures 2 and 3 relate to the execution of shaded plans by the brush and the pen, under different circumstances of light and shade.

Lecture 4 explains the different methods for reducing topographical maps, also the description, mode of using, and verification of pentagraphs.

Second Section.—Exercises.

These exercises are intended to teach the students the conventional signs used in topographical drawing, and to give them facilities with the pencil and brush for producing shaded maps, and in reducing them from one scale to another.

SECOND PART.—INSTRUCTION IN TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEYING.

This instruction comprises:

1st. Lectures given in amphitheatre.

2d. Practical lectures or exercises.

3d. The execution of topographical surveys.

First Section.—Oral Lectures.

These lectures are divided in two classes, which comprehend:—

1st. Those relating to the description of the instruments, and of the methods used in topography.

195

2d. Those which have reference to the manner in which the students should proceed in the execution of the work, and principally of surveys of limited extent.

Eight lectures are devoted to the description of the various instruments, the method of adjusting their errors, and the manner of using them, as well as to the different ways of proceeding in topography; touching also on the various modes of measuring distances, with descriptions of the compass, plane table, and instruments used for leveling, and on the taking observations for and preparation of s, and the orientation of maps.

Four preparatory lectures are given, showing the manner in which the students should proceed when on the ground to make a survey of small extent.

Two lectures relate to the methods that should be employed in making a survey of considerable extent, and on the appropriate scales.

Two lectures on military reconnaissance plans; instruments and scales employed.

Two preparatory lectures relate to the execution of a reconnaissance plan, in which the operations of a sham siege are intended to be recorded.

Second Section.—Practical Lectures or Exercises.

The object of these lectures, which take place on the glacis of the fortification, is to show the students the practical modes of using the instruments, and the precautions which must be taken, together with the most elementary proceedings in topography. They are given to ten or twelve students at the same time, and the Professor is assisted by an officer of the staff. Each lecture lasts two and a half hours.

Third Section.—On the Execution of Topographical Surveys.

The object is to familiarize the students with the use of the principal instruments and the principal operations, and they comprehend out-of-door work, of which the results are sketches, registers, and minutes made in pencil, and in the construction of plans, and inking in of the minutes in the Halls of Study.

The out-of-door work is performed under the superintendence of officers of the staff, who assist the students in their work. The construction of the plans is not commenced until the pencil minutes have been examined by the Professor.

These exercises comprise:—

1st and 2d. Construction of plans by the aid of the compass.

3d. The plan of a fortification made with the plane table.

4th. The determination of the variation of the compass.

5th. The execution of a second survey by the aid of the compass.

6th. The execution of a rapid survey by pacing the distances.

7th. The execution of a reconnaissance survey.

8th. The execution of a an itinerary and reconnaissance sketch.

9th. The preparation of a plan on which the whole of the operations of a sham siege may be laid down, as the works of attack and defense proceed.

196

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS.

NL Number of Lectures.

+A With application.

-A Without application.

T Total Credits.

I Number of Interrogations.

Lectures. NL Credits for Lectures. I
+A -A T
1st part:          
Topographical drawing, 4 6 . .   2
Art of Surveying—       36
On the instruments and Topographical processes, 8 12 . .
On Surveys of considerable magnitude, 2 . . 6
On Reconnaissance Plans, 2 1.5 3
Preparatory to out-of-door work, 5 7.5 . .  
Total, 21 27 9 30* 2

* The credit is diminished here and carried forward to the exercises, which serve for the interrogations of many lectures. These lectures have therefore really three series of interrogations.

D Drawings.

M Memoirs.

V Various.

+H In the halls.

-H Out of the halls.

O Out of doors.

C Credits.

Execution of Work. Number of C
D M V Attendances
+H -H O
1st Part:—
Topographical Drawing:
             
Conventional Tints, 1 . . . . 3 . . . . 10
Study of Maps, 4 . . . . 26 . . . . 120
Reduction, 1 . . . . 2 . . . . 10
Construction of a Triangulation with the Compass, 1 . . . . 3 . . . . 15
1st Survey with the Compass:              
Out-of-door work, . . . . 1 . . . . 6 50
Laying down, 1 . . . . 4 . . . . 20
Survey of Fortifications with the Plane-Table:              
Out-of-door work, 1 . . 1 . . . . 10 80
Laying Down, . . 4 . . . . 25
Determination of the Variation of the Compass, 1 . . . . 1 1h . . 5
2d Survey with the Compass:              
Out-of-door work, 1 . . 1 . . . . 8 65
Laying down, 1 . . . . 2 . . 10  
Rapid Survey:              
Out-of-door work, 1 . . 1 . . . . 6 50
Laying down, 1 . . 4 . . . . 25
Reconnaisance survey:              
Out-of-door work, 1 . . 1 . . . . 4 30
Laying down, 1 . . 3 . . . . 20
Itinerary and Reconnaissance,* 1 . . . . . . . . 1 10
Topographical operations relative to sham siege† . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Topographical exercises, each of 2½ hours duration, . . . . . . . . 6 .. ‡ 20
Total 15 3 5 52 7 35 565

* The description Itinerary is reckoned with the simulated siege operations.

† For a memoir.

‡ This number is formed with 5 taken from it for the credit of the interrogations because the exercises serve for the interrogations of several lectures.

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF INFLUENCE.

Lectures, 30
Execution of Works,     565
595.

197

VII. PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE OF GEODESY AND DIALLING.

This course is divided into two parts—the one part special for the engineers, and the other common to the artillery and engineers.

The first comprises:—

1st. The study of the execution of a triangulation of some extent, and of its connection with the general triangulation of France, executed under the superintendence of the Dépôt de la Guerre, and

2d. Leveling with the barometer.

The second contains:—

1st. The study of reflecting instruments.

2d. The principles of dialling.

Each of these parts comprehend:—

1st. Lectures given in the amphitheatre.

2d. Practical lectures or exercises.

3d. An application.

FIRST PART.—SPECIAL FOR ENGINEERS.

1st Section—Lectures.

These Lectures include:—

1st. A description of the principal geodesical instruments.

2d. The establishment of the triangulation.

3d. The survey and the calculations connected with it.

4th. The orientation of the triangulation.

5th. The calculation of the co-ordinates of the points and their construction from the minutes of the survey.

6th. The geodesical and barometrical leveling.

The first lecture is devoted to the explanation of the different kind of signals used under various circumstances; on the method of measuring bases and angles, and the principles on which these operations are performed; and concluding with the description and mode of using certain instruments for measuring angles.

The second lecture continues and enlarges on the subject of the measurement of angles, horizontal and vertical, with different kinds of instruments.

The third lecture relates to the corrections and reductions which must be made to observed angles, such as the correction for the eccentricity of the instruments, to the reduction of the angles to the horizon, and to the center of the station, and also on the adjustments of the instruments, or the application of corrections for certain errors.

The fourth lecture discusses the calculation of the triangles and their errors, and points out the best organization that can be given to the triangulation, and the exactitude which can be expected from it.

The fifth lecture also relates to the calculation and the development of the triangulation, and explains the nature of the geodesical operations for the map of France.

The sixth lecture explains the manner of observing for, and determination of the azimuthal bearing, for the orientation of the triangulation.

The seventh lecture has reference to the convergence of meridians, calculation of rectangular co-ordinates, sundry problems, and geodesical leveling.

198

The eighth lecture shows in what manner the barometer is made use of for the determination of differences of altitude, the nature of the corrections to be applied to the instrument, and the degree of exactitude to be found in the results of this process.

The ninth lecture points out the order in which geodesical calculations should be performed and the verifications which should be exacted.

The Second Section contains five lectures or exercises, and they have for their object to familiarize the students with the use of the various kinds of instruments employed in carrying on the operations which have been shortly described in the first .

The Third Section relates to the practical application of the preceding principles, and mostly consists of geodesical applications.

SECOND PART.—COMMON TO THE ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS.

The First Section consists of lectures given in the amphitheatre, and relates to reflecting instruments, such as the sextant, reflecting circle, and the method of using them, and also on the principles of dialling, and its connection with various problems in astronomy; describes also the different kinds of dials.

SECOND SECTION.—PRACTICAL EXERCISES.

In which the students are called upon, in the presence of the Professor, to adjust the sextant, and to use it in connection with an artificial horizon for the measurement of the angle between any two objects of the altitude of these objects above the horizon, and also the same altitude.

Third Section contains the practical application of the principles enunciated in the preceding s, in the preparation by the students of two drawings, in which they will exhibit the graphical representation of the hour in terms of the altitude of the sun previously observed, and show the various constructions of a sun-dial, according to the specified conditions based on the observation of the hour angle.

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ENGINEERS.

NL Number of Lectures.

+A With application.

-A Without application.

T Total Credits.

I Number of Interrogations.

Lectures. NL Credits for Lectures. I
+A -A T
First Part:—Geodesy:          
Lectures with application, 4 6 . . 21 1
Lectures without application, 5 . . 15
Second Part:          
Reflecting Instruments, 1 1.5 . . 4.5 1
Dialling, 2 3
Total, 12 10.5 15 25.5 2
199

D Drawings.

M Memoirs.

V Etats Divers.

+H In the halls.

-H Out of the halls.

C Credits.

Execution of Work. Number of C
D M V Attendances
+H -H
First Part:          
Geodesical calculations, . . . . 1 4 . . 20
Exercises of 2½ hours, . . . . 1 . . 5 10
Second Part:          
Drawings of Dialling, 2 . . . . 4 . . 20
Exercises of 2½ hours, . . . . . . . . 1 5
Total 2 . . 2 8 6 55

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF IMPORTANCE.

Lectures, 25
Execution of Works,     55
80.

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ARTILLERY.

NL Number of Lectures.

+A With application.

-A Without application.

T Total Credits.

I Number of Interrogations.

Lectures. NL Credits for Lectures. I
+A -A T
Reflecting Instruments, 1 4.5 . . 5 1
Dialling, 2
Total, 3 4.5   5 1

D Drawings.

M Memoirs.

+H In the halls.

-H Out of the halls.

C Credits.

Execution of Works. Number of C
D Days M
+H -H
Drawings of Dialling, 2 4 . . . . 20
Exercises of 2½ hours, . . . . 1 . . 5
Total, 2 4 1 . . 25

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF IMPORTANCE.

Lectures, 5
Execution of Works,     25
30.

200

VIII.—PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE OF SCIENCES APPLIED TO THE MILITARY ARTS.

Lectures.
1st part— Geology, 12
2d    “ On the Metallurgy of Iron, on Working in Iron, 6
3d    “ Applications of the Working in Iron, 3
4th   “ On the Manufacture of Small-arms, 4
5th   “ On the Manufacture of Ordnance, 5
6th   “ On the Manufacture of Powder, 5
7th   “ On Pyrotechny, 2
Total, 37
FIRST PART.—GEOLOGY.

Lecture 1.—Preliminary notions. Definition of geology expressed from its applications. Division in four s:—1st. Mineralogy. 2d. Paleontology. 3d. Geognosy. 4th. Geogeny. (Only the three first are here treated of.)

First Section.—Mineralogy. Generalities. Distinctive characters of minerals. Fundamental principle of a mineralogical classification. Minerals are distinguished as having characters either exterior, crystalline, chemical, or physical; classification of minerals.

Lecture 2.—First class: Simple bodies forming one of the essential principles of minerals. Genus silica, quartz, sulphur. Second class: Alkali and alkaline salts, potass, soda, &c. Third class: Alkaline earths, and earths. Genus lime. Fourth class: Metals. Iron of various kinds; copper, lead, tin, zinc.

Lecture 3.—Fifth class: Silicates of various kinds. Sixth class: Combustibles, minerals.

Lecture 4.—Description of various rocks. Classification of rocks.

Lecture 5.—Use of rock and stone in the arts, and particularly in the art of construction.

Lecture 6.—On the calcination of calcareous stones, lime-kilns.

Lecture 7.—Manufacture of artificial hydraulic lime, manufacture of bricks, stucco, or cements.

Lecture 8.—Second Section: Paleontology. General division established in zoology and botany. General notions relating to the different kinds of animals and vegetables, of which the remains are found in various geological formations. Third : Geognosy. Lectures 9, 10, 11, 12, occupied with the explanation of the various formations.

SECOND PART.—ON WORKING IN IRON.

Lecture 13.—Preliminary notions. Definitions and general considerations. Characteristics of iron, steel, cast-iron, &c.

Lecture 14.—On iron ore and the various kinds of fluxes.

Lecture 15.—On combustibles. Vegetable combustibles, mineral combustibles.

Lecture 16.—Manufacture of cast-iron. High furnaces, different modes of proceeding with vegetable and mineral combustibles.

Lecture 17.—Manufacture of iron and steel and the different kinds of iron.

201
THIRD PART.—APPLICATION OF THE WORKINGS OF IRON.

Lecture 19.—Making of projectiles, carriages for guns and mortars, axle-trees and anchors. Use of cast-iron for artillery. General notions in moulding. Use of wrought-iron and steel. Materials first made use of for the making of projectiles, and in the casting of cannon-balls, &c.

Lecture 20.—On the manufacture of hollow projectiles and the carriages for guns and mortars.

Lecture 21.—On the manufacture of axles and anchors.

FOURTH PART.—ON THE MANUFACTURE OF SMALL-ARMS.

Lecture 22.—Preliminary considerations. Assay of metals. Fire-arms, manufacture of gun-barrels, describing the various details.

Lecture 23.—Bayonets, locks, &c.

Lecture 24.—On the making of stocks. Finishing. Rifling small-arms.

Lecture 25.—Manufacture of sabres, swords, lances, hatchets, cuirasses, and on the preservation, maintenance, and repair of arms.

FIFTH PART.—ON THE MANUFACTURE OF ORDNANCE.

Lecture 26.—Preliminary notions. Metals proper for the manufacture of ordnance. Composition and properties of gun-metal. Wrought and cast-iron ordnance. Moulding generally. Moulding of cannons.

Lecture 27.—Moulding of howitzers. Foundries. Fusion of the metals.

Lectures 28, 29.—Boring. Turning. Carving. Turning of the trunnions, &c. Manufacture and reception of bushes. Insertion and replacement of bushes.

Lecture 30.—Last operations. Proofs and reception of cannon. Chemical operations. Assay and analysis of the metals employed in the casting of gun-metal; proportion of the several ingredients.

SIXTH PART.—ON THE MANUFACTURE OF POWDER.

Lecture 31.—General notions. Various kinds of powder, &c. On saltpetre and sulphur.

Lecture 32.—Charcoal; wood employed; various kinds of charcoal; proceeding followed in making powder in various ways by the pestle.

Lecture 33.—Manufacture by mills, &c.

Lecture 34.—Influence of the proportion of the several ingredients, and of the manner of making it on its various properties. Preservation, inflammation, and combustion.

Lecture 35.—Proofs and reception of powder. Proof of its projectile force. Mortar proof, and various kinds of other proofs to which it is subject. Reception and analysis of powder.

SEVENTH PART.—PYROTECHNY.

Lecture 36.—Preliminary ideas. Objects of the course. Precautions that should be adopted to prevent accident. Mixture of the materials. Manufacture of leaden balls of various kinds. Caps. Fireworks for warlike purposes, used for setting buildings, &c., on fire. Firing cannon and exploding mines.

Lecture 37.—Fireworks employed under various circumstances in war. Signal rockets. For illuminating or setting on fire. For explosions. Petards. On ordinary fireworks.

202

Works of Application.—The works of application which are connected with the course of science applied to the military arts are as follows:—

1st. Study of samples of mineralogical specimens.

2d. Study of geological maps to be followed by a memoir.

3d. Memoirs on: 1st. Iron and its applications. 2d. Manufacture of cannon. 3d. Manufacture of small-arms and powder.

4th. Out-of-door geological excursions to be followed by memoirs.

5th. Manipulations relative to moulding in earth or sand.

6th. Chemical manipulations.

7th. Pyrotechnic manipulations.

First.—Study of Samples of Mineralogical Specimens.

This study has for its object the determination of the kind of minerals described in the course. It is made in s of ten or twelve Sub-Lieutenants and by attendances of one hour, each Sub-Lieutenant being called upon to reply at least three times.

Second.—Study of Geological Maps, followed by a Memoir.

The study of geological maps will consist in indicating, by conventional colors, the different geological formations of a lithographical map, and to make a in a particular direction. The map will be the same for all, and it will be conceived so as to correspond with the geological formation of France, but the s will differ for each student.

An explanatory memoir will have for its object to call the attention of the Sub-Lieutenants to the most salient facts which will be placed in relief by this study.

One attendance in the halls of study will be devoted to this work.

Third.—Three Memoirs.

Three memoirs on different parts of the course, other than the geological, will be made immediately after the interrogations relative to each . Particular data will be furnished to each Sub-Lieutenant. Three attendances in the halls of study will be allowed for these memoirs.

Fourth.—Geological Excursions.

Three geological excursions will be made in the environs of Metz by groups of ten or twelve Sub-Lieutenants under the direction of the Professor, and at the period of the out-of-door work, so as not to interfere with the current work in the halls. The first excursion will have for its object the study of the lias and lower oolite, met with in the vicinity of Metz. If the time will admit of it, a reconnaissance will be made to the great oolite at Taumont or at Amanvillers.

The second excursion will be made in the direction of Gorze for the study of the lower oolitic formation and to trace it up to Bradford clay, where an important fault occurs in this direction near to Metz. The study of this fault will be the great object of this excursion.

The third excursion will be made in the direction of Forbach, meeting with the lias, chalk-colored freestone, &c.

Three entire days will be devoted to these excursions, and each Sub-Lieutenant will enter his observations in a note-book, and make a certain number of 203 s, and report the results of these excursions in three memoirs in a specified time.

Fifth.—Manipulations relative to Moulding in Earth or Sand.

These mouldings of projectiles will be made by s of ten or twelve Sub-Lieutenants, two attendances of three hours each being devoted to them, one for ordinary and the other for hollow projectiles.

The manipulations for the moulding of cannon will be executed by the Professor.

All the Sub-Lieutenants will be successively called by s a certain number of times, in order that they may be enabled to render an account of the different states of advancement of the work.

Programme of practical instruction for the casting of projectiles.

1st attendance. Making shot, &c.

2d attendance.  Making hollow projectiles.

Programme of the moulds to be executed by the Professor.

Manufacture of cannon; moulding in earth and the various processes to be carried on.

Sixth.—Chemical Manipulations.

The chemical manipulations are made by s of ten or twelve Sub-Lieutenants.

Nine attendances of three hours each are employed.

1st. To the determination of the specific gravity and real density of gunpowder and to its analysis.

2d. To two other analyses of gun-metal, iron-ore, &c.

Seventh.—Manipulations in Pyrotechny.

The manipulations in pyrotechny will be made by the whole division, divided into three brigades. Each brigade will be assembled in one of the halls at the School of Pyrotechny, and will execute the different manipulations indicated in the following programme, under the direction of the Professor, and with the assistance of the master artificers of the School of Pyrotechny. Five attendances of three hours will be employed at these manipulations.

PROGRAMME OF THE PRACTICAL INSTRUCTIONS ON MUNITIONS AND FIREWORKS.

1st Attendance. Munitions for small-arms.

Infantry cartridges, Construction of bullets.
Construction of pouches and caps.
Construction of cartridges.

Cartridges with oblong bullets.

2d Attendance. Ammunition for field guns.

Construction and filling of pouches, packing in wood, &c.

3d Attendance. Ammunition for siege artillery, &c.

Construction and filling of cartridges, &c.

Charging hollow projectiles.

4th Attendance. Fireworks for war purposes.

Construction of matches, quick matches, tubes, fusees for shells and grenades.

Construction of signal rockets.

204

5th Attendance. Carriage of field ammunition.

Loading and unloading field ammunition chests for cannons, howitzers, and infantry wagons.

Construction of ornamental lances and Roman candles.

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS.

NL No. of Lectures.

+A With Application, 1h. 5m.

-A Without Application, 3h. 0m.

T Total Credits.

I No. of Interrogations.

Lectures.—Parts of the Course. NL Credits for
Lectures.
C I  
+A -A
1st Part, Geology, 12 15 6 20   2 *
2d    “   on Working in Iron, 6   18 20   1
3d    “   Applications of working in Iron, 3 15 6 10  
4th   “   Manufacture of Small Arms, 4   12 10   1  
5th   “   Manufacture of Cannon, 5   15 15   1  
6th   “   Manufacture of Powder, 5   15 15   1  
7th   “   Pyrotechny, 2 3   5  
  37 19.50 72 95   6  

* The first series of interrogations relates to mineralogy.

† The second to geognosy.

The printed Observations column (shown here as footnotes) is ambiguous; the best guess is that both items refer to Geology.

St Studies.

Sk Sketches.

M Memoirs.

E Exercises.

Mp Manipulations.

H Attendances in halls, 4h. 5m.

OD Attendances out of doors, 6h.

AL Attendances at the Laboratory:

L1 1h. to 2h.

L3 of 3h.

P Attendance at the School of Pyrotechny 3h.

Cr Credits.

Works of Application. Number of Cr
St Sk M E Mp H OD AL P
1L 3L
Study of Mineralogical Specimens, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . 5
Study of Geological Map, followed by a Memoir Map, . . 1 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 5
Memoir, . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 10
Memoirs on the Metallurgy of Iron, and its—                      
1. Application, . . . . 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 10
2. Manufacture of cannon, . . . . 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 10
3. Manufacture of small arms or powder, . . . . 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 10
Geological Excursions, followed by Memoirs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Excursions, . . . . . . 3 . . . . 3 . . . . . . 20
Memoirs, . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Manipulations in Moulding, . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . 2 . . 5
Manipulations in Chemistry, . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . 9 . . 25
Manipulations in Pyrotechny, . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . 5 15
Total, 3 1 7 3 16 4 3 3 12 5 135

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF INFLUENCE.

Lectures, 95
Works of Application,     135
230.

205

IX. PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE OF APPLIED MECHANICS.

FIRST SECTION.—GENERAL PRINCIPLES.

Lectures 1 and 2.—Short account of the general principles which serve as a base for the application of mechanics to machines, under the compound ratio of their establishment and of the calculation of their effects.

Lecture 3.—General composition of a factory; power, recipient, transmission of movement, tools. General method of calculating the effect of forces in a complete factory.

Lectures 4, 5, and 6.—Theoretical rules and the results of experiments concerning the flow of liquids. (Particular reference is made to the principles which relate to the large orifices of machines moved by water.)

Lecture 7.—Gauging of the volumes and valuation of the dynamical power of water-courses which feed machines.

SECOND SECTION.—MOTOR MACHINES.

Lecture 8.—Theory of the effect of water on hydraulic wheels. Determination of the elements of the calculation.

Lectures 9 to 13.—Application of the general theories to the principal hydraulic recipients. Conditions of the maximum, relative to the useful effect of each kind. Results of experiments, &c. (With reference to turbines, those which are most generally employed in the artillery workshops must be adverted to.)

Lecture 14.—Comparative abstract of the usual properties of various hydraulic “recepteurs.” Operations that must be carried on in order to arrive at their results and to their reception in manufactories.

Lecture 15.—Physical ideas relative to the use of the vapor of water as a motive power. Theoretical bases of the calculation of the effects of steam-engines. Force exerted by the compression and expansion of elastic fluids.

Lectures 16 to 18.—Practical notions and results of experiments relating to the effects and to the usual properties of the principal systems of steam-engines in use, as to the employment, reception, and maintenance in workshops.

THIRD SECTION.—RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS.

Lecture 19.—Resistance to compression: 1st, by gradual pressure; 2d, by shock. Results of experience. Application to wooden and cast-iron supports, and to the foundations of machines. Stocks of hammers.

Lecture 20.—Resistance to traction. Application to the shank of a piston, to bolts, chains, cordage, and leather straps. Resistance to flexure. Practical formulæ for calculating the transverse dimensions of the wooden or cast-iron arms of hydraulic wheels, of the catches or sails.

Lecture 21.—Continuation of the resistance to flexure. Practical formula for calculating the dimensions of the several parts of such machines. Cranks, winches, and handles in wood or in metal.

Lecture 22.—Resistance to torsion. Practical formulas. Results of experiments relative to the resistance of wood and metals to boring and turning. Resistance of cast-iron plates to clipping.

206
FOURTH SECTION.—WORKING MACHINES

Lectures 23 and 24.—Of blowing machines. General expression of their useful effect. Conditions of the maximum effect. Ventilators; their use in workshops and galleries of mines. Practical bases of their construction. Blowing machines with a piston. Description. Calculation of the effects and results of experiment.

Lectures 25 and 26.—Description and properties of alternative and circular sawing machines. Practical rules for their establishment. Results of experiments concerning the motive power they require, the useful effect obtained, and the resistance of various kinds of wood to the action of the tool. Results of observation relative to the work in shops by hand-saws.

Lectures 27 and 28.—Machines which act by shocks. Practical formula for the calculation of the loss of acting force in the shock. Description and usual properties of various kinds of hammers employed in workshops. Results of experiments proper for serving as the base for the establishment of lever hammers and pestles in powder manufactories. Results of calculation and observation relative to hammers and pestles moved directly or by the transmission of a movement by steam.

Lecture 29.—Grindstones for powder manufactories. Rapidity suitable to the different parts of the work. Means of obtaining it. Calculation of the necessary motive power. Sharpening grindstones for the manufacture of arms. Ventilation.

Lecture 30.—Lathes and drilling bits. Description. Rapidity of movement and form of the tools, according to the nature of the matter and kind of work. Results of experiments concerning the motive force required, and its relation to the useful effect obtained. Composition of a workshop of turning-lathes for an arsenal of artillery.

Lecture 31.—Boring. Machines for cutting and boring. The form of the tool and the rapidity of its action must depend on the nature of the material and the kind of work. Results of experience concerning the motive power required, and its relation to the useful effect obtained, principally for the boring machines of the manufactories of arms and of foundries. Boring machines, disposal of them in an arsenal.

Lecture 32.—Flatteners. Machines for centering, for making screw holes. Descriptions. Different rapidity of the work, dependent on its nature and that of the material. Results of experiments concerning the amount of the motive power and its relation to the useful effect obtained.

FIFTH SECTION.—LECTURES PREPARATORY TO THE WORKS OF APPLICATION.

Lecture 33.—Proceeding to be followed in the preparation of the sketches of a machine. Observations on the effects of machines, their duration, original cost, and cost of maintenance, mode of making, &c. Indications of the difficulties which are met with, and means which should be employed.

Lecture 34.—Project of a factory (specially for the sub-lieutenants of artillery.) Legal conditions respecting the erection of factories. General mode of proceeding with the project. Choice of motor machines dependent on local circumstances and the nature of the work to be performed.

Lecture 35.—(Special for the sub-lieutenants of artillery.) Determination of 207 the effects supported by the pieces, whose dimensions should be calculated in applying the practical formula of the resistance of materials. Selection of materials.

Lecture 36.—(Special for the sub-lieutenants of artillery.) Principal assemblages of various pieces of machines. Building, foundations, supports of trunnions and pivots.

SECTION SECOND.—WORKS OF APPLICATION.

Survey of Workshops.

This survey of workshops comprehends:—

1st. Figured sketches and observations made on the ground.

2d. Drawing of the whole and of details shaded.

3d. A memoir containing an accurate description of the machines and workshops, the calculation of the dynamical effect, the exposition of the mode of fabrication, and, in general, the results and consequences of the observations made on the spot. It must be executed by each, conformably with the particular programme, and to the instruction which will be given to him. He is allowed for this work thirty-four days.

Project of Machines.

This work, executed immediately following the preceding, by the sub-lieutenants of artillery only, has exclusively for its object the establishment of a workshop for the service of the artillery, comprehending the driving machines and the principal operators; or, if there be time, the improvement of the workshops of the same arm, described in the preceding work. This project must be executed conformably to the particular programme given to each sub-lieutenant. It comprehends; 1, sheet of drawings: 2, a memoir. Twenty-six days are allowed for this work,

RECAPITULATION.

NL No. of Lectures.

CL Credits for Lectures.

+A With application.

-A Without application.

C Total Credits.

I No. of Interrogations.

Oral Instruction—Parts of the Course. Artillery. Engineers.
NL CL C I NL CL C I
+A -A +A -A
1st Section—General Principles, 7 6 9 15 1 7 6 9 15 1
2d Sec.—Driving Machines, 11 12 9 21 1 11 12 9 21 1
3d Sec.—Resistance of materials, 4 5 3 8 . . 4 5 3 8 . .
4th Sec.—Working Machines, 10 15 . . 15 1 10 15 . . 15 1
5th Sec.—Lectures preparatory to the works of application, 4 6 . . 6 . . 1 1.50 . . 1.50
Total 36 44 21 65 3 33 39.50 21 60.50 3
208

RECAPITULATION.

D Sheets of drawings.

M Memoirs.

Att Attendances.

H In the halls.

O Out-of-doors.

C Credits.

Works of application Number of Number of
D M Att C D M Att C
H O H O
Survey of workshops:                    
Figured sketches and observations, * . . . . 8 65 * . . . . 8 65
Shaded drawings, 1 . . 22 . . 100 1 . . 22 . . 100
Memoir, . . 1 4 . . 40 . . 1 4 . . 40
Project of machines:                    
Calculations and drawings, 1 . . 20 . . 90 . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation of memoir . . 1 6 . . 60 . . . . . . . . . .
Total, 2 52 8 355 1 26 8 205

* 1 note book.

† 1 note book 2 sheets

RECAPITULATION.

Artillery. Engineers.
Credits for lectures assigned to the interrogations, 65 60
Credits for works of application, 355 205
420 265

X.—PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE ON CONSTRUCTION.

The course on construction is divided into four parts.

The first part relates to the elements of masonry and the principles which should regulate the form, dimensions, and the construction of walls, and the different parts of buildings; it contains eighteen lectures.

The second part is devoted to the architecture of military buildings—twelve lectures.

The third part supplies the theory of the stability of construction, and is divided into—

1st , relating to the resistance of materials—six lectures.

2d , relating to the stability of walls of revetments and arches—nine lectures.

The fourth part applies to constructions in water—twenty lectures.

The course is very nearly the same for the Artillery as for the Engineers.

ELEMENTS OF MASONRY, ETC.

Lectures 1, 2, and 3.—Relate to the elements of which masonry is composed, such as the different kinds of stones, usual dimensions, manner in which good stone may be known; bricks, lime, cement, sand, mortar, stucco, mastic plaster, asphalte, &c., and to the general considerations relating to foundations, and the different kinds of walls under various circumstances.

Lecture 4.—Treats of sustaining walls and the probable effects of the pressure of the earth. Of the conditions which must be fulfilled to insure stability. Various formulæ on the subject. Details of construction and on the proper material to be used.

209

Lecture 5.—Refers to the manner of facing masonry. Openings in walls, windows. Partition-walls.

Lecture 6.—On cylindrical arches, vaults, key-stones. Formulæ for the calculation of the thickness of piers of an arch or vault. Construction and use of tables for the calculation of the thickness. Construction of arches and vaults in different materials.

Lecture 7.—Arches continued, flat arches, plate bands, &c.

Lecture 8.—On the woods used in construction. On the influence of the soil on its quality. Characteristics of good wood. Preservation of wood. Proper wood for constructions.

Lecture 9.—Flooring. Beams. Girders. Joists. Ceilings.

Lecture 10.—Staircases, conditions respecting. Construction of different kinds of staircases, part of masonry, wood, &c.; steps. Construction of landing-places, &c.

Lectures 11 and 12.—Roofs in carpentry. Conditions which should be satisfied. Composition of the roof of a building. On the different kinds of roofs.

Lecture 13.—On the different ways of joining pieces of wood or timber together.

Lecture 14.—On permanent kinds of roofing. Conditions which should be fulfilled by good roofing. Composition of roofing. Tiles, lathing, cut slates, ridge tiles, hollow tiles, Dutch tiles. On slate roofing. Metallic roofing. Metal mostly used. Precautions to be taken with reference to all metal roofing.

Lecture 15.—Details relating to inhabited buildings. Cellars. Privies. Drainage. Chimneys; cause of their smoking. Most favorable forms of the flues, pipes. Bake-house, hearth.

Lecture 16.—On joinery and locksmiths’ work. Flooring of different kinds. Doors. Camp-beds. Racks and mangers in stables. Shutters.

Lecture 17.—Apparatus for heating and for cooking food. Hearth, ash-pan. Grate-flues. Amount of surface to be given to heating apparatus. Furnace of kitchens in barracks. Summary notions on the heating and ventilating of buildings. Calorifiéres with hot air, steam, and hot water.

Lecture 18.—Plan of a building. Projections adopted for the representation of a building. Plans, s, and elevations. Order in which the measurements should be made, and the sketch prepared. Height at which the horizontal plane of projections should pass, &c.

SECOND PART.—ARCHITECTURE OF MILITARY BUILDINGS.

Lecture 1.—Decoration, without making use of the orders of architecture. Principal conditions relating to decoration. Symmetry, regularity, simplicity, unity, and apparent soliditity. Proper character. Proportions of the façades. Height of the stories. Basements. Horizontal chains or fillets. Vertical chains and pilasters. Proportions of the doors and windows. Arcades and arched windows. Cornices, pediments.

Lecture 2.—Distribution of buildings. Considerations that should have weight in the distribution. Number composing the edifice. Circumstances that guide in the disposal of masses. Conditions that should be satisfied in placing a building. Locality and suitable dimensions. Relations that should exist between them. Interior and exterior communications. Stories on the same floor. 210 Position of the large rooms. Separation of the rooms. Position and arrangement of staircases. Verification of stability.

Lecture 3.—Conditions to be fulfilled in the distribution of the principal military establishments. Arsenals. Polygons for drill. Military establishments to the School of Bridges.

Lecture 4.—Foundries. Manufacture of arms.

Lecture 5.—Refining saltpetre. Powder. Powder magazines. Details relative to the construction of lightning conductors.

Lecture 6.—Infantry and cavalry barracks.

Lecture 7.—Hospitals. Military prisons and penitentiaries.

Lecture 8.—Storehouse for corn. Store-pits. Storehouse for fodder. Preserving houses.

Lecture 9.—Cisterns. Filtration.

Lecture 10.—Military tribunals. Guard-house. Gates of cities. Hotels and dwelling-houses. Officers’ quarters.

Lecture 11.—Preparatory to the execution of a project for a building. Method of proceeding. Composition of the sketch; approximate surface of all the locality; separation into symmetrical groups in the case of several buildings; number of stories; surface of the ground floor; length and breadth of the building between its walls; distribution of each story; verification of the relation between the stories. Elevation of the building. Sketches. Memoir. General details, and details of execution.

Lecture 12.—Discussion before the abstraction of the measurements and the preparation of the estimate of the building.

THIRD PART.—FIRST SECTION: ON THE RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS.

1. Resistance of prismatic bodies to extension and compression. Elasticity of bodies. Modulus of elasticity. Limits of permanent efforts. Resistance to extension and compression of stone, bricks, and analogous materials; also of wood and metals. Applications.

2. Transverse resistance. Some cases in which it is brought into play. Results of experience. Resistance of bodies submitted to the effects of transversal flexure. Results of experience and conventions. Conditions of equilibrium of bodies submitted to efforts directly transversal to their length. Direction and value of molecular efforts. Equation of the axis of the body. Equation of the squaring. Discussion of these equations.

3. Geometrical method for determining the inertia. Application to the research for the inertia of various s. Applications of general equations of equilibrium and of squaring to straight pieces.

1st. A horizontal piece set in a frame at one extremity, and subjected to a weight acting at the other extremity, with a uniform vertical effect.

2d. Horizontal beam placed upon two supports, and subjected to a weight acting at its center, and with a uniform vertical effect.

3d. Beam placed horizontally on two supports, and having two equal weights symmetrically placed with respect to its center.

4th. Beam placed horizontally on two supports, and subjected to a weight acting at any point whatever throughout its length.

5th. Horizontal beam fixed at both its extremities, and subjected to a weight acting at its center with an equal vertical effect.

211

6th. Horizontal beam placed on three points of support, at unequal distances, and weighted with two weights acting at the middle of the intervals between the supports.

7th. Vertical beam fixed at the foot, and charged with a weight acting at a certain distance from the axis of the beam.

5. Solids of equal resistances. Most suitable form for cast girders. Applications of the formula of equilibrium and squaring to various kinds of carpentry.

6. On polygonal roofs. Conditions respecting them. Arched roofs, pressure, &c. On the stability of walls required to resist the pressure of roofs.

SECOND SECTION: ON THE STABILITY OF REVETMENT WALLS AND ARCHES.

7. On the pressure of earth. Explanation of the theory on Coulomb’s system. Investigation of the pressure of earth by analysis. Hypothesis necessary in order to simplify the calculations. General formula of the value of the pressure, &c. Equations of stability and equilibrium under the hypothesis of slipping and rolling.

8. Simplification of the general equations of equilibrium in three particular cases. Determination of the co-efficient of stability in Vauban’s profile. M. Poncelet’s formula for calculating the thickness of revetment walls with perpendicular face. Transformation of the profile of a revetment to another of equal stability. Vauban’s counterforts, &c.

9. Geometrical method for determining the pressure of earth, whatever may be the profile of the wall and of the earth, taking into account the friction of the earth on masonry. Geometrical determination of the amount of the pressure. Proceeding for the determination, by geometry, of the thickness of a revetment wall at the level of the exterior ground.

10. On buttresses. Geometrical determination of the buttressing of earth, and of its momentum. Simplification of the geometrical constructions of the pressure, of the buttressing, and of their momenta under certain hypotheses.

11. Points of application of the pressure and of the buttress. 1st. In the case of a terrace sloping less than the natural slope of the ground. 2d. In the case of the ordinary revetments of fortification.

On the stability of the foundations of revetment walls.

Compressible soil. The resultant of all the forces should pass through the center of the base. Size of the footing of the wall or depth of the foundations to arrive at the result. Possibility of the wall slipping over the base of the foundations. Use of the buttress to prevent this movement. Graphical method to determine the depth of the foundations. Depth of the foundations in unstable soil.

12. Pressure of arches. Case of cylindrical arches. Explanation of the theory of the pressure of arches. Point of application of the pressure in the five modes of possible rupture. Expression for the pressures and resistances by rolling or slipping. Proceeding to be followed to find by calculation the pressures and resistances.

13. Geometrical determination of the pressures and resistances by rolling. Explanation of the solution of this question. Construction of lines proportional to the surfaces of the voussoirs. 1st. In the case of an arch. Extrados without coping or additional weight. 2d. In that of an arch with extrados in the form of coping, and with or without additional weight. Construction of the 212 verticals passing through the center of gravity of the voussoirs. Abstract of the operations to be performed. Determination by geometrical means of the pressure and resistance against slipping.

14. Co-efficient of stability of arches from the springing. Manner of finding the outline of an arch for a certain given co-efficient. Stability of a cylindrical arch on its piers. Thickness of the piers. Considerations relative to the value of the co-efficient of stability. Stability of an arch on the base of its foundations. Filling in and depth of the foundations of piers.

Extension of the geometrical methods serving for the determinations of the pressures and thicknesses of piers in case of cross vaulting, arcades, and spherical vaulting.

15. Investigation by analysis of the pressures and resistances of an arch.

1st. Hypothesis of a plat-band; stability at the springing charge necessary on the coussinet; stability of the plat-band on its piers; thickness of the piers. Squaring of a tie-beam of iron which annihilates the pressure.

2d. Hypothesis of a semicircular vaulting with arched extrados. Pressures and resistances. In similar arches the pressure is proportional to the square of the radius.

FOURTH PART.—HYDRAULIC CONSTRUCTION.

1st. Classification of ground on which it may be necessary to place a foundation. Soundings. Their object. Various kinds of sounding line. Dams in earth, and in wood and earth combined. Case of an unstable foundation. Construction on rock. Thickness of dams and of the clay work. General disposition of a dam. Bottom-springs. Means of choking or smothering them or of diverting them. Use of sunk dams. Service bridges. Their height and disposition. Railways in great constructions. Their disposition.

2d. Summary review of draining or pumping machines. Choice between the different methods of draining. Table of the useful effect of such machines.

Pile driving. Pile driving machine with band ropes. Preparation of the pile and operation of driving. Pile driving machine with catch. Choice between the two kinds of pile driving machines. Precautions to be taken in the driving of piles. Distribution of piles, the space to be left between them, and the squaring of them. Disposition and driving of planks. Method of drawing up piles and planking. Execution of a foundation on piles. Driving stakes out of water. Machine for squaring piles.

3d. Parafouilles. Their object and construction.

Foundations in mortar under water. Preparation and immersion of the mortar. Examples.

Thickness of sunk dams with the enceint in mortar.

4th. Foundation frames and platforms. Their object and their construction. Preparation of the foundation frames in masonry.

Foundation by packing.

Foundation by coffer-dams. Details of a coffer-dam.

5th. Foundations on solid gravel. Properties of gravel. Case where it is advantageous to make use of gravel. Examples.

Foundations on sunk wooden piles, in gravel, and in gravel and mortar.

Foundation on pillars built in masonry.

Foundations on quicksand.

213

Species of foundation to adopt according to the nature of the ground.

6th. Banks of reservoirs. Conditions which should be fulfilled in their establishment. Banks in earth; their profile; revetments to protect them; the wet slope; sort of remblai; precautions which exact a large remblai. Banks in remblai and sustaining walls combined. Banks entirely in masonry; movements observed in walls; most suitable profile. Comparison between banks in earth and masonry. Works which are employed in connection with banks of reservoirs. Dikes of inundations. Their profile; defense of their slope against the action of water; their establishment and works in connection with them.

7th. Batardeaux in the ditches of strong places. Situation; profile; details of construction. Weirs. Their object; effect of a weir in a current. Advantages of the wedge or circular form. Height to give to a weir; and longitudinal form of the swelling occasioned by a horizontal dam. Construction of weirs with vertical walls, with a long slope down the stream. Injuries to which weirs are liable. Profile to adopt according to the nature of the ground.

8th. Sluice-dams, their object; form of the piles; distance apart, and dimensions. Details of construction. Various kinds of apparatus for opening and shutting sluice-dams. Play of a revolving gate. Calculation of the dimensions of the two half sluice gates and of the wicket. Carpentry of a revolving gate. Movable dams with iron wickets. Modifications to render them applicable to the retention of water at a greater height than 2.80 meters.

9th. Navigable locks. Canal lock; its management; form of the chamber; profile of the cheeks. Trace of the pier on which the gates work. Means of filling and emptying the chambers. Means of raising the paddle-valves. Wood-work of the gates sheathed in timber. Planes. Details of the pivots, collars and rollers. Arrangements for the management of the sheathed gates.

10th. Gates sheathed in wood; curves. Ties of cast-iron, and lining in wood or sheet-iron. Cast-iron gates.

River Navigation.—Advantages and disadvantages of water transit. Conditions of a navigable river. Works for the improvement of the navigation on a river.

Artificial Navigation.—Classification of canals. Conditions which determine the best position for a summit level. Search after a minimum of elevation. Expenditure of water at the summit level.

11th. Principal processes employed to economise the water in passing through a lock. Profile of a navigable canal.

Deep cuttings; their profile. Great landslips and means of remedying them.

Tunnels; their profile. Piercing of a tunnel.

12th. Bridges in masonry. Position; breadth of the roadway; outlet to be left for the water; size and form of the arches; trace of the surbased arches on more than five centers. Expansion of the bridge-heads. Profile of the arch. Thickness of the piles and abutments. Apparatus for the arches and bridge-heads. Parts above the arches. Leveling with the banks. Fixed and movable centerings. Removal of the centerings of arches.

13th. Wooden Bridges composed of straight pieces. Arrangement of the stakes and starlings. Different construction of the openings according to their span. Arrangement of the platform.

American Bridges.—Arrangement of the earliest form of bridge on Town’s system. Height of the trusses constructed in the form of trellis-work. Modifications 214 introduced to increase the resistance of the bridge. Calculation of the resistance of the trusses.

Arched frame-work of bridges. Composition of the arches. Junction of the straight beams with the arches.

Cast-iron Bridges.—Different systems. General principles of their construction.

Aqueducts in masonry; in cast-iron.

14th. Suspension Bridges.—Equation of the curve of the chains and construction of this curve. Tension supported by the suspension cables, their thickness. Influence of the length of the flèche upon the tension of the cables. Inconveniences resulting from a long flèche. Vibrations and means of diminishing them. Limits of length of the flèche. Length of the curve of suspension. Causes operating to vary this length; means of obviating the effects produced by them. Length of the suspension rods. Number of supports to be adopted. Thickness of the piles. Points at which the fixing cables are to be attached. Advantages and disadvantages of chains composed of bars and of cables of iron wire. Some details of construction.

15th. Drawbridges.—Conditions which they must satisfy. General principle of their balance.

Drawbridges with Plyers.—Special theory of this bridge. Reduction of it to practice. Alteration of equilibrium and means of remedying it.

Disadvantages of the drawbridge with plyers.

16th. Spiral drawbridge of Captain Berché. Trace of the spiral. Determination of the radius of the chain-roller, and of the greatest radius of the spiral.

17th. Drawbridges with variable counterbalances, invented by M. Poncelet. Construction of the chains of the counterbalance. Establishment of the leverage. Calculation of the counterbalances for the special case of the pulleys in front corresponding to the axis of the platform. Influence of the nature of the chains. Method of allowing for the weight of the small chains. Definitive construction of the chains of the counterbalance. Provision of loose cords.

18th. Succinct ideas upon the motion of the sea, and its action on the shore.

Undulating movement. Height of the waves, and depth at which the agitation is perceptible. Effects of the waves on the coasts. Tides; spring-tides; neap-tides. Height of tides and hour of flood. General currents. Action of the sea on its shores. Protection of level and steep shores.

19th. Sea-ports. Requisites of a good port. Ports in the Mediterranean. Conditions of a good roadstead. Moles and breakwaters. Ocean ports, channel tide-dock, floating dock, and sluice of floating dock, laying-up dock, and sluice for the ditch of fortifications. General arrangement of a harbor.

20th. Construction of moles. Stones dropped for foundations. Profile of a loose heap. Volume of the materials which insure their stability. Settling of masonry resting on a heap. Instances of masonry constructed at sea. 1. Wall of Cherbourg. 2. Fort Boyard.

Piers.—Direction, length, form of interval between, and profile of piers. Their construction. Passages reserved through piers.

RECAPITULATION.

First Part.— Parts of Buildings 18
Second Part.— Architecture of Military Buildings 12
Third Part.— First Section. Resistance of Materials, 6 15
Second Section. Stability of Constructions, 9
Fourth Part.— Hydraulic Constructions, 20
Total 65
215
WORKS OF APPLICATION.

Art Artillery.

Eng Engineers.

Name of work. No. Days allowed for execution of work to Students of Subject employed on. Observations.
Art Eng
Survey of a Building:    

Representation of an existing building or a part of a building by means of plans, s, and elevations.

The memoir contains an accurate and critical description of the distribution, construction, and decoration of the building.

Each day is equivalent to 4½ hours’ work.

The sketches are executed to scales approximating to one-fiftieth for the whole drawing, of one-twentieth for the large details, and of ¼ to ½ for the minute details.

The drawing prepared from the sketches is made on the scale of 1–100th.

Sketch (out-of-door work,) 8 31 8 31
Drawing, 21 21
Memoir, 2 2
     
Project for a Building:      

Study and preparation of a project of a building, in accordance with certain given data.

The sketches, the result of the first study, are made in pencil; the drawing is the fair copy of the sketch, modified as may be necessary.

The memoir contains an explanation of the rules and principles which must be observed in the construction of buildings, and the grounds on which the dispositions contained in the building have been adopted.

The abstraction of the measurements and their reduction to the proper elements, and the estimates, are prepared in conformity to the instructions laid down for the Engineer Service in towns: these supply the estimated cost of the construction of the building according to the project.

This work, common to the students of the two arms, is an application of the first part of the course.

The scale for the drawing is in general 1–200th for the plans and elevations, and 1–100th for the s. It is restricted by the condition that the whole of the drawings should be given on a single sheet of paper.

The details need only occupy half a sheet of paper, and its scales must depend on the size of the objects to be represented.

The details need only occupy half a sheet of paper, and its scales must depend on the size of the objects to be represented.

The project for a building is an application of the first two parts of the course, as well as of the 1st of the 3d part.

Sketch, (first study in pencil.) 12   12  
Drawing, (fair copy) 18 42 18 42
Details, 4 4
Memoir, 4 4
Abstraction of Measurements and Estimates 4 4
         
Diagram of the Stability:      

Determination of the profile for a revetment wall, according to certain conditions. Verification of the stability of an arch, and calculation of the pier supporting this arch.

In the memoir a short explanation is given of the theory relating to the strength of the revetment walls and arches, as well as the results of the application of these principles to the particular case.

The drawing is executed to the scale of 1–100th. This work is an application of the 2d of the 3rd part.

Drawing, 6 9 6 9
Memoir, 3 3
     
Project for an Hydraulic construction:      

Study and composition of a project for a great work of art on certain given data.

In the memoir an explanation is given of the principles and the results of the theories which are to be applied in making this project. The arrangements adopted in the project are discussed for the foundation and all other parts of the construction.

The scale of the drawing is chosen in such a manner that the project may be placed on a single sheet; generally it is 1–200th, or smaller.

The project of a hydraulic construction is an application of the 1st of the 3rd part as well as of the 4th part of the course.

Sketches, 10 28 12 34
Drawing, 15 18
Memoir, 3 4
     
Total, 110 116    
216

NL No. Lectures

CL Credits for Lectures

+A With application

-A Without application

T Total

I No. Interrogations

1st. Lectures.—Parts of the Course. Artillery. Engineers.
NL CL I NL CL I
+A -A T +A -A T
1st Part:                    
Elements of Masonry, form and dimensions of the different parts of buildings, 18 *24 6 30 2 18 *24 6 30 2
2d Part:                    
Architecture of military buildings, 12 18 ... 18 1 12 18 ... 18 1
3d Part:                    
Theory respecting stability:                    
1st —Resistance of materials, 6 6 6 12 1 6 6 6 12 1
2d —Stability of revetment walls and arches, 9 10.5 6 16.5 1 9 10.5 6 16.5 1
4th Part:                    
Hydraulic Constructions, 20 24 12 36 1 20 24 12 36 1
Total, 65 82 30 112 6 65 82 30 112 6

* A lecture with application is equivalent to 1½ hours of work, and a lecture without application is equal to 3 hours.

D Drawings and Sketches.

M Memoirs.

V Various.

H Attendances in halls 4½ hours.

O Attendances out of doors, 6 h.

C Credits.

2d. Execution of the Work. Artillery. Number of Engineers. Number of
D M V H O C D M V H O C
Plan of a Building:                        
Sketches (pen,) 1 ... ... ... 8 50 1 ... ... ... 8 50*
Drawing, 1 ... ... 21 ... 95 1 ... ... 21 ... 95
Memoirs, ... 1 ... 2 ... 20 ... 1 ... 2 ... 20†
Project of a Building:                        
Sketch, 1 ... ... 12 ... 55 1 ... ... 12 ... 55
Drawing, 1 ... ... 18 ... 80 1 ... ... 18 ... 80
Detail, 1 ... ... 4 ... 20 1 ... ... 4 ... 20
Memoir, ... 1 ... 4 ... 35 ... 1 ... 4 ... 35
Abstraction of quantities and estimates, ... ... 1 4 ... 20 ... ... 1 4 ... 20
Diagram of Stability.                        
Drawing, 1 ... ... 6 ... 25 1 ... ... 6 ... 25
Memoir, ... 1 ... 3 ... 25 ... 1 ... 3 ... 25
Project of an Hydraulic construction.                        
Sketch, 1 ... ... 10 ... 45 1 ... ... 12 ... 55
Drawing, 1 ... ... 15 ... 70 1 ... ... 18 ... 80
Memoir, ... 1 ... 3 ... 25 ... 1 ... 4 ... 35
Total, 8 4 1 102 8 565 8 4 1 108 8 595

* Of which 20 is for the out-of-door work, and 30 for the sketch.

† The time allowed for the preparation of the memoirs in the halls should be doubled, in order to take an account of the correction out of the halls of study.

RECAPITULATION OF THE CREDITS OF INFLUENCE FOR THE COURSE.

Artillery, Lectures, 112 677, or about 680.
Execution of Work, 565
Engineers, Lectures, 112 707, or about 710.
Execution of Work, 595
217

XI.—PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE IN THE GERMAN LANGUAGE.

SECOND DIVISION.—FIRST YEAR’S STUDY.

Number of Lectures, 50.

Grammar and composition during the 25 Lectures forming the odd numbers.

Oral translations of German authors. Phraseology. Lecture on idioms, founded on the passages which have been translated and given in the form of conversation during the first half of the 25 Lectures forming the even numbers.

Dialogues and conversations, on various subjects of every-day life, such as are particularly useful to an officer traveling in Germany, carried on during the second half of the Lectures of the even numbers.

FIRST DIVISION.—SECOND YEAR’S STUDY.

Number of Lectures, 100.

Translations of German authors, and conversations in German on the passages translated, during fifty Lectures, reckoning the odd numbers.

Military reconnaissances, in the form of a dialogue in German and in French, during the first half of the fifty Lectures, even numbers.

Translation of French into German: 1st, Narratives; 2d, Historical and descriptive fragments; 3d, Dramatic scenes; 4th, Epistolary style, during the second half of the fifty Lectures, even numbers.

At the close of the second year, the Sub-Lieutenants give in a composition on a certain subject.

The Sub-Lieutenants most advanced are not obliged to follow the course in German, but they should make translations of articles taken from German military works. These translations, after having been corrected, are deposited in the Library of the School.

Abstract of the course in German:—

1st year’s study, 50 Lectures.
2d   “   “ 100   “
Total, 150 at ½ hour each— 112. 3 0.
Credits of influence, 110.

XII.—PROGRAMME OF A SHAM SIEGE.—(Common to the Artillery and Engineers.)

FIRST SECTION.—PRELIMINARY MEASURES.

Art. I.Commission charged to study the Project for a Sham Siege.

A Commission is charged with drawing up and presenting to the General commanding the School a project for a sham siege. This is composed of:—

The Colonel second in command of the School, President.
The Major of Artillery, Members.
The Major of Engineers,
The Professor of Artillery,
The Professor of Fortification,
Clerk.

The Professors of Artillery and Fortification may be replaced by the Assistant Professors.

The General Commandant of the School decides in a Council of Instruction on the dispositions to be adopted for the project of a sham siege.

218

Art. II.Preparatory Lectures.

By the Professor of Military Art, 2

1st. Considerations relating to the fortress of Metz. Circumstances which might bring on a siege of it. Force of the garrison and of the besieging army. Investment.

2d. Trace of the lines of circumvallation and of countervallation.

By the Professor of Topography, 1

Execution of the second reconnaissance plan (memoire,) (1 lecture.)

1st. Measure of the base. Plan of the ground of the attack. Construction of the plans. Plans of the work executed.

By the Professor of Permanent Fortification, 2

1st. Discussion on the points of attack. Organization of the personnel and matériel of the Engineers of the besieging army and of the garrison.

2d. General progress of attack, and general dispositions of defense.

By the Professor of Artillery, 2

1st. Composition of the personnel and matériel of the Artillery of the besieging army. Transport of the siege equipage.

2d. General dispositions of the artillery in the attack and defense.

SECOND SECTION.—COMPOSITION OF THE PERSONNEL.

Director of the Siege.—The General Commandant of the School.

Chief of the Staff.—The Colonel second in command of the School.

Chief of the Artillery Service.—The Major of Artillery attached to the Staff.

Director of the Park of Artillery.—This may be given to the preceding.

Chief of the Engineer Service.—The Major of the Engineers attached to the Staff of the School.

Director of the Engineer Park.—This may be given to the preceding.

Major of the Trenches.—A Captain. Chiefs of Attacks. Captains.

Chiefs of Brigades.—Named by the General Commandant of the Siege.

THIRD SECTION.—CONFERENCES.

Before proceeding to the ground, the sub-lieutenants assist at conferences which are held for the purpose of explaining to them the successions of the several operations of the siege, as well as upon the traces which they have to execute. These conferences, eight in number, are divided as follows:—

The Chief of the Artillery Service will hold 4 conferences, and

The Chief of the Engineer Service will hold 4   “

FOURTH SECTION.—TRACING OF LINES AND TOPOGRAPHICAL WORK.

1st. The second reconnaissance survey (comprised in the course of topography.) Tracing of lines; one day is allowed for this work.

2d. “Director” plan. The execution of this plan comprises out-of-door work and drawing. The out-of-door work includes the measurement of one or many bases, the observation of the angles which are formed by this base, and the direction of certain remarkable points in the city and fortification, and the formation of a net-work of triangulation, intended to co-ordinate the surveys of the details.

The work of constructing the plan consists in laying down, day by day, the surveys of the details of the ground, as well as of the traces executed. Five 219 days are allowed for the execution of the topographical work, which precedes the opening of the trenches. The Director Plan is kept close up during the whole duration of the siege.

3d. Itineraries and sketches (comprised in the course of topography.)

The Professor of Topography directs the whole of the surveys and the execution of the Director Plan.

FIFTH SECTION.—TRACING OF THE WORKS OF ATTACK, AND ACTUAL EXECUTION IN FULL RELIEF OF CERTAIN WORKS.

The sub-lieutenants, divided into brigades, trace the works of the siege, under the direction of the officers of the staff, and take part in the superintendence of the works executed in full relief when the exigencies of the service will permit the chief of the Artillery Service and the Colonel of the Regiment of Engineers to place workmen at the disposal of the General Commandant of the School. Six days are appropriated to this work.

SIXTH SECTION.—WORK IN THE HALLS OF STUDY.

The work in the Halls of Study consists of:—

1st. A memoir on the sham siege, which memoir must be approved by the General Commandant of the School.

2d. Of a sketch representing one of the works traced or executed in full relief. These works in the Halls are performed during the interval of the attendances devoted to out-of-door work. Two days are appropriated to the preparation of the memoir, and two to the execution of the sketch. This time is included in the eleven days allowed to the sham siege.

RECAPITULATION FOR THE ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS.

NL No. of Lectures or Conferences.

CL Credits for Lectures or Conferences.

L Lectures.

Cf Conferences.

T Total.

Q No. of Questions.

Lectures and Conferences. NL Credits for
Lectures or
Conferences.
Q
L Cf T
By the Professor of Military Art, 2 3   . . 3    
By the Professor of Topography, 1 . . 2
By the Professor of Permanent Fortification, 2 3   . . 3  
By the Professor of Artillery, 2 3   . . 3  
Conferences by the Chief of the Service,        
of Artillery, 4 . . 6 6  
of Engineers, 4 . . 6 6    
Total, 15 10½ 12 22½ 2

* One series of questions by the Chief of the Artillery Service, as to what relates to that arm.

One series of questions by the Chief of the Engineer Service, as to what relates to that arm.

A Credit of 11 is assigned to each series of questions.

D Drawings.

M Memoirs.

H Attendances in the Halls.

I Credits.

Works of Application. Number of
D M Attendances
out of doors.
H C
of 4½h. of 8 h.
2nd Reconnaissance Plan (Memoir.)            
Topographical Work, . . . . 4 . . . . 20 *
Itinerary and Sketch (Memoir,) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plan “Director,” . . . . . . . . 1 5
Tracing of Lines, . . . . . . 1 . . 10
Tracing of Works of Attack and of Defense, . . . . 6 . . . . 25
Sketch, 1 . . . . . . 2 1
Memoir, . . 1 . . . . 2 2
            90  
Total, 1 1 10 1 5  

* Credits given by the Professor of Topography.

† Credits given by the Captains of the Staff, Chiefs of Brigades.

‡ Credits given by the Chiefs of the Service of the Artillery and Engineers.

220

XIII.—PROGRAMME OF THE COURSE ON THE VETERINARY ART.

FIRST PART.—INTERIOR OF THE HORSE.

Lecture 1.—Classification and nomenclature of the various matters which constitute the horse. Skeleton (head and body.)

Lecture 2.—Skeleton (limbs.) Mechanical importance of the skeleton. Nomenclature and use of the muscles. Cellular and fatty tissues, grease, skin. Insensible perspiration.

Lecture 3.—Functions for maintenance. Arteries of the nerves. Animal heat.

Lecture 4.—On various functions.

SECOND PART.—EXTERIOR OF THE HORSE.

Lecture 5.—Proportions. Equilibrium. Description and importance of the natural beauties and defects of the head and region of the throat.

Lecture 6.—Description and importance of the other parts of the horse. Blemishes. Soft tumors.

Lecture 7.—Osseous tumors. Various accidents. Temperaments. Description of clothing, &c.

Lecture 8.—Data respecting horses.

Lecture 9.—To know the age. On various bad habits. Examination of the eyes; their diseases.

Lecture 10.—Defective paces, &c. Draught and pack horses. Mules.

Lecture 11.—Stud and remounts. Races.

Lecture 12.—Vicious horses, and different bits. Manner of bitting a horse. On grooms and punishment.

THIRD PART.—ON THE HEALTH OF THE HORSE.

Lecture 13.—Examination of the foot, and shoeing with the hot shoe.

Lecture 14.—Shoeing with the cold shoe. Different kinds of horse-shoe, &c.

Lecture 15.—On stables. Food. Rations.

Lecture 16.—Description and nomenclature of the saddle. Harness and pack. Various saddles.

Lecture 17.—On work and rest. Horse and mule on the road and in bivouac. On diseases and accidents.

Abstract of the course:—

Interior of the horse, 4 17 lectures at 1½ hours. Total time, 25½ hours. Credits, 25.
Exterior, 6
Health, 7

The instruction on horseback can, under certain circumstances, be considered as connected with this course; and questions are asked during the time when the sub-lieutenants are not engaged in actual riding exercise. This instruction is described under the head of Practical Military Instruction; it comprises at the maximum 272 attendances, and its credit of influence is valued at 240.

221

ARTILLERY AND ENGINEERS’ REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.

I. ARTILLERY REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.

These are intended for the theoretical and practical instruction of officers, sous-officiers, and gunners.

Each School is under the orders of the General of Brigade commanding the Artillery in the military division in which it is situated.

Independent of the general officer, the school has the following staff:—

A Lieutenant (associated assistant to the General.)

A Professor of Sciences, applying more particularly to the Artillery.

A Professor of Fortification, of drawing, and construction of buildings.

Two Gardes of Artillery (one of the first, and the other of the second class.)

There are, in addition, attached to each school the number of inferior officers (captains, lieutenants, or sous-lieutenants) required for carrying on the theoretical courses, which are not placed under the direction of the professors.

A captain of the first class, assisted by two first lieutenants, is the director of the park of the school. Another captain, also of the first class, but taken from the regiment of Pontooneers, has the direction of that portion of the bridge equipage necessary for the special instruction of this corps, as well as of the material of the artillery properly belonging to this instruction.

The lieutenant-colonel, assistant to the general, fulfills, independent of every other detail of supervision with which he may be charged, the functions of ordonnateur secondaire, in what concerns the expenses of the school and their propriety (justification.) He corresponds with the minister of war for this part of the service.

The instruction is divided into theoretical and practical, and the annual course is divided into half-yearly periods, or into summer and winter instructions.

The summer instruction commences, according to different localities, from the 1st of April to the 1st of May, and that of the winter from the 1st of October to the 1st of November.

The winter and summer instruction is subdivided into school and regimental instruction.

The school instruction comprehends all the theoretical and practical instruction common to the different corps which require the 222 assistance of the particular means of the school, the employment of its professors, locality, and material, as that of the practical instruction in which the troops belonging to the different corps of the army are united to take part.

The regimental instruction is that which exists in the interior of the regiments and the various bodies of the artillery. It is directed by the chiefs of these corps, who are responsible for it, with the means placed at their disposal, under the general surveillance of the commandant of the school.

The special instruction of the Pontooneers not admitting of their following the same instruction as the other regiments of artillery, the chief of this corps directs the special instruction according to certain bases prescribed by the regulations.

There are for the captains of artillery, each year during the winter half-year, six conferences for the purposes of considering and discussing projects for the organization of different equipages and armaments for the field service, and for attack and defense of places.

In a building belonging to each school of artillery, under the name of the hotel of the school, are united the halls and establishments necessary for the theoretical instruction of the officers and sous-officers, such as halls for théorique drill and drawing, library, depots of maps and plans, halls for machines, instruments and models, &c.

Each school is provided with a physical cabinet and a chemical laboratory. There is also a piece of ground, called a polygon, for exercising artillerymen to the manœuvers of cannon and other firearms of great range. Its extent is sufficient in length to furnish a range of 1,200 meters, and in breadth of 600 meters.

Permanent and temporary batteries are established on this ground, and they seem not only for practice, but also to accustom the men to the construction of fascines, field batteries, &c.

The administration of each school, and the accounts relating to it, are directed by an administrative council, consisting of—

The General Officer commanding the Artillery (President.)

The Colonels of the regiments of Artillery in the towns where two regiments of the Artillery are quartered, and in other towns, the Colonel and Lieutenant-Colonel of the regiment.

The Colonel of the regiment of Pontooneers in the town where the principal part of the corps may be stationed, and in any other town the Lieutenant-Colonel or the Major.

The Lieutenant-Colonel associated assistant with the General Commandant.

The functions of secretary of the council are intrusted to a grade of the first class.

The functionaries of the corps of intendants fulfill, in connection 223 with the administrative councils of the artillery schools, the same duties as are assigned by the regulations relating to the interior administration of bodies of troops. They will exercise over the accounts, both of money and material of the said schools, the same control as over the administration connected with the military interests of the state.

II. ENGINEER REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.

The colonel of each regiment has the superior direction of the instruction.

The lieutenant-colonel directs and superintends, under his orders, the whole of the details of the regimental instruction.

A major, selected from among the officers of this rank belonging to the état-major of this arm, directs and superintends, under the orders of the colonel, the whole of the details of the special instruction.

The complete instruction consists of—

General instruction, or that of the regiment, by which a man is made a soldier.

Special or school instruction, having for its object the training of the miner or sapper.

The instructions are each separated into theoretical and practical instruction.

The theoretical instruction of the regiment comprehends the theories:—

On the exercises and manœuvers of infantry. On the interior service. On the service of the place. On field service. On the maintenance of arms. On military administration. On military penal legislation.

The practical instruction of the regiment comprises:—

The exercises and manœuvers of infantry. Practice with the musket. Military Marches. Fencing.

The teaching of these various duties is confided to officers, sous-officiers, and corporals of the regiments, as pointed out by the regulation, and the orders of the colonel.

The fencing school is organized in a similar manner to those of the infantry, and the military marches are also made in the same way as in those corps.

The special and theoretical instruction consists of:—

Primary instruction. Mathematics. Drawing. Geography. Military history of France. Fortification and the various branches of the engineering work.

Three civil professors (appointed by competition) are attached to each regimental school, for the special theoretical instruction, as regards the primary instruction, drawing, and mathematics.

The courses are distributed and taught in the following manner:

224

Primary instruction for the Soldiers.

By the Professor of Primary Instruction.

French grammar for the Corporals.

Book-keeping for the Sous-Officiers.

Elementary arithmetic for the Corporals.

By the Prof. of Mathematics.

Complete arithmetic

for the Serjeants.

Elementary geometry

Complete geometry

for the Serjeant-Major.

Trigonometry

Surveys for the Sous-Officiers.

Special mathematics for the Officers.

Drawing for the Corporals and Sous-Officers.

By the Professor of Drawing, who is also charged with completing the collection of models which relate to it.

The elements of fortification for the Serjeant-Majors.

 

Construction, and theories on practical schools

for the Sous-Officiers.

By the Officers of the regiment, named by the Colonel, independently of those appointed by the regulations

Permanent fortification

 

The attack and defense of places

for the Officers.

Mines
Bridges
Ovens
Topography  
Geography

for the Sous-Officiers.

Military history of France

 

At the end of each course the colonel of the regiment causes a general examination to be made in his presence of the whole of the men who have followed this course, and has a list made out in the order of merit, with notes of the capacity and aptitude of each.

These lists are consulted in the formation of tables of promotion, and placed with the said tables before the inspector-general.

Each captain and lieutenant are obliged to give in at least a single treatise on five different projects, consisting of a memoir discussing or the journal of a siege, with drawing of the whole, and of details in sufficient number to render them perfectly intelligible.

The special practical instruction is composed of seven distinct schools, relating to:—

Field Fortification. Saps. Mines and Fireworks. Bridges. Ovens. Topography. Gymnastics.

And they comprehend, in addition, sham sieges, and underground war. Each of these seven schools is taught in accordance with the special instructions annexed to the regulation, which, however, are not published.

Winter is more especially devoted to the course of special theoretical instruction, which commences on the 1st November, and usually finishes on the 15th March, and the course of special practical instruction is carried on during the summer from the 15th March to the 15th September. The second fortnight of September and the month of October are devoted to sham sieges and underground war, to the leveling of the works executed, and to the arrangement of magazines.

225

SCHOOL FOR INFANTRY AND CAVALRY
AT ST. CYR.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION. CONDITIONS OF ADMISSION. STAFF.

It will have been seen in the accounts of the Polytechnic School and the School of Application at Metz, in what manner young men destined for commissions in the artillery and engineers receive their previous education, and under what conditions appointments as officers in these two services are made in France. The regulations for the infantry, the cavalry, and the marines are of the same description. There are in these also the same two ways of obtaining a commission. One, and in these services the more usual one, is to rise from the ranks. The other is to pass successfully through the school at St. Cyr. Young men who do not enter as privates prove their fitness for the rank of officers by going through the course of instruction given, and by passing the examinations conducted in this, the principal, and putting aside the School of Application at Metz, the one Special Military School of the country.

The earliest foundation of the kind in France was the Ecole Royale Militaire of 1751. Like most other similar institutions of the time, it was intended for the young nobility. No one was to be admitted who could not prove four generations of Noblesse. The pupils were taught free of charge, and might enter at eight years old. Already, however, some marks of competition are to be discerned, as the best mathematicians were to be taken for the Artillery and Engineers. Buildings on the Plain of Grenelle (the same which still stand, occupying one end of the present Champs de Mars, and retaining, though only used as barracks, their ancient name,) were erected for the purpose. The school continued in this form till 1776, when it was dissolved (apparently owing to faults of discipline,) and replaced by ten Colleges, at Sorrèze, Brienne, Vendôme, and other places, all superintended by ecclesiastics. A new Ecole Royale Militaire, occupying the same buildings as the former, was added in 1777.

This came to an end in 1787; and the ten colleges were suppressed under the Republic. A sort of Camp School on the plain 226 of Sablons took their place, when the war had broken out, and lasted about a year under the name of the Ecole de Mars.

Under the Consulate in 1800, the Prytanée Français was founded, consisting of four separate Colleges. The name was not long after changed to the Prytanée Militaire; and after some time the number was diminished, and La Flèche, which had in 1764 received the youngest pupils of the old Royal Military School, became the seat of the sole remaining establishment; which subsequently sunk to the proportions of a mere junior preparatory school, and became, in fine, the present establishment for military orphans, which still retains the title, and is called the Prytanée Militaire de la Flèche.

A special Military School, in the meantime, had been set up at Fontainebleau in 1803, transferred in 1808 to St. Cyr, and thus taking the place of the Prytanée Militaire and of its predecessor, the original Ecole Royale Militaire, gradually assumed its present form.15

The course of study lasts two years; the usual number of cadets in time of peace is five, or at the utmost six hundred; the admission is by competitive examination, open to all youths, French by birth or by naturalization, who on the first of January preceding their candidature were not less than sixteen and not more than twenty years old. To this examination are also admitted soldiers in the ranks between twenty and twenty-five years of age, who, at the date of its commencement, have been actually in service in their regiments for two years.

The general conditions and formalities are the same as those already stated for the Polytechnic. It may be repeated that all the candidates, in accordance with a recent enactment, must have taken the usual degree which terminates the task at the lycées—the baccalaureate in sciences.

Those who succeed in the examination and are admitted, take an engagement to serve seven years either in the cavalry or infantry, and are thus under the obligation, if they are judged incompetent at the close of their two years’ stay at the school to receive 227 a commission, to enter and serve as common soldiers. The two years of their stay at the school counts as a part of their service. It is only in the special case of loss of time caused by illness, that permission is given to remain a third year.

The ordinary payment is 60l. (1,500 francs) per annum. All whose inability to pay this amount is satisfactorily established, may claim, as at the Polytechnic, an allowance of the whole or of half of the expenses from the State, to which may be added an allowance for the whole or for a portion of the outfit (from 24l. to 28l.) These bourses or demi-bourses, with the trousseau, or demi-trousseau, have during the last few years been granted unsparingly. One-third of the 800 young men at the school in February 1856 were boursiers or demi-boursiers. Candidates admitted from the Orphan School of La Flèche, where the sons of officers wounded or killed in service receive a gratuitous education, are maintained in the same manner here.16

It was the rule till lately that cadets appointed, on leaving St. Cyr, to the cavalry should be placed for two years at the Cavalry School at Saumur. This, however, has recently been changed; on entering St. Cyr those who desire appointments in the cavalry declare their wishes, and are put at once through a course of training in horsemanship. Those who are found unfit are quickly withdrawn; the remainder, if their place on the final examination allows of their appointment to the cavalry, are by that time sufficiently well practiced to be able to join their regiments at once.

Twenty-seven, or sometimes a greater number, are annually at the close of their second year of study placed in competition with twenty-five candidates from the second lieutenants belonging to the army,17 if so many are forthcoming, for admission to the Staff School at Paris. This advantage is one object which serves as a stimulus to exertion, the permission being given according to rank in the classification by order of merit.

The school consists of two divisions, the upper and the lower, corresponding to the two years of the course. Each division is divided again into four companies. In each of these eight companies there are sub-officers chosen from the élèves themselves, with 228 the titles of Sergent, Sergent Fourrier, and Caporal; those appointed to the companies of the junior division are selected from the second year cadets, and their superiority in standing appears to give these latter some considerable authority, exercised occasionally well, occasionally ill. The whole school, thus divided into eight companies, constitutes one battalion.

The establishment for conducting the school consists of—

A General as Commandant.

A Second in Command (a Colonel of Infantry.)

A Major, 4 Captains, 12 Lieutenants, and 5 Second Lieutenants of Infantry; the Major holding the office of Commandant of the Battalion.

A Major, 1 Captain, 34 Lieutenants, and 3 Second Lieutenants of Cavalry to superintend the exercises, the riding, &c.

A Director of Studies (at present a Lieutenant-Colonel of Engineers.)

Two Assistant Directors.

Six Examiners for Admission.

One Professor of Artillery.

One Assistant ditto.

One Professor of Topography and Mathematics.

One Professor of Military Administration, Military Art, and Military History.

One Professor of Fortification.

One Professor of Military Literature.

Two Professors of History and Geography.

One Professor of Descriptive Geometry.

One Professor of Physics and Chemistry.

Three Professors of Drawing,

One Professor of German.

Eleven Military and six Civilian Assistant Teachers (Répétiteurs.)

There is also a Quartermaster, a Treasurer, a Steward, a Secretary of the Archives, who is also Librarian, an Almoner (a clergyman,) four or five Surgeons, a Veterinary Surgeon, who gives lessons on the subject, and twelve Fencing Masters.

The professors and teachers are almost entirely military men. Some difficulty appears to be found by civilians in keeping sufficient order in the large classes; and it has been found useful to have as répétiteurs persons who could also be employed in maintaining discipline in the house. Among the professors at present there are several officers of the engineers and of the artillery, and of the staff corps.

There is a board or council of instruction, composed of the commandant, the second in command, one of the field officers of the school staff, the director of studies, one of the assistant directors, and four professors.

So, again, the commandant, the second in command, one of the field officers, two captains, and two lieutenants, the last four changing every year, compose the board or council of discipline.

St. Cyr is a little village about three miles beyond the town of Versailles, and but a short distance from the boundary of the park. The buildings occupied by the school are those formerly used by Madame de Maintenon, and the school which she superintended. 229 Her garden has given place for the parade and exercise grounds; the chapel still remains in use; and her portrait is preserved in the apartments of the commandant. The buildings form several courts or quadrangles; the Court of Rivoli, occupied chiefly by the apartments and bureaux of the officers of the establishment, and terminated by the chapel; the Courts of Austerlitz, and Marengo, more particularly devoted to the young soldiers themselves; and that of Wagram, which is incomplete, and opens into the parade grounds. These, with the large stables, the new riding school, the exercising ground for the cavalry, and the polygon for artillery practice, extend to some little distance beyond the limit of the old gardens into the open arable land which descends northwards from the school, the small village of St. Cyr lying adjacent to it on the south.

The ground floor of the buildings forming the Courts of Marengo, Austerlitz, and Wagram appeared to be occupied by the two refectories, by the lecture-rooms or amphitheaters, each holding two hundred pupils, and by the chambers in which the ordinary questionings, similar to those already described in the account of the Polytechnic School, under the name of interrogations particulières, are conducted.

On the first floor are the salles d’étude and the salle des collections the museum or repertory of plans, instruments, models and machines, and the library; on the second floor the ordinary dormitories; and on the third (the attics,) supplementary dormitories to accommodate the extra number of pupils who have been admitted since the commencement of the war.

The commission, when visiting the school, was conducted on leaving the apartments of the commandant to the nearest of the two refectories. It was after one o’clock, and the long room was in the full possession of the whole first or junior division. A crowd of active and spirited-looking young soldiers, four hundred at least in number, were ranged at two long rows of small tables, each large enough, perhaps, for twelve; while in the narrow passage extending up and down the room, between the two rows, stood the officers on duty for the maintenance of order. On passing back to the corridor, the stream of the second year cadets was issuing from their opposite refectory. In the adjoining buttery, the loaf was produced, one kilogramme in weight, which constitutes the daily allowance. It is divided into four parts, eaten at breakfast, dinner, the afternoon lunch or gouter, and the supper. The daily cost of each pupil’s food is estimated at 1f. 80c.

230

The lecture rooms and museums offer nothing for special remark. In the library containing 12,000 books and a fine collection of maps, there were a few of the young men, who are admitted during one hour every day.

The salles d’étude on the first floor are, in contrast to those at the Polytechnic, large rooms, containing, under the present circumstances of the school, no less than two hundred young men. There are, in all, four such rooms, furnished with rows of desks on each side and overlooked in time of study by an officer posted in each to preserve order, and, so far as possible, prevent any idleness.

From these another staircase conducts to the dormitories, containing one hundred each, and named after the battles of the present war—Alma, Inkerman, Balaclava, Bomarsund. They were much in the style of those in ordinary barracks, occupied by rows of small iron beds, each with a shelf over it, and a box at the side. The young men make their own beds, clean their own boots, and sweep out the dormitories themselves. Their clothing, some portions of which we here had the opportunity of noticing, is that of the common soldier, the cloth being merely a little finer.

Above these ordinary dormitories are the attics, now applied to the use of the additional three hundred whom the school has latterly received.

The young men, who had been seen hurrying with their muskets to the parade ground, were now visible from the upper windows, assembled, and commencing their exercises. And when, after passing downwards and visiting the stables, which contain three hundred and sixty horses, attended to by two hundred cavalry soldiers, we found ourselves on the exercising ground, the cavalry cadets were at drill, part mounted, the others going through the lance exercise on foot. In the riding-school a squad of infantry cadets were receiving their weekly riding lesson. The cavalry cadets ride three hours a-day; those of the infantry about one hour a week. The exercising ground communicates with the parade ground; here the greater number of the young men were at infantry drill, under arms. A small squad was at field-gun drill in an adjoining square. Beyond this and the exercising ground is the practice ground, where musket and artillery practice is carried on during the summer. Returning to the parade ground we found the cadets united into a battalion; they formed line and went through the manual exercise, and afterwards marched past; they did their exercise remarkably well. Some had been only three months at the school. The 231 marching past was satisfactory; it was in three ranks, in the usual French manner.

Young men intended for the cavalry are instructed in infantry and artillery movements and drill; just as those intended for the infantry are taught riding, and receive instruction in cavalry, as well as artillery drill and movements.

It is during the second year of their stay they receive most instruction in the arms of the service to which they are not destined, and this, it is said, is a most important part of their instruction. “It is this,” said the General Commandant, “that made it practicable, for example, in the Crimea, to find among the old élèves of St. Cyr, officers fit for the artillery, the engineers, the staff; and for general officers, of course, it is of the greatest advantage to have known from actual study something of every branch.”

The ordinary school vacation last six or seven weeks in the year. The young men are not allowed to quit the grounds except on Sundays. On that day there is mass for the young men.

The routine of the day varies considerably with the season. In winter it is much as follows:—At 5 A.M. the drum beats, the young men quit their beds; in twelve minutes they are all dressed and out, and the dormitories are cleared. The rappel sounds on the grand carré; they form in their companies, enter their salles, and prepare for the lecture of the day until a quarter to 7. At 7 o’clock the officers on duty for the week enter the dormitories, to which the pupils now return, at a quarter to 8 the whole body passes muster in the dormitories, in which they have apparently by this time made their beds and restored cleanliness and order. Breakfast is taken at one time or other during the interval between a quarter to 7 and 8 o’clock.

They march to their lecture rooms at 8, the lecture lasts till a quarter past 9, when they are in like manner marched out, and are allowed a quarter of an hour of amusement. They then enter the halls of study, make up their notes on the lecture they have come from, and after an hour and a half employed in this way, for another hour and a half are set to drawing.

Dinner at 1 is followed by recreation till 2. Two hours from 2 to a quarter past 4 are devoted to military services.

From 4 to 6 P.M. part are occupied in study of the drill-book (théorie,) part in riding or fencing: a quarter of an hour’s recreation follows, and from 6¼ to 8½ there are two hours of study in the salles. At half-past 8 the day concludes with the supper.

232

The following table gives a view of the routine in summer:—

  4½ A.M. to   4¾ A.M. Dressing.
  4¾   “ to   7¼   “ Military exercises.
  7¼   “ to   8¼   “ Breakfast, cleaning, inspection.
  8¼   “ to   9½   “ Lecture.
  9½   “ to   9¾   “ Recreation.
  9¾   “ to 11¼   “ Study.
11¼   “ to   1   P.M. Drawing.
  1   P.M. to   2     “ Dinner and recreation.
  2     “ to   4     “ Study of drill-book (théorie) or fencing.
  4     “ to   6     “ Study for some, riding for others.
  6     “ to   6¼   “ Recreation.
  6¼   “ to   8     “ Riding for some, study for others,
  8     “ to   8½   “ Supper.

The entrance examination is much less severe than that for the Polytechnic; but a moderate amount of mathematical knowledge is demanded, and is obtained. The candidates are numerous; and if it be true that some young men of fortune shrink from a test, which, even in the easiest times, exacts a knowledge of the elements of trigonometry, and not unfrequently seek their commissions by entering the ranks, their place is supplied by youths who have their fortunes to make, and who have intelligence, industry, and opportunity enough to acquire in the ordinary lycées, the needful amount of knowledge.

Under present circumstances it is, perhaps, more especially in the preparatory studies that the intellectual training is given, and for the examination of admission that theoretical attainments are demanded. The state of the school in a time of war can not exactly be regarded as a normal or usual one. The time of stay has been sometimes shortened from two years to fifteen months; the excessive numbers render it difficult to adjust the lectures and general instruction so as to meet the needs of all; the lecture rooms and the studying rooms are all insufficient for the emergency; and what is yet more than all, the stimulus for exertion, which is given by the fear of being excluded upon the final examination, and sent to serve in the ranks, is removed at a time when almost every one may feel sure that a commission which must be filled up will be vacant for him. Yet even in time of peace, if general report may be trusted, it is more the drill, exercises, and discipline, than the theory of military operations, that excite the interest and command the attention of the young men. When they leave, they will take their places as second lieutenants with the troops, and they naturally do not wish to be put to shame by showing ignorance of the common things with which common soldiers are familiar. Their chief incentive is the fear of being found deficient when they join their regiments, 233 and, with the exception of those who desire to enter the staff corps, their great object is the practical knowledge of the ordinary matters of military duty. “Physical exercises,” said the Director of Studies, “predominate here as much as intellectual studies do at the Polytechnic.”

But the competition for entrance sustains the general standard of knowledge. Even when there is the greatest demand for admissible candidates, the standard of admission has not, we are told, been much reduced. No one comes in who does not know the first elements of trigonometry. And the time allotted by the rules of the school to lectures and indoor study is far from inconsiderable.

EXAMINATIONS FOR ADMISSION—STUDIES AT THE SCHOOL.

The examinations for admission are conducted almost precisely upon the same system which is now used in those for the Polytechnic School.18 There is a preliminary or pass examination (du premier degré), and for those who pass this a second or class examination (du second degré.) For the former there are three examiners, two for mathematics, physics, and chemistry, and a third for history, geography, and German. The second examination, which follows a few days after, is conducted in like manner by three examiners. A jury of admission decides. The examination is for the most part oral; and the principal difference between it and the examination for the Polytechnic is merely that the written papers are worked some considerable time before the first oral examination (du premier degré,) and are looked over with a view to assist the decision as to admissibility to the second (du second degré.) Thus the compositions écrites are completed on the 14th and 15th of June; the preliminary examination commences at Paris on the 10th of July; the second examination on the 13th.

The subjects of examination are the following:—

Arithmetic, including vulgar and decimal fractions, weights and measures, square and cube root, ratios and proportions, interest and discount, use of logarithmic tables and the sliding rule.

Algebra, to quadratic equations with one unknown quantity, maxima and minima, arithmetical and geometrical progressions, logarithms and their application to questions of compound interest and annuities.

Geometry, plane and solid, including the measurement of areas, surfaces, and volumes; s of the cone, cylinder, and sphere.

Plane Trigonometry: construction of trigonometrical tables and the solution of triangles; application to problems required in surveying.

Geometrical representations of bodies by projections.

234

French compositions.

German exercises.

Drawing, including elementary geometrical drawing and projections; plan, , and elevation of a building; geographical maps.

Physical Science (purely descriptive:) cosmography; physics, including elementary knowledge of the equilibrium of fluids; weight, gravity, atmospheric pressure, heat, electricity, magnetism, acoustics, optics, refraction, microscope, telescope.

Chemistry, elementary principles of; on matter, cohesion, affinity; simple and compound bodies, acids, bases, salts, oxygen, combustion, azote, atmospheric air, hydrogen, water; respecting equivalents and their use, carbon, carbonic acid, production and decomposition of ammonia, sulphur, sulphuric acid, phosphorus, chlorine; classification of non-metallic bodies into four families.

History: History of France from the time of Charles VII. to that of the Emperor Napoleon I. and the treaties of 1815.

Geography, relating entirely to France and its colonies, both physical and statistical.

German: the candidates must be able to read fluently both the written and printed German character, and to reply in German to simple questions addressed to them in the same language.

The general system of instruction at St. Cyr is similar to that of the Polytechnic; the lectures are given by the professors, notes are taken and completed afterwards, and progress is tested in occasional interrogations by the répétiteurs. One distinction is the different size of the salles d’étude (containing two hundred instead of eight or ten;) but, above all, is the great and predominant attention paid to the practical part of military teaching and training. It is evident at the first sight that this is essentially a military school, and that especial importance is attached both by teachers and pupils to the drill, exercise, and manœuvers of the various arms of the service.

The course of study is completed in two years; that of the first year consists of:—

27 lectures in descriptive geometry.
35 physical science.
20 military literature.
35 history.
21 geography and military statistics.
30 German.
Total, 174

In addition to the above, there is a course of drawing between the time when the students join the school early in November and the 15th of August.

The course of drawing consists in progressive studies of landscape drawing with the pencil and brush, having special application to military subjects, to the shading of some simple body or dress, and to enable the students to apply the knowledge which has been communicated to them on the subject of shadows and perspective. This course is followed by the second or junior division during the first year’s residence.

The course of lectures in descriptive geometry commences with certain preliminary 235 notions on the subject; refers to the representation of lines on curved surfaces, cylindrical and conical, surfaces of revolutions, regular surfaces, inter of surfaces, shadows, perspective, vanishing points, &c., construction of geographical maps, and plan côté.

The lectures in physical science embrace nine lectures on the general properties of bodies; heat, climate, electricity, magnetism, galvanism, electro-magnetism, acoustics.

There are twelve lectures in chemistry; on water, atmospheric air, combustibles, gas, principal salts, saltpetre, metallurgy, organic chemistry.

There are fourteen lectures in mechanics applied to machines; motion, rest, gravity, composition and resolution of forces, mechanical labor, uniform motion, rectilinear and rotatory, projectiles in space, mechanical powers, drawbridges, Archimedean principle, military bridges, pumps, reservoirs, over and under-shot wheels, turbines, corn mills, steam-engines, locomotives, transport of troops, materials, and munitions on railways.

The twenty lectures in military literature refer to military history and biography, memoirs of military historians, battles and sieges, the art of war, military correspondence, proclamations, bulletins, orders of the day, instructions, circulars, reports and military considerations, special memoirs, reconnaissance and reports, military and periodical collections, military justice.

The thirty-five lectures in history principally relate to France and its wars, commencing with the Treaty of Westphalia and ending with the Treaty of Vienna.

The twenty-seven lectures in geography and military statistics are subdivided into different parts; the first eight lectures are devoted to Europe and France, including the physical geography and statistics of the same; the second six lectures are devoted to the frontiers of France; and the third part of thirteen lectures to foreign states and Algeria, including Germany, Italy, Spain, Portugal, Poland, and Russia.

The studies for the first division during the second year of their residence consist of—

10 lectures in topography.
27 fortification.
15 artillery.
10 military legislation.
12 military administration.
27 military art and history.
20 German.
Total, 121

One lesson weekly is given in drawing, in order to render the students expert in landscape and military drawing with the pencil, pen, and brash.

We must not omit to call attention to the fact that mathematics are not taught in either yearly course at St. Cyr.

The course in topography, of ten lectures, has reference to the construction of maps, copies of drawings, theory, description, and use of instruments for measuring angles and leveling, the execution for a regular survey on the different systems of military drawing, drawing from models of ground, on the construction of topographical drawing and reconnaissance surveys, with accompanying memoirs.

Twenty-seven lectures are devoted to fortification; the first thirteen relate principally to field fortification, statement of the general principles, definitions, intrenchments, lines, redoubts, armament, defilement, execution of works on the ground, means necessary for the defense, application of field fortification to the defenses of têtes de pont and inhabited places, attack and defense of 236 intrenchments, &c., castramentation; six lectures have reference to permanent fortification, on ancient fortifications, Cormontaigne’s system, exterior and detached works, considerations respecting the accessories of defense to fortified places; eight lectures relate to the attack and defense of places, preparations for attack and defense, details of the construction of siege works from the opening of the trenches to the taking of the place, exterior works, as auxiliaries, sketches, and details of the different works in fortifications, plans, and profile, &c.

The students also execute certain works, such as the making of fascines, gabions, saucissons, repair of revetments of batteries, platform, setting the profiles, defilement, and construction of a fieldwork, different kinds of sap, plan and establishment of a camp for a battalion of infantry, &c.

Under the head of artillery, fifteen lectures are given, commencing with the resistance of fluids, movement of projectiles, solution of problems with the balistic pendulum, deviation of projectiles, pointing and firing guns; small arms, cannon, materials of artillery, powder, munition, fireworks for military purposes; range of cannon, artillery for the attack or defense of places or coasts, field artillery, military bridges.

The students are practically taught artillery drill with field and siege guns, practice with artillery, repair of siege batteries, bridges of boats or rafts.

The ten lectures allowed for the course of military legislation have for their object the explanation of the principles, practice, and regulations relating to military law, and the connection with the civil laws that affect military men.

The twelve lectures on what is called military administration relate to the interior economy of a company, and to the various matters appertaining to the soldier’s messing, mode of payment, necessaries, equipment, lodging, &c.

Military art and history is divided into three parts. The first, of five lectures, relates to the history of military institutions and organization. The second, of fifteen lectures, refers to the composition of armies and to considerations respecting the various arms, infantry, cavalry, état-major, artillery and engineers, and the minor operations of war. The third part, of seven lectures, gives the history of some of the most celebrated campaigns in modern times. In the practical exercises, the students make an attack or defense of a work or of a system of fieldworks during their course of fortification, or of a house, farm, village, in the immediate vicinity of the school, or make the passage of a river.

The students receive twenty lectures in German, and are required to keep up a knowledge of German writing.

EXAMINATIONS AT THE SCHOOL.

The examinations at the end of the first year take place under the superintendence of the director and assistant director of studies. They are conducted by the professor of each branch of study, assisted by a répétiteur, each of whom assigns a credit to the student under examination, and the mean, expressed as a whole number, represents the result of the student’s examination in that particular branch of study. The examination in military instruction for training (in drill and exercises) is carried on by the officers attached to companies, under the superintendence of the commandant of the battalion, and that relating to practical artillery by the officer in charge of that duty.

The pupils’ position is determined, as at the Polytechnic, partly by the marks gained at the examination, partly by those he has obtained during his previous studies. In other words, the half of the credit obtained by a student at this examination in each subject is added to the half of the mean of all the credits assigned to him, 237 in the same subject, for the manner in which he has replied to the questions of the professor and répétiteur during the year; and the sum of these two items represents his total credit at the end of the year. The scale of credit is from 0 to 20, as at the Polytechnic.

Every year, before the examinations commence, the commandant and second in command, in concert with the director and assistant director, and in concurrence with the superior officer commanding the battalion for military instruction, are formed into a board to determine the amount of the minimum credit which should be exacted from the students in every branch of study. This minimum is not usually allowed to fall below eight for the scientific, and ten for the military instruction.

Any student whose general mean credit is less than eight for the scientific, or ten for the military instruction, or who has a less credit than four for any particular study in the general instruction, or of six for the military instruction, is retained at the school to work during the vacation, and re-examined about eight days before the re-commencement of the course, by a commission composed of the director and assistant director of studies for the general instruction, and of the second in command and the commandant of the battalion, and of one captain for the military instruction. A statement of this second examination is submitted to the minister of war, and those students who pass it in a satisfactory manner are permitted by him to proceed into the first division. Those who do not pass it are reported to the minister of war as deserving of being excluded from the school, unless there be any special grounds for excusing them, such as sickness, in which case, when the fact is properly established before the council of instruction, they are permitted to repeat the year’s studies.

Irregularity of conduct is also made a ground for exclusion from the school. In order to estimate the credit to be attached to the conduct of a student, all the punishments to which he can be subjected are converted into a specific number of days of punishment drill. Thus,

For each day confined in the police chamber, 4 days’ punishment drill.

For each day confined in the prison, 8 days’ punishment drill.

The statement is made out under the presidency of the commandant of the school, by the second in command, and the officer in command of the battalion. The credits for conduct are expressed in whole numbers in terms of the scale of 0 to 20, in which the 20 signifies that the student has not been subjected to any punishment 238 whatever, and the 0, that the student’s punishments have amounted to 200 or more days of punishment drill. The number 20 is diminished by deducting 1 for every 10 days of punishment drill.

The classification in the order of merit depends upon the total amount of the sum of the numerical marks or credits obtained by each student in every branch of study or instruction. The numerical credit in each subject is found by multiplying the credit awarded in each subject by the co-efficient of influence belonging to it.

The co-efficients, representing the influence allowed to each particular kind of examination, in the various branches of study are as follows:—

Second Division, or First Year’s Course of Study.

  Descriptive Geometry, Course, 6  

General
Instruction.

Drawing and Sketches, 2 40
Physical Science applied to the Military Arts, Course, 6
Sketch and Memoir, 2
History, 6
Geography and Statistical Memoirs, Course, 5
Sketch and Memoir, 2
Literature, Memoir on 4
German, 4
  Drawing, 3  
Special Instruction:—Drill, Practice, Manœuvers (Infantry and Cavalry,) 7
Conduct, 3
50

First Division, or Second Year’s Course of Study

Infantry. Cavalry.
  Topography, Course, 3   3  
General Instruction.

Maps, Memoirs, and Practical Exercises,

3 35 2 32
Fortification, Course, 4 4

Drawings, Memoirs, and Practical Exercises,

3 2

Artillery and Balistic Pendulum,

Course, 4 4
Practical Exercises, School of Musketry 2 1
Military Legislation, 2 2
Military Administration, Course, 3 3
Sheets of Accounts, 1 1
Military History and Art, Course, 4 4
Memoirs and applications, 1 1
German, 4 4
  Drawing, 1   1  
  Infantry

Theory of Drill, Manœuvers—3 Schools,

4 9

Special instruction for

Practical Instruction 3
Regulations, 2
Cavalry, Riding, 3 12

Theoretical and Practical Instruction

7
  Veterinary Art, 2
  Conduct 6 6
  Total, 50 50
239

To facilitate this classification in order of merit, three distinct tables are prepared,—

The first relating to the general instruction;

The second relating to the military instruction; and

The third relating to the conduct;

and they respectively contain, one column in which the names of the students are arranged by companies in the order in which they have been examined; followed by as many columns as there are subjects of examination, for the insertion of their individual credit and the co-efficient of influence, by which each credit is multiplied; and lastly by a column containing the sum of the various products belonging to, and placed opposite each student’s name.

These tables are respectively completed by the aid of the existing documents, the first for the general instruction, by the director of studies; the second for the military instruction, by the officer commanding the battalion; the third for conduct, under the direction of the commandant of the school, assisted by the second in command.

A jury formed within the school, composed of the general commandant, president, the second in command, the director of studies, and the officer commanding the battalion, is charged with the classification of the students in the order of merit.

To effect it, after having verified and established the accuracy of the above tables, the numbers appertaining to each student in the three tables are extracted and inserted in another table, containing the name of each student, and, in three separate columns, the numbers obtained by each in general instruction, military instruction, and conduct, and the sum of these credits in another column.

By the aid of this last table, the jury cause another to be compiled, in which the students are arranged in the order of merit as established by the numerical amount of their credits, the highest in the list having the greatest number.

If there should be any two or more having the same number of total credits, the priority is determined by giving it to the student who has obtained a superiority of credits in military instruction, conduct, general instruction, notes for the year; and if these prove insufficient, they are finally classed in the same order as they were admitted into the school.

A list for passing from the second to the first division is forwarded to the minister at war, with a report in which the results for the year are compared with the results of the preceding year; and the minister at war, with these reports before him, decides who 240 are ineligible from incompetency, or by reason of their conduct, to pass to the other division.

The period when the final examinations before leaving the school are to commence, is fixed by the president of the jury, specially appointed to carry on this final examination, in concert with the general commandant of the school.

The president of the jury directs and superintends the whole of the arrangements for conducting the examination; and during each kind of examination, a member of the corps, upon the science of which the student is being questioned, assists the examiner, and, as regards the military instruction, each examiner is aided by a captain belonging to the battalion.

The examination is carried on in precisely the same manner as that already described for the end of the first year’s course of study. And the final classification is ascertained by adding to the numerical credits obtained by each student during his second year’s course of study, in the manner already fully explained, one-tenth of the numerical credits obtained at the examinations at the end of the first year.

The same regulations as to the minimum credit which a student must obtain in order to pass from one division to the other, at the end of the first year, which are stated in page 160, are equally applicable to his passing from the school to become a second lieutenant in the army.

A list of the names of those students who are found qualified for the rank of second lieutenant is sent to the minister at war, and a second list is also sent, containing the names of those students that have, when subjected to a second or revised examination, been pronounced by the jury before whom they were re-examined as qualified.

Those whose names appear in the first list are permitted to choose according to their position in the order of merit, the staff corps or infantry, according to the number required for the first named service, and to name the regiments of infantry in which they desire to serve.

Those intended for the cavalry are placed at the disposal of the officer commanding the regiment which they wish to enter.

Those whose names appear in the second list are not permitted to choose their corps, but are placed by the minister at war in such corps as may have vacancies in it, or where he may think proper.

The students who are selected to enter the staff corps, after competing successfully with the second lieutenants of the army, proceed as second lieutenants to the staff school at Paris. Those who fail pass into the army as privates, according to the terms of the engagement made on entering the school.

241

THE CAVALRY SCHOOL AT SAUMUR.

This school was established in 1826, and is considered19 the most perfect and extensive institution of the kind in Europe,—perhaps the only one really deserving the title, the others being more properly mere schools of equitation.

It is under the control of the Minister of War, and was established for the purpose of perfecting the officers of the cavalry corps in all the branches of knowledge necessary to their efficiency, and especially in the principles of equitation,—and to diffuse through the corps a uniform system of instruction, by training up a body of instructors and classes of recruits intended for the cavalry service.

The instruction is entirely military, and is based upon the laws and regulations in force with regard to the mounted troops. It includes; 1st. The regulations for interior service; 2nd. The cavalry tactics; 3rd. The regulations for garrison service; 4th. The regulations for field service applied, as far as possible, on the ground, especially with regard to reconnaissances; 5th. A military and didactic course of equitation, comprising all the theoretical and practical knowledge required for the proper and useful employment of the horse, his breaking, application to the purposes of war, and various civil exercises; 6th. A course of hippology, having for its object practical instruction, by means of the model breeding-stud attached to the school, in the principles which should serve as rules in crossing breeds and in raising colts, to explain the phases of dentition, to point out the conformation of the colt which indicates that he will become a good and solid horse, the method to be pursued to bring the colt under subjection without resistance, and, finally, to familiarize the officers and pupils with all the knowledge indispensable to an officer charged with the purchase and care of remount horses. This course includes also a knowledge of horse-equipment, illustrated in the saddle factory connected with the school; 7th. Vaulting, fencing, and swimming. The non-commissioned officers are also instructed in the theory of administration and accountability. The course 242 of instruction continues one year, commencing in the month of October. The pupils at the school are:—

1st. A division of lieutenants, (lieutenants instructeurs.)

2nd. A division of sub-lieutenants, (sous-lieutenants d’instruction.)

3rd. A division of sub-officers, (sous-officiers élèves instructeurs.)

4th. A division of non-commissioned officers, (brigadiers élèves.)

5th. A division of cavalry recruits, (cavaliers élèves.)

The lieutenants are chosen out of the regiments of cavalry and artillery, as well as from the squadrons of the park-trains and military equipages, from the lieutenants who voluntarily present themselves for the appointment to the General Board of Inspectors. Their age must not exceed thirty-six years.

The sub-lieutenants are appointed from the cavalry regiments, must be graduates of the Special Military School, not above thirty-four years of age, and have served at least one year with the regiment.

The sub-officers are selected from the cavalry corps—one from every two regiments of cavalry and artillery, and every two squadrons of the park-trains and military equipages.

The non-commissioned officers are chosen annually by the inspectors-general—one from each regiment of cavalry:—from among those that show a peculiar aptness for equitation and are distinguished by good conduct, information, zeal, and intelligence; those who are recommended for promotion in their corps are selected in preference. Their age must not exceed twenty-five years, and they must have served at least one year in the ranks.

These pupils, numbering about four hundred, are sent to the school by order of the Minister of War. They continue connected with their corps, from which they are regarded as detached while they remain at the school. They receive additional pay. Those who after due trial are found deficient in the necessary qualifications, are sent back to their regiments.

Upon the recommendation of the inspector-general of the school, the officers who are serving as pupils, compete for promotion by choice with the officers of the corps from which they are detached.

The cavalry lieutenant, who graduates first in his class, is presented for the first vacancy as captain-instructor that occurs in the cavalry, provided he has the seniority of rank required by law. The lieutenant who graduates second obtains, under the same condition, the second vacancy of captain-instructor, provided his division consisted of more than thirty members. The sub-lieutenant graduating first, provided he is not lower than the tenth in the general classification 243 of the officers of both grades, is presented for promotion to the first vacant lieutenancy that occurs in his regiment.

The non-commissioned officers who pass a satisfactory final examination, are immediately promoted to vacancies that have been preserved for them in their regiments—those who have graduated among the first ten of the class, being presented for promotion as sub-lieutenants, as soon as they have completed their required term of service as non-commissioned officers. Those who attend the school as non-commissioned officers, frequently return as officers for instruction, and again in a higher grade on the staff of the school.

Officers transferred from the infantry to the cavalry are generally sent to this school for a short time at least. The captains-instructor of the cavalry regiments, and the instructors of equitation in the artillery regiments, are mostly selected from the graduates.

The school also receives by voluntary enlistment, such young men, not above the age of twenty-one years, as desire to enter the cavalry service. They are not admitted until they have been subjected to an examination before a committee, by whom they are classified according to their fitness. These volunteer enlistments for the cavalry school are made at Saumur, at least a month before the commencement of the course, on presentation of the certificate of classification and of approval by the commandant of the school. The number is limited to fifty each year.

Such of these cavalry pupils as are distinguished for diligence and good conduct and pass a satisfactory final examination are transferred to the regiments of cavalry, for promotion to the rank of noncommissioned officers by their respective colonels. Those who have not been found fit for admission are sent back simply as privates.

A council of instruction is charged with the direction of the studies. They propose useful changes, and direct the progress of the studies. They are also charged with the examinations.

The recitations are by s of about thirty each. In reciting upon the general principles of tactics, equitation, hippology, &c., the manner is as in our Military Academy; when reciting upon the movements in tactics, all the commands and explanations of the instructor to the troops are repeated “verbatim et literatim,” and in the tone and pitch of voice used in the field. Perfect uniformity of tone and manner is required. The object of thus reciting is to teach the pupils the proper tone and pitch of voice, to accustom them to hear their own voices, and to enable them to repeat the text literally at this pitch of voice, without hesitation or mistake.

The course of hippology includes the structure of the horse, the circulation of the blood, organs of respiration, &c., food, working 244 powers, actions, breeds, manner of taking care of him, ordinary ailments and remedies, shoeing, lameness, saddling, sore backs, sanitary police, &c., but does not comprise a complete veterinary course.

The practical exercises consist of:—the ordinary riding-hall drill, including vaulting, the “kickers,” &c.; the carrière, or out-door riding at speed, over hurdles, ditches, &c.; cutting at head; target-practice; fencing; swimming; the usual military drills; skeleton squadron and regimental drills; rides in the country; finally, in the summer, frequent “carousels” or tilts are held.

The veterinary surgeons of the lowest grade are sent here upon their first appointment to receive instruction in equitation, to profit by the study of the model stud, and to learn the routine of their duties with the regiments. They form a distinct class.

In the Model Stud, the number of animals varies. There are usually two stallions and about twenty mares, (Arabs, English, Norman, &c.,) in addition to those selected from time to time from among the riding-animals. Attached to it is a botanical garden, more especially for useful and noxious grasses and plants.

School for Breaking Young Horses.—The best horses purchased at the remount dépôts are selected for the officers, and sent to this place to be trained. The number is fixed at 100 as a minimum. These, as soon as their education is complete, are sold or given, according to the orders of the Minister of War, to those officers who need a remount—in preference, to officers of the general staff and staff corps, those of the artillery, and mounted officers of infantry. These officers may also select from among the other horses of the school, with the approval of the commandant.

School of Farriers.—This is attached to the cavalry school, and is under the direction of the commandant. It is composed of private soldiers who have served at least six months with their regiments, and are blacksmiths or horse-shoers by trade. There are usually two men from each mounted regiment. The course lasts two years; it comprises reading, writing, arithmetic, equitation, the anatomy of the horse, thorough instruction as to all diseases, injuries, and deformities of the foot, something of the veterinary art in general, the selection of metals, making shoes, nails, tools, &c., shoeing horses. The establishment has a large shoeing shop and yard, a recitation-room, museum, and store-rooms. In the recitation-room there are skeletons of horses, men, &c., as well as some admirable specimens of natural preparations in comparative anatomy, a complete collection of shoeing-tools, specimens of many kinds of shoes, &c.—Annuaire de l’Instruction 1861, andObservations.”

245

THE SCHOOL OF APPLICATION FOR THE STAFF.
AT PARIS.

DUTIES OF THE FRENCH STAFF.

The staff is the center from which issue and to which are addressed all orders and military correspondence.

The officers of the staff are divided into chiefs of the staff, sub-chiefs, staff-officers, and aides-de-camp.

The colonels and lieutenant-colonels are employed as chiefs of the staff in the different military districts of France, and in the divisions of the army on active service. The ordinary posts of the majors and captains is that of aides-de-camp to general officers.

When several armies are united together under a commander-in-chief, the chief of the general staff takes temporarily the title of Major-Général, the general officers employed under him that of Aide-Major-Général.

The duties of the chief of the staff are to transmit the orders of the general; to execute those which he receives from him personally, for field-works, pitching camps, reconnaissances, visits of posts, &c.; to correspond with the commanding officers of the artillery and the engineers, and with the commissariat, in order to keep the general exactly informed of the state of the different branches of the service; to be constantly in communication with the different corps, so as to be perfectly master of everything relating to them; to prepare for the commander-in-chief and for the minister of war, returns of the strength and position of the different corps and detachments, reports on marches and operations, and, in short, every necessary information.

The distribution of the other officers of different ranks, when it has not been made by the minister of war, is regulated by the chief of the general staff.

In every division of the army an officer of the staff is specially charged with the office work; the others assist him when necessary, but they are more usually employed in general staff duties, in reconnaissances, drawing plans of ground, missions, the arrangement of 246 camps and cantonments, superintending the distribution of the rations, &c.

The officers of the staff may further be charged with the direction of field-works thrown up to cover camps and cantonments.

Staff officers of all ranks may be employed on posts and detachments. On special missions they command all other officers of the same rank employed with them. When a staff officer is charged with the direction of an expedition or a reconnaissance, without having the command of the troops, the officer in command concerts with him in all the dispositions it may be necessary to make to ensure the success of the operation.

The staff of generals of artillery and of engineers is composed of officers of their respective arms.

The war depot (Dépôt de la Guerre) was founded for the purpose of collecting and preserving military historical papers, reconnaissances, memoirs, and plans of battles; to preserve plans and MSS. maps useful for military purposes, and to have them copied and published.

It is divided into two s—one charged with trigonometrical surveying, topography, plan drawing, and engraving; the other with historical composition, military statistics, the care of the library, the archives, plans, and maps. Each of these s is under the direction of a colonel of the staff corps, who has under his orders several officers of his corps.

The war depot has taken a large share in the preparation of the map of France. The first idea of undertaking this important work dates from 1808. After various delays and difficulties, the trigonometrical survey, which had been for a time suspended, was recommenced in 1818. The work was placed under the war depot, intrusted to the corps of geographical engineers. Since this period the geographical engineers have been incorporated in the staff corps, by the officers of which the work has been continued. The primary triangulation was finished in 1845; the secondary is now finished; the filling in the details will occupy several years to come. The number of officers of the staff corps employed on the survey has varied from twenty-six to ninety.

THE STAFF CORPS.

The officers of the French staff constitute a distinct and separate corps, numbering thirty-five colonels, thirty-five lieutenant-colonels, one hundred and ten majors, three hundred and thirty captains, and one hundred lieutenants. None but officers of this corps can be 247 employed on the staff. When, by accident, there is not a sufficient number present, regimental officers may be temporarily employed, but they return to their regiments as soon as officers of the staff corps arrive to replace them. The division of the staff into adjutant-general’s and quartermaster-general’s department does not exist in the French service.

The only means of entering the staff corps is through the Staff School of Application. Of the fifty student-officers which the School of Application usually contains, twenty-five leave annually to enter the staff corps, and are replaced by an equal number. Three of these come from the Polytechnic, the remaining twenty-two are selected from thirty pupils of the Military School of St. Cyr, who compete with thirty second lieutenants of the army, if so many present themselves; but, in general, the number of the latter does not exceed four or five.

The course of study in the Staff School of Application lasts two years. The students have the rank of second lieutenant. On passing the final examination they are promoted to the rank of lieutenant; they are then sent to the infantry to do duty for two years, at the expiration of which time they are attached for an equal period to the cavalry. They may finally be sent for a year to the artillery or engineers.

This routine can not be interrupted except in time of war, and even then the lieutenant can not be employed on staff duty until he has completed his two years with the infantry. However, officers who have a special aptitude for the science of geodesy or topography, may even earlier be employed on the map of France or other similar duty; and, further, two of the lieutenants, immediately on quitting the Staff School of Application, are sent to the war depot (Dépôt de la Guerre) to gain a familiarity with trigonometrical operations.

The General Officers at their Inspections are required to report specially to the Minister of War on the captains and lieutenants of the staff corps doing duty with the regiments in their districts, both as to their knowledge of drill and manœuvres, and their acquaintance with the duties of the staff. They are to require these officers to execute a military reconnaissance, never allowing more than forty-eight hours for the field sketch and its accompanying report.

Officers of all arms of the rank of captain or under, are permitted to exchange with officers of equal rank in the staff corps; but they must previously satisfy the conditions of the final examinations of the Staff College.

248

THE BUILDINGS AND ESTABLISHMENT.

The Staff School of Application is situated in Paris, in the Rue de Grenelle, close to the Invalides. Of the ninety officers attending it, sixty lodge in the building and thirty out of it, but all take their meals in the town. Each has, in general, a room to himself. Servants are provided in the proportion of one to about eight rooms. The officers are forbidden to have private servants.

The staff of the school is composed as follows:—

The Commandant, a General of Brigade.

The Second in Command, Director of the Studies, a Colonel or Lieutenant-Colonel of the Staff Corps.

A Major of the Staff Corps, charged with the superintendence of the interior economy and the drills and exercises.

Three Captains of the same Corps, charged with the details of the interior economy of the School, and to assist the Major in the instruction of the Officers in their military duties. The Captains are required to take the direction of a portion of the topographical works on the ground.

A Medical Officer.

Thirteen Military Professors, or Assistant Professors, viz.:—

A Major or Captain, Professor of Applied Descriptive Geometry.

A Major or Captain, Professor of Astronomy, Physical Geography, and Statistics.

A Major or Captain, Professor of Geodesy and Topography.

A Major or Captain of Engineers, Professor of Fortification.

A Major or Captain of Artillery, Professor of the instruction relative to this arm.

A Military Sub-Intendant, Professor of Military Legislation and Administration.

A Major or Captain, Professor of Military Art.

A Captain, Assistant Professor of Descriptive Geography; charged also to assist the Professor of Fortification.

A Captain, Assistant Professor of Topography; charged also to assist the Professor of Geography.

A Major or Captain of Cavalry, Professor of Equitation; he acts under the immediate orders of the Major of the College.

Two Lieutenants or Second Lieutenants of Cavalry, Assistant Professors of Equitation.

An Officer of Cavalry of the same rank, acting as Paymaster to the Riding Detachment.

The Non-Military Professors are:—

Two Professors of Drawing.

Two Professors of German.

A Professor of Fencing.

One hundred and forty-five horses are kept for the use of the student-officers, and eighty-two men belonging to the cavalry to look after them.

Both the studies and examinations at the Staff School hold an intermediate place between those of the Polytechnic and St. Cyr, being less abstract than the former, and higher and more difficult than the latter.

249

CONDITIONS OF ADMISSION.—ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS.

The entrance to the Staff School of Application in France is, as is the case in all the French military schools, by means of a competitive examination, or, rather, by the results of three distinct examinations, and by the selection of different sets of successful candidates. Three are taken from the students leaving the Polytechnic, who have an absolute right to the three first places in the Staff School, and twenty-two are selected from the thirty best students leaving St. Cyr, and an equal number of sub-lieutenants of the line under twenty-five years of age, if so many present themselves. The sub-lieutenants must have one year of service in that rank, and they must make known their request to be allowed to compete for admission to the Staff School to the Inspector General, and, through him, to the Minister of War. It should be added, that their number is generally extremely small.

The usual number of young officers admitted yearly to the school in time of peace is twenty-five, but this number is sometimes considerably exceeded, and we found no less than ninety present. The three Polytechnic students select the Staff School after their final examination, and the St. Cyr students make known their desire when the whole are examined by a Board of Examiners, and the thirty best are then selected as competitors for admission into the Staff School of Application.

The sub-lieutenants also repair to St. Cyr, where they are examined separately by the same examiners who have just conducted the examination of the St. Cyr students, and in the same subjects.

Their marks or credits are then compared with those of the St. Cyr pupils; and the relative position of the two sets of candidates is ascertained, and the list of those to be admitted to the School of Application determined accordingly.

These examinations take place before a Commission of Officers, composed of,—

A Lieutenant-General President, appointed by the Minister of War.

The Director or Chief of the Dépôt de la Guerre.

The Commandant of the School of Application.

Four Colonels or Lieutenant-Colonels of the Staff, appointed by the Minister of War.

A Field Officer chosen from among the Officers employed at the Dépôt de la Guerre, as permanent Secretary.

This Commission is also charged with drawing up and proposing regulations for the approval of the Minister of War concerning the interior organization and the course of study to be followed in the 250 school, and to make changes in the programmes for admission and for leaving the school.

A very detailed account of the subjects of the entrance examination is drawn out, and inserted in the Journal Militaire, and the Moniteur every year. The following are the subjects:—

(1.) Trigonometry and Topography.

(2.) Regular Topography—the measuring of plane surfaces and leveling.

(3.) Irregular Topography, Plane Trigonometry.

(4.) Military Art and History, including—

(a.) History of Military Institutions at the chief periods.

(b.) Present composition of the French army.

(c.) Organization of an army in the field.

(d.) History of some of the most memorable campaigns, as those of 1796–97 in Italy, and of 1805 and 1809, in Germany.

(5.) Artillery and Science of Projectiles.

(6.) Field Fortification and Castremetation.

(7.) Permanent Fortification.

(8.) Military Legislation.

(9.) Military Administration.

(10.) Manœuvres.

(11.) German Language.

(12.) Drawing.

The marks assigned and the influence allowed to each of these subjects are the same as those given in the final examination at St. Cyr. The entrance examination places the students in order of merit.

THE STUDIES.

All the details of the teaching are in the hands of a Council of Instruction, similar to that of the Polytechnic, and consisting of the General Commandant (President,) the Director of Studies, and three Military Professors, appointed yearly by rotation. Other professors and assistant professors, or officers of the staff of the school, may be called in to assist the Council, but (except in deciding the list at an examination) they have no votes.

This council does not interfere directly with the administration, the common work of the school. It draws up, indeed, the list of lectures, making any alterations in them, or in the books to be used which may seem from time to time desirable. But the officer accountable for the daily working of the school is the Director of Studies. His functions appeared to us to bring him into more constant connection with the pupils than was the case with the director of the Polytechnique. In all the schools the General Commandant and the Director of Studies live in the establishment; but at the Ecole d’Application and at St. Cyr the director “examines the methods of teaching, and proposes to the Council of Instruction any modifications or improvements which may raise or quicken the instruction. He inspects the work of the student-officers, both in 251 and out of the school. He keeps a register of the marks given by the professors, and at the end of every three months brings the sum of them before the General Commandant in a detailed report.” In fact, his school functions are not modified, as at the Polytechnic, by a body of able professors.

As already stated, there are fifteen professors, without reckoning those of equitation, and thirteen of them are officers; but the system of Répétiteurs, which we have seen so influential at the Polytechnic, does not exist here.

The hours of work are, in summer, i.e. from May to November, from six to five, and in winter from eight to five, with the exception of one hour for breakfast and one hour for étude libre, which appears to mean very little indeed. From seven to nine hours daily may be taken as the amount, but (as is the case with most French schools) there is a constant change, not only in the subjects taught but in part of the work being out and part in doors, some really head work, much purely manual. There does not appear to be the same intense application as at the Polytechnic; indeed, the work for three months in the year is almost entirely in the open air, consisting in making plans and military sketches, either in the neighborhood of Paris or in the more distant parts of the country; eight months are devoted to the in-door studies, one month to the examinations.

The in-door studies are entirely conducted in the halls of study (Salles d’étude), in each of which we found parties of twelve or fifteen students seated. They are inspected constantly by the director or some of the professors. None of the regular work may be done in private. It seems everywhere a fixed belief in the French Military Schools that very much would be done idly and ill if done in private. This presents a striking contrast to the feeling on the subject in England.

The severer and preparatory studies of mathematics are supposed to have been completed prior to entrance into the Polytechnic or St. Cyr. Some, however, of the studies of applied science occupy considerable time at the School of Application.

The following analysis will show the time assigned to each branch:—

1. Astronomy occupies 1½ hours weekly for the pupils of the first year; afterwards it ceases entirely.

2. To Applied Descriptive Geometry a good deal of time is given, but still only by the pupils of the first year. 12 hours a week are spent upon it in the first half year, 10 in the second.

3. Military Topography occupies about 10½ hours in the first year, 6 in the second.

252

4. A good deal of time is devoted to Field Fortifications. The junior division, it is true, only begin it in their second half year of study, and then only work at it for 1½ hours weekly. But the senior division are occupied 4½ hours weekly in their first half year, and 7½ hours in their second.

5. The Study of Military Administration and Legislation is begun immediately upon entrance. It occupies during both years 1½ hours weekly.

6. Lectures on Military Art and Tactics are also given for 1½ hours weekly during both years, and after hearing these lectures the students are occasionally required to write a military memoir on a campaign, descriptions of reconnaissances, or of fields of battle, and to make sketches of ground with accompanying reports. This course was noted by General Foltz, the director of the school, as defective, on the ground that it was too difficult to find a teacher for, or indeed to teach military art; and he thought that lectures on military history, or such works as Napoleon’s Memoirs, would be more useful to the pupils.

7. Drawing occupies throughout 4½ hours weekly, and great attention is bestowed upon it. “We were shown a large number of works done by the young officers of the school. To enumerate some of the most important—there were specimens of objects, with shadows; perspective of the exterior and interior of buildings, with shadows; perspective views of country; machinery drawings, plan, , and elevation; in fortification, a plan of comparison of a portion of ground with proposed field-works for defense; military bridges; reconnaissance, and memoir of a route, with accompanying notes and sketches, done both on foot and on horseback; plan of a portion of country made with a compass by parties of ten, under the direction of a Captain (for this the trigonometrical points and distances were furnished, and it was filled up by a minor triangulation;) plan of a field of battle, made without points; and a description of the battle.”

These drawings were mostly executed with great care, and we were told that the course was fully as much as the student could accomplish in two years. Some parts of it are done entirely in the Salle d’étude; sketches are made on horseback in the neighborhood of Paris, always under the direction of the professors, others again at great distances, such as one at Biarritz last year, and the one on which the pupils are to be engaged this year, is the line of operations of Wellington from the Spanish frontier to Toulouse. The two last kinds of work are roughly sketched, and finished at Paris. These summer occupations seem to stand in place of vacations, of which there are none.

(1.) To Fencing, three hours a week are given throughout.

(2.) To the Cavalry Drill two hours weekly in the first division. It is replaced by Infantry Drill in the second.

The studies which none but the senior division pursue are,—

(1.) Artillery studies, which occupy 4½ hours weekly.

(2.) Geography, meaning chiefly the military geography of a country, with a few lectures on statistics and political economy; these take 1½ hours weekly.

(3.) Geodesy, or trigonometrical surveying, also for 1½ hours.

The only strictly literary occupation is the study of German for about three hours per week during the whole time. We were told that a large proportion of the pupils unite among themselves to learn English privately, but no public course is given.

253
THE EXAMINATIONS.

The students have two examinations to go through in each year; the first commencing about the first of June, the last in November, and each of the first year’s examinations is held before a jury consisting of—

(1.) The General Commandant, or the Director of Studies; President.

(2.) The Professor of the Course examined in.

(3.) Two Officers appointed by the Council of Instruction.

The last examination in each year is, of course, the most important, inasmuch as the passage from the Second or Junior to the First or Senior Division, and in part from the Senior into the Staff Corps, is regulated by the results of these examinations; and the value allowed to the last examination in each year is just double of that assigned for the examinations in June.

The examinations of the first year are confined to the subjects of study followed during that year, viz.:—

Descriptive Geometry, Astronomy, Topography, Artillery, Fortification, Military Art and Administration, German, Drawing, Register of Notes and Memoranda.

The professors and members of the jury are directed rigorously to conform themselves to the following scale as regards the marks or credits they award for the oral answers, graphical representations, &c.

  0 to   4 bad.
  5 to 10 passable.
10 to 13 fair.
14 to 18 good.
19 to 20 very good.

The Co-efficients of influence of the various studies of the first year are as follows:—

Descriptive Geometry, Theory, 4 9

Geographical Representation,

3

Drawing of Machines,

Memoir, 1
Drawing, 1
Astronomy Theory, 4 5

Graphical Representation,

1
Topography Theory, 4 10

Graphical Representation,

* 6
Artillery, 4
Fortification Theory, 4 8

Graphical Representation,

2
Memoirs, 2
Military Art Theory, 4 7
Memoirs,

On various questions,

1
On surveys, 2
254

Military Administration,

Theory, 4 5
Memoirs, 1
Manœuvres, 2
German, 4
Drawing, 2

Keeping of Memorandum Books,

1

Conduct and Discipline,

1

Riding and Knowledge of the Horse,

Riding,   2
Hippology,
Total, 60
* Subdivision of the Co-efficients
of the Graphical Representations.
Survey with compass, 1     
Rapid sketch, 6
Itinery of the first survey,
Itinery of the second survey,
First Topographical Drawing, ½
Second, with relief, ¾
Third, on the scale of 1/20000 ¾  

As soon as the examinations are concluded, the Council of Instruction, prepares a provisory classified list of the students, made out in order of merit from the credits or marks awarded by the Examining Jury in connection with the above-mentioned co-efficients of influence, in a similar manner to that already explained in the account of the Polytechnic School, the student with the largest numerical credit being placed at the head of the list.

This provisory list is submitted to the Consulting Committee of the Staff Corps for transmission to the Minister of War.

In order to pass from the Second or Junior into the First or Senior Division, every Student Officer must have obtained the following marks or credits from the Jury, viz.:—

In Astronomy and Geometry, six out of twenty in each.

In all other branches of theoretical instruction, four out of twenty.

In the classification of the graphical representations in topography, a mean of eight out of twenty, and in each of the other courses a mean of six out of twenty; and as the general result of his various works and of his examinations (the mean of the year being combined with the number obtained before the jury in the proportion adopted by the Council of Instruction,) he must have obtained a number of credits equal to one-half of the maximum (1,200.)20

Every Student Officer who in his oral examination before the Jury has failed in obtaining the minimum stated above is subjected to a fresh proof before the Consulting Committee of the Staff Corps, and if this is not favorable to him he ceases to belong to the school, and must return to his regiment, unless such failure can be attributed to an illness of forty-five days, in which case he may be permitted to double his first year’s course of study.

If the second proof be favorable he is retained at the school, but 255 placed at the bottom of the classified lists prepared by the Council of Instruction.

The co-efficients of influence for the second year are—

Geography and Statistics, Theory, 4 5
Memoir, 1
  Theory 4  
Geodesy and Topography,

Geographical Representation,

  10

Survey with the Compass,

1 6
Reconnaissance,

Itinerary of the first survey,

Itinerary of the reconnaissance

Drawing of a Fortress and its Environs,

 

Reduction of the Drawings,

½    
  Theory, 4  
Artillery, Graphical Representation, 3 8

First Drawing of a Military Bridge,

1
Second ditto, ½
Breaching Battery ½

Drawing of Artillery Carriage,

1
  Memoirs, 1  
  Theory, 4  
Fortification, Graphical Representation, 3 11
Defilement, 1
Project of Fortification, 2

Memoir on a Fortified place,

 

Memoir on a Project of Field Fortification,

 

Military Administration,

Theory 4 4
Military Art Theory 4 8

Memoir on various questions comprised in drawing up a memoir,

2

Memoir on the survey with a Compass, or sketch reconnaissance

2
Manœuvres, 3
German, 4
Drawing, 2
Keeping of Note Books, 1
Conduct and Discipline, 1

Riding and Knowledge
of the Horse,

Riding, 2 3
Veterinary Art, 1
Total 60

[Indented items:] Subdivision of the Co-efficients of the Graphical Representations, &c.

The examinations of the students of the Senior or First Division is made in a similar manner to that already described for the Junior Division, but after they are concluded, and prior to these students being admitted into the Staff Corps, they are subjected to another examination before the Consulting Committee of the Staff Corps, consisting of—

3 Generals of Division on the Staff.

3 Generals of Brigade.

256

3 Colonels of the Staff.

5 Lieutenant-Colonels, including the Secretary.

The professors belonging to the school may be called in to assist at this examination, and when it is concluded the Consulting Committee proceeds to the definitive classification of the Student Officers of the First Division by causing the following documents to be placed before them, viz.:—

The register of the notes of each Student Officer.

Tables of the value of their work; the classified list of passage to the First Division, and the provisionary list for leaving, recently prepared by the Council of Instruction. The numerical credits obtained in these two classifications are added (each sum being halved) to the definitive classification prepared by the committee. The total is divided by two, in order not to exceed the regulated limit of 1,200 credits for the maximum.

Every Student Officer who, in this examination for leaving, has not obtained the half of the maximum number of numerical credits is considered to be inadmissible to the Staff Corps.

This classified list, prepared by the Consulting Committee of the Staff Corps, fixes the position of the Student Officers in order of merit, and according to this order of merit they enter the Staff Corps. The committee reports to the Minister of War the names of the Student Officers that are not eligible for the Staff Corps.

The first two or three places, we were told, are always remembered as marks of distinction, but the honor does not descend lower, as in the intense competition of the Polytechnic.

Students belonging to the First Division may also be permitted to double the second year’s course of study on account of illness; but in no case can an officer be permitted to remain more than three years at the school.

257

MILITARY ORPHAN SCHOOL
AT LA FLECHE.

The Collége or Prytanée Militaire appears, in point of studies, to differ from the schools that have just been described, chiefly in its having only one department for the elder pupils, the scientific, with merely occasional subsidiary lessons in grammar and literature.

The institution is a school for boys between the ages of ten and eighteen; no one under ten or above twelve years old can be admitted: and no one can commence a new course at the school after completing his eighteenth year.

The prescribed instruction comprises the following courses:—

Humanities (Latin, &c.)

History and Geography.

German.

Mathematics.

Physical Sciences.

Natural History.

Figure Drawing.

Linear Drawing.

And the general object of the courses is to qualify the pupils to pass the examination for the degree of Bachelor of Science.

The pupils also go through military and gymnastic exercises, and learn to swim.

The school is under military discipline, is governed by a general officer of the staff corps or a colonel in active service, as commandant and director of studies, and by a lieutenant-colonel or major, with the title and functions of second in command and sub-director. In addition there are four officers, twenty-three professors and teachers, and eighteen répétiteurs.

The yearly charge for paying pupils is 850 francs, and the cost of outfit about 500 francs; but there are 400 free and 100 half-free places (400 bourses and 100 demi-bourses) granted by the state in favor of the sons of officers, the order of preference being regulated as follows, those who are orphans on both sides having the first claim, and those who have lost their father, the next:—

258

1. Those whose fathers have been killed, or have died of wounds received in action.

2. Those whose fathers have died in the service, or after retiring on a pension.

3. Sons of fathers who have been disabled in consequence of wounds received in action.

Sons of non-commissioned officers or of private soldiers who have been killed or have been disabled in action, who have been placed on the retired list, or have been discharged after twenty years’ service, may also be admitted, as a special mark of favor.

The candidates undergo an examination, not, however, for the purpose of competition, but merely to show that they are qualified to enter the classes.

The school is inspected annually by a general officer sent by the war department, as also by an officer of the commissariat. There is no sort of engagement or expectation that the pupils should enter the military service. The nature of the studies holds out some inducement to them to compete for admission at St. Cyr or the Polytechnic; and in the examination for entrance at St. Cyr, it is stated that the sons of military men have the privilege of being raised fifteen places in the list of the order of merit. An officer’s or soldier’s son from La Flèche would, in case of 300 candidates being admitted to St. Cyr, be able to claim admission, if he came 315th on the list, to the exclusion of the candidate who stood 300th.

259

SCHOOL OF MUSKETRY

The School of Musketry, formed by the Ministerial Order of 29th March, 1842, was only intended at first to supply instructors to the ten battalions of Chasseurs who were armed with rifles. The results of its establishment were, however, found so valuable, that the benefits of the instruction it afforded were by degrees extended to the whole army.

In 1845, the Duc d’Aumale, who had taken a special interest in the improvement of fire-arms and the better instruction of the soldier in their use, was nominated Inspector-General of Schools of Musketry. Besides the chief school at Vincennes, others were formed in the principal garrisons; and eventually a regimental School of Musketry was established in every regiment of infantry.

Some changes have been made in the system established under the Duke. The School of Musketry at Vincennes has only been regularly organized on its present footing since 1852. A portion of the fortress affords the accommodation required for the theoretical instruction, while the Polygon offers admirable facilities for practical instruction and target practice.

The Staff of the School consists of,—

A Commandant, a Lieut.-Colonel of Infantry.

An Instructor in Musketry, a Major of Infantry.

A Professor, a Captain of Artillery.

An Assistant Professor, a Captain of Artillery.

A Sub-Instructor in Musketry, a Captain of Infantry.

Each regiment sends an Officer (a Sub-Lieutenant or a Lieutenant) to Vincennes, to go through the course of instruction. The course commences on the 1st of March, and lasts four months. Two hours a day three times a week are devoted to lectures on the construction and use of fire-arms, and the theory of projectiles. Each officer is required to complete a certain number of drawings of the separate parts of arms. At the termination of the course, certificates are given, and, if favorable, go towards the officer’s claim to be promoted “au choix.”

We were conducted over the rooms of the fortress set apart for the school by the officer charged with the Theoretical Instruction (Captain Févre, of the Artillery.) They consist of a large paved 260 room, where the officers perform their small-arm exercise in bad weather; of the study-room, in which the drawings are executed; of a lecture-room or amphitheater; of the library, chiefly supplied with technical works on arms; and of a model-room, containing a very good collection of French and foreign arms, and of portions of arms, to illustrate the lectures. There are, besides, private rooms for the instructors, and a room for the orderlies. On the ground floor a small forge has been fitted up for the purpose of giving practical instruction in some of the details of the manufacture of arms.

To produce accurate marksmen is not the only object of the School of Musketry. Its staff may be considered a description of standing committee, to whom inventions in arms and ammunition are submitted, to have their qualities practically tested. On the day of our visits experiments on the relative merits of three forms of balls were being carried on, which we witnessed.

Quitting the fortress by a bridge over the ditch, in an angle of which the Duc d’Enghien was shot, we entered on the Polygon or practice ground. In a few minutes two detachments of troops, one from the Chasseurs de Vincennes, the other from the 20th regiment of the line, arrived and took up their ground in front of the practice butts. Of the balls between which comparisons were to be made, one was proposed by M. Minié, who was himself present, another by M. Nessler, the third was named the ball “de la garde.” There were six targets in line in front of the butt; the Chasseurs fired at three of them, and the 20th regiment at the other three. A trench runs along parallel to the butts, and at a few yards in front of them. The line of targets is in the space between the trench and the butts. The trench gives cover to the range party, one of whom is stationed opposite to each target, in a rude recess cut into the side of the trench, to afford shelter in wet weather. Each time a target is struck, the man opposite to it raises his banderol, which is then seen by the firing party, and acknowledged.

The trench is continued to some distance beyond the butts, and is there met by another trench at right angles to it; so that one may go up from the firing party to the range party without any risk.

On the cessation of the firing, the officer in command of the range party numbered the hits in each target. He marked separately the hits where the balls had arrived sideways (shown by the form of the perforation,) a very important consideration in comparative experiments with oblong balls.

Prizes and honorable mentions are bestowed annually on the best shots. The number of the regiment and the names of the men thus distinguished are inserted in the official military journal.

261

MILITARY AND NAVAL SCHOOLS OF MEDICINE AND PHARMACY

I. IMPERIAL MILITARY SCHOOL OF APPLICATION OF MEDICINE AND PHARMACY AT PARIS.

This school, which is located at Paris, at the military hospital of Val-de-Grâce, is under the control of the Minister of War. Its design is to introduce the pupils in the medical service of the army to an actual exercise of their skill, to complete their practical education, and make them acquainted with the regulations, which govern the army in its relation to the sanitary service.

Admission to the School of Application as resident physicians and pharmaceutists, is gained by passing successfully a competitive examination. These examinations are held at Paris, Strasburg, and Montpelier, at uncertain periods, as the wants of the service may require.

For admission to the examination, the candidate for employment as resident physician must have his name enrolled in a bureau of military superintendence, and satisfy the following conditions:—1st. Be a native of France; 2nd. Be not above thirty years of age at the time of the examination; 3rd. Have received the degree of doctor of medicine from one of the medical faculties of the Empire; 4th. Be free from any infirmity that disables from military service; and 6th. Subscribe a pledge of honor that he will devote at least five years to the military sanitary service. The candidates are subjected to an examination in pathology, medical therapeutics, anatomy, and practical surgery. Candidates for the office of resident pharmaceutist must also be natives of France, be not above thirty years of age, have a diploma of pharmacy of the first class, be free from every disabling infirmity, pledge themselves to at least five years service, and pass an examination upon the materia medica, chemistry, and pharmacy.

During their continuance at the School, they receive a fixed annual salary of 2,160 francs, and an allowance of 500 francs for the first expense of uniform. After spending one year at the school and passing a satisfactory final examination, they receive the brevet rank of medical or pharmaceutical aid-major of the second class.

262

There is at Strasburg, in connection with the Medical School, a Preparatory School, designed to prepare for the degree of doctor of medicine the pupils belonging to the sanitary service of the army. It is annually supplied with pupils, who, without having passed the usual course of matriculation, are enabled to satisfy the conditions requisite for admission to the first grade of a doctorate. Every pupil of the preparatory school, has the right of admission to the Imperial Military School of Application.—Decrees of 13th of Nov., 1852, and 28th of July, 1860; Acts of 18th of June, and 15th of October, 1859, and 4th of August, 1860.

II. IMPERIAL NAVAL SCHOOLS OF MEDICINE AND PHARMACY.

These schools, located at Brest, Toulon, and Rochefort, are under the control of the Minister of the Marine; their design is to prepare sanitary officers for service in the vessels of the imperial marine.

The posts of surgeon, or pharmaceutist, of the third, second and first classes are assigned on examination, according to order of priority determined by a medical jury. For admission as student in these schools, after attaining to the first grade of the third class, it is necessary to be at least sixteen years of age, and not above twenty three, to produce a diploma as bachelor of sciences, to prove French nationality, and to be exempt from every infirmity that can cause unfitness for the marine service. Examinations for filling the vacancies in each school commence on the 1st of April, and 1st of October, annually.

The instruction is continuous. The libraries, cabinets of natural history, the botanical gardens, anatomical theaters, chemical laboratories, cabinets of natural philosophy, are at the disposition of the students. The candidates admitted, receive cards of membership. They are required to pay the treasurer of the library a sum of 50 francs, which is devoted to its maintenance.—Ordinance of 17th July, 1835, and 15th May. 1842.

263

THE IMPERIAL NAVAL SCHOOL AT BREST.

This school, located at the Road of Brest, on board the ship “La Borda,” and under the control of the Minister of the Marine, is designed for the instruction of youth destined for the corps of state naval officers. Candidates are admitted to this school after a public examination, which occurs annually. For admission to the examination, they must prove; 1st. By the production of the records, that they are French by birth or naturalization, and that on the 1st of January of the year of the examination, they were at least fourteen years of age, and had not passed the maximum of seventeen years; 2d. By the certificate of a physician, that they have been vaccinated, or have had the small-pox, and that they have no infirmity that disables them from the performance of marine duty.

The matriculation of the candidate is effected between the 1st and 24th of April, at the prefecture of the department in which the domicil of the family is located. The examination is made at the principal office for examination nearest to that domicil, or to the college where he has been educated; the choice as regards the place of examination must be made known at the time of matriculation.

There is required for admission into the school, a knowledge of arithmetic, algebra, geometry, plane trigonometry, applied mathematics, natural philosophy, chemistry, geography, the English language, and drawing, in conformity with the course of study pursued at the lyceums. The candidates must prepare a French composition, a translation from the Latin, an exercise in English, a numerical calculation in plane trigonometry, a geometrical drawing, and the off-hand sketch of a head. These compositions are done at Paris, and the principal towns of the departments simultaneously, on the 2nd and 3rd of July. The oral examinations are commenced at Paris on the 2nd of July, and repeated at the other towns in succession as previously announced. The oral examinations are of two grades; the lowest serving to determine whether the candidates are sufficiently well prepared for admission, the higher—to which only those are subjected, who have successfully passed the first—being 264 the decisive one, and together with the compositions, determining the final classification in accordance with the order of merit.

The course of study continues two years, which are passed at the Board of Brest on the ship “La Borda.” The expense of board is 700 francs, and of the outfit, about 500 francs. A grant of the whole or half of the amount of the expense, may be made to young men without fortune. The insufficiency of the resources of a family for the maintenance of a pupil in the school, must be authenticated by a resolution of the municipal council, approved by the prefect. There may also be allowed to each beneficiary, at his entrance into the school, the whole or the half of his outfit. Application for this assistance must be made to the Minister of the Marine at the matriculation of the candidate.

The pupils that have passed the examinations of the second year in a satisfactory manner, are known as naval candidates of the second class.—Law of 5th June, 1850Decree of 19th January, 1856Acts of Sept., 1852, and 1st January, 1861.

265

SCHOOL OF MILITARY GYMNASTICS NEAR VINCENNES.

The practice of gymnastics is an essential part of the training both of officers and men in the French army, and constitutes a portion of the regular exercise in every military school. There are also several schools specially devoted to this department of physical education, and one styled the Imperial School of Military Gymnastics at the Redoute de la Faisanderie, part of the fortifications near Vincennes, may be regarded as the Normal School for training both officers and privates in order to act as monitors or instructors in their respective regiments and battalions. The following account of the instruction given, is abridged from an article in the New York Tribune, under the heading, “How the French and the English make their Soldiers.” The writer says that Military Gymnastics, in the form and to the extent taught in this school, is exclusively French, and is thought to have an important bearing on the more frequent and deadly use of the bayonet in future warfare.

About three hundred privates and officers compose the School of Military Gymnastics near Vincennes, where three professors of the science and art of gymnastics give a course of practical instruction for about six months each year. The school is under the same regulations as the School of Musketry—each colonel being responsible for the instruction of his regiment, and the lieutenant-colonel directs the application of the rules and regulations.

I. ELEMENTARY GYMNASTICS.

The gymnastic exercises are divided into “elementary gymnastics,” and “gymnastics applied,” that is, applied to special military purposes. A general progression regulates all the exercises.

The men are divided into three classes. The third class comprises all the recruits. These are exclusively practiced in the first lessons of elementary gymnastics during the first fortnight of their enlistment, and before they proceed to regimental drill. The first class consists of those who are proficient in the first four lessons of the general progression; and the second class, of those who are preparing for the first. The first class practices twice a week; the second, three times a week; the third class twice a day, until the men have commenced their regimental drill, and then once a week. Each practice lasts one hour and a half. “Returns” are drawn up recording the zeal and progress of the men, as in musketry instruction; and the captain instructor of gymnastics has to send in, every month, to the lieutenant-colonel, similar returns as to 266 the general progress of the instruction, so that the number of effectives of each company may be accurately known.

None but the prescribed exercises are permitted by the instructor. He must never allow the men to attempt any extraordinary or exaggerated feats, that might cause accidents. His aim must be to develop the strength, agility and dexterity of the soldier by a wisely regulated exertion, and inspire him with that self-reliance which the various occasions of his military life may demand. He must strive to rouse his pluck and emulation by rendering the exercises as agreeable and as easy as possible, taking all necessary precautions to prevent him from injuring himself or becoming discouraged. He must never forget that the perfect safety of the soldier under training, the pleasure of the various exercises, and, above all, the soldier’s own desire to excel, are the first and secret elements of success in gymnastics. Harsh treatment must be carefully avoided, much more anything like turning his efforts into ridicule when he fails, or punishing him for involuntary awkwardness. In conclusion, he must not expect more than regularity, precision, and relative perfection in these exercises, to which a military form has been given merely to facilitate their study and their application to the whole army.

The men practice in their fatigue dress, in squads of ten or fifteen, and are provided with belts.

The first exercises are intended to make the body supple from head to foot, turning the head from right to left, forward and backward, or merely toward right and left, bending the body, raising the arms vertically, with and without bending them; flinging out the right or left arm, fists clenched, and describing a circle of which the arm is the radius.

No soldier marches so easily as the French. It is the result of his method of learning to march. In the moderate and quick cadence the foot comes flat to the ground, the point of the foot touching it first; in the running cadence the movement is an alternate hopping on the points of the feet. It is obvious that this mode of teaching to march must enable the soldier to avoid the great cause of universal bad marching and walking, namely, bringing the heel to the ground, thus shaking the whole body, especially the spine, and consequently distressing the brain and lungs. By the great elevation of the legs the soldier must habituate himself to bringing the toes first to the ground, instinctively, to avoid the shock, especially in the running cadence. During the practice the soldier repeats the words “onetwo,” as each foot comes to the ground, in order to practice the lungs at the same time, and also to give a rhythm to the performance.

In order still more to direct locomotion to the fore-part of the foot, so essential to good and easy marching, there is the following practice:—1. Attention. 2. Flexion of the lower limbs. 3. Commence. 4. Cease. At the second command the soldier brings both feet together, throwing the weight of the body forward. At the word commence, he slowly lowers his body by bending his hams, so that the thighs touch the calves of the leg, the arms falling beside the body, the weight of the body being entirely thrown on the points of the feet. He then gradually rises to the erect position.

There is also what is called the “gymnastic chain.” Circles are traced on the ground contiguously; the men are posted in these circles, in a single rank, three paces apart. The instructor commands:—1. Squad will advance. 2. Double. 3. March. 4. Halt. At the first word the soldier throws the whole weight of 267 his body on the right leg. At the word march, he throws the left foot smartly forward, the leg slightly bent, bringing the point of the foot to the ground, thirty-nine inches from the right, and so in like manner with the right, always keeping the weight of the body on the leg which feels the ground, allowing the arms to take their natural motion for equilibrium. The first man (a monitor, one of the best trained) runs successively through all the windings of the chain of contiguous circles without stopping; the others follow, preserving the distance. When the men meet each other at the inters of the circles, they shorten or lengthen the pace, so as not to jostle each other, and so that two men shall not pass by the same interval.

To deliver a thrust or a blow with the bayonet, sword, or fist to the best advantage, requires training of the subsidiary muscles, and such scientific practice as places the body in the best position to aid and intensify the effect. This is done by the “Pyrrhic Exercise.” The command is:—1. Pyrrhic Exercise (right or left limb forward.) 2. Ready. 3. March. 4. Halt. At the word ready, the soldier faces to the left, carries the right foot forward, the heel sixteen inches from the hollow of the left foot, the right knee bent, the left leg stretched, the right arm extended forward, the fist clenched, on a line with the shoulder, the nails slightly upward, the left arm in a line with the left side and but little bent, fist clenched, and about six inches from the thigh, the nails toward the thigh, the upper part of the body inclined forward, the head erect, the eyes looking to the front, the left shoulder lowered. At the word march, the soldier straitens his body, bringing the right heel near the hollow of the left foot without touching the ground, turns at the same time his right forearm, so that describing a circle from below upward, the fist lightly touches the right breast, then flinging the fist smartly forward, the nails a little upward, and advancing the right leg to about twenty-five inches, the foot striking the ground with force, or an “attack,” as we call it in sword exercise, the upper part of the body inclining forward, the left leg stretched, the foot flat, the left arm turned outward and along the thigh as before. These movements are continued until the words “company—halt” are given, when the soldier faces to the right and comes to attention. The left arms are practiced in like manner, and a rhythm is given to the performance by the repetition of the numbers 1, 2, 3, by the soldier.

A soldier must not be easily knocked off his legs; so there are six positions for the practice devised to teach the soldier how to maintain his equilibrium. He stands alternately on the right or left leg, bending the other against the body with his locked fingers, or he stands on one leg, the other bent behind, or he comes slowly to the kneeling position and springs up smartly, flinging his arms suddenly above his head, the nails turned inward, and then comes to attention, or he bends forward on one foot, or backward in like manner, and to the right or left, all on one foot.

The elementary development of the muscles forms a most important part of the training. By word of command the soldiers strike their breasts with the right or left fist—strike out with the right and left as in boxing—support cannon balls in the hand, one or both arms extended, and hurl the balls to a distance. They fling an iron bar, held by the middle; they support a heavy club in every possible position, at the shoulder, behind the back, one with the left hand, another with the right, at right-angles, or two together, one in each hand. They swing the club horizontally and overhead, or vertically and behind, or round and round the body.

268

Preparatory to leaping, the proper muscles must be taught their necessary contractions, and this is done to the words of command—“Simultaneous flexion of the legs,” “Simultaneous flexion of the thighs and legs,” whereat they hop on the right or the left leg singly, and then on both together. They are practiced in advancing on the position of kneeling on one leg alternately, obviously a very useful mode of progression for a skirmisher in stealthily changing position behind a low wall or a hedge.

They are taught to walk systematically on the heels alone and on tiptoe, and to fling a cannon ball with the foot by means of a strap attached to it. As practice alone can habituate us to the proper inclination of the body in ascending and descending, both these modes of marching are carefully taught, attention being fixed to throwing the weight of the body on the point of the feet in the former, and on the heels in the latter.

Their wrestling takes every shape and mode of contest. With extended arms, the fingers interlocked, the left leg advanced, they push against each other; or, holding each other by the hands or by the wrists, they pull against each other; or, each man holding his left wrist with his right hand, the thumb underneath, seizes with his left hand the wrist of his antagonist, and then at the word “wrestle,” he pulls or pushes uniformly or by jerks, to the right, to the left, forward, to the rear, upward and downward, striving to displace his antagonist.

Furnished with appropriate handles, with a short cord attached, they pull against each other, each striving to drag his antagonist with one hand, then with both hands; and then three wrestle together in like manner, the central man pulling or resisting the outer two, or both of these pulling against him in opposite directions.

Then two wrestle in a sitting posture. They sit, closing the legs, feet to feet, and sole to sole, with the aforesaid handle and cord between their feet, and at the word of command pull away, striving to raise each other. As soon as one is raised the contest ends, and the victor holds the handle in his left hand. The instructor then makes all those wrestle together successively who have won the handle, until only two remain, and then ascertains the strength of these two by a dynamometer, and makes a note of it.

The last of the elementary exercises are those of traction, or drawing against each other, holding on by a rope, either in pairs, or several together pulling against a fixed point, which may be a dynamometer, indicating the force of the combined pull resulting, or the men are divided into two squads and pull against each other.

As most of these exercises admit of a rhythm or cadenced sound emitted by the men themselves, this vocal accompaniment is strongly recommended. It certainly gives additional animation to the scene. Indeed the cultivation of the voice is considered eminently essential in the course of gymnastics. Singing exerts a salutary influence on the chest, and, moreover, it is incontestable that it will be the means of powerfully acting on the morale of the French soldier, by teaching him songs of patriotic and martial import. The singing-lesson at which I was present was particularly interesting. The system is one recently invented, wherein the ordinary notes are represented by arithmetical numbers—thus occupying about one-third of the usual space. Pointing by means of two canes to each representative number is all that is required by the instructor. The pupils, about 300 men and officers, intoned the notes with admirable 269 precision. When the instructor opened out the canes they made a crescendo—swelling to the loudest—and when he closed them gradually it was a beautiful diminuendo, “in linked sweetness long drawn out.” There was then sung a concerted piece in two parts, extemporized by the highly-gifted Commandant, who figured it on the blackboard. It was at once most accurately sung—first and second so admirably concerted that the whole seemed as it were an organ of human stops—alto, tenor, and bass most harmoniously blending.

Such are the elementary gymnastics of the course.

II. APPLIED GYMNASTICS.

The exercises of applied gymnastics must be directed with extreme prudence. Care must be taken by the instructor that the emulation of the pupils should not degenerate into a spirit of rivalry, instigating them to dangerous efforts.

During cold weather they must abstain from executing leaps that require violent efforts; at all times those who are not perfectly disposed should not be required to leap at all. Carelessness and inattention to the rules can alone cause those accidents apprehended in these exercises.

The dimensions of the obstacles to be leaped over must be gradually increased; but no downward leap must ever exceed sixteen feet—five meters. Such is the regulation; but really to leap down sixteen feet seems no small matter, considering that the height of an ordinary room—some ten or twelve feet—would make the nerves tingle if we had to leap down that height; however, the French soldiers perform such leaps with ease, and therefore we must conclude that all Anglo-Saxons here or elsewhere can “go and do likewise.”

The words of command are: 1. Attention. 2. Forward—leap—one, two, three. At the second word, the man closes the points of the feet; at the word one, he stoops on his lower extremities, slightly raising the heels and stretching his arms to the rear, the fists clenched; he then rises again, the arms hanging naturally down. At the word two, he repeats the movement; at three, he recommences the same movement, stretches the hams vigorously, throwing his arms forward, leaps the distance, or over the obstacle, falls on the point of his feet, stooping down, and then comes to attention.

The same principle is observed in all leaping, whether to a height, downward, or forward and downward—the only difference being in the position of the arms. In leaping upward, the arms are flung overhead to aid the ascent—the same in a downward leap; but if the leap be forward and downward, the soldier begins with his arms in advance, and then places them perpendicularly for the fall. The reverse takes place when in leaping forward and upward.

Thus they practice leaping in every possible direction—upward and downward combined—upward, forward, and downward—to the right or to the left—to the right and to the left and downward combined—the arms being directed accordingly. They leap backward precisely in the same directions, and according to the same rules. In leaping backward from the top of a wall, the man first takes a glance at the descent, turns, closes his feet—the heels projecting over the wall, stoops—the upper part of the body being forward, places his hands outside his feet and seizes the edge of the wall, the four fingers above, the thumb underneath, and thus flings himself backward, his arms overhead. When there is width as well as depth in the backward leap, the body and the legs are flung off almost horizontally.

The running leap is performed in a similar manner—the run being quickened 270 more and more up to the moment of springing forward. Some of the leaps I saw performed were from fifteen to twenty feet. As a complement to these leaping exercises, the ground may be prepared with various objects to leap over, such as benches, tables, heaps of stones, &c.

The men are also progressively practiced in all these leaps, carrying their arms and baggage. In such cases the downward leap must be restricted to thirteen feet. The soldier holds his rifle balanced at the trail with the right hand, the muzzle slightly raised, so as to prevent it from touching the ground; he holds his sword (as the French soldier has a sword) with his left hand. When the soldiers have become familiar with leaping, the difficulty is increased by rendering movable first the point of departure, and then the point of the fall, and, finally, both these points are made movable. To leap from a body in oscillation, the soldier leaps at the moment when the body is sinking. There is great danger in leaping from an object in rapid motion. In case of necessity, the soldier must face in the direction of the motion, and at the moment of quitting it he must lay hold of it, shortening his arms, and so push himself backward, lengthening his arms.

It is a general principle that in leaping from a height of any extent, the soldier should avail himself of anything at hand to diminish the shock of the fall.

The circumstances in which leaping must be resorted to are often unforeseen, and require prompt decision; it is therefore important that the men should be taught the following principles—useful to everybody—to apply them spontaneously on all occasions:—

First. To form a rapid judgment of the obstacle, and also of the ground on either side. We scan the ground in advance of the obstacle, in order to make a good choice of a footing for the leap; if the ground is too smooth the foot may slip; on soft ground there can not be a good footing for the leap. By scanning the ground beyond the obstacle, we select our landing-place, and we foresee what difficulties we shall meet with. A difference of level between the point of departure and the fall modifies considerably the extent of the leap.

Second. During the leap the breathing must be restrained, and the air with which the lungs have been previously filled must be expired the moment the man reaches the ground.

Third. In leaps in width and height, fling out the clenched fists in the direction the body is to take, so as to augment the impulse given by the legs.

To prove the utility of this principle, the men, in leaping, sometimes hold in each hand a grenade of two-pounds weight, or a four-pound shot; with this auxiliary the width of the leap is augmented.

Fourth. In downward leaps, raise the arms vertically as soon as the body begins to descend, in order that the body, reaching the ground on the point of the feet, may sink vertically without losing its equilibrium. If a man leaps into water, he places his arms at his side, his hands on his hips, the feet close together, the points of the feet lowered, the body stiff and rigid.

Fifth. During the whole time of the leap keep the arms in the parallel position they have at its commencement, in order to preserve the equilibrium of the body.

Sixth. In forward or wide leaps incline the body forward, in order that the oblique action of the legs on the body may be more efficient.

The recommendation to precipitate the last movements of the run preceding the leap, has the important advantage of enabling the soldier to incline his body as much as possible.

271

Seventh. Fall on the point of the feet, the legs being close together, bending all the articulations of the body from above downward, in order that the shock be not transmitted to the head without being lessened and attenuated by numerous decompositions of the force. The articulations of the feet concur efficaciously with this result, and it would be dangerous not to avail ourselves of them by falling on the soles of the feet, especially the heels, as previously explained.

Eighth. Avoid too rough a fall by giving to all the articulations a general and supple “setting up,” so as to make a light bound on landing.

Ninth. On landing avoid all useless motion, allow the muscles to relax; their continued contraction and rigidity would interfere with the body’s equilibrium.

They also practice leaping with poles. These are of different dimensions, beginning with the smallest—not longer than the rifle—and finished with long ones from nine to twelve feet in length. He then seizes the pole higher or lower, according to the distance of the leap. Of course perfect success in this exercise depends greatly upon the energy of the effort, and the long and rapid run by which it is preceded. They also leap with two poles together from a height, the poles being planted parallel and about two feet apart.

Suspension-bars are made subservient to the training of the French soldier. This exercise enables him to use his body as he pleases, in any possible position, provided he can get hold of anything. Its beautiful and splendid result is extraordinary strength of arms, legs, hands, and fingers. Indeed, these suspensions of the body by the hands, the elbow, the legs, by one hand, one leg, one finger, in every possible position, show how the men are prepared for the thousand casualties of the assault.

They climb ropes after the manner of sailors, and horizontal beams are raised at various heights from the ground, in which they learn to preserve a perfect equilibrium—sitting, moving along them by the hands, supporting the body, which is free to fall, and, finally, walking erect upon them like a rope-dancer without his balance-pole! In these ticklish positions they meet and pass each other—simulate a fall and recover; the beams may be inclined or even set in motion, it matters not—they hold on and do their work equally well—and drop to the ground without injury.

They are taught to pick their way over scattered stones or stakes driven into the ground; and it has even been thought expedient to teach them how to walk systematically on stilts.

They are taught swimming—all its necessary movements before they go into the water; and many, I was told, strike out at once, at the first trial, thus proving the physiological or anatomical efficacy of the well-considered mode of tuition. In the water they are practiced in performing the feats required in actual warfare, carrying their arms and accoutrements in a variety of ways, according to the supposed circumstances of the campaign.

Of course, if the men are taught to swim they must be sent regularly into the water. This regulation, therefore, insures personal cleanliness—the first rule of health, which is much needed in all armies. The morality of most armies is generally above the average; it should naturally be less—as nothing conduces more to long life than exercise, regular hours, and a rational discipline. But cleanliness, personal cleanliness is wanting, and we have to deplore the consequences.

With a view to escalading, the French soldier is assiduously trained in all the 272 shifts of ladder-mounting—with ladders of wood and ladders of rope—and he becomes as good as a sailor in pulling himself up a rope, either looped, knotted, or smooth, from the ground to any reasonable or unreasonable height. If a scaling-ladder be not at hand, a tent-pole or any pole will do to enable him to get to the top of a wall or the crest of a parapet. He is actually taught nine different modes of performing this achievement so flattering to the ambition of the French soldier.

The scaling of a represented turret was something beautiful to see. “In the twinkling of an eye” or “done in no time,” can alone describe the rapidity of the exploit.

Every appliance may, however, be wanting on certain occasions in war—it matters not—the French soldiers are taught how to mount a wall without any instrument whatever—with their feet and the hands and the fingers alone. Bullets and cannon balls leave holes and indentations in the hardest walls—these are represented on the walls of the Gymnasium—and thus they practice this last resort of the resolute and determined besiegers. If there be no holes—no points d’appui for the ascent—what then? Why, then they build a pyramid of men—four men stand as a base, two or four more perch themselves on the shoulders of these, and then one mounts to the top on the shoulders of the latter by way of apex!

They have adopted all the fetes of the trapèze, as performed by acrobats. These tend to strengthen the arms and promote that self-reliance and confidence which are the prime elements of a good soldier. Some of their swinging leaps with the trapèze were prodigious, from one end of the long gymnasium to the other, where they alighted, and caught on the top of the wall, and descended to the ground, with hands and fingers, by mimic bullet holes, as before described.

Flying leaps on and over a wooden horse are practiced in every possible direction, and the French cavalry are required to be able to leap on their horses from the rear while galloping, and to leap over a hedge or barrier together with the horses, but on foot, holding the reins! It is impossible to believe that very many can do this; but that is the aim, and the higher the aim the greater the effort, and something worth having is sure to be done, even if we fail of the highest attainment.

The most laborious of the practices is probably that of carrying, at the top of their speed, all the implements of war, fascines, sand-bags, gabions, projectiles, &c., whose weight is progressively increased from twenty to fifty pounds. They must also practice carrying ladders, beams, caissons, dragging gun-carriages, &c., and they are equally habituated to carry rapidly and skillfully the wounded from the field of battle, by placing men on litters, or any substitute at hand, in the gymnasium.

Sword exercise, bayonet exercise, boxing and fencing are also taught, but only the rudiments. In the regiments and battalions they have more opportunities of perfecting themselves in these accomplishments.

Such is a succinct account of the military gymnastics of the French. The 300 various fetes and practices have only one object in view, preparation for the possible and probable casualties of war, but they have, meanwhile, the positive and immediate effect of giving the men the utmost freedom of motion, aplomb, self-reliance, and that very useful self-estimate in the soldier, namely, that he is superior to every other in the world. It will take a vast deal to knock that conceit out of him.

273

REMARKS ON FRENCH MILITARY EDUCATION.

The English Commissioners in their Report on “The best Mode of Reorganizing the [English] System of Training Officers for the Scientific Corps, together with an Account of Foreign and other Military Education,” close with the following general remarks on French Military Education:—

The following summary may close our account of French Military Education.

1. The French army combines a considerable proportion of officers professionally educated, with others, who form the majority, whose claims to promotion consist in their service, proved ability, and conduct. One-third of the officers in the line, two-thirds of those in the scientific corps, and the whole of the staff, receive a careful professional education; the remainder are taken upon the recommendation of their superior officers, from the ranks. But it was stated to us expressly that such officers do not often rise above the rank of captain.

2. There are no junior military schools in France, and no military education commences earlier than sixteen. This is the very earliest age at which pupils can be received at the Polytechnic or at St. Cyr, and the usual age is later; whilst in the case of the Special Corps, strictly professional education does not begin till twenty or twenty-one. The best preparation for the military schools is found to be that general (in France chiefly mathematical) education which is supplied by the ordinary schools of the country, directed as these are and stimulated by the open examinations for admission to St. Cyr and the Polytechnic.

3. The professional education for commissions in the line is that given at the school of St. Cyr. A fair amount of mathematics is required at entrance, but the chief instruction given at the school is of a professional character. Active competition, however, which is the principle of all French military education, is kept up amongst young men educating for the line by the competitive entrance to the school, by the system of examinations pursued in it, and in particular, by the twenty-five or thirty places in the Staff School which are practically reserved for the best pupils on leaving.

4. In the Staff School itself the competitive system is acted upon; there are strict examinations, and the pupils are ranged in the order of merit on leaving the College.

274

5. The officers of artillery and engineers may be said to be in quite a peculiar position in France, owing to the high education given at the Polytechnic School. The consequence is, that the preparatory education of French artillery and engineer officers is of the highest scientific character. We have already spoken largely on this point, and need do no more than allude to it.

6. We may remark, that preparatory military education in France is mainly mathematical—at the Polytechnic almost wholly so. The literary and classical elements, which enter so largely into all education in England and Prussia, are in French military education very much thrown aside. Lectures in military history and literature are said, however, to succeed at St. Cyr.

7. The system of State foundations (Bourses) existing in the Polytechnic and St. Cyr, and affording a curious parallel to the military foundations in the Austrian schools, requires some notice. Every pupil, in both the Polytechnic and St. Cyr, who can prove poverty, is entitled to State support, either entire or partial. At the present time, not less than one-third of the students in each of these schools receive such maintenance. The system of civil Bourses is of old standing in France; most of these were destroyed at the Revolution. They were renewed and greatly devoted to military purposes by Napoleon. The extent to which they are given may seem excessive, but it must prove a powerful incentive and assistance to talent.

8. It has been remarked that there is comparatively little practical teaching in the School of Application for Artillery and Engineers at Metz. But a very extensive practical training is in fact supplied to these officers after they enter the service, remaining as they must do with the troops until promoted to the rank of second captain, and subsequently being employed in the arsenals, workshops, fortified places, &c.

9. The French have no “senior departments” for military education. In this respect their practice differs from that of England and Germany.

FRENCH MILITARY EDUCATION IN 1869.

The following remarks on French Military Education are from the Report of the English Military Education Commission submitted to Parliament, and printed in 1870:

1. The proportion of professionally educated officers in the line is greater now than in 1856, when it was stated by the Commissioners in their report to be one-third.

2. The professional education for commissions in the line is given by a two years’ course at St. Cyr, admission to the school being dependent on competitive examination. Admission to the Artillery and Engineers is obtained through the Polytechnic, where young men intended for commissions in those arms receive a preparatory education of a highly scientific character, in common with candidates for many other branches of the public service. Admission to the school is obtained by competition, and the choice of services is 275 dependent on the results of another competitive examination at the end of the two years’ course. Commissions are then obtained in the respective corps, and the young officers go for a further period of two years to the School of Application at Metz, there to receive their strictly professional instruction. The course of teaching at Metz is still mainly of a theoretical character, and the main portion of the practical training of the officers is deferred until they join their regiments. The Staff Corps is recruited entirely from the Staff School; a very small number of pupils from the Polytechnic have a claim to admission to the school, but the great majority of the students are admitted by competitive examination, open nominally to the sub-lieutenants of the army and to the best students of St. Cyr, but in practice almost entirely confined to the latter. The students join the school with commissions as officers; at the end of the two years’ course they are definitely appointed to the Staff Corps in the order in which they stand in a competitive examination, but before being employed upon the staff they are sent to do duty for five years with the various arms.

3. The military schools in France are not, as in England and in Prussia, placed under the control of a special department. They are all under the immediate management of the Minister of War. There is, however, for each branch of the service in the French army a consulting committee (comité consultatif), or board of general officers, attached to the War Department, for the purpose of giving advice to the Minister, and in matters affecting the individual schools the Minister generally consults the comité consultatif of that branch of the service for which the school is specially preparatory.

4. Each school has its own conseil d’instruction, composed of officers and professors of the establishment, which exercises a general supervision over the course of instruction, and has the power of suggesting alterations or improvements in it. The financial business of the school is managed by another board (conseil d’administration); and there is generally also a similar board (conseil de discipline), which exercises more or less authority in questions of discipline. The effect of this arrangement is to give the various officers and professors of each school to some extent a voice in the general management of the institution.

5. The staff of officers and instructors employed appears, in most cases, very large in proportion to the number of the students; 48 for 270 in the Polytechnic; 33 for 170 in the school at Metz; 62 for 600 in St. Cyr, &c.

Though there is in all the schools a military staff separate from the staff of professors and instructors, and more especially charged with the maintenance of discipline, the line of separation between the two bodies is not, except at the Polytechnic, so distinctly drawn as in the English military schools. The military professors exercise disciplinary powers; while, on the other hand, the members of the strictly military staff in almost all cases take some part in instruction. The latter appear to be more utilized for this purpose than is the case either at Sandhurst or Woolwich.

6. Considerable care is exercised in the appointment of professors; at the Polytechnic the candidates are selected by the Conseil de Perfectionnement; at La Flèche they are recommended to the Minister of War by the Minister of Public Instruction; at the Staff School and St. Cyr the appointments are thrown open to competition.

7. The discipline maintained at all the schools is of a very strict nature; 276 except for the youngest pupils at La Flèche it is entirely military; the punishments are similar to those inflicted in the army, and even include imprisonment. The maintenance of discipline is considerably facilitated by the fact that the pupils at most of the schools are actually subject to military law; and those of St. Cyr, if dismissed from the school, are sent into the ranks as private soldiers. There appears, however, in all the schools to be an absence of the moral control over the young men which is exercised in the Prussian schools. The Commandant of each school has very extensive powers in regard to discipline, but in no case has he authority to dismiss a student from the school without the sanction of the Minister of War.

8. The principle carried out in France is that special military education should not be begun until a comparatively late age, and should be founded upon a groundwork of good general education in civil schools. The only approach to a junior military school in France is that of La Flèche, and this is mainly a charitable institution; the pupils, it is true, learn drill, but beyond this no special military instruction is given them. The course of study is the same as that at the Lycées or ordinary civil schools, and the pupils are under no obligation to enter the military service. Nor can the Polytechnic be called an exclusively military school; even those who enter the Artillery and Engineers from it have their education in common with civilians at the very least until the age of 18, and in the great majority of cases their strictly professional instruction at Metz does not begin till 20 or 21. The very earliest age at which a special military education commences in France is 17, which is the age of admission to St. Cyr, and comparatively few enter the school before 18 or 19. The knowledge required for admission to St. Cyr is entirely such as is acquired at civil schools, and so much importance is attached to a good general education that the degree of either bachelier ès sciences or bachelier ès lettres is made a necessary qualification for admission to the examination, while the possession of both degrees gives considerable advantage to a candidate. The principle of deferring the commencement of special instruction has even received extension since 1856; the age of admission to St. Cyr, which was then 16, has been now increased to 17, and the junior school of La Flèche has been made even less military in its character than it was at that time.

9. When a professional education has once commenced, the principle appears to be that it should be almost entirely confined to subjects which have a practical bearing on military duties. Mathematics, as a subject by themselves, do not form part of the ordinary course of instruction at any of the special schools. The previous course at the Polytechnic secures of course very high mathematical attainments in the candidates for the Artillery and Engineers who enter Metz; but at Metz itself the study of mathematics is no longer continued. In the same way at the Staff School a knowledge of mathematics as far as trigonometry is required for admission, and their practical applications to operations of surveying enter into the school course; but no part of the time spent at the school is devoted to mere theoretical instruction in pure mathematics; yet the officers of the Staff Corps are intrusted with the execution of those scientific surveys which in our service are in the hands of the Engineers.

St. Cyr offers to some extent an exception to the rule that the course of study at the special schools should be of an exclusively professional character, as the instruction given there during the first year is partly of a general nature, 277 embracing history and literature. This, however, arises from the fact that the students from the Lycées generally show a deficiency in the more literary subjects of a liberal education, and a portion of the time at the school is therefore spent in completing and improving their general acquirements. A knowledge of arithmetic, algebra, and plane trigonometry is required as a qualification for admission, but beyond a very brief revision of these subjects, and a voluntary course for candidates for the Staff Corps, mathematics are not taught at the school. It would seem indeed that, except in the case of candidates for admission to the Artillery and Engineers, mathematics do not hold so prominent a position in French military education as is generally supposed in England to be the case. For staff and regimental officers the main requisite demanded seems to be a practical knowledge of trigonometry as required for surveying.

10. Much time is devoted in all the French schools to drawing in its various branches; some hours daily are invariably given up to the subject; indeed the time spent upon purely geometrical drawing appears almost to be excessive. The great importance attached to the drawing of machinery is a peculiar feature in all the schools. Landscape drawing is one of the regular subjects taught to candidates both for the line and the Staff Corps.

The theoretical instruction given at every school is supplemented by visits to numerous military establishments, manufacturing departments, and fortresses. This is also a feature in the system of military education in Prussia; in both countries it seems to be thought desirable to afford young officers a practical insight into the working of the various establishments connected with the army. In the case of officers of the Artillery and Engineers it appears in France to be made a special object to cultivate a mechanical genius, and to secure a thorough acquaintance with manufacturing departments with which their professional duties bring them into contact.

Military law and administration (comprising financial and other regulations connected with the army), and drill, riding, and fencing in the way of practical exercises, form part of the education of officers of all branches of the service; in drill, lectures explanatory of the drill-book are invariably given in addition to the practical instruction.

11. The system of instruction in all the French military schools is more or less that of the Polytechnic. Lectures attended by large numbers, enforced study of fixed subjects, the execution of all work under close supervision of the instructors, and frequent periodical examinations, are everywhere found. Active competition is the leading feature of the system; the students are perpetually being “kept up to the mark.” A fixed period of two years is in all cases assigned to the course of study; the course can not be completed in a shorter time, and the regulated period can not (unless under quite exceptional circumstances) be exceeded.

It seems also to be thought that, as a necessary consequence of the strictly competitive system, the subjects upon which the competition depends should be exactly the same for every student. No choice of studies is allowed; those which enter into the examination are equally obligatory for all. The only exception to this rule is at St. Cyr, where in languages a choice between German and English is given.

No pecuniary rewards are offered to the students at any of the schools. The bestowal of the numerous bourses which are granted to those admitted to the 278 Polytechnic and St. Cyr is regulated entirely by the poverty of the candidates, without any regard to their ability.

12. The education of officers in France is entirely concluded before any regimental duty has been done. The French system is in this respect the exact opposite of that pursued in Prussia, where no professional instruction, as a rule, is given until a certain amount of service with the troops has been performed. There are in France no establishments for the instruction of officers of some years’ service, like the Staff College in England, or the Artillery and Engineer School and the War Academy in Prussia.

13. The chief changes which have taken place in the military schools of France since the publication of the Report of the Commissioners of 1856 may be summarized as follows:—

(a.) The modifications in the course of instruction at the Polytechnic; the abridgement of the studies previously pursued; and the slightly increased importance now attached to literary subjects.

(b.) At Metz, the introduction of an examination at the end of the first years’ course of study.

(c.) At St. Cyr, the alteration of the age for admission to the school from 16 to 17; the extension of the subjects of the entrance examination; the modifications in the course of instruction, and the postponement of the commencement of strictly military studies almost entirely until the second year; the introduction of a stricter system of discipline, combined with additional encouragements to good conduct and industry; and the increased advantages offered with the view of attracting to the school a higher class of professors and officers.

(d.) At La Flèche, the complete reorganization of the institution with the object of more closely assimilating its general arrangements to those of a purely civil school.

(e.) At the Staff School some modifications in the course of study and in the mode of admission to the school have been made; but the most important alterations are those adopted in July 1869, by which the number of students admitted annually to the school is increased considerably beyond the number of vacancies likely to occur in the Staff Corps, and the novel principle is introduced that admission to the school does not carry with it the certainty of permanent employment on the staff.

It may be added that there seems a tendency to diminish the importance of mathematics as an element of preparatory military education, and to attach slightly more weight to studies of a literary character. This is more particularly seen at St. Cyr and at La Flèche, and to a less extent at the Polytechnic. There is also a growing disposition to increase, in the case of the cavalry and infantry, the proportion of officers who have received a professional education.

EXPENSE OF MILITARY SCHOOLS IN 1869.

SC Sums charged to the Schools Estimate.

MP Military pay charged to other Estimates.

T Total.

CS Cost to the State.‡

EP Each pupil.

Name of School. SC
Frs.
MP
Frs.
T
Frs.
CS
Frs.
EP
£.
Polytechnic 719,673 85,515 805,188 568,188 78
Artil’y and Eng’er school at Metz 99,500 *416,350 515,850 515,850 50
St. Cyr 1,348,792 15,000 1,363,792 741,292 49
Staff school 99,000 *214,870 313,870 313,870 168
La Flèche 539,868 15,000 554,868 457,868 45
Medical school 659,300 659,300 . . . .
Cavalry school at Saumur 227,000 18,500 245,500 . . . .
Gymnastics, musketry schools 36,270 36,270 . . . .
Regimental schools 173,600 173,600 . . . .
Total 3,903,003 765,235 4,668,238 2,597,068 390

* These sums include the pay of the officer students at these establishments, amounting to 288,000 frs. at Metz, and 103,000 frs. at the Staff School.

† The estimate for the Medical School appears to be exclusive of the pay of all military medical officers employed at the school, but the amount of this additional sum is not stated.

‡ For 1,520 pupils, who repaid 956,500 francs.

Footnotes to Part I: France

1 It will be admitted, as a postulate, that only one parallel to a given right line can pass through a given point.

2 The volume of the cone is derived from that of the pyramid; and it is to be noted that the demonstration applies to the cone with closed base, whatever the figure of that base.

3 Numerical examples on the areas and volumes of the round bodies, including the area of a spherical triangle, will be required by the examiners. The calculations will be made by logarithms.

4 The true distinction between Algebra and Arithmetic is so commonly overlooked that it maybe well to present it here, in the words of Comte. “The complete solution of every question of calculation is necessarily composed of two successive parts, which have essentially distinct natures. In the first, the object is to transform the proposed equations, so as to make apparent the manner in which the unknown quantities are formed by the known ones; it is this which constitutes the Algebraic question. In the second, our object is to find the value of the formulas thus obtained; that is, to determine directly the values of the numbers sought, which are already represented by certain explicit functions of given numbers; this is the Arithmetical question. Thus the stopping-point of the algebraic part of the solution becomes the starting-point of the arithmetical part.

Algebra may therefore be defined as having for its object the resolution of equations; taking this expression in its full logical meaning, which signifies the transformation of implicit functions into equivalent explicit ones. In the same way Arithmetic may be defined as intended for the determination of the values of functions. Henceforth, therefore, we may call Algebra the Calculus of Functions, and Arithmetic the Calculus of Values.”

5 The students will apply these reductions to a numerical equation of the second degree, and will determine the situation of the new axes with respect to the original axes, by means of trigonometrical tables. They will show to the examiner the complete calculations of this reduction and the trace of the two systems of axes and of the curves.

6 They will be deduced from the property, previously demonstrated, of the derivative of the ordinate with respect to the abscissa.

7 The method of the change of the planes of projection will be used for the resolution of these problems.

8 Compiled from “Report and Appendix of English Commissioners on Military Education.” 1857.

9 In an Analysis of the Report of this Commission, see page 97.

10 The influence exercised in the various branches of study, and consequently in the position of the students in the list classified according to merit, by the professors and répétiteurs on the one hand, and by the examiners on the other, as in the table above.

11 The students are selected, by a competitive examination, out of a very large number of candidates, as will be seen from the following table, extracted from the yearly calendars:—

Year. Candidates who
inscribed their Names.
Candidates
examined.
Candidates admitted
to the Polytechnic.
1832 567 468 183
1833 367 304 110
1834 627 541 150
1835 729 633 154
       
1837 629 508 137
1838 533 410 131
1839 530 531 135
       
1842 709 559 137
1843 802 559 166
1844 746 531 143
1845 780 559 136

Giving an average of one student for four candidates examined, so that it is impossible to imagine that there is any lack of ability in those selected.

A similar result appears to follow from some other more recent statistics.

Year. Number of Candidates who
inscribed their Names.
Number declared admissible
to the Second Examination.
Number admitted.
1852 510 216 202
1853 494 222 217
1854 519 238 170
1855 544 232 170

In judging, however, of these numbers, it should be borne in mind that, a very large number of the candidates who succeed have tried more than once; the successful of this year have been among the unsuccessful of last year, so that the proportion of individuals who succeed to individuals who fail, is, of course, considerably larger than one to four. Of the 170 candidates admitted in November, 1855, 117 had put down their names for the examination of 1854, and 53 only had not been previously inscribed. Of the 117 who put down their names, 19 had withdrawn without being examined at all, 71 had been rejected on the preliminary examination, 27 had been unsuccessful at that of the second degree; 98 of the 170 came up for the second time to the examination.

12 In 1856 there were only 15 professors; there are now two additional professors for history, the study of which has been recently introduced at the school.

13 Formerly two professors of the school were also members of the Council of Discipline, but the professors have now no voice in matters of discipline.

14 The examination chamber is a small room in the school buildings, near the library, ornamented with portraits of Vauban, and of D’Argenson, under whose ministry the original schools at La Fère and Mézières were founded. At a large table under these portraits, and extending across the room, General Morin, President, and four officers, members of the jury, were seated. The sixth member sat at a small table in front, near the blackboard, at which the student stood. The Commandant, the Director of Studies, and the other officers of the school were seated also in this part of the room.

The student who was first examined was questioned partly by the examiner, partly by the president, and gave his answers, working problems and drawing illustrations on the board as he went on. He was asked questions as to the details of the steam-engine, and as to the method of casting cannon. The German teacher of the School put him on to construe from a German book, and tried him in speaking; he succeeded just passably in both. The whole occupied about three-quarters of an hour.

The second student, after answering similar scientific questions, had opportunity given him to show his knowledge, which was considerable, of the geology of the neighborhood; and having lived in foreign countries, he was able to make a very good display of his knowledge of German, Spanish, Italian, and English.

After each examination the jury retired into the inner cabinet, by a door opening to it from behind their seats.

15 Founded the Ecole Royale Militaire, 1751. Junior pupils transferred to La Flèche, 1764.

Suppression of the Ecole Royale Militaire and establishment of ten Colleges, 1776.

New Ecole Royale Militaire, for the best pupils of the Colleges, 1777.

Suppression of the Colleges and of the Ecole Royale Militaire, 1787.

Foundation of the Ecole de Mars, May 1794.

Foundation of the Prytanée Français at Paris, Versailles, St. Germain, Fontainebleau, 1800.

Foundation of the Ecole Spéciale Militaire at Fountainebleau, 1803.

The four Schools of the Prytanée Français are converted into the Prytanée Militaire, 1806; and are transferred to La Flèche, 1808.

The Ecole Spéciale Militaire is transferred to St. Cyr, also in 1808.

16 About twenty-five are sent every year from La Flèche. The admissions from the army (i.e., of soldiers between twenty and twenty-five years old) do not amount to more than four or at the utmost five per cent. They are very frequently young men who have previously failed for St. Cyr, and who then enter the army as privates, and come in as such. They have to pass the same examination.

17 Few usually present themselves; and these also, it is said, are very generally old élèves of St. Cyr, who had not succeeded in obtaining admission to the Staff School before. They are not examined with the pupils of St. Cyr, but are intercalated in the list according to their merit.

18 The system was, in fact, first tried at St. Cyr, and adopted, on the representation of the Mixed Commission, at the Polytechnic. The previous method, by which different sets of examiners took different districts, had created distrust and dissatisfaction.

19 “Report of Observations in Europe during the Crimean War,” by Major Gen. McClellan.

20 There must be some error in the printed regulations on the subject.

Errata for Part I (France):

I. GENERAL MILITARY ORGANIZATION OF FRANCE.
ORGANIZATON

Algebra4 is not, as are Arithmetic and Geometry
Footnote tag missing; position conjectural

the chief scientific creation of the first French Revolution
scientic

patriotism and courage can not always supply
“always

returned to Paris in the reign of terror, “to see from his lodgings
quotation mark in original

are obliged to re-enter the army.
abliged

chosen from former pupils of the school
“the” missing

and the life that is led in them.
lead

work heartily and zealously together
togethen

[TABLE FOR THE SECOND OR LOWER DIVISION]

Geodesy
Goedesy

Schools of Application for Artillery and Engineers
hyphen in “En-/gineers” invisible at line break

Lessons—10-13. Derivatives and Differentials ...
Lessons—10-13.

Lessons 24-27. Geometrical Applications continued ...
Lessons 14-17.

Geometrical demonstration of the formula.
demostration

Lesson 3. Integration of Differentials ...
Lessons 3.

[DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.—GEOMETRICAL DRAWING.]

Lessons 1-3. Revision and Completion ...
. missing

not enough in themselves to define objects completely.
final . missing or invisible

Lessons 3-6. Composition of the Velocities of a Point.
period . after “3-6” invisible

three movements of translation with respect to three axes
tranlation

of invariable form, but also in motion.
motion,

Suspendors
spelling unchanged

Lessons 1-2. / Chemical sources of electricity.
period . after “1-2” missing or invisible

Lesson 3. 1. Chemical Actions.
Lesson 3.—1.

Straight and curved rods.
Staight

the general direction of the vibrating motion communicated.
commuicated.

[Footnote 12]

recently introduced at the school.
introdued

Clerks and draughtsmen are provided as required.
clerks

EXAMINATION AND CLASSIFICATION.
header supplied from Table of Contents

REGIMENTAL SCHOOLS.
header supplied from Table of Contents

Fifty-eighth Lecture.—(2.) ... artillery commands.
missing . after “commands”

which is indicated in the programme of the memoir.
final . missing

[RECAPITULATIVE TABLE.—ARTILLERY STUDENTS.]

| 75 | 73 50 | 78 | 151 50 | 10
totals printed as shown: “10” error for 11?

1st. The direction ... / 2d. The tracing ...
paragraph breaks added by transcriber for consistency

Lecture 7.—Gauging of the volumes and valuation
Guaging

Lecture 22.—Resistance to torsion.
21.

1st. Composition of the personnel and matériel of the Artillery
matéreil

At 5 A.M. the drum beats, the young men quit their beds;
theis

made without points; and a description of the battle.”
final ” missing

Geographical Representation, 6
text unchanged: error for “Graphical”?

The prescribed instruction comprises the following courses:—
comprise

MILITARY AND NAVAL SCHOOLS OF MEDICINE AND PHARMACY
word AND supplied from Table of Contents

They leap backward precisely in the same directions
in the some

First. To form a rapid judgment of the obstacle,
obstable

regular hours, and a rational discipline.
discipline,

but beyond a very brief revision of these subjects, and a voluntary course for candidates for the Staff Corps
very beief ... condidates

the execution of all work under close supervision of the instructors,
instrutors



279

PART II.
MILITARY SYSTEM AND SCHOOLS IN PRUSSIA.

280

AUTHORITIES.

Report of the Commissioners appointed to consider the Best Mode of Re-organizing the System for Training Officers for the Scientific Corps; together with An Account of Foreign and other Military Education and An Appendix. London: 1857. pp. 442 and 245, folio.

Report from the Select Committee on Sandhurst Royal Military College; together with the Proceedings of the Committee, Minutes of Evidence, Appendix and Index. Printed by Order of the House of Commons. London: 1855. pp. 230, folio.

Helldorf’s Dienst-Vorschriften der Königlich-Preussischen Armee. Berlin, 1856.

Friedlander’s Kriegs-Schule.

Von Holleben, Paper on Military Education in Prussia.

Official Programme of the Principal Subjects of Instruction Taught in the Artillery and Engineer School at Berlin.

Account of the War, or Staff School at Berlin.

Directions for the Supreme Board of Military Studies. 1856.

Directions for the Supreme Military Examinations Commission. 1856.

Barnard’s National Education in Europe. 1852.

Bache’s Report on Education in Europe. 1838.

281

MILITARY SYSTEM AND EDUCATION IN PRUSSIA.1

I. OUTLINE OF MILITARY SYSTEM.

According to the law of the 3rd of September, 1814, which is the basis of the present military organization of Prussia, every Prussian above twenty years of age, is bound to service in arms for the defense of his country.

The military force of the country is made up of three distinct bodies, and the whole of the adult male population is distributed among them. It consists of,—

I. The Standing Army.

II. The National Militia or Landwehr, divided into two portions, viz., the first Landwehr and the second Landwehr.

III. The Last Reserve or Landsturm.

I. The standing army is composed of all young men between twenty and twenty-five years of age. The period of service in time of war is for five years, but in time of peace the young soldiers can obtain leave of absence after three years’ service;—they belong for the remaining two years to what is termed the “reserve,” receiving neither pay nor clothing, and they are subject to be recalled if war should break out.

Encouragement, indeed, is given and advantages held out to induce men to stay, and to take a new engagement for an additional term of six years; but it is said that only a small number are thus obtained. The bulk of the troops are men serving for this short time; and there are many, it should be added, whose term of service is even yet shorter. For all educated young men, all, that is, who pass a certain examination, are allowed, on condition that they pay for their own equipment and receive no pay, to shorten their service from three years to one. This privilege appears to be very largely used. It should also be stated, that young men of any class may volunteer to perform their service at any age after seventeen.

The Prussian standing army amounts at the present time to 282 about 126,000 men. It is divided into nine army-corps or corps d’Armée, one of which is named the guard, and the others are numbered from I. to VIII. In each there is a regiment of artillery and a division of engineers. A regiment of artillery consists, in time of peace, of three divisions; each division of one troop of horse artillery and four companies, of which, one is Fortress artillery with two-horsed pieces. Each regiment has thus three companies for the service of the fortress and twelve for field service. The whole of the artillery is under the command of a general inspector, and it is divided into four inspections. An engineer division is composed of two companies. There are nine engineer divisions, one in each army corps. The whole are commanded by a general inspector, and they are divided into three inspections.

The promotion in the Prussian infantry and cavalry is regimental, and by seniority, up to the rank of major; after that it is by selection; and an officer who has been passed over two or three times may consider that he has received an intimation to retire from the service. In the artillery the promotion is by regiments; in the engineers it is general.

II. The first Landwehr, or Landwehr of the first summons (des ersten aufgebots,) consists principally of young men between twenty-five and thirty-two years of age, who enter when they have completed their period of service in the standing army. They are called out once every year for service with the divisions of the standing army to which they are attached, for a period varying from a fortnight to a month; and they may be sent in time of war on foreign service.

Those who have passed through the first Landwehr, enter at the age of thirty-two in the second Landwehr, or Landwehr of the second summons (des zweiten aufgebots.) They are called out only for a very brief service once a year, and they can not at any time be ordered out of the country, but continue to form a part of the second Landwehr until they are thirty nine years of age.

III. After the age of thirty-nine a Prussian subject belongs to the last reserve or Landsturm, and can only be summoned to service in arms upon a general raising, so to say, of the whole population, when the country is actually invaded by the enemy.

With the standing army, the center of the system, all the other forces are kept in close connection. For every regiment of the standing army there is a corresponding regiment of Landwehr, and the two together form one brigade. In the local distribution, every village and hamlet of the Prussian dominions belongs to a certain 283 regiment of Landwehr, serving with a certain regiment of the army, and belonging accordingly to one of the nine army corps.

Such is the military organization, which, from the important part played in it by the Landwehr, is sometimes termed the Prussian Landwehr system. The history of its formation is remarkable, and the circumstances which led to its creation helped also to create the very peculiar education of the army.

The Prussian Landwehr or militia is not of modern origin; in its form at least it is but a revival of the old feudal military organization, so far as that consisted of raising the country en masse, instead of keeping up a permanent, trained, and limited military force. Landwehr or Landsturm2 was the old German name for this feudal array, before the system of standing armies was begun in Europe by Charles VII. of France, with his Scotch regiments. It was possibly the failure of the trained Prussian armies—long reputed the models of military discipline—in the attack upon France in 1792, and still more signally at Auerstadt and Jena, which partly led to the revival of the Landwehr as the peculiar national force of Prussia. The means by which Stein, and after his expulsion, Scharnhorst, called it into activity, was a master stroke of policy under the existing difficulties of the country. The following outline may be sufficient to explain its effects upon education.

The condition which Napoleon had exacted at Tilsit—a reduction of the standing army from 200,000 to 40,000 men—would have lowered Prussia at once to the rank of a second-rate power. It was adroitly evaded by the plan of keeping only 40,000 men in arms at one and the same time, disbanding these as soon as they were disciplined, and replacing them constantly by fresh bodies. Thus the whole population of the country was ready to rise in 1813, after the crisis of Napoleon’s retreat from Russia. The plan was chiefly due to the genius of Scharnhorst, whose early death deprived Prussia of her greatest scientific soldier. The Landwehr then proved itself a most efficient force, though its success was promoted by the national enthusiasm, which must prevent our taking such a period as a criterion of its permanent military working. Since that time it has continued to be the national army of the country.

We were assured that this peculiarity of the Prussian army system, by which almost every man in the country serves in his turn in the ranks, has had a tendency to improve the education of the officers. It seems to have been felt that the officers would not retain the respect of intelligent privates unless they kept ahead of 284 them in education. And this impression appears to have been the cause of the royal edicts passed in 1816, by which it was required that every Prussian officer should pass two examinations before receiving his commission, one to test his general education, and the other his professional knowledge.

II. HISTORICAL VIEW OF PRUSSIAN MILITARY EDUCATION.3

The Prussian system of military education stands in close connection with the general education of the country, just as the Prussian military organization is the peculiar creation of that country’s history. And the greatest improvements in the army and in its scientific teaching have been made at those remarkable periods when we should most naturally have looked for them—the time of Frederick the Great and the Liberation war of 1813-1814.

The leading principles of Prussian military education consist, first, in requiring from every officer in the army proof of a fair general education before his entrance, and of a fair military education afterwards. Secondly, they encourage a higher military education in a senior school, which has almost exclusively the privilege of supplying the staff.

In this requirement of a fair education, both general and military, universally from its officers, Prussia stands alone among the great military nations of Europe, and this honorable distinction is in a great measure the result of the diffused system of education throughout the country, and of the plan adopted by Stein and Scharnhorst, to make the officers the leaders of the army both in education and in military science.

The military schools of Germany may be said to have begun with the Reformation wars. Some such were founded by Maurice of Saxony, the great political and military genius of Germany in that century; the example was soon imitated in Baden, Silesia, and Brunswick, and a curious sketch of military education, by the hand of Duke Albert of Brandenburg, has been lately published from the Berlin archives, in which theology and mathematics hold the two most important places.

The first school of any real importance was founded in Colberg, by the great elector, Frederick William, in 1653. This had considerable success, and both his successors, King Frederick and Frederick William I., improved it greatly, and finally transferred it to Berlin. It was the time (about 1705, 1706,) of the great advance in military engineering under Vauban and Coehorn, and a school 285 for engineering was founded, in which some of their pupils had a great share. The first Prussian trigonometrical survey also dates as early as 1702; that of England was not begun till 1784. It may indeed be said that the scientific arms began to take a more favorable place in the Prussian army about this time. They have held, and even still hold in some respects, a less distinguished position in Germany than in France, England, or Sardinia; and the first instance of an artilleryman being made a general, was in the reign of Frederick William I.

On Frederick the Great’s accession he found several military schools in existence. These had been chiefly founded by his eccentric father, who had a passion for Cadet Houses and cadets, and their object is said to have been to supply an education to the nobility, who at that time were very ill-taught in Germany. After Frederick’s first wars, his own attention was much occupied by the need of a better military education, and he continued to work at the subject very zealously till his death. His example on this point, as that of a great military authority, is most instructive, since his object was at first only to educate cadets before their entrance to the army, but was afterwards extended to completing the education of officers already on active service. His views on the last point were carried out by Scharnhorst. They were the germ of the present Prussian military education.

It is curious to observe that the Austrian Succession War and the Seven Years’ War, the first great wars since Louis XIV., and which broke the Thirty Years’ Peace of the eighteenth century, are periods at which scientific military education made a great step in Europe. A Treatise of Marshal Count Beausobre’s on the subject first showed the existing want; it is entitled “Utilité d’une Ecole et d’une Académie Militaire, avec des Notes, ou l’on traite des Ecoles Militaires de l’Antiquité”. It attracted great attention on its appearance. Most of the military academies properly so called, date from about this time. The earliest warrant for Woolwich, dates in 1741. The Theresianum of Maria Theresa was begun at Vienna about 1748. The first French school was the celebrated engineer school of Mezières founded in 1749. This was soon followed by the old military school of Paris in 1751, and by the school for artillery at La Fère in 1756. Frederick’s own Ritter Academie dates from 1764.

Frederick began this institution with his usual energy, immediately on the close of the Seven Years’ War. “My fire is quenched,” he writes, “and I am now only busied in improving the practice of 286 my men. *   *   *   * The position of the common soldier may be left as it was before the war began, but the position of the officers is a point to which I am devoting my utmost care. In order in future to quicken their attention whilst on service, and to form their judgment, I have ordered them to receive instruction in the art of war, and they will be obliged to give reasons for all they do. Such a plan, as you will see, my dear friend, will not answer with every one; still out of the whole body we shall certainly form some men and officers, who will not merely have their patent as generals to show, (die nicht blos patentirte Generale vorstellen,) but some capacity for the office as well.” He had, in fact, seen with great admiration the improved military school recently founded by Maria Theresa; and as it is best on such points to let this great authority be heard for himself, we shall quote his own words:—

“In order to neglect nothing bearing on the state of the army, the Empress founded near Vienna, (at Wiener Neustadt,) a college where young nobles were instructed in the whole art of war. She drew to it distinguished professors of geometry, fortification, geography, and history, who formed there able pupils, and made it a complete nursery for the army. By means of her care, the military service attained in that country a degree of perfection which it had never reached under the Emperors of the House of Austria; and a woman thus carried out designs worthy of a great man.”

His letters show that he contemplated an improved school, and he says to D’Alembert: “I send you the rules of my academy. As the plan is new, I beg you to give me your honest opinion of it.” Accordingly, the academy was founded. We will describe it in his own words:—

“An academy was founded at the same time, in which were placed those of the cadets who showed most genius. The king himself drew up the rules for its form, and gave it a plan of instruction, which stated the objects of the studies of the pupils, and of the education they were to receive. Professors were chosen from the ablest men who could be found in Europe, and fifteen young gentlemen were educated under the eyes of five instructors. Their whole education tended to form their judgment. The academy was successful, and supplied able pupils, who received appointments in the army.”4

This school, which was opened in 1765, was Frederick’s only foundation of the kind; he was occupied with it incessantly. The plan of its studies was drawn up by his own hand, and we have 287 many of his letters of encouragement to its pupils or professors. Whether he is writing to Voltaire, Condorcet, or “My Lord Marischal” Keith, he constantly shows both his well-known attention to the economy of his new school, and a paternal interest in his young cadets and their teachers.5

Accordingly, both in professors and pupils, the new institution soon gained an European character. Out of its twenty first directors, no less than ten were distinguished foreigners; one of the best teachers at Berlin was D’Antoni, a distinguished soldier from the Turin institution and the artillery school at Alessandria—schools which were still the representatives of the military science of the great Italian generals, of the Duke of Parma, of Spinola, and Montecuculi.

This institution was still, as it would appear, upon the old principle of juvenile army schools, nor does Frederick seem to have set on foot any school for officers after entering the service. But he evidently felt strongly the need of improving his staff officers, and of raising the science of his artillery and engineers. Thus we find him referring to the French engineer school at Meziéres; and he endeavored to raise the intelligence and education of his officers. It may, however, be suspected that the spirit of the “Potsdamer Côterie,” as it was called, became gradually, and particularly after Frederick’s death, too literary and speculative to suit the rough work of war; and it may, perhaps, be thought that some defect of this kind is still traceable in the excessive amount of teaching and the abstract nature of some of the subjects taught in the staff school at Berlin.

Such seems to have been the opinion of Scharnhorst, the virtual author of the present system of army education, and whom the Prussians still regard as their first authority on that subject. “Instruction is given,” he says, “at the military school in all literature, in philosophy, and in many various sciences. Frederick seems to have wished to lay in it the foundation of the education at once of an officer and of a learned man. Few men, however, are able to excel at once in various branches of human knowledge, and the surest means to do so in one is not to attempt it in many.”

288

We have referred to Frederick and his school rather to show the interest he felt in military education, than because his institution was very important. Military education was still very imperfect, and it completely languished in Prussia till Scharnhorst established it on its present footing.

Scharnhorst was himself an Hanoverian, but entered the Prussian service, and had seen by experience the defects of their system in the campaigns of 1792, 1793, and 1805. He had long devoted especial attention to military education and to all the scientific part of his profession. Along with Blucher and Gneisenau, he was considered one of the first generals of the army, and, on the exhaustion of Prussia after Jena, he was selected to remodel its whole system. He did not live to complete his work, having been killed early in 1812; but his statue near the bridge at Berlin, remarkable for its noble and thoughtful expression, records the gratitude of Prussia to its greatest scientific soldier.

“The perfection of the French military organization,” says Mr. Alison, appeared to him in painful contrast beside the numerous defects of that over which he presided. *   *   *   * Boldly applying to the military department the admirable principles by which Stein had secured the affections of the burgher classes, he threw open to the whole of the citizens the higher grades of the army, from which they had been hitherto excluded. *   *   *   * And every department of the public service underwent his searching eye.”

The work began with the commission of 1807, of which both Stein and Scharnhorst were members. And the regulation of 1808 laid down the principle broadly, that the only claim to an officer’s commission must be, “in time of peace, knowledge and education; in war, courage and conduct.”

On these principles, during the next three years, Scharnhorst laid the foundations of the present education. He abolished most of the existing juvenile schools, with the exception only of the Cadet Houses, intended almost solely for the sons of officers. He changed the previous war school into a sort of school d’Elite, consisting of a senior and junior department, in which the younger soldiers of all arms were to be imbued with such knowledge as might give them a scientific interest in their profession, and in which senior officers (also of all arms) were to have a higher course of a similar nature, success in which was to form a recommendation for employment on the staff. He began the plan of the division schools, where all candidates for commissions, but not yet officers, might conduct their 289 military studies along with the practice of their profession. Its idea was to make some military study necessary, and successful study honorable, in the army. Finally, he began the present system of careful examination on entering the army.

The following historical notice of the origin and successive changes of the division schools is taken from a communication by Col. Von Holleben, and a member of the General Inspection of Military Instruction to the English Commission.

The cabinet order of the 6th of August, 1808, laid the foundation of the present system of military education. It regulates the appointment of Swordknot ensigns and the selection of officers, and declares that the only title to an officer’s commission in time of peace shall be professional knowledge and education, and in time of war distinguished valor and ability.

The cabinet order of the 6th of August, 1808, could only come gradually into operation; the system of military examinations had to be created, and the educational institutions had to receive a new organization, under the superintendence of a general officer. Four provincial boards of examination were successively established, and on the 1st December, 1809, a body of instructions, still very vague and general, was issued for their guidance.

A cabinet order of the 3rd of May, 1810, remodeled the military schools, directing, in addition to the cadet schools at Berlin and Stolpe, the formation of three military schools for Swordknot ensigns, (Portepée-Fähnriche,) one at Berlin for the marches (Die Marken,) and Pomerania, a second at Königsberg, for east and west Prussia, and a third at Breslau, for Silesia; and the formation of a military school at Berlin for officers. All these institutions were placed under the general superintendence of Lieutenant-General Von Diericke, who had also the special superintendence of the boards of examination. A board of military studies was created and intrusted, under his control, with the task of carrying the regulations into effect.

Before, however, the new institutions attained to any stability the war years of 1813-14-15 intervened, and the operations of the board of examinations ceased.

Soon after the conclusion of peace directions were given that the examinations should recommence, with an equitable consideration of the claims of the Landwehr officers, ensigns, and other young persons who had grown up during the war.

At first there was only one board of examination at Berlin, with large discretionary powers as to their mode of procedure. In April, 290 1816, a cabinet order was issued to form boards of examination for the Swordknot at every brigade, as the present divisions were then called, besides the existing board at Berlin, for the examination for an officer’s commission.

Contemporaneously with the nine boards of examination, the board of military studies, by an order of January, 1816, directed the establishment of schools for every brigade, and attempted to gradually regulate the instruction they gave. The schools contained two classes, the lower to prepare candidates for the Swordknot, the higher to prepare candidates for the rank of officer. As, however, no standard of attainment was required for admission into the schools, their instruction had to commence with the first elements, and was charged with more work than it could perform. The weaker scholars stayed two, three, or more years in the lower class, and the education of the better scholars was impeded.

During this and the following period the authority over the examination boards (the Præsidium,) was distinct from that over the schools, (the general inspection,) and it was not till later that both authorities were vested in a single person. This division of powers, intended to secure the independence and impartiality of the examinations, led to the result that the two authorities were occasionally led, from a difference of principles, to labor in different directions. Still, in the infancy of military education, the rivalry it occasioned, was favorable to a rapidity of development.

An order of the 16th of March, 1827, added French to the studies for the ensigns’ examination, and fixed a higher standard of attainments in military sciences for the officers’ examination.

Nearly at the same time, a cabinet order of the 27th of March, 1827, directed that there should be only one class for Swordknot ensigns in the division schools, and that after October, 1829, the candidate should obtain a testimonial of fitness for the rank of Swordknot ensign previous to admission as a student.

Accordingly young men had to be prepared for examination for the Swordknot at their entrance into their corps, or might prepare themselves by private studies and instruction during their service.

The task of the schools, still very comprehensive embracing all the liberal sciences as well as the military, was accomplished during this period in two courses of nine months, in a higher and a lower class.

A cabinet order of the 31st of January, 1837, introduced the entrance examination, instead of the examination for the Swordknot, 291 being declared that every candidate for the commission of an officer, after his reception into a corps, should prove in an examination his possession of the knowledge requisite for a Swordknot ensigncy before his actual appointment. At the same time a regulation of the ministry of war, of the 17th of December 1836, remodeled and more precisely defined both the entrance (Swordknot ensign) examination, and that for the commission of an officer. This regulation, while it essentially modified the instruction given at the division schools, furnished them at the same time with a more certain clue for their guidance. The preparation of youths for the Swordknot examination during their service in the corps was discontinued. But the standard of the entrance examination was still too low, requiring only a small portion of the branches of a general liberal education, and that not in the shape in which they are taught in our gymnasia. Hence the evil result, that young men, previous to their entrance into a corps, had usually to prepare for the military profession at private institutions instead of at the gymnasia, and nevertheless brought with them a very defective amount of preparatory training; on the other hand, the demands of the officers’ examination were very multifarious. It still required the general scholastic sciences by way of formal education, and the military sciences as a special education for the military profession. Thus the task of the division schools continued overwhelming, and an aim was set before them which they could not attain.

A regulation of the 4th of February, 1844, reformed simultaneously the whole system of military examination and education.

The views which guided these reforms, the improvements and advantages which were hoped to be thereby obtained, were, in general, the following:—

1. The military profession, like every other, requires a general school education intended generally to cultivate the mind, distinct from the subsequent special and professional educ